Riggers Handbook 2017-Web

VOL 17
Work with HSI Slings TM

Since 1930
RIGGERS HANDBOOK
A tremendous reference guide for every Rigger!
Wire Rope • Chain • SlingmaxTM Slings • Fittings • Accessories • General Usage • Safety Guidelines
SEVEN LOCATIONS & THE WEB TO SERVICE YOUR NEEDS!
BUFFALO, NY ROCHESTER, NY ALBANY, NY SYRACUSE, NY
WATERTOWN, NY BRANFORD, CT NORTH & SOUTH CAROLINA
Our Headquarters is located in Buffalo, New York 55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206
PHONE 716.826.2636 FAX 716.826.4412
20 Jetview Dr • Rochester, NY 14624 • PHONE 585.235.0160 • FAX 585.235.0229
6181 Thompson Rd, Suite 500A • Syracuse, NY 13206 • PHONE 315.299.4114 • FAX 315.870.9345
22432 US Route 11 • Watertown, NY 13601 • PHONE 315.782.8247 • FAX 315.782.5709
156 Railroad Avenue • Albany, NY 12205 • PHONE 518.438.0139 • FAX 518.438.5343
4 Indian Neck Avenue • Branford, CT 06405 • PHONE 203.481.3469 • FAX 203.481.7642
NORTH CAROLINA 704.506.4744 SOUTH CAROLINA 843.458.0749
ADDITIONAL SERVICES WE PROVIDE

REPAIR AND RENTAL SERVICES: LOAD TESTING:
• Hoists • Hydraulic Equipment • Slings • Below-the-Hook
• Lifting Equipment • Fittings Lifting Devices
FIRE EXTINGUISHER SERVICES: BELOW-THE-HOOK

• Sales • Service LIFTING DEVICES:
• Testing • Training • Standard or Custom Designed
for your Specific Application
CONFINED SPACE:
• Equipment Rental and Sales CUSTOMIZED TOOL KITS
• Detection Device Service, • Assembled to Your Specifications
Calibration and Sales • Rigging, Hoists, Hydraulics,
Tools, Safety, Etc.
WWW.HANESSUPPLY.COM
Table of Contents
Hanes Supply has complete testing facilities for tension and cycling of wire rope, chain, nylon, high-
performance fiber slings, and related items including spreader beams and other types of rigging gear.
With three new Chant Engineering testing machines, we have the latest state of the art testing equipment to
satisfy all of your testing requirements.
Buffalo, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 186' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 165' maxi-
mum. Capacity: Two-load range 300 ton high or 35 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 12'
ram. Capable of elongation measurement. Robert’s 50 Ton Vertical Test Machine. Ram Stroke: 4.5' ram.
Albany, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 60' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 51' maximum.
Capacity: Two-load range 175 ton high or 25 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 6' ram.
Rochester, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 100' length with testing capacity 3' minimum
to 84' maximum. Capacity: Two-load range 300 ton high or 35 ton low holding range, pull or
break test. Ram Stroke: 6' ram.
Calibration: In accordance with ASTM E4 +/-1% and complies with MIL-STD-45662A
and traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technologies. Re-calibrated
yearly. Applies to machines in all branches.
Digital Load Readout with Test Certificate in all branches.
Programmable Cycling Capability: Buffalo, NY and Rochester, NY branches.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Adjustable Slings ....................................................44 Conversions .....................................................208
Blocks ..............................................171-175, 191-193 Crane Hand Signals (USA Std.) ......................210
Sheave .............................................................175 Definitions .................................................205-207
Snatch .......................................................171-174 Formulas ...................................................195-197
Boom ..............................................................148-154 How to Read a Tag ............................................204
Pendants ...................................................153-154 Weights of Material ..........................................209
Pendant Fittings .........................148-151, 153-154 Grommet Slings ...........................................26, 31-32
Bridles ..................................13-14, 33-35, 40-44, 203 Cable-Laid ..........................................................31
Chain .............................................................40-44 Gator-Flex® .........................................................26
Measuring Length .............................................203 Strand-Laid .........................................................32
Twin-Path®.....................................................13-14 Hoists .................................................................62-68
Wire Rope......................................................33-35 Hand (manual) Chain .............................63, 64, 67
Buttons, Swage......................................................152 Electric (power) Chain ..................................65, 68
Chain .......................................................37-44, 60-61 Lever ......................................................62, 64, 66
Saddle Rings .....................................................44 Hooks .............................................................123-137
Slings ............................................................40-44 Barrel ...............................................................136
Slings, Inspection................................................39 Clevis ........................................................133, 135
Transport (Binding) .............................................61 Eye .....................................................129-130, 133
Clevises .................................................................138 Golden Gate .....................................................137
Clips, Wire Rope .............................................100-101 Grab .................................................................133
Cordage Information ...........................................69-86 Hoist ..........................................................125-130
Davit Cranes ............................................................87 Replacement ....................................................136
Dynamometers ...................................................93-94 Shank ........................................................127-128
Eye Bolts ........................................................155-160 Shur-loc .....................................................134-135
Gator-Flex® Grommets ...........................................26 Sliding Choker ..................................................136
Gator-Laid® Slings, Wire Rope ...............................27 Sling ...........................................123-126, 129-131
General Information .......................................191-210 Snap .................................................................136
HEADQUARTERS: 55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206 PHONE: 716.826.2636 FAX: 716.826.4412 www.HanesSupply.com
1 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

Table of Contents
Sorting .............................................................136 Syn-Glide ..........................................................12
Swivel ...............................................131-132, 134 Sockets ..........................................139-140, 148-154
Synthetic Sling ..........................................123-124 Spelter ......................................................148-150
Hydraulics ...........................................................88-92 Swage .....................................................150-154
Lifting Attachments ..................................................98 Wedge .....................................................139-140
Lifting Beams ...........................................................97 Spreader Beams ....................................................98
Lifting Clamps ................................................164-168 Swivels .........................................................169-170
Lift Engineering .............................................194-197 Swivel Hoist Rings .......................................161,163
Links, Master Oblong ............................................102 Thimbles ......................................................146-147
Load Binders ......................................................57-59 Tri-Flex® Slings .................................................23-25
Machinery Rollers ...................................................95 Turnbuckles ..................................................141-145
Man Baskets ...........................................................99 Twin-Path® ..........................................................3-22
Personnel Crane Basket .........................................99 Abrasion .............................................................8
Ratchet Assembly, Polyester .............................56-57 Check-Fast® ..................................................7, 15
Rope ..................................................................69-86 Cornermax® ..................................................10-11
Hand Line ..........................................................80 Covermax® .......................................................8-9
Pulling & Stringing Line ......................................80 Equalizer Block ................................................16
Samson .........................................................78-81 Extra Covermax® Slings .....................................6
Solid & Double Braid .....................................73-74 Field Taper .......................................................16
Specifications .....................................................75 Inspection .....................................................7, 21
Twisted ..........................................................72-73 K-Spec® Core Yarn .............................................6
Winch ............................................................81-86 Mechanical Considerations .........................19-20
Yale ...............................................................76-77 Rigging Practices .............................................17
Shackles .........................................................103-121 Rifled Cover ........................................................8
Easy-Loc ...........................................................111 Shackle Pin Pad ...............................................12
Long Reach ......................................................118 Slings .............................................................6,15
Sheet Pile .........................................................121 Sparkeater Slings ..............................................15
Sling Saver ........................................110, 112-113 Syn-Glide ..........................................................12
Wide ....................................................110-111, 116 UV Resistance ....................................................9
Slide-Loc ................................................................161 Wear Pads ..........................................................8-12
Sling Connector ..............................................122-123 Winches .................................................................87
Slings .............................6, 15, 23-35, 40-44, 198-202 Winch Lines .....................................................81-86
Cable-Laid ....................................................25, 30 Windmill Lifting Brackets .......................................96
Chain ............................................................40-44 Wire Mesh Slings ..............................................45-46
Gator-Flex® Grommets ........................................26 Wire Rope ..........................................24-36, 176-190
Gator-Laid® .........................................................27 6x19 Classification .........................................177
Hitch Types ...............................................198-202 6x36 Classification .........................................178
Nylon Web .........................................47-49, 52-54 Abrasion & Bending .................................181-182
Polyester Roundsling .........................................51 Abuse ......................................................185-186
Reversed Eye......................................................51 Aircraft Cable .................................................180
Tri-Flex® ........................................................23-25 Breaking Strength ....................................187-188
Twin-Path® .......................................................6, 15 Bridle Fittings ....................................................36
Wide Lift ..............................................................50 Clips .........................................................100-101
Wire Mesh ....................................................45-46 Cross Sections ...............................................176
Wire Rope .....................................................24-35 D/d Ratio .........................................................189
Sling Protection ....................................................8-12 High Performance ..........................................180
Cornermax® ...................................................10-11 Inspection ................................................183-186
Covermax® .........................................................8-9 Rotation Resistant ..........................................179
Sleeves ...............................................................10 Slings ...........................................................24-35
Shackle Pin Pad ................................................12
Synthetic Armor ..................................................11
WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930 2
Innovative Lifting Solutions
H anes Supply specializes in lifting solutions for a wide variety of applications. As a manu-
facturer of Slingmax® slings we are proud to provide riggers with innovative products that
increase productivity and safety. The following product inventions provide benefits that make a
rigger’s work easier, safer or more cost effective.
SYNTHETIC SLINGS
Twin-Path® Synthetic roundslings for heavy lifting by Slingmax® Rigging Solutions are the only synthetic
roundslings available that come equipped with the Check-Fast® External Warning Indicator, Covermax®
Cover, and Rifled Cover® technology. Think Twin-Path® slings for all your heavy lifting and rigging needs.
TWIN-PATH PG. 6 SPARKEATER PG. 15 SINGLE PATH PG. 15 ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE

PG. 13-14
INSPECTION METHODS
NO EXPOSURE
500 Hrs EXPOSURE
CHECK-FAST PG. 7 UV PG. 9 ABRASION PG. 8

Innovative Lifting Solutions
SYNTHETIC SLING PROTECTORS
Experts agree that over 80%

of synthetic sling accidents are
caused by cutting; always be
SURE you have the correct Sling
Protection for your specific lift!
CORNER-MAX PAD PG. 11 CORNER-MAX SLEEVE PG. 10
SYN-GLIDE PG. 12 SYNTHETIC ARMOR PG. 11 SHACKLE PIN-PAD PG. 12
SYNTHETIC SLING ACCESSORIES
EQUALIZER BLOCK PG. 16 TWIN-PATH TAPER PG. 16
WIRE ROPE SLINGS
GATOR-LAID PG. 27 GATOR-FLEX GROMMETS PG. 26 TRI-FLEX PG. 25
Twin-Path® Slings
TWIN-PATH ®
SLINGS IN ACTION
88 ton Refinery Compressor with CornerMax™ Pads
500 ton Steam Generator Replacement Mark V Navy Assault Boat
Turbine Rotor Removal of 500 ton Bridge Decking Reactor Coolant Pump Motor

Twin-Path® Extra Covermax® Slings
TWIN-PATH® SLINGS WITH COVERMAX® COVER, K-SPEC® CORE YARN
AND CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION SYSTEM
US Patent #7,926,859, #7,661,737, #7,568,333 CA #2,547,632
EP #1,899,255 Japan #4,864,965 China #ZL200680017605.5
Twin-Path synthetic roundslings have Check-Fast® Inspection overload indicators,
®
Covermax® Covers for superior abrasion resistance, and inner red covers as an aid to
inspection. Twin-Path® slings are used worldwide in place of steel rigging for heavy lifts.
They are approximately 10% of the weight of a steel sling and are repairable. The Twin-Path®
sling design, which has two individual paths of fiber working as one sling, gives the rigger
confidence. These slings have less than 1% elongation at rated capacity. If productivity, safe-
ty, and precision are important, then Twin-Path® high-performance roundslings are your best
choice. Independent testing shows that K-Spec® core yarn is the longest lasting load-bearing
core yarn in any sling.
NOTE: Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Sling ratings based on commercial fittings of equal or
greater capacity. Conforms to ANSI/ASME B30.9 chapter 6, NAVFAC P-307 section 14.7.4.3, and the Cordage Institute Round-
sling Standard. This chart is based on a 5:1 Design Factor (DF); but any other DF can be fabricated. Higher capacity slings are
available. CAPACITIES ARE IN POUNDS (LBS.).
UNITED STATES CANADIAN

PATENT #4,850,629 RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) 5:1 DF PATENT #1,280,458
VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE NOMINAL

TWIN-PATH® BODY
EXTRA COVERMAX® WEIGHT
90° 60° 45° (LBS. PER FT.) WIDTH
STOCK NO. (BEARING-BEARING) (INCHES)
TPXCCF/ TPXC 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .40 1.5 - 3
TPXCCF/ TPXC 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .45 1.5 - 3
TPXCCF/ TPXC 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .51 1.5 - 3
TPXCCF/ TPXC 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .57 1.5 - 3
TPXCCF/ TPXC 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .71 2.0 - 4
TPXCCF/ TPXC 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 .83 2.0 - 4
TPXCCF/ TPXC 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 1.14 2.5 - 5
TPXCCF/ TPXC 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.27 2.5 - 5
TPXCCF/ TPXC 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.39 2.5 - 5
TPXCCF/ TPXC 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.65 3.0 - 6
TPXCCF/ TPXC 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 1.84 3.0 - 6
TPXCCF/ TPXC 12500 125,000 100,000 250,000 216,500 176,750 2.35 4.0 - 8
TPXCCF/ TPXC 15000 150,000 120,000 300,000 259,800 212,100 2.66 4.0 - 8
TPXCCF/ TPXC 17500 175,000 140,000 350,000 303,100 247,450 3.14 5.0 - 10
TPXCCF/ TPXC 20000 200,000 160,000 400,000 346,400 282,800 3.45 5.0 - 10
TPXCCF/ TPXC 25000 250,000 200,000 500,000 433,000 353,500 4.07 5.0 - 10
TPXCCF/ TPXC 27500 275,000 220,000 550,000 476,300 388,850 4.61 6.0 - 12
TPXCCF/ TPXC 30000 300,000 240,000 600,000 519,600 424,200 4.92 6.0 - 12
TPXCCF/ TPXC 40000 400,000 320,000 800,000 692,800 565,600 6.54 7.0 - 14
TPXCCF/ TPXC 50000 500,000 400,000 1,000,000 866,000 707,000 8.15 8.0 - 16
TPXCCF/ TPXC 60000 600,000 480,000 1,200,000 1,039,000 848,000 10.20 9.0 - 18
DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY

NOTE: When ordering a Twin-Path sling, the Check-Fast® Inspection system is included unless specified otherwise.
Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect
! WARNING before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling
from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet
light, sunlight & temperature above 180° F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
Check-Fast® Inspection System
CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION SYSTEM

Now available in Polyester or K-Spec® Single-Path and Twin-Path® Roundslings
Patent US Patent #7,661,737 CA #2,547,632 EP #1,899,255

The Check-Fast® Inspection System is designed to improve job site safety. The Check-Fast® External Warning Indicator
(EWI) provides a criteria for pass/fail inspection when the internal load-bearing core yarn may be damaged. The Check-Fast®
Inspection System can also indicate ultraviolet (UV) light degradation, fiber-on-fiber abrasion, fatigue, and severe overload. If
the sling is overloaded beyond its rated capacity, the EWI is designed to retract before the sling fails. The sling inspector now
has an objective “GO/NO-GO” inspection device rather than relying on subjective and labor-intensive inspection techniques
to guess if the load-bearing core yarns are in good condition.
Sacrificial strand
(same material as sling core yarns)
External Warning Indicator (E.W.I.)

“Weak Link” +/- 65% breaking
strength vs. sling core yarns.
Sacrificial strand recoils
External Warning Indicator pulls

violently into the sling
Weak Link fails from
severe overload.

Covermax® Covers
COVERMAX® RIFLED COVER TECHNOLOGY

US Patent #7,926,859
Rifled Cover® Technology is a major patented breakthrough only available
on Slingmax® Twin-Path® high-performance fiber roundslings. Rifled Cover®
Technology works like the inside of a rifle barrel, where the bullet spins as it
leaves the muzzle of the gun. The helical winding of the core fibers signifi-
cantly improves strength and efficiency.
Twin-Path® high-performance roundslings with patented Rifled Cover®

Technology yield three major advantages:
1. Increased strength-to-weight ratio. 17% increased breaking strength
with the same amount of core yarn.
2. Consistent and predictable breaking strength for every sling.
3. Repeatability in the manufacturing process.
COVERMAX® COVER - ABRASION

Any Twin-Path® sling can be made with a Covermax® cover. This is made of a heavy-duty, double layer industrial nylon
material. The outside cover is green and the inside cover is red. If you see any red showing through the green cover, stop
using the sling and get a repair evaluation. This cover has been tested to provide the best ultraviolet (UV) protection and the
best abrasion protection of any commercially available synthetic lifting sling. Below are summary charts of the cover tests.
Roundsling Cover Abrasion Test Results

Cycles
Covers
Covermax® Protection
COVERMAX® COVER - UV RESISTANCE
Ultra-Violet Light (UV) Resistance (Testing)
Because of the Covermax® tubing’s thick dense structure the material restricts a vast
majority of the ultra-violet rays that penetrate other roundsling covers.
NO EXPOSURE 500 Hrs EXPOSURE
DBL
NO UV NO DBL DBL BLACK COVERMAX®
YELLOW
EXPOSURE COVER ORANGE POLY COVER COVER
FIBER TYPE POLY COVER
PERCENTAGE OF STRENGTH LOST AT 500 HOURS OF
BASE LINE
UV EXPOSURE TO COVERS / FIBER
POLYESTER 100% 36% 12% 9% 5% 2%
ARAMID 100% 28% 26% 27% 9% 2%
K-SPEC® 100% 12% – – – 1.13%
SLING PROTECTION
Once synthetic slings have been selected, they then need to be protected. Web slings and roundslings can be quickly
damaged from cutting and friction. In ASME B30.9 Slings it states, “Slings in contact with edges, corners, protrusions,
or abrasive surfaces shall be protected with a material of sufficient strength, thickness, and construction to prevent
damage”. Edges have varying degrees of danger. You should protect all edges. This removes all subjectivity from the
workers guessing which edges protection and which may not. All edges can cut a sling. A sling’s design factor of 5:1 is not
reached until the radius of the protected edge is approximately 1". THEREFORE: Slingmax® recommends cut protection
for edges with a radius <1".
Chart 1: Sling Break Load vs. Edge Type
70,000
Treated Polyester
60,000
50,000 Polyester
Test Load (lbs)
40,000
Nylon
30,000
FS 2 (25,600 LBS)
20,000
10,000 WLL (12,800 LBS)
0
Knife 75° 90° 105° 1/64" 1/32" 1/16" 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 1"
Edge Type

CornerMax® Sleeve (Cut Protection)
The CornerMax® Sleeve is the latest in rigging protection from SLINGMAX® Rigging Solutions. The CornerMax® Sleeve
is the ideal solution to protect synthetic slings from cutting when it is not practical to use a CornerMax® Pad, whether due
to curvature of the load edge or repetitive uses such as unloading steel coils. Independent field and laboratory testing has
shown the CornerMax® Sleeve to be extremely cut resistant. The CornerMax® Sleeve is made with Dyneema® Fiber and is
proven tough. To prevent sliding, the 6" wide CornerMax® Sleeve has been sewn down the middle (5") on each end of the
Twin-Path® Extra Sling (pictured). The true benefits of this revolutionary material far outweigh the costs and now provide for
the use of synthetic slings in applications previously dominated by heavy chain, mesh and wire rope slings
TWIN-PATH® Coil Sling
• 10 times lighter than conventional steel coil gripper slings.
• Chain and metal mesh slings require rigger to use a “fish hook” to grab & pull the sling through the coil.
The Twin-Path® Coil Sling is so light that one underhanded toss is all you need. Also faster to make.
• Will not damage the load.
• Repairable as manufacturer can remove a damaged CornerMax™ sleeve & sew a new one to the sling.
FASTENED OVER
CORNERMAX® EXTERNAL SLEEVE
BOTH LEGS OF
STOCK NO. WIDTH (IN)
TWIN-PATH® SLING
CRNMXS03 5 UP TO TPXC 3,000

CORNERMAX™ PAD CUT PROTECTION

Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Damaged or misused protection
! WARNING can result in damage or sling failure. Inspect before each use. Inspect for cuts, tears or damage that may prevent
protection of the sling. Ensure protection is the correct size & type to protect the sling. Prevent pads & sling from
slipping or sliding across load edge. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use, maintenance &/or inspec-
tion. MAXIMUM LOADING: Do NOT exceed 25,000 lbs. per inch of sling width.
Synthetic Armor™ Pads (Abrasion Protection)
CornerMax® Pads (Edge Protection)
Synthetic Armor Pads protect slings from abrasion damage which can be caused by contact with rough surfaces such as
concrete beams and structures. They are also used to protect finished or painted loads from marring. These wear pads can
be made to fit any length or width sling. They can also be made in long lengths which the customer can cut into suitable sizes
on the job. Double or triple thickness provides resistance for the more severe conditions. There is no maximum width and a
variety of materials are used to protect slings & to protect loads.
SYNARM–SL “Sliding” SYNARM–RM “Removable”
SYNARM–EE “Eye and Eye”
CORNERMAX® PADS
Exposure of a sling to load edges or corners requires protection that is not susceptible to cutting because of toughness
or zero contact. As shown in the photo below, the CornerMax® Pad forms a tunnel between the load edge and the pad.
This geometric separation is essential in protecting the pad itself from contacting the load edge, which provides maximum
protection to the sling. US Patent #7,744,138
CORNERMAX CORNERMAX
CORNERMAX® SLING WIDTH
APPROX WIDTH APPROX WEIGHT
STOCK NO. (INCHES)
(INCHES) (LBS)
CRNMX02 1&2 4 1.00
CRNMX03 3 5 1.25
CRNMX04 4 6 1.50
CRNMX05 5 8 2.00
CRNMX06 6 8 2.00
CRNMX08 8 10 2.50
CRNMX10 10 12 3.00
CRNMX12 12 16 5.50
CRNMX14 14 18 6.50
CORNERMAX™ PAD CUT PROTECTION

Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Damaged or misused protection
! WARNING can result in damage or sling failure. Inspect before each use. Inspect for cuts, tears or damage that may prevent
protection of the sling. Ensure protection is the correct size & type to protect the sling. Prevent pads & sling from
slipping or sliding across load edge. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use, maintenance &/or inspec-
tion. MAXIMUM LOADING: Do NOT exceed 25,000 lbs. per inch of sling width.

Shackle Pin Pads
Syn-Glide
SHACKLE PIN PADS
Patent Pending
The pin area of a shackle can damage synthetic slings. Placing synthetic slings on the pin should be avoided. Shackles have
a sharp edge where the pin goes through the shackle ear. If the sling is rigged on this area, it can become severely damaged.
If you must rig on the pin, protect your sling with a Shackle Pin Pad. The Shackle Pin Pad is sized for the model of shackle
and protects the sling along the entire pin.
SYN-GLIDE
Syn-Glide Film is the only material available on the market today that reduces 70% of cover friction
by allowing the cover to glide over itself or a piece of hardware. Syn-Glide is an important accessory
for every rigger that works with Twin-Path® Slings. Syn-Glide is designed to eliminate the “bite” of the
Covermax cover in situations where the cover is resting on itself when the weight of a load is applied.
Syn-Glide will:
• Decrease cost of job
• Eliminate large shackles & hardware
• Increase job-site safety
• Increase job speed
• Significantly reduce the need for sling repair
Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle
TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE

US Patent #5,651,572, #7,926,859 CA #2,195,393 EP #0785163 Japan #2929431 Australia #707924
The Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle (TPXA with K-Spec® core yarn, or TPA with polyester core yarn) is a two-leg bridle made with
a Twin-Path® sling and an adjustable bridle ring. When tension is applied to the Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle, it self-adjusts
until the lifting point is over the center of gravity. This allows the two legs to be adjusted for a level lift without the need for
custom slings or hardware.
TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS
ADJUSTABLE RING DIMENSIONS SHACKLE DIMENSIONS SLING WEIGHT (LBS.)

BRIDAL NOMINAL MAIN HOOK RING NOMINAL APPROX APPROX
STOCK CAPACITY SLING RING STOCK AREA AREA SHACKLE TONNAGE 3 FOOT ADDER
NUMBERS (LBS) WIDTH (IN) DIAMETER (IN) (WIDTH)(IN) (LENGTH)(IN) SIZE (IN) (WLL) BASE PER FOOT
TPA 06 6,000 2-1/2 1-3/16 3-1/8 2-5/8 5/8 3-1/4T 4.40 1.35
TPXA 12 12,000 3 1-1/8 4-1/8 4 7/8 6-1/2T 6.80 1.95
TPXA 20 20,000 3 1-1/8 4-1/8 4 1-1/4 12T 13.60 2.70
TPXA 40 40,000 4 1-5/8 5-1/4 5-1/2 1-3/4 25T 31.10 4.20
TPXA 60 60,000 4 2 7 7-1/2 2 35T 60.00 5.70
TPXA 90 90,000 5 2-1/4 8 8-1/2 2-1/4 55T 86.00 8.10
NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN ARE FOR ENTIRE BRIDLE ASSEMBLY WITH LEGS @ 45° ANGLE.
METRIC CAPACITIES AVAILABLE

Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle
The Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle sling is a multi-purpose rigging tool and it’s important that it is
used properly. The adjustment ring has a double sling on one side and a single sling on the other side.
If the lifting points are an equal distance from the cen- If the lifting points are an equal distance on either side
ter of gravity, then the Twin-Path® Adjustable can be of the center of gravity but one is higher, then the dou-
hooked-up with the double or single sling on either ble sling should be attached to the higher lifting point.
lifting point.
If one of the lifting points is closer to the center of grav- Never use the Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle in situa-
ity, then attach the double sling to this lifting point. It will tions where the sling-to-hook angle is greater than 45°.
have the highest weight concentration. If the Twin-Path® Always connect above the center of gravity. If connec-
Adjustable is attached so that the single sling is nearest tions are made below the center of gravity, then the
the center of gravity, it will not allow the lift to be made. load may turn when lifted.
Check-Fast® High Performance Roundslings
Twin-Path® Sparkeater Slings
SINGLE-PATH® EXTRA COVERMAX® WITH CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION
US Patent #7,661,737, #7,926,859 CA #2,547,632 EP #1899255
Slingmax® Single-Path Slings are the only single-path, high-performance fiber roundslings available
with the Check-Fast® Inspection System and Covermax® Cover. The Covermax® Cover is the most
durable cover available for a synthetic sling. Also available in polyester with a polyester cover and
polyester core yarn.
RATED CAPACITIES (LBS) 5:1 DF
SINGLE-PATH® VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES NOMINAL

APPROXIMATE
K-SPEC® WEIGHT BODY

90° 60° 45°
SLINGS (LBS. PER FT.) WIDTH
STOCK NO. (BEARING-BEARING) (IN)
SPXCF 500 5,000 4,000 10,000 8,660 7,070 .34 2.5
SPXCF 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .38 2.5
SPXCF 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .44 2.5
SPXCF 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .52 2.5
SPXCF 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .59 3
SPXCF 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .65 3
SPXCF 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 .85 3
SPXCF 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 .98 4
SPXCF 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.11 4
SPXCF 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.24 4
SPXCF 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.63 5
SPXCF 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 1.81 5
SPARKEATER®
US Patent #4,850,629 CN Patent #1,280,458
The Sparkeater® sling (SE) is the sling to use when the job site is in a hot environment (up to
300°F or 150°C). These slings are made with high-temperature core yarns and a high tempera-
ture cover. Sparkeater® slings, as with all Twin-Path® slings, come with an inner red cover that
provides an early warning for damage, as well as the patented Check-Fast® Inspection System.
RATED CAPACITIES (LBS) 5:1 DF

VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE
WEIGHT NOMINAL
TWIN-PATH® 90° 60° 45° (LBS. PER FT.) BODY WIDTH
STOCK NO. (BEARING-BEARING) (IN)
TPSE 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .40 1.5 - 3
TPSE 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .45 1.5 - 3
TPSE 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .51 1.5 - 3
TPSE 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .57 1.5 - 3
TPSE 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .71 2.0 - 4
TPSE 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 .83 2.0 - 4
TPSE 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 1.14 2.0 - 4
TPSE 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.27 2.0 - 4
TPSE 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.39 3.5 - 7
TPSE 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.65 3.5 - 7
TPSE 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 1.84 3.5 - 7
NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE SLING.
SMALLER AND LARGER CAPACITIES AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST

Equalizer Block
Twin-Path® Field Taper
EQUALIZER BLOCK
The Equalizer Block is used to maintain tension on all legs of the sling during a lift.
Rather than adjusting slings and hooks prior to completing a lift, the Equalizer Block
automatically adjusts itself when the load is put on the device from the sling. This
product was designed specifically for Twin-Path® slings and is the only rolling block
for synthetic roundslings.
MAXIMUM SLING SUGGESTED SLING FOR 90° BLOCK WEIGHT

PART NO. CAPACITY (5:1 DF) WIDTH (IN) BASKET (LBS)
SEB10 10 US TON 3 TPXCF1000 44
SEB125M 125 METRIC TON 8 TPXCF15000 640
WARNING
Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or over-
loaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling
! from contact with edges. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
TWIN-PATH® FIELD TAPER

The Twin-Path® Field Taper is a removable, repositionable wrap that re-
duces the width of TPXCF slings onsite. This is a tool that can be utilized
to fit a sling into smaller openings without sacrificing sling capacity.
Benefits: 1. Removable and transferable from sling to sling
2. Can be installed by the customer in the field
3. Bearing points can be changed throughout the sling length
4. Much quicker installation
5. Doesn’t contaminate a nuclear fuel pool
6. Easy inspection of sling after use
Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not
! WARNING be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges,
corners, protrusions and abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkali and temperature over 180.
Twin-Path® Rigging Practices
Do not fold one path over Squeeze both paths

Keep folded and wrinkled Smooth folds and wrinkles out the other path to fit sling together to fit sling into
sling covers off bearing of the covers over the hook and into tight fittings tight hooks and fittings
points hardware area with your hands
Do not allow the sling to roll Makes sure the body of the sling Do not place the identification Identification should be
over itself and twist at inside paths run smooth in the choker tag on the bearing point placed 18" - 24" away
the choker hitch hitch without any twisting from the bearing point and
facing away from the load
When rigging a
vertical hitch with When rigging a vertical
When rigging a basket hitch When rigging a basket hitch, a long sling don't hitch with a long sling
do not pull slack out of the adjust slack out by hand, pull the slack side equalize the slack side
hitch with the crane before lifting with the crane out with the crane by hand
When placing multiple Twin-Path® slings in hardware place When connecting two When connecting two slings
the slings directly on top of each other or side by side. When slings with a shackle, do with a shackle, use sling pro-
placing slings in narrow fittings squeeze sling to fit and not place a sling over the tection over the pin to protect
maintain equal loading on the paths. pin area without protection the sling from cutting
Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only
! WARNING if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions and abrasive
surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkali and temperature over 180° F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use
or maintenance.

Twin-Path® Slings
TWIN-PATH®
SLINGS...
DO THE JOB
40 ton Electric Transformer 90 ton Oil Rig Thruster
F-15 Level Lift with Adjustable Bridles Transporting a 500 ton Electric Generator
220 ton Cement Kiln Removing Nuclear Reactor Lid Sections
Use and Care
Mechanical Considerations
1. Load both paths of Twin-Path® slings equally. Do not side load. Do not load the edge of the sling.
2. Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling.
3. Select a sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment.
4. Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to angle of lift
which may affect the lifting capacity. Diameters of pins and edges also may affect the capacity of the
lifting sling.
5. Slings used in a choker shall not be forced to tighten around the load by pounding with hammers or
other objects. Choker hitches are the least effective way to use a sling based on capacity. Two chokers
should be used to balance the load. One choker in the center of the load may create an unbalanced
situation which could lead to an accident.
6. Slings used in a basket hitch must have the load balanced to prevent slippage and accidents.
7. Slings used with fittings shall be compatible with the fittings used. The lifting capacity shall be
rated at the lower of the fitting or sling. Fitting openings shall be of the proper shape and size to assure
that the sling will seat properly.
8. Slings in contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or abrasive surfaces shall be protected with a
material of sufficient strength, thickness, and construction to prevent damage. The pin area of a
shackle can cause synthetic slings to cut or tear.
9. Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or drawn across other surfaces which may damage the sling.
10. Slings shall not be twisted or tied in knots to shorten.
11. Slings can be damaged by resting loads on them or by pulling slings from under a load.
12. Do not drop objects on slings or run over them with vehicles.
13. Slings which are damaged shall not be used.
14. Sling hitches must provide control of the load.
15. Portions of the human body shall be kept from between the sling and the load and from between the
sling and any attachment to lifting devices such as hooks.
16. Personnel shall stand clear of suspended loads.
17. Personnel shall not ride on the sling or suspended loads.
18. Avoid shock loading.
19. Twisting and kinking the legs of the sling shall be avoided.
20. Load applied to the hook should be centered in the bowl of the hooks. Do not point-load the hook.
21. During lifting with or without the load all personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.
22. The slings shall contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity so the load
will not tilt when the load is lifted.

Use and Care
Mechanical Considerations
23. Synthetic roundsling users shall be trained in the selection, inspection, cautions to personnel,
effects of environment, and rigging practices.
24. Only legibly marked or labeled slings must be used. If the tag is not legible, or missing, the sling
must not be used.
25. Keep labels or tags away from the load, the hook and the angle of choke.
26. Synthetic slings should be inspected before each lift.
Environmental Considerations
K-Spec® core yarn strength retention is based on test results of components at 65°C/150°F (or less) for
6 months. K-Spec® has a 100% strength retention when exposed to: age, 10% detergent solution, rot and
mildew, sunlight and toluene; 99% strength retention when exposed to: acetic acid, gasoline, hydrochloric
acid 1m, hydraulic fluid, kerosene, and sea water; 98% retention when exposed to: 25% ammonium
hydroxide, 10% hypophosphite solution, and 40% phosphoric acid; 97% retention when exposed to 5m
sodium hydroxide; 95% retention when exposed to Portland cement and sulfuric acid; and 88% retention
when exposed to Clorox® bleach, and nitric acid.
Fiber Characteristics
POLY-ARYLATE
NYLON POLYESTER ARAMID (LIQUID CRYSTAL) UHMwPE K-SPEC®
FIBER PROPERTIES
Tenacity - dry g/d 7.5 - 10.5 7.0 - 10.0 28 26 - 29 35 - 40 35
Elongation at break % 15 - 28 12 - 18 4.6 3.8 3.5 - 3.8 3.8
Moisture regain % 4.0 - 6 1 2 <0.10 0 0
Specific Gravity 1.14 1.38 1.38 1.41 .97 1.11
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Solvents Good Good Excel Excel Excel Excel
Acids
Excel
Dilute: Good Good Good Excel Excel
Excel
Conc: Fair Fair Good <90% Excel
Alkalis
Dilute: Excel Good Good Excel Excel Excel
Conc: Excel Fair Good <30% Excel Excel
TEMPERATURE TOLERANCE
320°F
Melt Point 425°F 490°F 900°F 625°F 300°F In use, Follow
sling tag warning
Use and Care
Inspections of Twin-Path® Products

1. Check-Fast® External Early Warning Indicator (EWI) and Tell-Tail indicators shall extend past the tag
area of each sling. If your sling is equipped with Check-Fast® and the EWI is not visible or both Tell-Tails
are not visible, remove the sling from service. Send to manufacturer for repair evaluation.
2. If Fiber-Optic inspection is installed in the sling, inspect by allowing light to enter the fiber optics. If
the fiber optics do not transmit light from end to end, remove the sling from service and contact the
manufacturer for repair evaluation.
3. Slings shall be inspected for evidence of cutting or tearing of the outer cover. Slings with cuts shall be
removed from service and sent back to the manufacturer for repair evaluation. Damage to the cover may
indicate core damage.
4. Inspect slings for evidence of heat damage. Sparkeater® slings shall not be exposed to temperatures
over 149 °C/300°F. K-Spec® and polyester slings shall not be exposed to temperatures above
82°C/180°F. Cold temperature exposure down to - 40°C/- 40°F do not affect the strength of the products.
5. If any part of the sling shows evidence of chemical degradation or damage, remove the sling from service.
Return the sling to the manufacturer for repair evaluation.
6. Slings using aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays or mists of alkalis or acids
are present.
7. Twin-Path® lifting slings and any fittings attached shall be the subject of frequent and regular
inspections. In addition to the initial inspection by a competent person and frequent written inspections,
the slings shall be visually inspected before each use.
8. Written inspections shall be performed as required and documents of such inspection by a competent
person shall be kept on file in the safety department of the plant or site where used. Inspections may be
done more often based on frequency of use, severity of conditions, experience of past service life.
9. Slings shall be examined throughout their length for abrasion, cuts, heat damage, fitting distortion
or damage, tag legibility, and if any doubts are held by the inspector, the sling shall be removed from
service. If deterioration is found, the sling must be removed from service.
10. Slings removed from service that are not repairable shall be destroyed and rendered completely unfit for
future use.
11. Abrasion, heat damage or cuts to the cover may indicate a loss of strength to the core yarns, and these
slings shall not be used until evaluated by the manufacturer.
Test Procedures for Twin-Path® Sling Products
1. Proof tests shall consist of pulling the slings to twice their rated capacity.
2. Testing of Twin-Path® sling products and core yarn shall be on a testing machine which meets or exceeds
the standards as described in ASME E-4.
3. Break testing of slings shall be as above with results documented. Pin size for break testing should be a
diameter equal to half the nominal sling width, or larger.
4. Repaired fittings or slings shall be proof-tested before they are returned to service. Certifications may
be provided to the fitting or sling owner.

Sling Reference Charts
RIGGING COMPARISON
TYPES OF SLINGS
TWIN-PATH® WIRE ROPE HPF ROPE ALLOY CHAIN POLYESTER SYNTHETIC WEB HMPE ROPE
COMPARISON EXTRA SLINGS SLINGS SLINGS SLINGS ROUNDSLINGS SLINGS SLINGS
WEIGHT Lightest Very Heavy Light Very Heavy 3 Times Heavier 3 Times Heavier Light
FLEXIBILITY Excellent Moderate Excellent Excellent Excellent Multi-ply stiff Excellent
ELONGATION Negligible Negligible Low Negligible Med to High High High
REPAIRABLE Yes No No Yes No No No
ABSORPTION No No No No No Yes Yes
CORROSION No Yes No Yes No No No
SAFETY FEATURES Yes No No No No No No
UV RESISTANT Yes Yes No Yes No No Minimal
ABRASION RESISTANT Best Syn. Yes No Yes No No No
BUOYANCY Yes Sinks Fast Yes Sinks Fast Sinks Sinks
CONDUCTIVITY No Yes No Yes No No No
SPARKING No Yes No Yes No No No
QUICK REFERENCE CHART OF THE MOST POPULAR SLINGMAX®

HEAVY-LIFT WIRE ROPE SLINGS
PARTS OF WIRE TERMINATION OF

ROPE IN BODY D/d BODY* D/d EYE* EACH EYE MINIMUM LENGTH FEATURES
Good
Tri-Flex® 6' for 7/8" replacement for
3 5/1 1.5/1 1 Ferrule
Sling component wire* single-strand wire
rope slings
Gator-Laid® 6' for 3/4" 80% efficiency;

9 5/1 1/1 3 Ferrules
sling component wire* parallel-laid eyes
Gator-Flex® 5' for 1/4"

9 5/1 N/A Hand tuck Endless
grommet component wire*
* Ratio based * Ratio based * Minimum length

on finished on finished increases as
body diameter body diameter component wire
size increases
INSPECTION OF SLINGMAX® WIRE ROPE SLINGS

1. Follow general criteria in ASME/ANSI B30.9 Chapter 9-2 “Wire Rope Slings - Selection, Use,
and Maintenance”
2. Retirement criteria: for Tri-Flex® slings of less than 9 parts, 20 broken wires per lay length means that the
sling should be removed from service. For slings of 9 parts or more, 40 Broken wires per lay length means that
the sling should be removed from service.
ADVANTAGES: FLEXIBILITY, LOW D/d RATIOS, GOOD LENGTH TOLERANCE

Meets conditions specified by the Wire Rope Technical Board Sling Manual
Tri-Flex® Slings
TRI-FLEX SLINGS IN ACTION

Tri-Flex® Wire Rope Slings
Tri-Flex® Wire Rope Slings provide the best combination of strength and flexibility. Because of the Tri-
Flex® sling construction, there is a large savings in material and machine costs in the larger sizes. This,
combined with ease of use, makes Tri-Flex® Wire Rope Slings the slings for smart buyers.
PIN SIZE EQUALS BASKET HITCH EQUALS

Patent #4,043,581
D/d OF 1.5:1 IN THE EYE USING D/d OF 5:1 USING
FINISHED DIAMETER FINISHED DIAMETER
TRI-FLEX® ENGINEERING INFORMATION

DESIGN FACTOR 5:1 RATED LOAD IN TONS
COMPOSED FINISHED WEIGHT
3 PARTS OF ACTUAL PER FT.
EIP ROPE (IN) VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET DIAMETER (IN) LBS.
1/4 1.7 1.3 3.4 1/2 .44
5/16 2.6 1.9 5.2 5/8 .68
3/8 3.6 2.7 7.2 3/4 .99
7/16 4.9 3.7 9.8 7/8 1.33
1/2 6.4 4.8 12.8 1 1.75
9/16 8.0 6.0 16.0 1-1/8 2.24
5/8 9.9 7.4 19.8 1-1/4 2.73
3/4 14.0 10.5 28.0 1-1/2 3.9
7/8 19.0 14.3 38.0 1-3/4 5.4
1 24.8 18.6 49.6 2 7.0
1-1/8 31.2 23.4 62.4 2-1/4 8.9
1-1/4 38.4 28.8 76.8 2-1/2 10.0
1-3/8 46.0 34.5 92.0 2-3/4 13.3
1-1/2 55.0 41.2 110.0 3 15.8
1-3/4 73.0 54.8 146.0 3-1/2 21.5
2 95.0 71.2 190.0 4 28.0
2-1/4 118.0 88.5 236.0 4-1/2 35.6
2-1/2 145.0 109.0 290.0 5 44.0
TRI-FLEX® WIRE ROPE SLINGS provide the best combination of strength and flexibility. Because of the patented
TRI-FLEX® SLING construction, there is a large savings in material and machine costs in the larger sizes; this,
combined with ease of use make TRI-FLEX® SLINGS the only sling for smart buyers.
Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect
! WARNING before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges,
corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can
occur from improper use or maintenance.
Tri-Flex® with Cable Laid Wire Rope
This wire rope sling is an extremely flexible product with great

applications for general rigging purposes. It makes a fantastic
choker sling, especially when setting or removing utility poles.
COMPOSED 3 PARTS
OF: (IN) VERTICAL (TONS) CHOKER (TONS) VERTICAL BASKET (TONS) FINISHED DIAMETER (IN)
1/4 1.3 .9 2.6 1/2
3/8 2.7 2.0 5.4 3/4
1/2 4.6 3.4 9.2 1
5/8 7.0 5.2 14.0 1-1/4
3/4 10.0 7.5 20.0 1-1/2
NOTE: Vertical rated capacity is based on 5:1 Design Factor, EIP, IWRC, or GAC.
Bending radius of the sling body is 5:1 where D is the Pin or Load and d is the sling body.
D/d of loops: 1/1 where D is the pin and d is the sling body
Inspect before each use. Follow OSHA, ANSI B30.9 and Manufacturer's Guidelines. Use by untrained persons
! WARNING is hazardous. Improper use will result in serious injury or death. Do not exceed rated capacity. This product will
fail if damaged, abused, misused, overused or improperly maintained.

Gator-Flex® Grommets
GATOR-FLEX® GROMMETS
U.S. Patent #5,561,973
Gator-Flex® Grommets are endless for heavy lifts that re-
quire short connections. These slings can be made shorter
than standard multi-part slings. They are the most flexible
grommets in the industry.
GATOR-FLEX® GROMMETS (D/d = 5:1)

RATED CAPACITY AT 5:1 DF
PIN SIZE 5 x FD 9 PTS. TONS (2000 LBS) WEIGHT
FINISHED DIA. (IN) WIRE ROPE SIZE (IN) VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET VERTICAL PER FT./LBS.
1 1/4 10 7 20 2
1-1/4 5/16 15 11 30 3
1-1/2 3/8 22 15 44 5
1-3/4 7/16 29 21 58 6
2 1/2 38 27 76 8
2-1/4 9/16 48 34 96 11
2-1/2 5/8 59 42 118 13
3 3/4 85 59 170 19
3-1/2 7/8 115 81 230 25
4 1 148 104 296 33
4-1/2 1-1/8 187 131 374 42
5 1-1/4 230 161 460 52
5-1/2 1-3/8 276 194 552 63
6 1-1/2 328 230 656 75
7 1-3/4 441 308 882 102
8 2 570 399 1140 133
9 2-1/4 711 498 1422 168
10 2-1/2 870 609 1740 209
11 2-3/4 1040 728 2080 250
12 3 1224 857 2448 300
Gator-Laid® Wire Rope Slings
GATOR-LAID® WIRE ROPE SLINGS

For heavy lifting work, Gator-Laid® Wire Rope Slings are the most efficient and flexible
wire rope slings that meet all industrial and regulatory standards. These slings have
metal sleeves for the splice connection and parallel-laid wire in the eyes. It is a heavy-lift
sling that can be made in short working lengths. Gator-Laid® products were developed
in conjunction with the offshore oil industry to provide the world's best heavy lift wire
rope slings.
GATOR-LAID® SLINGS
TECHNICAL CHART
FINISHED COMPONENT STANDARD VERTICAL RATED CHOKER RATED BASKET RATED WEIGHT
DIAMETER (IN) PARTS (IN) EYE SIZE (IN) CAPACITY (TONS) CAPACITY (TONS) CAPACITY (TONS) PER FOOT (LBS)
1/2 1/8 8 1.4 1.0 2.8 .26
5/8 5/32 10 2.0 1.5 4.0 .40
3/4 3/16 12 3.0 2.2 6.0 .59
7/8 7/32 14 4.0 3.0 8.0 .77
1 1/4 16 4.8 3.6 9.6 .99
1-1/4 5/16 18 7.5 5.6 15.0 1.56
1-1/2 3/8 20 10.5 7.8 21.0 2.19
1-3/4 7/16 22 14.6 10.9 29.2 3.15
2 1/2 24 19.1 14.3 38.2 4.14
2-1/4 9/16 26 24.1 18.0 48.2 5.13
2-1/2 5/8 28 29.6 22.2 59.2 6.48
3 3/4 30 42.3 31.7 84.6 9.36
3-1/2 7/8 35 57.3 42.9 114.6 12.78
4 1 40 74.4 55.8 148.4 16.65
4-1/2 1-1/8 45 93.6 60.2 187.2 21.06
5 1-1/4 50 115.0 86.2 230.0 26.01
5-1/2 1-3/8 55 138.2 103.6 276.4 31.50
6 1-1/2 60 164.0 123.0 328.2 37.44
7 1-3/4 70 220.3 165.2 440.6 51.03
8 2 80 285.1 213.8 570.2 66.51
9 2-1/4 90 355.6 266.7 711.2 84.24
10 2-1/2 100 434.8 326.1 869.6 104.00
NOTE: Rated capacity is based on 5:1 Design Factor.

Hand-Spliced Slings
NO. 100 B
The end of a single wire rope is turned back along the rope to form the eye, and
strands are hand-tucked into the body of the rope. There are two styles available:
1: Standard Four Tuck burnt-end splice. The strands are left exposed, cut off and
fused with a torch.
2: The tapered and concealed splice utilizes tension in the rope body to secure
strands where they are tucked back into the rope. The center core of either fiber or
wire is removed along the length of the splice. When “tapered and concealed”, ends
of strands are tucked inward and concealed inside the rope.
Standard Four tuck and tapered and concealed slings have the same rated capacity
for each available diameter of wire rope.
WARNING: Hand-spliced slings should not be used in lifts where the sling may
rotate and cause the wire rope to unlay.
RATED CAPACITIES IN TONS (2000 LBS)

LOOP
DIMENSIONS 6 X 19 AND 6 x 37 EIPS ROPE - FIBERCORE & IWRC
BASKET HITCH
DIAMETER MIN LENGTH (SL) W L SINGLE LEG CHOKER

OF ROPE (IN) OF SLING (FT-IN) (IN) (IN) VERTICAL HITCH 60° 45° 30°
1/4 1-9 2 4 0.54 0.42 0.94 0.77 0.54
5/16 2 2-1/2 5 0.83 0.66 1.4 1.2 0.83
3/8 2-6 3 6 1.2 0.94 2.0 1.7 1.2
7/16 2-9 3-1/2 7 1.6 1.3 2.7 2.2 1.6
1/2 3 4 8 2.0 1.6 3.5 2.9 2.0
9/16 3-6 4-1/4 9 2.5 2.1 4.4 3.6 2.5
5/8 4 5 10 3.1 2.6 5.3 4.4 3.1
3/4 4-6 6 12 4.3 3.7 7.4 6.1 4.3
7/8 5-6 7 14 5.7 5.0 9.8 8.0 5.7
1 6 8 16 7.4 6.4 13 10 7.4
1-1/8 6-6 9 18 9.3 8.1 16 13 9.3
1-1/4 7 10 20 11 9.9 20 16 11
Rated capacities of choker hitches apply when the angle of choke is greater than 120°.
Rated capacities of basket hitches are based on a minimum diameter of curvature at the point of load contact of 25 times the rope diameter.
The Wayne special- Wayne Printup who was a Native

American Ironworker who came up with the idea of having
one loop hand Tuck and the other loop Flemished eye.
Mechanical Splice
Flemish Eye Slings
NO. 105 B
Eyes are formed using the flemish eye splice. Ends
are secured by pressing a metal sleeve over the
ends of the strands of the splice. Pull is directly
along the centerline of rope & eye. Gives most effi-
cient use of rope capacity & is economical.
Flemish Eye Splice Swaging Provides
In the standard flemish eye me- Positive Grip
chanical splice, rope is separat- This cutaway of a metal sleeve
ed into two parts – 3 adjacent swaged onto a splice shows how
strands, and 3 adjacent strands metal “flows” into valleys between
and core. These two parts are then strands to positively prevent ends
re-laid back in opposite directions to from unlaying when sling is used
form an eye, and ends are secured with a within its rated capacity.
pressed metal sleeve.
RATED CAPACITIES IN TONS (2000 LBS)
LOOP DIMENSIONS 6 X 19 AND 6 X 37 EIPS ROPE - IWRC
BASKET HITCH
DIAMETER MIN LENGTH (SL) W L SINGLE LEG CHOKER

OF ROPE (IN) OF SLING (FT-IN) (IN) (IN) VERTICAL HITCH 60° 45° 30°
1/4 1-6 2 4 0.65 0.48 1.1 .91 .65
5/16 1-9 2-1/2 5 1.0 0.74 1.7 1.4 1.0
3/8 2 3 6 1.4 1.1 2.5 2.0 1.4
7/16 2-3 3-1/2 7 1.9 1.4 3.4 2.7 1.9
1/2 2-6 4 8 2.5 1.9 4.4 3.6 2.5
9/16 2-9 4-1/2 9 3.2 2.4 5.5 4.5 3.2
5/8 3 5 10 3.9 2.9 6.8 5.5 3.9
3/4 3-6 6 12 5.6 4.1 9.7 7.9 5.6
7/8 4 7 14 7.6 5.6 13 11 7.6
1 4-6 8 16 9.8 7.2 17 14 9.8
1-1/8 5 9 18 12 9.1 21 17 12
1-1/4 5-6 10 20 15 11 26 21 15
1-3/8 6 11 22 18 13 31 25 18
1-1/2 7 12 24 21 16 37 30 21
1-3/4 8 14 28 28 21 49 40 28
2 9 16 32 37 28 63 52 37
2-1/4 10 18 36 44 35 77 63 44
2-1/2 11 20 40 54 42 94 77 54
2-3/4 12 22 44 65 51 113 92 65
3 13 24 48 77 60 133 108 77
3-1/2 16 - 6 32 64 102 79 176 144 102
3-3/4 18 36 72 115 90 199 163 115
4 20 40 80 130 101 225 184 130
4-1/2 24 50 100 160 124 277 226 160
*Rated capacities of basket hitches are based on a minimum diameter of curvature at the point of load contact of 40 times
the rope diameter for slings 1/4" thru 1" diameter and 25 times the rope diameter for slings 1-1/4" diameter and larger.

Cable-Laid Slings
NO. 108C These smooth and very flexible slings are made from cut lengths of cable-laid fabric that is
machine formed by laying six wire ropes in a helical pattern around a core rope. Flemish eye
mechanical splices, secured by pressed metal sleeves, provide centerline pull at the eyes.
More flexible than same capacity single-part slings.
Flemish Eye Splice Swaging Provides

In the standard flemish eye mechanical Positive Grip
splice, rope is separated into two parts This cutaway of a metal sleeve swaged
– 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent onto a splice shows how metal “flows”
strands and core. These two parts are into valleys between strands to posi-
Sling Bodies then re-laid back in opposite directions tively prevent ends from unlaying when
are made from to form an eye, and ends are secured sling is used within its rated capacity.
7 Individual with a pressed metal sleeve.
Wire Ropes
Ideal for use as basket or choker hitches, where flexibility and ease of
handling are essential and cutting or abrasion is not a critical factor.
RATED CAPACITY (TONS)
BASKET HITCH LOOP

BODY SLIP THRU HEAVY SLIP-ON
DIA THIMBLE THIMBLE THIMBLE
(IN) VERT CHOKER 60° 45° 30° A B ST HT QT
1/4 .50 .34 1.0 .87 .71 .50 2 4 W-2 1/4 3/8
LENGTH
3/8 1.1 .74 2.2 1.9 1.5 1.1 3 6 W-2 3/8 3/8
7x7x7
1/2 1.9 1.3 3.7 3.2 2.6 1.9 4 8 W-3 1/2 1/2
5/8 2.8 1.9 5.5 4.8 3.9 2.8 5 10 W-4 5/8 5/8
3/4 4.1 2.8 8.1 7.0 5.8 4.1 6 12 W-4 3/4 3/4
7/8 5.4 3.7 11 9.4 7.6 5.4 7 14 W-5 7/8 7/8
7x7x19
B 1 6.9 4.7 14 12 9.7 6.9 8 16 W-5 1 1

1-1/8 8.3 5.8 17 14 12 8.3 9 18 W-6 1-1/8
A 1-1/4 9.9 7.0 20 17 14 9.9 10 20 W-6 1-1/4
E-E ST-ST HT-HT OT-OT
Grommet Slings
CABLE LAID GROMMET
WIRE ROPE SLINGS
Cable Laid Grommets have six wire ropes laid helically
around a wire rope core, with ends joined either by a
hand-tucked or a mechanical splice to form an endless
body. Highly flexible, they resist kinks and are easy to
handle. Minimum circumference of the sling is 96 times
the grommet body diameter.
Hand-Tucked
Continuous Construction... Mechanical Splice
made from one 7 Parts of Wire Rope
continuous wire rope in the Sling Body
NO. 21 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) NO. 15 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.)
BASKET HITCHES BASKET HITCHES
FINISHED FINISHED
EIP SLING SLING
COMPONENT BODY BODY
ROPE DIA (IN) DIA (IN) VERT CHOKER VERTICAL 60° 45° 30° DIA (IN) VERT CHOKER VERTICAL 60° 45° 30°
7 X 7 X 7 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE 7 X 7 X 19 CONSTRUCTION
1/8 3/8 1.6 1.0 3.2 12.8 2.2 1.6 1/4 .83 .54 1.7 1.4 1.2 .83
3/16 9/16 3.5 2.3 6.9 6.0 4.9 3.5 3/8 1.8 1.2 3.6 3.1 2.5 1.8
7/32 5/8 4.5 2.9 9.0 7.8 6.4 4.5 1/2 3.0 2.0 6.1 5.3 4.3 3.0
7 X 6 X 9 & 7 X 6 X 37 - EIP 5/8 4.6 3.0 9.1 7.9 6.4 4.6
1/4 3/4 5.6 3.6 11 9.7 7.9 5.6 7 x 6 x 9 & 7 x 6 x 37 - EIP CONSTRUCTION
5/16 15/16 8.7 5.6 17 15 12 8.7 3/4 6.2 4.1 11 11 8.8 6.2
3/8 1-1/8 12 8.0 25 21 17 12 7/8 8.3 5.4 17 14 12 8.3
7/16 1-5/16 17 11 33 29 23 17 1 11 6.8 25 18 15 11
1/2 1-1/2 21 14 43 37 30 21 1-1/8 13 8.4 33 22 18 13
9/16 1-11/16 27 17 53 46 38 27 1-1/4 16 10 43 27 22 16
5/8 1-7/8 33 21 66 57 46 33 1-3/8 18 12 53 32 26 18
3/4 2-1/4 46 30 92 80 65 46 1-1/2 22 14 66 38 31 22
7/8 2-5/8 62 40 123 107 87 62 1-5/8 25 16 92 44 36 25
1 3 79 51 158 137 112 79 1-3/4 28 18 123 49 40 28
1-1/8 3-3/8 98 64 196 170 138 98
Rated Capacities Basket Hitch and vertical lift based on D/d ratio of 5
1-1/4 3-3/4 119 77 237 205 168 119 when “d” is diameter of the finished grommet.
Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no smaller than
5x the body diameter.
Rated capacities based on design factor of 5.
Sling angles of less than 30 degrees shall not be used.

Grommet Slings
STRAND LAID GROMMET WIRE ROPE SLINGS
Strand Laid Grommets have either a wire rope body, or a body of six
strands laid helically around a fiber or strand core, with either a hand
tucked or a mechanical splice to form an endless sling body. Minimum
circumference of the sling is 96 times the grommet body diameter.
Hand-Tucked
Continuous Construction... Mechanical Splice
made from one 7 Parts of Wire Rope
continuous wire rope in the Sling Body
NO. 11 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) NO. 14 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.)
6 X 19 CLASS - FC EIPS 6 X 19 & 6 X 37 CLASS - IWRC EIPS
BASKET HITCHES BASKET HITCHES

SLING SLING
BODY BODY
DIA. DIA.
(IN) VERT CHOKER VERTICAL 60° 45° 30° (IN) VERT CHOKER VERTICAL 60° 45° 30°
1/4 0.94 0.66 1.9 1.6 1.3 0.94 1/4 1.1 0.74 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.1
5/16 1.5 1.0 2.9 2.5 2.1 1.5 5/16 1.6 1.2 3.3 2.8 2.3 1.6
3/8 2.1 1.5 4.2 3.6 3.0 2.1 3/8 2.4 1.6 4.7 4.1 3.3 2.4
7/16 2.8 2.0 5.7 4.9 4.0 2.8 7/16 3.2 2.2 6.4 5.5 4.5 3.2
1/2 3.7 2.6 7.3 6.4 5.2 3.7 1/2 4.1 2.9 8.3 7.2 5.9 4.1
9/16 4.6 3.2 9.3 8.0 6.6 4.6 9/16 5.2 3.7 10 9.1 7.4 5.2
5/8 5.7 4.0 11 9.9 8.1 5.7 5/8 6.4 4.5 13 11 9.1 6.4
3/4 8.2 5.7 16 14 12 8.2 3/4 9.2 6.4 18 16 13 9.2
7/8 11 7.7 22 19 16 11 7/8 12 8.7 25 22 18 12
1 14 10 29 25 20 14 1 16 11 32 28 23 16
1-1/8 18 12 35 31 25 18 1-1/8 20 14 41 35 29 20
1-1/4 21 15 43 37 30 21 1-1/4 25 17 50 43 35 25
1-3/8 25 18 51 44 36 25 1-3/8 30 21 60 52 42 30
1-1/2 30 21 60 52 42 30 1-1/2 36 25 71 62 50 36
1-5/8 34 24 69 60 49 34 1-5/8 41 29 82 71 58 41
1-3/4 40 28 79 69 56 40 1-3/4 48 33 95 83 68 48
1-7/8 45 31 89 77 63 45 1-7/8 54 38 109 94 77 54
2 50 35 101 87 71 50 2 62 43 124 107 87 62
2-1/8 56 39 112 97 79 56 2-1/8 69 48 138 119 98 69
2-1/4 62 43 124 107 88 62 2-1/4 77 54 154 133 109 77
2-3/8 68 48 137 118 97 68 2-3/8 85 60 171 148 121 85
2-1/2 75 52 149 129 106 75 2-1/2 94 66 188 163 133 94
2-3/4 89 62 177 154 125 89 2-3/4 113 79 225 195 159 113
3 95 67 191 180 147 104 3 133 93 265 230 188 133
Rated Capacities Basket Hitch and vertical lift based on D/d ratio of 5 when “d” is diameter of the finished grommet.
Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no smaller than 5x the body diameter.
Sling angles of less than 30 degrees shall not be used
2 Leg Wire Rope Bridles
No. 200 Series ALLOY RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC
MINIMUM OBLONG
LENGTH LINKS
Slings are 2-leg DIAMETER OF (SL) OF SLING DIAMETER
all-purpose bridles, WIRE ROPE (IN) (FT - IN) (IN) 60° 45° 30°
designed for general 1/4 1-3 1/2 1.10 0.91 0.65

lifting purposes where 5/16 1-6 1/2 1.70 1.40 1.00
attachment may be made 3/8 1-8 3/4 2.50 2.00 1.40
directly to the load, such 7/16 1 - 10 3/4 3.40 2.70 1.90
as hooking into lifting eyes 1/2 2-0 3/4 4.40 3.60 2.50
or placing loops over lugs. 9/16 2-2 1 5.50 4.50 3.20
5/8 2-4 1 6.80 5.50 3.90
3/4 2-9 1-1/4 9.70 7.90 5.60
7/8 3-3 1-1/4 13.00 11.00 7.60
1 3-6 1-1/2 17.00 14.00 9.80
1-1/8 4-0 1-3/4 21.00 17.00 12.0
1-1/4 4-6 1-3/4 26.00 21.00 15.0
1-3/8 5-0 2 31.00 25.00 18.0
1-1/2 5-6 2-1/4 37.00 30.00 21.0
1-5/8 6-0 2-1/2 42.00 35.00 24.0
1-3/4 6-6 2-1/2 49.00 40.00 28.0
2 8-0 2-3/4 63.00 52.00 37.0
2-1/4 8-9 3-1/4 77.00 63.00 44.0
2-1/2 10 - 0 3-3/4 94.00 77.00 54.0
For approximate capacities using Fibre Core IPS: deduct 10% from IPS-IWRC strengths.
For approximate capacities on Hand Braided Slings: deduct 15% from corresponding mechanically swaged strengths.
For approximate capacities on Socket Attachments: add 5% to corresponding IWRC swaged strengths.
200FL 200CT
2 leg – Oblong link with heavy 2 leg – Oblong link with heavy
duty thimbles on top and Flemish duty thimbles on top and Crescent
Loops on bottom. Thimble on bottom.
200HT 200OS
2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty 2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty
thimbles on top and Heavy Duty thimbles on top and Open Swage
Thimbles on bottom. Socket on bottom.
200EH 200CS
2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty 2 leg – Oblong link with heavy
thimbles on top and Eye Hoist duty thimbles on top and Closed
Hooks Safety Latches on bottom. Swage Socket on bottom.
200SPA 200BAS
thimbles on top and Screw Pin An- thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor
chor Shackle on bottom. Shackle on bottom.

No. 300 Series MINIMUM ALLOY RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC
LENGTH OBLONG
(SL) LINKS
Slings are 3-leg all-pur- DIAMETER OF OF SLING DIAMETER
WIRE ROPE (IN) (FT - IN) (IN) 60° 45° 30°
pose bridles, generally
recommended for handling 1/4 1-3 1/2 1.70 1.40 0.97
unbalanced loads. 5/16 1-6 3/4 2.60 2.10 1.50

3/8 1-8 3/4 3.70 3.00 2.20
7/16 1 - 10 1 5.00 4.10 2.90
1/2 2-0 1 6.60 5.40 3.80
9/16 2-2 1 8.30 6.80 4.80
5/8 2-4 1-1/4 10.0 8.30 5.90
3/4 2-9 1-1/2 15.0 12.0 8.40
7/8 3-3 1-1/2 20.0 16.0 11.0
1 3-6 1-3/4 26.0 21.0 15.0
1-1/8 4-0 2 31.0 26.0 18.0
1-1/4 4-6 2-1/4 38.0 31.0 22.0
1-3/8 5-0 2-3/4 46.0 38.0 27.0
1-1/2 5-6 2-3/4 55.0 45.0 32.0
1-5/8 6-0 2-3/4 63.0 52.0 37.0
1-3/4 6-6 3 74.0 60.0 42.0
2 8-0 3-1/2 95.0 78.0 55.0
2-1/4 8-9 4 116.0 94.0 67.0
2-1/2 10 - 0 4-1/2 141.0 115.0 82.0
300FL 300CT
3 leg – Oblong link with heavy 3 leg – Oblong link with heavy
duty thimbles on top and Flemish duty thimbles on top and Crescent
Loops on bottom. Thimble on bottom.
300HT 300OS
thimbles on top and Heavy Duty thimbles on top and Open Swage
Thimbles on bottom. Socket on bottom.
300EH 300CS
3 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty 3 leg – Oblong link with heavy
thimbles on top and Eye Hoist duty thimbles on top and Closed
Hooks Safety Latches on bottom. Swage Socket on bottom.
300SPA 300BAS
thimbles on top and Screw Pin An- thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor
chor Shackle on bottom. Shackle on bottom.
No. 400 Series MINIMUM ALLOY RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC
LENGTH OBLONG
(SL) LINKS
Slings are 4-leg all-pur- DIAMETER OF OF SLING DIAMETER
WIRE ROPE (IN) (FT - IN) (IN) 60° 45° 30°
pose bridles, used both for
balanced and unbalanced 1/4 1-3 1/2 2.20 1.80 1.30
loads and for heavier loads 5/16 1-6 3/4 3.50 2.80 2.00
where design calls for 3/8 1-8 1 5.00 4.10 2.90
more distribution of weight 7/16 1 - 10 1 6.70 5.50 3.90
by the use of attachment at 1/2 2-0 1-1/4 8.80 7.10 5.10
four points. 9/16 2-2 1-1/4 11.0 9.00 6.40

5/8 2-4 1-1/4 14.0 11.0 7.80
3/4 2-9 1-3/4 19.0 16.0 11.0
7/8 3-3 1-3/4 26.0 21.0 15.0
1 3-6 2-1/4 34.0 28.0 20.0
1-1/8 4-0 2-3/4 42.0 34.0 24.0
1-1/4 4-6 2-3/4 51.0 42.0 30.0
1-3/8 5-0 3-1/4 62.0 50.0 36.0
1-1/2 5-6 3-3/4 73.0 60.0 42.0
1-5/8 6-0 3-3/4 85.0 69.0 49.0
1-3/4 6-6 4-1/2 98.0 80.0 57.0
2 8-0 4-1/2 127.0 104.0 73.0
2-1/4 8-9 CALL 154.0 126.0 89.0
2-1/2 10 - 0 CALL 188.0 154.0 109.0
400FL 400CT
4 leg – Oblong link with heavy
duty thimbles on top and Crescent
duty thimbles on top and Flemish
Thimble on bottom.
Loops on bottom.
400HT 400OS
4 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty
thimbles on top and Open Swage
thimbles on top and Heavy Duty
Socket on bottom.
Thimbles on bottom.
400EH 400CS
duty thimbles on top and Closed
thimbles on top and Eye Hoist
Swage Socket on bottom.
Hooks Safety Latches on bottom.
400SPA 400BAS
thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor
thimbles on top and Screw Pin An-
Shackle on bottom.
chor Shackle on bottom.

Wire Rope Bridle End Fittings
PERTINENT DIMENSIONS FOR END FITTINGS FOR NO. 200, 300 & 400 SERIES SLINGS
DIA STANDARD HEAVY DUTY ALLOY CARBON 1/2 THIMBLE INSIDE OPEN CLOSED
OF LOOP INSIDE THIMBLE INSIDE HOOK SHACKLE SIZE (IN) LOOP SIZE (TONS) SWAGE SOCKET SWAGE SOCKET
WIRE SIZE JAW HEAD
ROPE W L W L (TONS) FOR FOR W L W OPENING HOLE DIA THICKNESS
(IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) IPS & EIPS IPS EIPS (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN)
6 x 19 - WITH IWRC
1/4 2 4 7/8 1-5/8 1 5/16 5/16 – – 11/16 11/16 3/4 1/2
5/16 2-1/2 5 1-1/16 1-7/8 1 3/8 3/8 – – 13/16 13/16 7/8 11/16
3/8 3 6 1-1/8 2-1/8 1-1/2 7/16 7/16 2 4 13/16 13/16 7/8 11/16
7/16 3-1/2 7 1-1/4 2-3/8 2 1/2 1/2 2-1/4 5 1 1 1-1/16 7/8
1/2 4 8 1-1/2 2-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 2-1/4 5-1/2 1 1 1-1/16 7/8
9/16 4-1/2 9 1-1/2 2-3/4 5 5/8 5/8 2-1/4 5-1/2 1-3/16 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/8
5/8 5 10 1-3/4 3-1/4 5 3/4 3/4 3-1/4 7 1-3/16 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-1/8
3/4 6 12 2 3-3/4 7 7/8 7/8 3-1/4 9 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 1-5/16
7/8 7 14 2-1/4 4-1/4 11 1 1 4-1/2 10-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-11/16 1-1/2
1 8 16 2-1/2 4-1/2 11 1-1/4 1-1/8 4-1/2 12 2 2 2-1/16 1-3/4
1-1/8 9 18 2-7/8 5-1/8 15 1-1/4 1-1/4 4-5/8 13-1/2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-5/16 2
6 x 37 - WITH IWRC
1-1/4 10 20 2-7/8 5-1/8 15 1-3/8 1-3/8 5-1/2 15 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-9/16 2-1/4
1-3/8 11 22 3-1/2 6-1/4 22 1-1/2 1-1/2 6 17 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-9/16 2-1/4
1-1/2 12 24 3-1/2 6-1/4 22 1-3/4 1-3/4 6-1/2 18 2-3/4 3 2-16/16 2-1/2
1-5/8 13 26 4 8 30 1-3/4 2 6-1/2 18 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-9/16 3
1-3/4 14 28 4-1/2 9 30 2 2-1/2 7 21-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-9/16 3
2 16 32 6 12 37 2-1/2 2-1/2 7 24-1/2 3-3/4 4 3-16/16 3-1/4
2-1/4 18 36 7 14 45 2-1/2 3 8-1/2 25-12 4-1/4 4-1/4 4-5/16 4
2-1/2 20 40 – – 60 3 3 8-1/2 26-1/2 4-1/4 4-1/4 4-5/16 4
2-3/4 22 44 – – – 3 3 10 30 – – – –
3 24 48 – – – 3 3-1/2 10 32 – – – –
3-1/4 – – – – – 3-1/2 3-1/2 – – – – – –
3-1/2 – – – – – 3-1/2 4 – – – – – –
3-3/4 – – – – – 4 4 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Chain Sling Assembly
GRADE 80 AND 100 CHAIN SLING ASSEMBLY

BASIC TYPES OF CHAIN SLINGS
Basic types of chain slings are designated throughout the industry by the following symbols:
First Symbol (basic type):
S - Single chain sling with master link and hook, or hook at each end.
C - Choker chain sling with master link on each end; no hooks.
D - Double chain sling with standard master link and hooks.
T - Triple chain sling with standard master link and hooks.
Q - Quadruple chain sling with master link and hooks.
Second Symbol (type of master link or end link):
O - Oblong master link – Recommended standard for all types.
P - Pear shaped master link – Available on request.
Third Symbol (type of hook):
S - Sling hook G - Grab hook
F - Foundry hook L - Latchlok hook
Sling tags are coded with numerals 1 through 4 to reflect number
of branches in sling. Additional coding is defined as follows:
AS - Adjustable sling SB - Single Basket
ES - Endless single ED - Endless double
SAL - Single adjustable loop DAL - Double adjustable loop Type TOS
AD - Adjustable double DB - Double basket
HOW TO SELECT & ORDER THE PROPER CHAIN SLING

1. Determine the weight and configuration of the load(s) to be lifted.
2. Determine the type of chain sling required, according to weight MASTER
OBLONG
and configuration. LINK
3. Determine the size of the body chain according to the working load
limits. Be sure to take into consideration the effect of the required angle.
IRED
Working Load Limit: The working load limit is the maximum load in
REQU
pounds which should ever be applied to chain, even when chain is

new, and when load is uniformly applied in direct tension to a straight
H AS
length of chain.
REAC
SLING HOOK
4. Determine the reach required to give the desired angle. The reach is
measured from the upper bearing surface of the master link to the
bearing surface of the lower attachment. If chain slings are to be used ANGLE
in pairs & are to be matched for reach, please indicate when ordering.
5. Be sure to specify type, size and reach when ordering chain slings. For
specifications on additional hooks, attachments and accessories, refer
to the following pages.
Note: Angle to the load on multiple leg slings will be 60° or greater as
LOAD
long as the distance between lifting eyes of load is NOT greater than
reach shown on Identification Tag.

Alloy Chain Slings
GRADE 80 ALLOY SINGLE CHAIN SLINGS

A higher strength heat treated alloy steel chain, Before shipment, all Grade 80 chain slings undergo
Grade 80 Alloy chain is primarily used as a sling com- a succession of demanding quality control checks.
ponent for overhead lifting, but can be used in rigging Every sling is proof tested, registered and guaranteed
and tie down applications where a lighter weight high for one year to be free from defects in materials and
strength chain is desirable. Recommended for over- workmanship. A durable metal tag attached to the
head lifting by NACM, ANSI, & OSHA. sling permanently identifies the grade, type, working
Grade 80 Alloy chain slings and attachments are load limit (at a specific angle of lift) and registration
manufactured from special analysis alloy steel, number of the sling.
engineered for a superior combination of strength, Chain slings are used primarily for overhead lifting
lightness & durability. and are generally used in conjunction with a crane or
All Grade 80 chain and attachments are black finish some type of lifting device. Standard sling configura-
&/or color coded orange for easy, permanent iden- tions consist of chain branches which are affixed on
tification. The chain is embossed with the grade & one end to a master link or ring with some type of at-
trace code. tachment, usually a hook, affixed to the opposite end.
GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN AND ATTACHMENTS CONVERSION TABLE

CHAIN SIZE HOOK SIZE DESIGNATION AND MARKINGS
FRACTION (IN) DECIMAL (IN) METRIC (MM) SLING CRADLE GRAB FLAT GRAB FOUNDRY LATCHLOK
7/32 .218 5.5 HA22 10M 10M – –
9/32 .281 7.0 HA220 HA9/32 HA1 HA498 9/32
3/8 .394 10.0 HA250 HA3/8 HA3 HA499 3/8
1/2 .512 13.0 HA280 HA1/2 HA5 HA500 1/2
5/8 .630 16.0 HA290 HA5/8 HA6 HA501 5/8
3/4 .787 20.0 HA300 HA3/4 HA7 HA502 3/4
7/8 .875 22.0 HA320 HA7/8 HA8 HA503 –
1 1.024 26.0 HA330 HA1 HA9 HA504 –
1-1/4 1.260 32.0 HA350 HA1-1/4 HA11 HA505 –
GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN SIZES AND WORKING LOAD LIMITS

90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°
NOMINAL APPROX. APPROX.

WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS)
DIMENSIONS (IN) NO. WEIGHT
CHAIN SIZE PRODUCT SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE & QUAD INSIDE INSIDE LINKS PER 100 FT
(IN) (MM) CODE 90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30° LENGTH WIDTH PER FT (LBS)
7/32 5.5 607020 2,100 3,600 3,000 2,100 5,450 4,450 3,150 .671 .296 17.9 44.7
9/32 7.0 607028 3,500 6,100 4,900 3,500 9,100 7,400 5,200 .868 .395 13.8 74.2
3/8 10.0 607037 7,100 12,300 10,000 7,100 18,400 15,100 10,600 1.222 .572 9.8 145.9
1/2 13.0 607050 12,000 20,800 17,000 12,000 31,200 25,500 18,000 1.101 .720 8.5 257.7
5/8 16.0 607062 18,100 31,300 25,600 18,100 47,000 38,400 27,100 1.733 .854 6.9 387.3
3/4 20.0 607075 28,300 49,000 40,000 28,300 73,500 60,000 42,400 2.160 1.052 5.5 622.0
7/8 22.0 607087 34,200 59,200 48,400 34,200 88,900 72,500 51,300 2.250 1.137 5.3 776.4
1 26.0 607101 47,700 82,600 67,400 47,700 123,900 101,200 71,500 2.664 1.348 4.5 995.4
1-1/4 32.0 607128 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300 187,800 153,400 108,400 3.250 1.656 3.7 1,570.9
Alloy Chain Slings
CARE, USE AND INSPECTION
The life & strength of Alloy chain slings depends on proper • Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links
inspection, maintenance and use. For additional info, refer or attachments, especially spread in throat opening
to ANSI B30.9 & OSHA 1920.184. of hooks.
CARE • Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment
Chain requires careful storage & regular maintenance. showing any of the conditions listed here
• Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place. to indicate rejection; remove from service until
• To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage. properly repaired.
• Do not heat Alloy chain; this will alter its thermal treatment WEAR ALLOWANCES OF ALLOY CHAIN
• Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact Measure cross section at link ends to determine wear. If chain
Hanes for special requirements. is worn to less than the minimum allowable thickness, remove
USE from service.
To protect both operators and materials, observe these MAXIMUM MINIMUM THICKNESS
ALLOWABLE ALLOWABLE AT LINK
precautions when using chain slings: MM INCHES WEAR (INCHES) ENDS (INCHES)*
• Before use, inspect chain and attachments following the 5.5 7/32 2/64 (.031) 12/64 (.189)
instructions under “Inspection” below.
7.0 9/32 2/64 (.031) 16/64 (.239)
• Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors
10.0 3/8 3/64 (.047) 21/64 (.342)
listed here can reduce the load the chain will hold:
• Acceleration in rate of load to application – 13.0 1/2 4/64 (.062) 28/64 (.443)
can produce dangerous overloading. 16.0 5/8 5/64 (.078) 35/64 (.546)
• Variation in the angle of the load to the sling 20.0 3/4 6/64 (.094) 42/64 (.687)
– as the angle decreases, the working load 22.0 7/8 8/64 (.125) 48/64 (.750)
of the sling will increase. 26.0 1 9/64 (.140) 53/64 (.887)
• Twisting, knotting or kinking – subjects links
32.0 1-1/4 10/64 (.156) 70/64 (1.09)
to unusual loading, decreasing the working
load of the sling. USE OF CHAIN UNDER HEAT CONDITIONS
• Use for purposes other than those for which When the chain itself is heated to temperatures shown here,
slings are intended – can reduce the working
working load limits should be reduced as indicated.
load of the sling.
• Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks. REDUCTION IN PERMANENT
TEMPERATURE WORKING LOAD LIMIT1 REDUCTION IN WORKING
• Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not OF CHAIN WHILE HEATED LOAD LIMIT2
support load. 500°F 25% 5%
• Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering.
600°F 30% 15%
• Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads.
• Use pads around sharp corners. 700°F 40% 20%
• Do not drop load on chains. 800°F 50% 25%
• Match the size & working load limit of attachments such 900°F 60% 30%
as hooks or rings to the size & WLL of the chain. 1000°F 70% 35%
• For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain
and attachments (grade 80 or 100). 1
While chain is at temperature shown in first column.
INSPECTION 2
When chain is used at room temperature after having been
It is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and to heated to temperatures shown in first column.
keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow this guide for CERTIFICATE OF TEST AND IDENTIFICATION
such an inspection system. The identification tag found on the master coupling link
• Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/ of each chain sling contains this information:
non-causic solvent so that marks, nicks, wear • Grade • Size
and other defects are visible. • Reach • Type
• Inspect each link for these conditions: • Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift)
• Twists or bends. • Serial number
• Nicks or gouges.
• Excessive wear at bearing points.
• Stretch.

Alloy Chain Sling Specifications
SINGLE
CHAIN
SLINGS
REACH
TYPE SOG TYPE SOG TYPE SOF TYPE SOS TYPE SOL TYPE SOO
GRAB HOOK CLEVLOCK FOUNDRY SLING LATCHLOK OBLONG
GRAB HOOK HOOK HOOK HOOK
DOUBLE
CHAIN
SLINGS
REACH
SINGLE TYPE DOS TYPE DOG TYPE DOF TYPE DOS TYPE DOG
BASKET CLEVLOK CLEVLOK FOUNDRY GRAB HOOK
SLING HOOK GRAB HOOK HOOK
TRIPLE
& QUAD
CHAIN
H
AC
SLINGS
RE
TYPE TOS TYPE OOS DOUBLE BASKET
ADJUSTABLE CHAIN SLINGS

STYLE A STYLE B
H
REAC
TYPE ASOSA TYPE ADOSA TYPE SAL A TYPE ASOAB TYPE ADOSB TYPE SAL B
Chain Slings - Single Types S & C
GRADE 80 SINGLE ALLOY CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C
WORKING OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX WT

CHAIN SIZE WORKING MASTER DIMENSIONS (IN) (LBS)
LOAD LIMIT LINK DIAMETER INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH TYPE SOS
(IN) (MM) (LBS)* NUMBER MATERIAL A B C 5' REACH
7/32 5.5 2,100 HA40 13/32 1-1/2 3 4
9/32 7 3,500 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 5

3/8 10 7,100 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 10
1/2 13 12,000 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 18
5/8 16 18,100 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 25
3/4 20 28,300 HA125 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 38
7/8 22 34,200 HA150 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 34
1 26 47,700 HA175 1-3/4 6 12 76
1-1/4 32 72,300 HA200 2 7 14 116
A C
SOS SOG SOF SOL SOO

REACH
SLING GRAB FOUNDRY LATCHLOK OBLONG

HOOK HOOK HOOK
GRADE 100 SINGLE ALLOY CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C

WORKING OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX WT
CHAIN SIZE WORKING MASTER DIMENSIONS (IN) (LBS)
LOAD LIMIT LINK DIAMETER INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH TYPE SOS
(IN) (MM) (LBS)* NUMBER MATERIAL A B C 5' REACH
7/32 5.5 2,700 HA40 13/32 1-1/2 3 4
9/32 7 4,300 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 5
3/8 10 8,800 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 10
1/2 13 15,000 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 18
5/8 16 22,600 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 25
3/4 20 35,300 HA125 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 38
7/8 22 42,700 HA150 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 34
1 26 59,700 HA175 1-3/4 6 12 76

Chain Slings - Grade 80 Alloy
DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D
B
A C
DOS DOG DOF DOL
REACH
SLING GRAB FOUNDRY LATCHLOK
HOOKS HOOKS HOOKS HOOKS
WORKING OBLONG MASTER LINK

LOAD LIMIT APPROX WT
CHAIN SIZE (LBS)* MASTER DIMENSIONS (IN) (LBS)
LINK DIAMETER INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE TYPE DOS
(IN) (MM) 60° 45° 30° NUMBER MATERIAL A B LENGTH C 5' REACH
7/32 5.5 3,600 3,000 2,100 HA40 13/32 1-1/2 3 8
9/32 7 6,100 4,900 3,500 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 9
3/8 10 12,300 10,000 7,100 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 18
1/2 13 20,800 17,000 12,000 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 31
5/8 16 31,300 25,600 18,100 HA125 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 49
3/4 20 49,000 40,000 28,300 HA150 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 71
7/8 22 59,200 48,400 34,200 HA175 1-3/4 6 12 98
1 26 82,600 67,400 47,700 HA200 2 7 14 132
1-1/4 32 125,200 102,200 72,300 HA225 2-1/4 8 16 221
TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q

Safety note: A quad branch chain sling B B
usually does not sustain loads with
A C TOS A C
even distribution to its four branches, QOS
SLING SLING
especially when loads are of rigid struc-
H
H
AC
AC
HOOKS HOOKS
ture. Therefore, maximum working load
RE
RE
limits are set at the same values as for

triple branch chain slings of equal qual-
ity and size and used with branches at
the same angle of inclination.
OBLONG MASTER LINK

APPROX WT
CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)* MASTER DIMENSIONS (IN) (LBS)
LINK DIAMETER INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE TYPE TOS TYPE QOS 5'
(IN) (MM) 60° 45° 30° NUMBER MATERIAL A B LENGTH C 5' REACH REACH
7/32 5.5 5,450 4,450 3,150 HA50-SA 1/2 2-1/2 5 12 16
9/32 7 9,100 7,400 5,200 HA75-SA 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 14 18
3/8 10 18,400 15,100 10,600 HA100-SA 1 3-1/2 7 28 36
1/2 13 31,200 25,500 18,000 HA125-SA 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 50 62
5/8 16 47,000 38,400 27,100 HA150-SA 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 79 97
3/4 20 73,500 60,000 42,400 HA175-SA 1-3/4 6 12 112 137
7/8 22 88,900 72,500 51,300 HA200-SA 2 7 14 155 188
1 26 123,900 101,200 71,500 HA225-SA 2-1/4 8 16 215 260
1-1/4 32 187,800 153,400 108,400 HA275-SA 2-3/4 9 16 348 421
Chain Slings - Grade 100 Alloy
DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D

B
A C
DOS DOG DOF DOL
REACH
SLING GRAB FOUNDRY LATCHLOK
HOOKS HOOKS HOOKS HOOKS
OBLONG MASTER LINK

APPROX WT
LINK DIAMETER INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE TYPE DOS
(IN) (MM) 60° 45° 30° NUMBER MATERIAL A B LENGTH C 5' REACH
7/32 5.5 4,700 3,800 2,700 555231 13/32 1-1/2 3 8
9/32 7 7,400 6,100 4,300 555232 1/2 2-1/2 5 9
3/8 10 15,200 12,400 8,800 555235 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 18
1/2 13 26,000 21,200 15,000 555238 1 3-1/2 7 31
5/8 16 39,100 32,000 22,600 555240 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 49
3/4 20 61,100 49,900 35,300 555243 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 71
TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q

Safety note: A quad branch chain
sling usually does not sustain loads B B
with even distribution to its four A C
A C TOS QOS
branches, especially when loads are SLING SLING
H
of rigid structure. Therefore, max-

AC
AC
HOOKS HOOKS
RE
RE
imum working load limits are set at

the same values as for triple branch
chain slings of equal quality and size
and used with branches at the same
angle of inclination.
OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX WT
LINK DIAMETER INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE TYPE TOS TYPE QOS 5'
(IN) (MM) 60° 45° 30° NUMBER MATERIAL A B LENGTH C 5' REACH REACH
7/32 5.5 7,000 5,700 4,000 HA50-SA 1/2 2-1/2 5 12 16
9/32 7 11,200 9,100 6,400 HA75-SA 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 14 18
3/8 10 22,900 18,700 13,200 HA100-SA 1 3-1/2 7 28 36
1/2 13 39,000 31,800 22,500 HA125-SA 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 50 62
5/8 16 58,700 47,900 33,900 HA150-SA 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 79 97
3/4 20 91,700 74,900 53,000 HA175-SA 1-3/4 6 12 112 137

Chain Slings Adjustable
Chain Saddle Rings
ADJUSTABLE CHAIN SLINGS

STYLE A STYLE B
Grab Hooks can be added to a single, double,

triple, or quad chain sling to make one or all
12" of chain of the legs adjustable. The Style A Adjustable
Sling features grab hooks attached directly
to the mechanical couplers at the master link
to keep them out of the way. The Style B Ad-
justable Sling adds approximately 12″ of chain
between the master link and the grab hook ad-
justers to allow for ease of use.
CHAIN SADDLE RINGS

United States Patent #4,241,575
Canadian Patent #1,086,510 British Patent #2,029,370
Chain Saddle Rings give a chain bridle length adjustment capabilities in each leg. They
aid the rigger in placing the lifting point over the center of gravity so the load will lift in
a level manner. Chain Saddle Rings allow for many configurations, making them more
versitile than any standard chain sling.
DOUBLE SLING TRIPLE AND QUADRUPLE SLING

SINGLE
BRANCH
CHAIN SLING 90 CHAIN
SIZE DEGREE SIZE
SYSTEM INCHES LOADING 60° 45° 30° INCHES 60° 45° 30°
10 9/32 4,300 7,400 6,100 4,300 9/32 11,200 9,100 6,400
10 3/8 8,800 15,200 12,400 8,800 3/8 22,800 18,600 13,200
10 1/2 15,000 26,000 21,200 15,000 1/2 39,000 31,800 22,500
10 5/8 22,600 39,100 32,000 22,600 5/8 58,700 47,900 33,900
10 3/4 35,300 61,100 49,900 35,300 3/4 91,700 74,900 53,000
10 7/8 42,700 74,000 60,400 42,700 7/8 110,900 90,600 64,000
8 1 47,700 82,600 67,400 47,700 1 123,900 101,200 71,500
8 1-1/4 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300 1-1/4 187,800 153,400 108,400
8 1-1/2 80,000 138,600 113,100 80,000 1-1/2 — — —
Design Factor is 4:1. Rated loads are in pounds.
Inspect before each use. Follow OSHA, ANSI B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Use by untrained persons is
! WARNING hazardous. Improper use will result in serious injury or death. Do not exceed rated capacity. This product will
fail if damaged, abused, misused or improperly maintained.
Wire Mesh Slings
LIKE
A GIANT
HAND...
STRONG, GENTLE GRIP – SAFE, SURE BALANCE MAKES
GRIPPER WOVEN
WIRE
SLINGS
BEST FOR FAST, SAFE, EASY LIFTS
Safer than wire rope, gentle as canvas, flexible as manila... that’s only a part of the story of the Gripper Sling
– the ultimate in versatile materials handling tools. Like a giant hand, Gripper Slings grasp and hold the load
in a strong, gentle grip when used in a choke hitch... safely and gently cradle it on a broad, flat surface in a
basket hitch.
Whatever the size or shape of the load you handle – rounds, flats, hexes or squares--Gripper Slings can
reduce load damage in production or shipping, provide greater safety for load and operator, cut rigging and
unhitching time and eliminate the need for two-legged slings. Here’s how –
NO LOAD DAMAGE – The unique woven wire construction of Gripper Slings consists of a series of smooth,
spiral wires joined together across the body of the sling. This gives the sling complete flexibility, enabling it
to bend easily around even irregularly shaped loads and eliminating the danger of gouging or marring edges
of the load members. For turned or ground surfaces, PVS or Neoprene-covered slings assure extremely
delicate handling.
SAFE – The wide bearing surface of the Gripper Sling provides better load balance and gripping power...
less crushing effect when handling hollow tubing or similar parts. Its instant gripping action means there’s
no slipping of shifting when load is applied. All metal construction means there’s no core to rot, nothing to
tear suddenly. Gripper Slings will not whip, kink or tangle, and there are no loose strands to snag load or
operator. As for rigging and hitching, a single man can easily do the job.
STRONG – Thousands of spiral wire loops in a transverse construction give Gripper Slings exceptionally
long life. Should a single wire break, the slack is absorbed by the rest of the sling. Gripper Slings are
pretested and guaranteed to meet load specifications. Standard lengths and widths with capacities up to
100,000 lbs. are available. Special sizes and corrosion resistant alloys available on request.

Wire Mesh Specifications
HOW TO SELECT PROPER SLING WIDTH

First, determine the hitch you will use for the gauge selected. Then read down the column under the selected
hitch and gauge to the load weight you wish to lift. Then read across to the first column at left to find sling width
required. Example: You wish to use a G-43 sling in a choke hitch to lift 6,400 pounds. Sling width required is 8".
EFFECT OF ANGLE ON RATED

CAPACITIES IN BASKET HITCH
60° 45° 30°

30° 60°
45°
NOMINAL
WIDTH OF VERTICAL 30° VERT. 45° VERT. 60° VERT.
SLING (IN) CHOKER BASKET 60° HORZ. 45° HORZ. 30° HORZ.
2 1,600 3,200 2,700 2,000 1,600

3 3,000 6,000 5,100 3,800 2,800
4 4,400 8,800 7,480 5,600 4,400
6 6,600 13,200 11,225 8,400 6,600
G-35 8 8,800 17,600 15,000 11,250 8,800

HEAVY 10 11,000 22,000 18,700 14,000 11,000
DUTY 12 13,200 26,400 22,440 16,800 13,200
14 15,400 30,800 26,180 19,600 15,400
16 17,600 35,200 29,920 22,400 17,600
18 19,800 39,600 33,660 25,200 19,800
20 22,000 44,000 37,400 28,000 22,000
2 1,450 2,900 2,320 1,740 1,450
3 2,175 4,350 3,700 2,700 2,175
4 2,900 5,800 4,900 3,670 2,900
6 4,800 9,600 8,150 6,100 4,800
G-43 8 6,400 12,800 10,880 8,100 6,400
MED. 10 8,000 16,000 13,600 10,200 8,000
DUTY 12 9,600 19,200 16,300 12,000 9,600
14 11,200 22,400 19,000 14,000 11,200
16 12,800 25,600 21,700 16,200 12,800
18 13,500 27,000 22,900 17,000 13,500
20 15,000 30,000 25,500 19,000 15,000
2 900 1,800 1,600 1,300 900
3 1,400 2,800 2,400 2,000 1,400
4 2,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000
6 3,000 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000
G-59 8 4,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,000
LIGHT 10 5,000 10,000 8,600 7,100 5,000
DUTY 12 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000
14 7,000 14,000 12,100 9,900 7,000
16 8,000 16,000 13,900 11,300 8,000
18 9,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9,000
20 10,000 20,000 17,300 14,100 10,000
Nylon Web Slings
BASIC SLING TYPES HITCHES

Type 1 TC Slings
Slings with a triangle on one
end and a slotted triangle
(the choker) on the other end.
Choice of lightweight alumi-
num or durable steel fittings.
Type 2 TT Slings
Slings with a triangle at both
ends. Used in vertical and
basket hitches only. Choice of
lightweight aluminum or dura-
ble steel fittings.
Type 3 EE Slings
Slings with an eye on both
ends. Choice of straight or
tapered eyes (tapered eye are
standard on 2" and larger web-
widths).
Type 4 EE Slings
Same basic type as Type 3 but
eyes are twisted to a right an-
gle to the sling body. (Tapered
eye are standard on 2" & larger
web-widths).
Type 5 EN Slings
Endless slings, sometimes
also referred to as grommet
slings. The most versatile sling.
Type 6 RE Slings
Return eye sling, also referred
to as reversed eye sling. Sling
body is formed by 2 parts of
webbing sewn side by side us-
ing either a cordura tube or web
in the finished width.
from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light,
sunlight & temperature above 194° F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.

Nylon Web Sling Capacities
• Resistant to Alkalies.
• Untreated – approx. 6% stretch; treated – approx. 10% stretch at rated capacity.
• Temperature limits are listed on Warning Labels.
• Contains red warning yarns.
• Subject to damage of edges.
Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width.
WEB CODE RATED CAPACITIES (LBS)

WIDTH (IN) NUMBER VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET
SINGLE PLY SLINGS
2 TC1-802 3,200 2,400 6,400
TYPE 1 SLINGS 3 TC1-803 4,800 3,600 9,600
CHOKER & BASKET HITCH 4 TC1-804 6,400 4,800 12,800
TRIANGLE & CHOKER FITTINGS 5 TC1-805 8,000 6,000 16,000
6 TC1-806 9,600 7,200 19,200
8 TC1-808 12,800 9,600 25,600
10 TC1-810 16,000 12,000 32,000
12 TC1-812 19,200 14,400 38,400
16 TC1-816 25,500 19,200 51,000
18 TC1-818 28,700 21,000 57,400
20 TC1-820 32,000 24,000 64,000
24 TC1-824 38,400 28,800 76,800
TWO PLY SLINGS
2 TC2-802 6,400 4,800 12,800
3 TC2-803 8,600 6,500 17,200
4 TC2-804 11,500 8,600 23,000
5 TC2-805 14,000 10,500 28,000
6 TC2-806 16,800 12,600 33,600
8 TC2-808 22,400 16,800 44,800
10 TC2-810 28,000 21,000 56,000
12 TC2-812 33,600 25,200 67,200
16 TC2-816 44,800 33,600 89,600
18 TC2-818 50,400 37,800 100,800
20 TC2-820 56,000 42,000 112,000
24 TC2-824 67,200 50,400 134,400
SINGLE PLY SLINGS
2 TT1-802 3,200 – 6,400
TYPE 2 SLINGS 3 TT1-803 4,800 – 9,600
BASKET & VERTICAL 4 TT1-804 6,400 – 12,800
HITCHES ONLY 5 TT1-805 8,000 – 16,000
6 TT1-806 9,600 – 19,200
Type 1 Sling TWO TRIANGLE FITTINGS 8 TT1-808 12,800 – 25,600 Type 2 Sling
10 TT1-810 16,000 – 32,000
12 TT1-812 19,200 – 38,400
16 TT1-816 25,500 – 51,000
18 TT1-818 28,700 – 57,400
20 TT1-820 32,000 – 64,000
24 TT1-824 38,400 – 76,800
TWO PLY SLINGS
2 TT2-802 6,400 – 12,800
3 TT2-803 8,600 – 17,200
4 TT2-804 11,500 – 23,000
5 TT2-805 14,000 – 28,000
6 TT2-806 16,800 – 33,600
8 TT2-808 22,400 – 44,800
10 TT2-810 28,000 – 56,000
12 TT2-812 33,600 – 67,200
16 TT2-816 44,800 – 89,600
18 TT2-818 50,400 – 100,800
20 TT2-820 56,000 – 112,000
24 TT2-824 67,200 – 134,400
Nylon Web Sling Capacities
Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width.
WEB CODE RATED CAPACITIES (LBS)

WIDTH (IN) NUMBER VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET
SINGLE PLY SLINGS
1 EE1-801 1,600 1,200 3,200
2 EE1-802 3,200 2,400 6,400
TYPE 3 & 4 SLINGS 3 EE1-803 4,800 3,600 9,600
FLAT OR TWISTED EYES 4 EE1-804 6,400 4,800 12,800
5 EE1-805 8,000 6,000 16,000
VERTICAL, CHOKER, BASKET
6 EE1-806 9,600 7,200 19,200
HITCHES
8 EE1-808 12,800 9,600 25,600
10 EE1-810 16,000 12,000 32,000
12 EE1-812 19,200 14,400 38,400
TWO PLY SLINGS
1 EE2-801 3,200 2,400 6,400
2 EE2-802 6,400 4,800 12,800
3 EE2-803 8,600 6,500 17,200
4 EE2-804 11,500 8,600 23,000
5 EE2-805 13,600 10,200 27,200
6 EE2-806 16,300 12,200 32,600
8 EE2-808 19,200 14,400 38,400
10 EE2-810 22,400 16,800 44,800
12 EE2-812 26,900 20,100 53,800
THREE PLY SLINGS
1 EE3-801 4,100 3,100 8,200
2 EE3-802 8,300 6,200 16,600
3 EE3-803 12,500 9,300 25,000
4 EE3-804 16,000 12,000 32,000
5 EE3-805 19,200 14,400 38,400
6 EE3-806 23,000 17,200 46,000
8 EE3-808 30,700 23,000 61,400
10 EE3-810 36,800 27,600 73,600
12 EE3-812 44,000 33,000 88,000
FOUR PLY SLINGS
1 EE4-801 5,000 3,800 10,000
2 EE4-802 10,000 7,500 20,000
3 EE4-803 14,900 11,100 29,800
4 EE4-804 19,800 14,800 39,600
5 EE4-805 24,800 18,600 49,600
6 EE4-806 29,800 22,300 59,600
Type 3 Flat 8 EE4-808 39,700 29,700 79,400 Type 4 Twisted
10 EE4-810 49,600 37,200 99,200
Eye Sling Eye Sling
12 EE4-812 59,500 44,600 119,000
SINGLE PLY SLINGS
1 EN1-801 3,200 2,500 6,400
TYPE 5 SLINGS 2 EN1-802 6,400 5,000 12,800
VERTICAL, CHOKER, BASKET
HITCHES 3 EN1-803 8,600 6,900 17,200
ENDLESS OR GROMMET TYPE 4 EN1-804 11,500 9,200 23,000
5 EN1-805 13,600 10,900 27,200
6 EN1-806 16,300 13,000 32,600
TWO PLY SLINGS
1 EN2-801 6,200 4,900 12,400
2 EN2-802 12,200 9,800 24,400
3 EN2-803 16,300 13,000 32,600
4 EN2-804 20,700 16,500 41,400
5 EN2-805 24,500 19,600 49,000
6 EN2-806 28,600 23,000 57,200

Wide Lift Nylon Slings
WIDE LIFT SLINGS
Attached Eye Wide-Lift For VERTICAL

BODY BASKET HITCH EYE EYE MAT’L.
Light, Bulky Loads WIDTH CAPACITY LENGH WIDTH
that require wider bearing areas and (IN) CODE (LBS) (IN) (IN)
some balance attributes. Eyes are ATTACHED EYE WIDE-LIFT
made from separate material – WLA1 6 WLA1-806 5,000 6 1

8 WLA1-808 5,000 8 1
is 1 ply – WLA2 is 2 ply – both sewn to 10 WLA1-810 5,000 10 1
1 PLY
sling body. Body is single ply for both 1 EYE 12 WLA1-812 5,000 12 1
16 WLA1-816 10,000 14 2
and 2 ply eyes. 20 WLA1-820 10,000 16 2
24 WLA1-824 10,000 20 2
6 WLA2-806 10,000 10 1
8 WLA2-808 10,000 10 1
10 WLA2-810 10,000 12 1
2 PLY
EYE 12 WLA2-812 10,000 12 1
16 WLA2-816 18,000 12 2
20 WLA2-820 18,000 18 2
24 WLA2-824 18,000 18 2
Continuous Eye Wide-Lift for VERTICAL

Heavy Loads - BODY BASKET EYE EYE MATL
WIDTH HITCH CAPACITY LENGTH WIDTH
Constructed from one endless sling with (IN) CODE (LBS) (IN) (IN)
the two body lengths butted and joined
CONTINUOUS EYE WIDE-LIFT
side by side. Stiffener webbing is used 6 WL1-806 15,400 9 1-1/2
at the base of the eyes to deter the body 8 WL1-808 20,400 12 2
webbing from folding down the middle. 10 WL1-810 25,600 15 2-1/2
1 PLY 12 WL1-812 30,800 18 2
16 WL1-816 38,000 24 2-3/4
20 WL1-820 45,000 30 3-1/2
24 WL1-824 52,000 36 4
6 WL2-806 28,600 9 1-1/2
8 WL2-808 38,000 12 2
12 WL2-812 57,200 18 3
2 PLY
16 WL2-816 75,000 24 4
20 WL2-820 90,000 30 5
24 WL2-824 110,000 36 8
Reversed Eye Slings
Polyester Roundslings
REVERSED EYE (RE) SLINGS - TYPE 6
Reversed Eye Sling is a modified endless sling. Cordura wear pads offer added protection on the body and
eyes of the sling. This extra Cordura webbing offers superior abrasion resistance and sling life.
SLING SLING EYE

VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET WIDTH THICKNESS LENGTH
CODE (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (IN) (IN) (IN)
HEAVY DUTY WEB
RE1-802 4,500 3,600 9,000 2 5/16 9
1 PLY RE1-804 7,700 6,200 15,400 4 5/16 15
RE1-806 11,000 8,800 22,000 6 5/16 15
RE2-802 6,500 5,200 13,000 2 1/2 9
2 PLY RE2-804 13,000 10,400 26,000 4 1/2 15
RE2-806 20,000 16,000 40,000 6 1/2 15
RE3-804 16,400 13,100 32,800 4 11/16 15
3 PLY
RE3-806 25,500 20,400 51,000 6 11/16 15
4 PLY RE4-806 34,000 27,200 68,000 6 7/8 15
SINGLE PATH - ENDLESS POLYESTER ROUND SLINGS

• A flexible solution to your lifting needs.
• Rotation of lift points extends service life of sling.
• Length measure from Bearing Point to Bearing Point.
• Two same color polyester tubular jackets.
• The economical choice!
RATED CAPACITY (LBS) APPROX. MEASUREMENTS
MIN. BODY DIA. WIDTH

ITEM LGTH. WT. RELAXED @ LOAD
NO. COLOR VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET (FT) (LBS/FT) (IN) (IN)
SP260 Purple 2,600 2,100 5,200 1- 1/2 .2 5/8 1- 1/8
SP530 Green 5,300 4,200 10,600 1- 1/2 .3 7/8 1- 1/2

SP840 Yellow 8,400 6,700 16,800 3 .4 1- 1/8 1- 7/8
SP1060 Tan 10,600 8,500 21,200 3 .5 1- 1/8 2- 1/8
SP1320 Red 13,200 10,600 26,400 3 .7 1- 3/8 2- 1/4
SP1680 White 16,800 13,400 33,600 3 .8 1- 3/8 2- 1/2
SP2120 Blue 21,200 17,000 42,400 3 1.1 1- 3/4 3
SP3100 Grey 31,000 24,800 62,000 3 1.6 2- 1/4 3- 3/4
SP5300 Brown 53,000 42,400 106,000 8 2.5 2 -3/4 4- 5/8
SP6600 Olive 66,000 52,800 132,000 8 3.1 3- 1/8 5- 1/4
SP9000 Black 90,000 72,000 180,000 8 4.0 3- 5/8 6
WARNING! DO NOT exceed rated capacities.

When slings are used at angles of less than 90° from horizontal ratings must be reduced.

Synthetic Web Slings
5.2 - MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS
5.2.1 Use only if trained. Determine weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling.
5.2.2 Select the proper sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment.
5.2.3 Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration should be given to the angle of lift (sling-to-
load angle), which affects rated capacity.
5.2.4 Slings with fittings which are used in a choker hitch shall be of sufficient length to assure that the choking action
is on the webbing, and never on the other fitting.
5.2.5 Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage.
5.2.6 The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to insure that the fitting will seat properly in the hook
or other attachments.
5.2.7 Slings shall always be protected from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusion, or abrasive surfaces.
5.2.8 Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface.
5.2.9 Slings shall not be twisted or tied into knots, or joined by knotting.
5.2.10 Slings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the sling.
5.2.11 Do not drop slings equipped with metal fittings.
5.2.12 Slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as usable under Section 5.2.
5.2.13 The sling shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load.
5.2.14 Portions of the human body should be kept from between the sling and the load, and from between the sling
and the crane hook or hoist hook.
5.2.15 Personnel should stand clear of the suspended load.
5.2.16 Personnel shall not ride the sling.
5.2.17 Shock loading should be avoided.
5.2.18 Twisting the legs (branches) shall be avoided.
5.2.19 Load applied to the hook should be centered in the base (bowl) of hook to prevent point loading on the hook.
5.2.20 During lifting, with or without the load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.
5.2.21 The slings' legs (branches) should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity when
using a basket hitch.
5.2.22 Slings shall be long enough so that the rated load (rated capacity) is adequate when the angle of the legs (branches)
is taken into consideration.
5.3 - ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
5.3.1 Slings should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should not be exposed to sunlight or ultraviolet light,
to prevent mechanical or chemical damage when not in use.
5.3.2 Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying degrees ranging
from none to total degradation. The sling manufacturer should be consulted before slings are used in chemically
active environments.
a. ACIDS
1. Nylon is subject to degradation in acids, ranging from none to total degradation.
2. Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation, ranging from none
to moderate in some acids.
3. Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:
i Type of Acid
ii Exposure to conditions
iii Concentration
iv Temperature
b. ALKALIS
1. Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from none to total degradation.
2. Nylon is resistant to many alkalis, but is subject to degradation ranging from none to
moderate in some alkalis.
3. Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:
i Type of Alkali
ii Exposure to conditions
iii Concentration
iv Temperature
5.3.3 Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 194°F (90°C), however, they may be
used in temperatures as low as -40°F (-40°C).
5.3.4 Slings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of alkalis
and/or acids are present.
5.3.5 Environments in which synthetic webbing slings are continuously exposed to ultra-violet light can affect the strength
of synthetic webbing slings in varying degrees ranging from slight to total degradation.
a. Factors which affect the degree of strength loss are:
1. Length of time of continuous exposure
2. Sling construction and design
3. Other environmental factors such as weather conditions and geographic location.
b. Suggested procedures to minimize the effects of ultra-violet light
1. Store slings in a cool, dry and dark place when not being used for prolonged periods of time
2. Inspect slings weekly or more often depending on frequency of sling use
c. Visual indications of ultra-violet degradation are:
1. Bleaching out of sling color
2. Increased stiffness of sling material
3. Surface abrasion in areas not normally in contact with the load.
d. Proof-Testing – Slings used in environments where they are subject to continuous exposure to ultra-violet light
should be proof-tested to two times rated capacity annually, or more frequently depending on severity of exposure.

5.4 - INSPECTION
5.4.1 TYPE OF INSPECTION
a. INITIAL INSPECTION – Before any new or repaired sling is placed in service, it shall
be inspected to insure that the correct sling is being used, as well as to determine that
the sling meets the requirements of this specification.
b. FREQUENT INSPECTION – This inspection should be made by the person handling the
sling each time the sling is used.
c. PERIODIC INSPECTION – This inspection shall be conducted by designated personnel.

Frequency of inspection should be based on:
1. Frequency of sling use
2. Severity of service conditions
3. Experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar applications
4. Periodic inspections should be conducted at least monthly
5.5 - POSSIBLE DEFECTS

5.5.1 A sling shall be removed from service if any defects such as the following are visible:
a. Acid or alkali burns

b. Melting, charring, or weld spatter of any part of the sling
c. Holes, tears, cuts, snags or embedded particles
d. Broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices
e. Excessive abrasive wear
f. Knots in any part of the sling
g. Distortion and excessive pitting or corrosion or broken fittings
h. Other apparent defects which cause doubt as to the strength of the sling
i. If sling rated capacity or sling material identification is missing or not readable
5.6 - INSPECTION RECORDS

5.6.1 Written inspection records, utilizing the identification for each sling as established by
the user, should be kept on file for all slings. These records should show a description
of the new sling and its condition on each subsequent inspection.
5.7 - REPAIR OF WEB SLINGS

5.7.1 Slings shall be repaired only by a sling manufacturer. When repaired by other than the
original manufacturer, the sling shall be permanently marked to identify the repair agent.
5.7.2 All repaired slings shall be proof-tested to two (2) times its newly assigned rated capacity, before
being put back into service. Certification of proof-test should be provided.
5.7.3 Temporary repairs of either webbing, fittings, or stitching shall not be permitted.
Polyester Ratchet Assembly
1" RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET AND VINYL COATED S HOOKS
• Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs. • WLL: 1000 lbs.
TIE12505 1" x 15'
2" RATCHET STRAP WITH FLAT HOOK

• Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs. • WLL: 3,335 lbs.
TIE11600 2" x 27'
2" RATCHET STRAP WITH WIRE HOOK

• Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs. • WLL: 3,335 lbs.
TIE11602 2" x 27'
4" WINCH STRAPS WITH FLAT HOOK

• Breaking Strength: 15,000 lbs • WLL: 5,400 lbs.
427FH 4" x 27'
430FH 4" x 30'

Polyester Ratchet Assembly
TRUCKER TIE DOWN AND LASHING EQUIPMENT
RATCHET STRAPS – Designed to handle most types of flatbed tie-down requirements.
• All straps have an 18" fixed end as standard, except for straps with 3705-2 and 3705-3 chain anchors which have
a fixed end of 30". Special length fixed ends and alternate end hardware available through Hanes Supply.
Labeled to meet CVSA guidelines, DOT regulations and WSTDA recommended standards.
Custom fabricated Many hook/fitting options Bulk purchasing at special

to meet your requirements. available to choose from. pricing also available.
2" RATCHET STRAPS W/804 WIDE HANDLE AND 2004 WEBBING

STRAP END 10,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH
LENGTH (FT) HARDWARE WLL
27
TIE11600 3,335 lbs.
1015 Flat Hook 1515 kgs.
30
3,335 lbs.
27 3705-2 Chain Anchor
1515 kgs.
TIE11602 3,335 lbs.

27
1006 Wire Hook 1515 kgs.
3" RATCHET STRAPS W/806 LONG HANDLE AND 3004 WEBBING

STRAP END
27
5,000 LBS
1021-3 Flat Hook
2270 KGS
30 15,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH
STRAP END
27
5,400 LBS
3705-3 Chain Anchor
30 2450 KGS
27 5,400 LBS
3704 Grab Hook
30 2450 KGS
16,200 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH
4" RATCHET STRAPS W/808 LONG HANDLE AND 4004 WEBBING

STRAP END
27
5,000 LBS
1021-3 Flat Hook
2270 KGS
30 15,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH
STRAP END
27
6,600 LBS
1016 Wire Hook
30 2995 KGS
20,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH
Load Binders
LOAD BINDER WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS - LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS
! WARNING • Hook load binder to chain so you can operate it while standing
on the ground. Position load binder so its han-
dle can be pulled downward to tighten chain
• Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. (see photo). Be aware of ice, snow, rain,
• Use only if trained. oil, etc. that can affect your footing. Make
• Failure to use this load binder properly may result in
serious injury or even death. certain your footing is secure.
• Do not operate load binder while standing on the load. • The Crosby Group LLC specifically recommends AGAINST the
• Move handle with caution. It may whip – Keep body clear. use of a handle extender (cheater pipe). If sufficient leverage
• Keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle. cannot be obtained using the lever type load binder by itself, a
• You must be familiar with state and federal regulations ratchet type binder should be used.
regarding size and number of chain systems required for
• If the above recommendation is disregarded and a cheater
securing loads on trucks.
• Always consider the safety of nearby workers as well pipe is used, it must closely fit the handle and must slide down
as your self when using load binder. the handle until the handle projections are contacted. The pipe
• While under tension, load binder must not bear against should be secured to the handle, for example, by a pin, so that
any object. the pipe cannot fly off the handle if you lose control and let go.
• Do not throw these instructions away. Keep them The increased leverage, by using a cheater pipe, can cause
close at hand & share them with any others who use this
load binder.
deformation and failure of the chain and load binder.
• During and after tightening chain, check load binder han-
dle position. Be sure it is in the locked position and that its
bottom side touches the chain link.
• Chain tension may decrease due to load shifting during
transport. To be sure the load binder remains in proper
position: Secure handle to chain by wrapping the loose
end of chain around the handle and the tight chain, or tie han-
dle to chain with soft wire.
• When releasing load binder, remember there is a great
RATCHET TYPE LEVER TYPE deal of energy in the stretched chain. This will cause the
load binder handle to move very quickly with great force
when it is unlatched. Move handle with caution. It may whip
- Keep body clear.
• Never use a cheater pipe or handle extender to release
handle. Use a steel bar and pry under the handle and stay out
of the path of handle as it moves upward.
• If you release the handle by hand, use an open hand
LEVER SNUBBING TYPE LEVER WALKING TYPE under the handle and push upward. Do not close your
Mechanical Advantage
hand around the handle. Always keep yourself out of
Lever Type Binder = 25:1 the path of the moving handle.
Ratchet Type Binder = 50:1 INSTRUCTIONS - RATCHET LOAD BINDERS
Example: 100 pounds of effort • Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from the ground.
applied to the binder results in • Make sure your footing is secure.
the following force on the binder.
MAINTENANCE OF ALL LOAD BINDERS
Lever Type:
2500 (100 lbs. x 25) lbs. of force
•Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks,
LEVER RELEASING TYPE Ratchet Type: or gouges. If visual wear bending or cracks are present -Do
5000 (100 lbs. x 50) lbs. of force not use load binder.
• Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders,
and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend
product life and reduce friction wear.

Load Binders
STANDARD LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS

L-150
• Forged Steel–Quenched & Tempered.
• Binder toggles away from the load.
MIN-MAX WORKING
CHAIN LOAD PROOF ULTIMATE WEIGHT HANDLE TAKE
STOCK STD. SIZE LIMIT LOAD LOAD EACH LENGTH UP
MODEL NO. PKG. (IN) (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (IN) (IN)
7-1 1048128 4 5/16-3/8 5400 10800 19000 7.02 16.00 4.50

A-1 1048146 4 3/8-1/2 9200 18400 33000 12.47 18.69 4.50
C-1 1048164 4 1/2-5/8 13000 26000 46000 19.68 21.00 4.75
L-130 MIDGET LOAD BINDER

• Forged handle, hooks and swivel link.
• Steel swivels and clevis.
• Meets or exceeds requirements of US DOT FMCSA Part 393 Subpart I.
WORKING
L-130 MIN-MAX LOAD LIMIT ULTIMATE WEIGHT EACH
MODEL STOCK NO CHAIN SIZE (IN) (LBS) LOAD (LBS) (LBS) TAKE UP (IN)
W-1 1048100 3/16-1/4 1450 5100 2.57 2.40
3/8" LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDER

• Provides more control in binding and releasing without extra tools.
• Handle closes down away from load with more leverage.
• Hooks are heat treated steel.
• Functionally superior to any other on the road.
• Handles are drop forged from special bar quality steel.
• Single welded links as in binder chain for better reliability.
• More take-up for binding greater loads. Smaller handle slot with
riveted nose to prevent spreading at the critical loading point.
• Meets DOT and CVSA requirements.
CHAIN SIZE CHAIN WORKING LOAD PRODUCT HANDLE TAKE-UP WEIGHT

(IN) GRADE LIMIT (LBS)* CODE LENGTH (IN) (IN) (LBS)
3/8 30, 43, 70, 80 7,100 48769 16 4-7/8 8-1/4
Load Binders
STANDARD RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDER
• Upgrade for use with Grade 7 Transport Chain - applies to R-7 only.
• Utilizes standard Crosby A-323 Alloy Eye Grab Hooks.
• New design “one piece” forged handle.
• Continuous take-up feature, gets the last half of chain.
• One piece assembly, no bolts or nuts to loosen.
L-140 • All load bearing or holding parts forged.
• Easy operating positive ratchet.
• Meets or exceeds requirements of US DOT FMCSA
Part 393 Subpart I.
MIN-MAX PROOF WEIGHT HANDLE BARREL TAKE
CHAIN SIZE WLL LOAD EACH LENGTH LENGTH UP
MODEL STOCK NO. (IN) (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (IN) (IN) (IN)
R-7** 1048404 5/16-3/8 8800 17600 12.11 14 10 8.0
R-A** 1048422 3/8-1/2 15000 30000 14.70 14 10 8.0
R-C*** 1048440 1/2-5/8 16000 32000 14.55 14 10 8.0
NOTE: Binders shown with Proof Load Pounds have been individually Proof Tested to these values shown, prior to shipment. *Ultimate Load is 3 times
the Working Load Limit. **Matches the Working Load Limit of Grade 100 chain for both sizes. ***Matches the Working Load Limit of Grade 100 chain
for 1/2" size.
FORGED RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDER

• Handle is designed loose using self-locking, one-way bolts allowing
easy removal of unwanted debris such as mud, snow or ice
• Proof tested to 50% of minimum breaking strength
• Gears are permanently welded to the barrel
• Durable powder coat finish
• Design factor 4:1 (except 48358 & 48387, which are 3:1)
MIN-MAX WEIGHT HANDLE BARREL SIZE
CHAIN SIZE WLL EACH LENGTH DIAM. X LENGTH TAKE UP
STOCK NO. (IN) (LBS) (LBS) (IN) (IN) (IN)
48455 5/16 - 3/8 8800 16 14 1-1/2 x 10 8
48358 3/8 - 1/2 15000 16 14 1-1/2 x 10 8
48387 3/8 - 1/2 16000 16 14 1-1/2 x 10 8
CLEVIS ASSEMBLY
• Hook on each end
• Meets all Department of Transportation (D.O.T.) requirements and is
required in most states by the D.O.T.
• Chain won't degrade in ultra-violet light, as compared to nylon straps
• Available in 12, 14, 16, 18, 24 or 25ft as well as custom lengths
• Design factor 4:1
CHAIN PRODUCT
SIZE (IN) WLL (LBS) CODE L (FT) WEIGHT (LBS)
SHORT LINK
1/4 3150 638265 20 16.41
5/16 4700 638284 20 21.13
L
3/8 6600 638294 20 31.11
1/2 11300 638350 20 56.93

Chain Specifications
CARBON CHAIN SPECIFICATIONS
NOMINAL INSIDE LINK

CHAIN SIZE WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT
LOAD LIMIT PER 100 FT
INCHES DECIMAL (LBS)* LENGTH WIDTH (LBS)
GRADE 30 PROOF COIL 3/16 0.218 800 0.95 0.40 38
CHAIN 1/4 0.276 1,300 1.00 0.47 66

Low carbon steel utility chain with a wide
5/16 0.327 1,900 1.10 0.50 98
range of general purpose uses. Self-col-
3/8 0.390 2,650 1.23 0.62 144
ored finish. Links embossed every 10"
with date code and grade appearing alter- 7/16 0.468 3,700 1.37 0.75 210
nately. Also available in Hot Galvanized or 1/2 0.531 4,500 1.50 0.81 278
Bright Zinc finish.
5/8 0.656 6,900 1.87 1.00 422
3/4 0.787 10,600 2.12 1.12 628
1 1.031 17,900 2.75 1.50 1,069
GRADE 43 HIGH TEST CHAIN 1/4 0.281 2,600 1.00 0.47 71

Made from a selected analysis carbon 5/16 0.327 3,900 1.10 0.50 98
steel to provide higher tensile strength
3/8 0.390 5,400 1.23 0.62 144
and working load limits, as well as better
resistance to wear. Bright (polished) fin- 7/16 0.468 7,200 1.37 0.75 210
ish. Links embossed every 10" with date 1/2 0.531 9,200 1.50 0.81 278
code and grade appearing alternately.
5/8 0.656 13,000 1.87 1.00 422
Also available in Hot Galvanized or Bright
Zinc finish. 3/4 0.781 20,200 2.12 1.12 606
7/8 0.875 24,500 2.25 1.14 776
1 1.000 34,100 2.75 1.50 1,050
GRADE 70 TRANSPORT 1/4 0.281 3,150 0.84 0.47 74

(BINDING) CHAIN 5/16 0.327 4,700 0.98 0.46 100
Significantly higher tensile strength for
3/8 0.406 6,600 1.14 0.54 156
all load binding and tie down applica-
tions, which permits you to hold a given 7/16 0.468 8,750 1.33 0.62 204
load with the next smaller size chain 1/2 0.531 11,300 1.43 0.72 259
than Grade 43. This increased strength-
to-weight ratio means lower costs and a
lighter chain, for easier storage and han- *WARNING! DO NOT EXCEED WORKING LOAD LIMIT.
dling. Gold finish. Links embossed every
BINDER CHAIN ASSEMBLIES AVAILABLE IN GRADE 43, 70 & 80
10" with date code and grade appearing AND A VARIETY OF SIZES AND LENGTHS
alternately.
See page 61 for additional Binding Chain information.
Transport Chain (Binding Chain)
GRADE 70 TRANSPORT (BINDING) CHAIN
• Do not use for overhead lifting
• High-carbon steel, heat treated
• Zinc plated with gold chromate finish
• Meets ASTM & NACM standards
• Meets FMCSA & CVSA requirements
• Thermal heat treated using advanced technology
• Heat treated for superior wear and toughness
• 100% proof tested
• Permanent identification on chain
• Full weld trim
• Chart Note: ** Standard Link Grade 70 Chain
• Design Factor 4:1
NOMINAL CHAIN PER DRUM PER PAIL
DIMENSIONS (IN) PER FOOT FULL DRUM HALF DRUM
CHAIN APPROXIMATE
SIZE WLL PRODUCT WEIGHT NUMBER OF PRODUCT LENGTH PRODUCT LENGTH PRODUCT LENGTH
(IN) (LBS) A B C CODE (LBS) LINKS CODE (FT) CODE (FT) CODE (FT)
1/4 3,150 0.28 0.84 0.47 608927 0.76 14.30 678531 800 678521 400 678517 130
5/16 4,700 0.33 0.98 0.46 608935 1.01 12.20 678532 550 678522 275 678518 90
5/16** 4,700 0.33 1.10 0.50 609035 0.97 10.90 679032 550 679022 275 679018 90
3/8 6,600 0.39 1.14 0.54 608941 1.46 10.50 678533 400 678523 200 678519 60
3/8** 6,600 0.39 1.38 0.60 609041 1.37 8.73 679033 400 679023 200 679019 60
1/2 11,300 0.53 1.56 0.73 608954 2.70 7.70 678535 200 678525 100 – –
BINDING CHAIN SPECIFICATIONS

This chart indicates the minimum number of chains required to secure loads in the forward direction
(0.8g deceleration)* per federal Motor Carriers Safety Administration, DOT Regulations; per 49CFR,
Part 393 - Paragraph 393.102.
*Refer to 49CFR, Parts 392 and 393, for North American Standard for Protection Against Falling & Shifting Cargo for complete regulations.
MIN # OF CHAINS REQUIRED TO SECURE LOADS IN FORWARD

DIRECTION BY WEIGHT OF THE ARTICLE IN LBS (kN)
WORKING
CHAIN GRADE SIZE LOAD LIMIT
5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000
(IN) (LBS) (kN) (22) (44) (67) (89) (111) (133) (156) (178) (200) (222)
GRADE 30 5/16 1,900 8 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 22

PROOF COIL 3/8 2,650 12 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 14 16
GRADE 43 5/16 3,900 17 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

HIGH TEST 3/8 5,400 24 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8
1/4 3,150 14 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13
GRADE 70
5/16 4,700 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
TRANSPORT
3/8 6,600 29 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7
7/32 2,100 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
GRADE 80 9/32 3,500 16 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12

ALLOY 5/16 4,500 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3/8 7,100 32 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6
GRADE 100 ALLOY 3/8 8,800 39 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5

CM Lever Hoists
LEVER HOIST MODEL COMPARISON
SERIES 602/603 Mini Ratchet Hoist
The most compact and comfortable ratchet lever hoist in the market. Performs just like larger lever hoist models.
THE BANDIT Ratchet Lever Hoist
One of the most compact and durable ratchet lever hoists in the industry. Its lightweight and portable design, easy free-chain-
ing feature and 360° rotating handle make a versatile hoist.
SERIES 653 Lever Operated Hoist
Features a short handle and minimal lever pull effort. High quality, rugged steel for close quarter pulling, stretching, and
hoisting applications. Ideal for a wide array of applications in construction, industrial and plant operations.
PULLER SERIES 640
Heavy-duty design for pulling, lifting, dragging, and stretching construction and industrial applications. Built for ease of use,
ease of maintenance and long life.
SHORT HANDLE PULLER
Same heavy-duty design as the Puller in a smaller size for lighter loads and tighter spaces.
SERIES 602/ 603 BANDIT SERIES 653 SERIES 640 SHORT HAND
CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING
1/4 3 1
1/2 3 1
3/4 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
1 3 1
1-1/2 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
2 3 1
3 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2
4-1/2
6 3 2 3 2 3 4
FEATURES
Load Limiter Optional Optional Optional
Metal Housing 3 3 3
Aluminum Housing 3 3
Free Chaining 3 3 3 3 3
Weston Brake 3 3 3 3 3
Standard Lifts (ft) 5, 10 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 20
Zinc-Plated Chain 3 3 3
Self-Colored Chain 3 3
Metric Rated 3 3 3 3
Warranty Lifetime Lifetime 5 Years Lifetime Lifetime
CM Hand Chain Hoists
SERIES 622
The CM Series 622 Hand Chain Hoist features a simple, efficient and economical design. Its compact design, low headroom
and lightweight steel construction makes this hoist easy to install, even in confined spaces.
CYCLONE
The CM Cyclone Hand Chain Hoist features superior engineering, efficiency and durability and is considered one of the most
popular and reliable hand chain hoists ever designed.
SERIES 622 CYCLONE

CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING
1/4 3 1
1/2 3 1 3 1
1 3 1 3 1
1-1/2 3 1
2 3 1 3 1
3 3 2 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2 3 3
6 3 3
8 3 4
10 3 5
12 3* 6*
FEATURES
Load Limiter 3
Metal Housing 3
Aluminum Housing 3
Weston Brake 3 3
Standard Lifts (ft) 10, 15, 20 10
Low Headroom Option 3
Zinc Plate Hand Chain
Zinc Plate Load Chain
622 CYCLONE Self-Colored Hand Chain 3 3
Self-Colored Load Chain 3 3
Configurator Quoted 3
Domestic Hoist 3
Warranty 1 Year Lifetime
Metric Ton Rated 3 3

360º Hoists
TORNADO 360°
Redefining lever-operated hoists, the CM® Tornado 360°™ features the revolutionary Sidewinder™ lever handle that allows
for efficient operation in both lifting and pulling applications. Ergonomically designed for increased safety, the patent-pending
CM Tornado 360° lets the operator work up to 12 times faster and with as much as 30% less pull force than with conventional
ratchet lever tools.
HURRICANE 360°
The CM Hurricane 360º features a full cycle of flexibility for a wide range of lifting and pulling applications. A unique hand chain
hoist by any comparison in the market, the CM Hurricane 360º provides maximum versatility and safety on any job site. The
patented hand chain cover rotates a full 360 degrees to allow loads to be lifted, pulled, or positioned from virtually any angle.
TORNADO 360 HURRICANE 360

CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING
1/4
1/2 3 1
3/4 3 1
1 3 1
1-1/2 3 1
2 3 1
3 3 1 3 1
4
5 3 2
6 3 2
8
10 3 3
FEATURES
Load Limiter Optional 3
Metal Housing 3
Aluminum Housing 3
Free Chaining 3
Weston Brake 3 3
Standard Lifts (ft) 5, 10, 15, 20 10, 15, 20
Low Headroom Option
TORNADO 360 Standard Chain Gold Chromate Zinc Plated
Configurator Quoted 3
Domestic Hoist
Warranty Lifetime Lifetime
HURRICANE 360 Metric Ton Rated 3
CM Lodestar
CAPACITIES LIFT VOLTAGES

1/8 to 3 Ton 10 feet standard Available on 3-phase,
460 volt and 230 volt models
For versatility and ultimate control, choose the CM Lodestar

electric chain hoist equipped with an under-the-cover Variable
Frequency Drive.
KEY BENEFITS
3-STEP INFINITELY VARIABLE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM SPEED
CONTROL STANDARD SETTINGS
Provides acceleration and deceleration for With the ability to choose intermediate
full load control and precise positioning. speeds during operation without timely
programming or upgrades.
SOFT STARTS
Increase the life of gear train components, 115 VOLT INTERFACE
load chain, hooks and brake components. CARD STANDARD
Allows for integration into existing bridge
ELECTRONIC REVERSING
and crane systems without upgrades or
Eliminates the need for magnetic contactor
modifications to the hoist VFD controls.
and speed relay controls.
STANDARD FEATURES
6:1 SPEED RATIO MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD
PROTECTION
FAULT HISTORY
ADJUSTABLE RAMP TIME AND
PHASE LOSS PROTECTION
SPEEDS
VFD PROGRAMMABLE 3 second ramp time between minimum
To customer’s exact and maximum speed setting.
voltage requirements.
3-STEP ROBUST NEMA 4X CONTROL
STATION
SPECIFICATIONS
RATED CAPACITY STANDARD LIFT SPEED (FPM) PRODUCT CODE
(TONS) LIFT (FT) MINIMUM MAXIMUM MOTOR HP MODEL REEVING 230-3-60 460-3-60
1/8 10 5.3 32 1/4 A 1 2709NH 2710NH
10 2.6 16 1/4 B 1 2726NH 2729NH
1/4
10 5.3 32 1/2 C 1 2734NH 2736NH
10 2.6 16 1/2 F 1 2730NH 2731NH
1/2 10 5.3 32 1 J 1 3635NH 3636NH
10 10.6 64 2 JJ 1 3642NH 3643NH
10 2.6 16 1 L 1 3625NH 3626NH
1
10 5.3 32 2 LL 1 3644NH 3645NH
10 1.3 8 1 R 2 3632NH 3633NH
2
10 2.6 16 2 RR 2 3646NH 3647NH
10 0.9 5.5 1 RT 3 9531NH 9534NH
3
10 1.8 11 2 RRT 3 9539NH 9540NH

Harrington Lever Hoists
LB LEVER MANUAL HOISTS
Harrington's LB lever hoists combine easy operation with a compact, low headroom design that easily handles
real-world demands. These hoists can be used horizontally, vertically, inverted or at any other load angle and
have the strength to get the job done.
• Capacities 3/4 Ton through 9 Ton
• Compact design makes it a perfect fit for use in tight quarters
• Steel body is more durable yet lighter in weight than die cast aluminum models
• Revolutionary freewheeling offers one handed operation
• 360 degree handle rotation and pivot & swivel top hook for easy rigging
HEAD- PULL TO LOAD CHAIN DIA NET SHIPPING

CAP PRODUCT ROOM C STANDARD LIFT LOAD (MM) x CHAIN FALL WEIGHT WEIGHT WEIGHT FOR ADD’L
(TONS) CODE (IN) LIFT (FT) (LBS) LINES (LBS) APPROX (LBS) 1' OF LIFT (LBS)
3/4 LB008 11.0 54 13
5.6 X 1 13 0.5
1 LB010 11.8 72 14
1-1/2 LB015 13.2 64 7.1 X 1 18 18 0.7
2 LB020 59
14.8 5 8.8 X 1 25 26 1.1
2-3/4 LB028 81
3 LB030 15.6 69 10.0 X 1 33 35 1.5
6 LB060 21.3 72 10.0 X 2 57 60 3.2
9 LB090 26.8 78 10.0 X 3 88 93 4.7
LX LEVER MANUAL HOISTS
Harrington's LX lever pullers are ultra lightweight and compact yet extremely durable. Known as the perfect
“toolbox hoists”, these little hoists have all the power you need to get the job done. Revolutionary 1/2 Ton model
is the only 1/2 Ton “toolbox” sized puller in the industry.
• Capacities 1/4 Ton and 1/2 Ton
• Compact, low headroom design makes it a perfect tool for use in tight quarters
• Low pulling force required for ease of use
• Effortless to transport, install & store
• Free-chain adjusting mechanism for quick adjustments
• Rugged die-cast aluminum body with steel frame
HEAD- PULL TO LOAD CHAIN DIA NET SHIPPING

CAP PRODUCT ROOM C STANDARD LIFT LOAD (MM) x CHAIN FALL WEIGHT WEIGHT WEIGHT FOR ADD’L
(TONS) CODE (IN) LIFT (FT) (LBS) LINES (LBS) APPROX (LBS) 1' OF LIFT (LBS)
1/4 LX003 8.1 40 3.2 X 1 3.5 4.0 0.15
5
1/2 LX005 9.7 62 4.3 X 1 5.7 6.2 0.25
Harrington Hand Chain Hoists
CF HAND CHAIN HOISTS
Harrington's CF hand chain hoists were designed for portability and durability. These hoists are the economical
and practical choice for efficient, trouble-free service. The CF model is a long-lasting construction grade hoist
that offers the best value in a hand chain hoist.
• Rugged die-cast aluminum body provides exceptional strength
• Pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings for long life and low maintenance
• Weston-style load brakes for positive braking action
• Designed with fewer parts to simplify maintenance
HEAD- PULL TO LOAD CHAIN DIA NET SHIPPING WEIGHT FOR

CAP PRODUCT ROOM C STANDARD LIFT LOAD OVERHAUL (MM) x CHAIN FALL WEIGHT WEIGHT ADD’L 1' OF
(TONS) CODE (IN) LIFT (FT) (LBS) RATIO LINES (LBS) APPROX (LBS) LIFT (LBS)
1/2 CF005 12.8 60 19 5.0 x 1 24 26 1.0
1 CF010 14.6 72 31 6.3 x 1 29 31 1.2
1-1/2 CF015 17.3 84 41 7.1 x 1 40 42 1.4
10
2 CF020 20.1 80 63 6.3 x 2 47 49 1.8
3 CF030 23.2 81 7.1 x 2 62 66 2.1
92
5 CF050 24.4 134 7.1 x 3 82 86 2.9
CB HAND CHAIN HOISTS
Harrington's CB hand chain hoists combine heavy duty construction with top-of-the-line internal compo-
nents for the most demanding industrial applications. These hoists are built to withstand rugged, day-in,
day-out use and they are easily maintained and repairable making them the perfect hoist for a long-lasting
fleet of industrial products.
• All-steel construction for extreme durability
• Low headroom and lightweight design for ease of use
• Slip clutch prevents lifting damaging loads beyond rated capacity
• Limited number of parts simplifies and reduces maintenance
HEAD- PULL TO LOAD CHAIN DIA NET SHIPPING WEIGHT FOR
CAP PRODUCT ROOM STANDARD LIFT LOAD OVERHAUL (MM) x CHAIN FALL WEIGHT WEIGHT ADD’L 1' OF
(TONS) CODE (IN) LIFT (FT) (LBS) RATIO LINES (LBS) APPROX (LBS) LIFT (LBS)
1/2 CB005 11.2 48 25 5.0 x 1 22 23 1.0
1 CB010 11.6 58 43 6.3 x 1 25 26 1.2
1-1/2 CB015 13.8 70 57 7.1 x 1 32 33 1.4
2 CB020 14.8 72 70 8.0 x 1 41 43 1.6
8
2-1/2 CB025 16.5 66 99 9.0 x 1 56 58 1.8
3 CB030 20.1 72 114 7.1 x 2 49 53 2.1
5 CB050 23.6 68 198 9.0 x 2 85 89 3.0
8 CB080 30.3 75 297 9.0 x 3 124 131 4.2
10 CB100 29.9 72 396 9.0 x 4 186 203 5.5
15 CB150 40.2 74 594 9.0 x 6 346 368 7.9
20 CB200 46.5 72 x 2 396 x 2 9.0 x 8 524 678 10.9
30 CB300 51.2 495 x 2 9.0 x 10 690 889 13.3
12 86 x 2
40 CB400 58.3 693 x 2 9.0 x 14 1068 1398 18.2
50 CB500 61.4 98 x 2 792 x 2 9.0 x 16 1422 1752 20.6
80 CB800 100.8 86 x 4 693 x 4 9.0 x 28 3392 36.3
–
100 CB1000 125.2 98 x 4 792 x 4 9.0 x 32 6525 41.2

Harrington Electric Chain Hoists
SNER ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS
Harrington's SNER electric chain hoists are built for extreme duty applications that require single
phase power. A hoist with a 60 minute, H4 duty rated motor is revolutionary and unmatched in a
single phase offering. Maintenance friendly features include a unique chain guide, hinged control
panel, sealed housing and durable load sheave. For beam travel requirements couple with SMR
motorized, PT manual push and GT manual geared trolleys.
• SNER, SNERM, SNERP, SNERG capacities 1/4 Ton through 3 Ton
• 60 minute, H4 rated, fan cooled motor for the most demanding applications
• Pull-rotor electric brake is self-adjusting and virtually maintenance-free
• Ability to accommodate very long lifts
• Compact, low headroom design
• Completely sealed body suitable for harsh indoor or outdoor environments - IP55 rated
LIFTING MOTOR WEIGHT

PUSH 1 PHASE 60 Hz LOAD CHAIN FOR
STD BUTTON LIFTING RATED CURRENT DIA (MM) X NET ADD’L
CAP PRODUCT HEADROOM LIFT CORD L SPEED OUTPUT CHAIN FALL WEIGHT 1' OF LIFT
(TONS) CODE C (IN) (FT) (FT) (FT/MIN) (Hp) @115V (AMPS) @230V (AMPS) LINES (LBS) (LBS)
1/4 SNER003S 13.8 14 5.0 x 1 82 0.37
0.34 7.7 3.9
1/2 SNER005L 14.0 7 6.3 x 1 84 0.57
1/2 SNER005S 14.6 15 6.3 x 1 104 0.57
7.2 0.6 16.9 8.5
1 SNER010L 16.1 10 7 8.0 x 1 110 0.93
1 SNER010S 17.3 14 8.0 x 1 159 0.93
2 SNER020L 22.6 7 1.2 23.9 12.0 10.0 x 1 174 1.5
3 SNER030C 29.5 8.2 3.5 10.0 x 2 207 3.1
HARRINGTON ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS
Easy Access Dual Pendant Unique Chain

Suspension Speed VFD Controls Guide
Harrington electric hoists

can be customized to
various specifications.
Standard Count “The Guardian” Notched Nook &

Hour Meter Smart Brake Latch System
Technology
Cordage Information
Select the Correct Size

A rope too small may fail quickly, one too large will prove expensive. Don't work any rope
above one-fifth of its breaking strength.
Avoid Overloads
Safe working load ranges for any new rope is between 1/5 and 1/12 of its minimum tensile.
Make enough allowances for safety if your rope is old or worn. Ignoring this safety factor
causes early rope replacement and is dangerous to men and materials.
Keep Away from Chemicals
Acids & Alkalis are injurious to rope. If exposed, wash thoroughly and inspect before using.
Watch for battery and building cleaning acids, caustic soda and paint. Keep rats away.
Stop Unnecessary Wear
Outer and inner rope fibers contribute equally to the strength of your rope. If worn out, the
rope is naturally weakened. Eliminate rubbing, dragging or working over rough surfaces.
Protect its surface with chafing gear, such as canvas wrapped and tied around the rope.
Pad corners of sharp objects when lifting, and avoid strain on sharp bends. Remove kinks
if they form.
To Uncoil Rope
A new coil of rope should be placed flat on its side with the "tag" inside end down. Remove
the outside lashings and unfasten the inside bands. Leave burlap around the coil to keep
rope clean.
Reach down through the eye of coil and pull out the inside end, where tag is attached,
through the eye of the coil.
Store it Properly
Keep in dry, cool place with good air circulation. Use wooden grating on concrete or steel
floors, and keep away from steam pipes and metal walls. Protect from prolonged exposure
to sunlight. Store only clean, dry rope.
Use Right Sheaves
Block sizes or sheaves should be eight times the diameter of the rope. For power transmis-
sion or for use with continuous load, sheaves should be at least forty times the diameter of
the rope. Small sheaves cause added friction and rope wear. Keep sheaves smooth.
Watch Rope Condition
Inspect rope frequently, whether working or in storage. Occasionally reverse your rope,
end-to-end, to distribute the wear more evenly.
Use worn rope only where strength failure will not cause injury or damage.
*All ropes will last longer if given proper care and handling, storage and use.
These are the more important points to keep in mind to assure greatest service and safety.

Cordage Information
ROPE CONSTRUCTION SELECTION GUIDE*
CHARACTERISTICS SOLID BRAID HOLLOW BRAID DOUBLE BRAID DIAMOND BRAID TWISTED
No. of Strands or Carriers 9, 12 or 18 8, 12 or 16 16, 24 or 32 8 or 16 3
Spliceable No Yes Yes No Yes
Strength to Weight 5 2 1 4 3
Flexibility 3 1 2 4 5
Flattens Under Load No Yes No Yes No
Rotates Under Load No No No No Yes
Mechanical Elongation 1 4 5 3 2
Cost Per Size 2 4 1 3 5
Working Load (as a % of Tensile) 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 8-14%
Abrasion Resistance 1 5 2 3 4
WARNING: This guide is de-

signed for general reference only.
The construction comparisons
assume using the same rope fiber
Top View Top View Top View Top View Top View
and size. Expert advice should
be sought when choosing a rope
where protection of life or property
is involved.
Solid or Single Braid

This construction leaves a void in the center and utilizes strand counts of eight, 12 or 16. The hollow is instrumental in
making it easy to splice. Hollow braids are nonrotating and are an extremely efficient way to utilize fiber.
Plaited or Hollow Rope

Eight-strand “Square Braid” is comprised of eight individual strands, which are woven together as four pairs. Its major
advantages are non-rotation & high energy absorption.
Double Braid
This is really two separate ropes in one: the core, which is a single braid, is over-braided with a sleeve. This construction
allows the rope to be used for more applications; the same or dissimilar fibers can be engineered into a rope suited to any
of many specific applications. This construction entirely shields one of the two elements in the rope from abrasion.
Three-Strand or Twisted
The simplest type of rope is formed by twisting fiber into a strand, and then twisting three strands into rope. Its conversion
efficiency is relatively low since this construction technique is the hardest on fiber.
Cordage Information
ROPE FIBER SELECTION GUIDE: FIBER PROPERTIES - TYPICAL VALUES
MANILA SISAL COTTON NYLON POLYESTER
STRENGTH:
Breaking Tenacity – Dry (grams/denier) 5.0 - 6.0 4.0 - 5.0 2.0 - 3.0 7.0 - 9.5 7.0 - 9.5
Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength Up to 120% Up to 120% Up to 120% 85-90% 100%
Shock-load Absorption Ability Poor Poor Very Poor Excellent Good
WEIGHT:
Specific Gravity 1.38 1.38 1.54 1.14 1.38
Floats No No No No No
ELONGATION:
Percent of Break 10 - 12% 10 - 12% 5 - 12% 18 - 25% 12 - 15%
Creep (ext. under sustained load) Very Low Very Low Very Low Moderate Low
EFFECTS OF MOISTURE:
Water Absorp. of Indiv. Fibers Up to 100% Up to 100% Up to 100% 2 - 8% <1%
Dielectric Properties Very Poor Very Poor Very Poor Poor Good
DEGRADATION:
Resistance to UV Sunlight Good Good Good Good Excellent
Resistance to Rot Mildew Poor Poor Poor Excellent Excellent
Storage Requirements Dry Only Dry Only Dry Only Wet or Dry Wet or Dry
THERMAL PROPERTIES: Does Not Melt Does Not Melt Does Not Melt
Melts at Chars at 350° Chars at 350° Chars at 300° 420 - 480° 490 - 500°
RESISTANCE3:
Resistance to Acids Poor Poor Poor Fair Good
Resistance to Alkalis Poor Poor Fair Very Good Fair
Resistance to Oils & Gas Poor Fair Poor Very Good Very Good
POLYPROPYLENE POLYETHENE KEVLAR1 SPECTRA2

STRENGTH:
Breaking Tenacity – Dry (grams/denier) 6.5 6.0 18-26.5 30.0
Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength 100% 100% 95% 100%
Shock-load Absorption Ability Very Good Fair Poor Fair
WEIGHT:
Specific Gravity 0.91 0.95 1.44 0.97
Floats Yes Yes No Yes
ELONGATION:
Percent of Break 15 - 25% 15 - 25% 1.5 - 3.6% 3.5%
Creep (ext. under sustained load) High High Very Low Moderate
EFFECTS OF MOISTURE:
Water Absorp. of Indiv. Fibers None None 3.5 - 7.0% None
Dielectric Properties Excellent Excellent Poor Excellent
DEGRADATION:
Resistance to UV Sunlight Poor* Fair* Fair Fair
Resistance to Rot Mildew Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
Storage Requirements Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry
THERMAL PROPERTIES: 800° Begins
Melts at 330° 275° to Decompose 297°
RESISTANCE3:
Resistance to Acids Excellent Excellent Fair Excellent
Resistance to Alkalis Excellent Excellent Fair Excellent
Resistance to Oils & Gas Very Good Very Good Very Good Very Good
* Black is best 1 - Based on Dupont Kevlar® Data 2 - Based on Allied/Signa; Spectra® Data - Type 990
3 - Resistance is relative to the length of exposure, percent of concentration & temperature.

Twisted Ropes
NYLON ROPE
• Four stage construction • High strength and elasticity
• Medium-Soft Lay • Color: Natural White
NOMINAL STANDARD MINIMUM UNITS RWL APPROX.

DIAMETER SIZE DIA DEC TENSILE TENSILE -SPOOL- 5:1 - 12:1 DENSITY
(IN) NO EQUIV. (LBS) (LBS) (FT) (LBS) (LBS/100°)
1/4 3/4 0.250 1,650 1,490 600 298 - 124 1.5
5/16 1 0.313 2,550 2,300 600 460 - 192 2.5
3/8 1-1/8 0.375 3,750 3,340 600 668 - 278 3.4
1/2 1-1/2 0.500 6,400 5,750 600 1,150 - 479 6.5
5/8 2 0.625 10,000 9,000 600 1,800 - 750 10.0
3/4 2-1/2 0.750 14,200 12,800 600 2,560 - 1,067 14.5
7/8 2-3/4 0.875 20,000 18,000 600 3,600 - 1,500 20.0
1 3 1.000 25,000 22,600 600 4,520 - 1,883 26.0
1-1/8 3-1/2 1.125 32,000 28,800 600 5,760 - 2,400 32.5
1-1/4 3-3/4 1.250 37,500 33,800 600 6,760 - 2,817 40.0
1-1/2 4-1/2 1.625 53,000 47,800 600 9,560 - 3,983 55.0
1-5/8 5 1.500 65,000 58,500 600 11,700 - 4,875 66.5
2 6 2.000 92,000 83,000 600 16,600 - 6,917 95.0
2-1/4 7 2.250 125,000 113,000 600 22,600 - 9,417 129.0
2-1/2 7-1/2 2.500 140,000 126,000 600 25,200 - 10,500 149.0
2-5/8 8 2.625 162,000 146,000 600 29,200 - 12,167 168.0
3 9 3.000 200,000 180,000 600 36,000 - 15,000 210.0
4 12 4.000 360,000 324,000 600 64,800 - 27,000 379.0
POLYESTER ROPE
• Continuous multifilament yarn • Good abrasion resistance
• Low stretch • Color: Natural White • Excellent UV resistance
DIAMETER SIZE DIA DEC TENSILE TENSILE -SPOOL- 5:1 - 12:1 DENSITY
3/8 1-1/8 0.375 3,750 3,340 600 668- 278 4.5
7/16 1-1/4 0.438 5,000 4,500 600 900 - 375 6.2
1/2 1-1/2 0.500 6,400 5,750 600 1,150 - 479 8.0
5/8 2 0.625 9,550 8,600 600 1,720 - 717 12.3
3/4 2-1/4 0.750 12,500 11,300 600 2,260 - 942 17.5
7/8 2-3/4 0.875 17,000 15,250 600 3,050 - 1,271 23.4
1 3 1.000 22,000 19,800 600 3,960 - 1,650 30.4
1-1/8 3-1/2 1.125 27,550 24,800 600 4,960 - 2,067 38.2
1-1/4 3-3/4 1.250 33,200 29,800 600 5,960 - 2,483 46.5
1-1/2 4-1/2 1.500 46,800 42,200 600 8,440 - 3,517 67.0
1-5/8 5 1.625 55,500 50,000 600 10,000 - 4,167 79.0
2 6 2.000 80,000 72,000 600 14,400 - 6,000 118.0
2-1/4 7 2.250 100,500 90,500 600 18,100 - 7,542 148.0
2-1/2 7-1/2 2.500 122,000 110,000 600 22,000 - 9,167 181.0
2-5/8 8 2.625 137,000 123,000 600 24,600 - 10,250 204.0
3 9 3.000 174,000 157,000 600 31,400 - 13,083 258.0
Twisted & Solid Braid Ropes
MANILA
• Traditional three-strand rope • Subject to rot
• Holds knots well • Color: Tan • Absorbs water
NOMINAL DIAMETER UNITS -SPOOL- TENSILE STRENGTH RWL APPROX. WT.

(IN) (FT) (LBS) (LBS) PER COIL (LBS)
3/16 1600 405 81 25
1/4 1200 540 108 25
1/4 2400 540 108 50
5/16 850 900 180 25
5/16 1700 900 180 50
3/8 600 1,215 243 25
3/8 1200 1,215 243 50
7/16 600 1,575 315 32
1/2 600 2,385 477 45
1/2 1200 2,385 477 90
5/8 600 3,960 792 82
5/8 1200 3,960 792 164
3/4 600 4,860 972 104
3/4 1200 4,860 972 208
13/16 600 5,850 1170 117
7/8 600 6,930 1386 139
1 300 8,100 1620 81
1 600 8,100 1620 162
1 1200 8,100 1620 324
1-1/4 600 12,150 2430 251
1-1/2 600 16,650 3330 364
2 600 27,900 5580 624
SOLID BRAID ROPES

Solid braid ropes are constructed of various bundles of fiber interlocked together in a circular braiding pattern
PROLINE® MULTIFILAMENT POLY

• Inexpensive • Flexible • Floats
• Holds knots well • Color: Natural White

DIAMETER SIZE DIA DEC TENSILE TENSILE -REEL- 5:1 - 12:1 DENSITY
1/8 4 0.125 175 158 1000 32 - 13 0.2
3/16 6 0.188 450 405 1000 71 - 34 0.6
1/4 8 0.250 725 653 1000 131 - 54 1.1
3/8 12 0.375 1,400 1,260 500 252 - 105 2.4
1/2 16 0.500 2,200 1,980 500 396 - 165 4.0

Solid & Double Braid Ropes
NYLON
• Color: Natural White • Good general purpose cord
• Good UV resistance • Works well in pulleys • Strong
3/32 3 0.094 275 248 1000 50 - 21 0.2
7/64 3-1/2 0.109 325 293 1000 59 - 24 0.3
1/8 4 0.125 400 360 1000 72 - 30 0.4
5/32 5 0.156 600 540 1000 108 - 45 0.6
3/16 6 0.188 850 765 1000 153 - 64 0.8
1/4 8 0.250 1,300 1,170 1000 234 - 98 1.3
5/16 10 0.313 1,950 1,755 500 351 - 146 2.0
3/8 12 0.375 2,750 2,475 500 495 - 206 2.9
1/2 16 0.500 4,200 3,780 500 756 - 315 5.1
DOUBLE BRAID ROPES

Double braid ropes are actually two ropes in one and are sometimes called braid on braid ropes.
The jacket is braided over a braided core.
NYLON
• Gold Braid® Brand • Spliceable
• Resists abrasion & snagging • Color: White & Gold
• Excellent shock absorbing elasticity • Torque-free
1/4 3/4 0.250 1,850 1,665 600 330 - 138 1.6
5/16 1 0.303 2,850 2,570 600 514 - 214 2.4
3/8 1-1/8 0.975 4,100 3,700 600 740 - 308 3.5
1/2 1-1/2 0.500 7,275 6,550 600 1,310 - 546 6.3
5/8 2 0.625 11,300 10,200 600 2,040 - 850 9.8
3/4 2-1/4 0.750 16,300 14,700 600 2,940 - 1,225 14.1
7/8 2-3/4 0.875 22,100 19,900 600 3,980 - 1,658 19.1
1 3 1.000 28,900 26,000 600 5,200 - 2,167 25.0
POLYESTER
• Rhino Flex™ Brand • Low stretch, high stretch
• Good dielectric properties • Torque-free
• Resistant to ultraviolet degradation • Color: White w/gold Tracer
1/4 3/4 0.250 2,500 2,250 600 450 - 188 2.1
3/8 1-1/8 0.375 5,085 5,085 600 1,017 - 424 4.5
1/2 1-1/2 0.500 9,900 8,910 600 1,782 - 743 8.0
5/8 2 0.625 15,000 13,500 600 2,700 - 1,125 12.5
3/4 2-1/4 0.750 21,000 18,900 600 3,780 - 1,575 17.9
7/8 2-3/4 0.875 28,000 25,200 600 5,040 - 2,100 24.4
1 3 1.000 37,200 33,480 600 6,696 - 2,790 33.3
1-1/8 3-1/2 1.125 46,400 41,760 600 8,352 - 3,480 42.2
1-1/4 3-3/4 1.250 54,000 48,600 600 9,720 - 4,050 49.8
1-1/2 4-1/2 1.500 76,000 68,400 600 13,680 - 5,700 71.8
1-5/8 5 1.625 88,000 79,200 600 15,840 - 6,600 84.0
Rope Specifications
ROPE SPECIFICATIONS
THREE STRAND AND EIGHT STRAND – STANDARD LAY ROPES
POLYPRO NYLON POLYESTER MANILA

LBS. FEET BRK. LBS. FEET BRK. LBS. FEET BRK. LBS. FEET BRK.
DIA. CIR. PER PER STGTH. PER PER STGTH. PER PER STGTH. PER PER STGTH.
(IN) (IN) 100' LB. (LBS) 100' LB. (LBS) 100' LB (LBS.) 100' LB. (LBS)
3/16 5/8 .75 133.0 800 1.0 100.0 1,000 1.2 83.4 850 1.5 66.7 450
1/4 3/4 1.2 83.4 1,250 1.5 66.7 1,650 2.0 50.0 1,650 2.0 50.0 600
5/16 1 1.8 55.6 1,900 2.5 40.0 2,550 3.1 32.2 2,550 3.0 35.0 1,000
3/8 1-1/8 2.8 35.7 2,700 3.5 28.5 3,700 4.5 22.2 3,700 4.0 25.0 1,350
7/16 1-1/4 3.8 26.3 3,500 5.0 20.0 5,000 6.2 16.1 5,000 5.3 19.0 1,750
1/2 1-1/2 4.7 21.3 4,200 6.5 15.4 6,400 8.0 12.5 6,400 7.5 13.3 2,650
5/8 2 7.5 13.3 6,200 10.5 9.5 10,400 13.0 7.7 10,000 13.3 7.5 4,400
3/4 2-1/4 10.7 9.3 8,500 14.5 6.9 14,000 17.5 5.7 12,500 16.7 6.0 5,400
7/8 2-3/4 15.0 6.7 11,500 20.0 5.0 20,000 25.0 4.0 18,000 22.0 4.5 7,700
1 3 18.0 5.5 14,000 26.0 3.8 25,000 30.5 3.3 22,000 27.0 3.7 9,000
1-1/8 3-1/2 23.7 4.2 18,300 34.0 2.9 33,000 40.0 2.5 29,500 36.0 2.8 12,000
1-1/4 3-3/4 27.0 3.7 21,000 40.0 2.5 37,500 46.3 2.5 33,200 42.0 2.4 13,500
1-5/16 4 30.5 3.3 23,500 45.0 2.2 43,000 52.5 1.9 37,500 48.0 2.2 –
1-1/2 4-1/2 38.5 2.6 29,700 55.0 1.8 53,000 66.8 1.5 46,800 60.0 1.7 18,500
1-5/8 5 47.5 2.1 36,000 68.0 1.5 65,000 82.0 1.2 57,000 75.0 1.3 22,500
1-3/4 5-1/2 57.0 1.7 43,000 83.0 1.2 78,000 98.0 1.02 67,800 90.0 1.1 26,500
2 6 69.0 1.4 53,000 95.0 1.1 92,000 118.0 .85 75,000 108.0 .93 31,000
2-1/8 6-1/2 80.0 1.2 62,000 109.0 .92 105,000 135.0 .75 81,000 125.0 .79 36,000
2-1/4 7 92.0 1.1 70,000 129.0 .77 125,000 157.0 .64 96,000 146.0 .69 41,000
2-1/2 7-1/2 107.0 .93 80,500 150.0 .67 138,000 181.0 .55 110,000 167.0 .59 46,500
2-5/8 8 120.0 .83 90,000 168.0 .59 154,000 205.0 .49 125,000 191.0 .53 52,000
2-7/8 8-1/2 137.0 .73 100,000 189.0 .53 173,000 230.0 .43 140,000 213.0 .47 58,000
3 9 153.0 .65 116,000 210.0 .47 195,000 258.0 .39 158,000 242.0 .42 64,000
3-1/4 10 190.0 .52 137,000 263.0 .38 238,000 319.0 .31 190,000 299.0 .33 77,000
3-1/2 11 232.0 .43 162,000 316.0 .31 288,000 384.0 .26 230,000 367.0 .28 91,000
4 12 275.0 .36 190,000 397.0 .26 342,000 460.0 .21 275,000 436.0 .23 105,000

Yale Rope
ULTREX PLUS ROPE
Ultrex Plus is a double braid of Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene, treated with Maxijacket coating for enhanced tough-
ness. Sleeved with high tenacity polyester, Ultrex Plus is spliceable utilizing conventional high modulus splice techniques, or
the new Yale tuck splice, which shortens the bury portion and minimizes the length of the larger diameter associated with a
bury type splice. All strengths shown are for spliced line.
AVERAGE SPLICED BREAK MINIMUM SPLICED BREAK MAXIMUM** WORK WEIGHT
DIAMETER (IN) STRENGTH* (LBS) STRENGTH* (LBS) LOAD 5:1 (LBS) (LBS/100FT)
1/4 6,000 5,400 1,200 2.4
5/16 9,500 8,550 1,900 2.9
3/8 12,700 11,430 2,540 3.8
7/16 15,300 13,770 3,060 4.9
1/2 22,000 19,800 4,400 7.3
9/16 27,800 25,020 5,560 8.0
5/8 33,000 29,700 6,600 11.0
3/4 45,000 40,500 9,000 14.1
7/8 60,000 54,000 12,000 21.6
1 75,000 67,500 15,000 26.0
1-1/8 98,000 88,200 19,600 35.5
1-1/4 120,000 108,000 24,000 43.5
1-5/16 148,000 133,200 29,600 45.7
1-1/2 172,000 154,800 34,400 61.3
1-5/8 184,000 165,600 36,800 71.7
1-3/4 230,000 207,000 46,000 85.6
2 285,000 256,500 57,000 108.6
*Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lowers maximum working load.
**Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load up or down, in excess of
10% of the rope's rated working load constitutes hazardous shock load and would void normal working load recommendation. Consult Yale
Cordage for guidelines for working loads and safe use of rope.
PE-12 ROPE
PE-12 has been recently re-engineered boosting its strengths significantly. Using the same high tenacity fiber we use
in our value packed Portland Braid, this high tenacity polyester single braid offers a single end per carrier construction
which keeps the rope from flattening out in service and self centers in sheaves beautifully. PE-12 comes with the same
tough grades of Maxijacket urethane we use on our more expensive products. PE-12 is easy to splice and field repairs
are easily accomplished. It is available in unlimited lengths and brilliant colors for easy identification. PE-12 is torque free
and is undamaged when rigging with swivels.
5/16 3,900 3,510 780 3.2
3/8 5,900 5,310 1,180 3.9
7/16 9,800 8,820 1,960 6.4
1/2 12,500 11,250 2,500 8.5
9/16 15,800 14,220 3,160 10.5
5/8 18,500 16,650 3,700 12.5
3/4 23,250 20,925 4,650 17.4
7/8 34,350 30,915 6,870 25.9
1 41,600 37,440 8,320 31.3
Yale Rope
HY-DEE BRAIT ROPE
Hy-Dee is an 8-strand bi-polymer rope with extraordinary dielectric properties. The rope is nubby which provides excellent
grip, and treated with a proprietary chemical mixture Yale calls Aralube-dielectric. This treatment is the key to Hy-Dee Brait's
wet dielectric performance and allows us to make the highest dielectric strength rope commercially available. Easy to splice
with a tucking procedure or by the quick splice method illustrated. Hy-Dee Brait meets ASTM 1701-12 which calls for a
maximum leakage of 250 microamperes at any time during the wet test. Electrodes are 1 foot apart, shielded and the test is
conducted at 50KV-AC. This product is 100% lot tested for dielectric conformance.
3/8 3,200 2,880 400 3.3
7/16 4,900 4,410 610 4.0
1/2 5,600 5,040 700 4.8
9/16 7,000 6,300 875 5.4
5/8 8,500 7,650 1,060 7.6
3/4 11,000 9,900 1,375 10.7
UNITREX XS ROPE
Unitrex XS Max Wear is Uniline's high tech cousin, which is a parallel cored rope of Honeywell's Spectra, wrapped with a
Neoprene tape and over braided with a tough jacket of high tenacity polyester. The result is a synthetic cable, somewhat
stiffer than your usual rope, which is much like wire in its stretch characteristics. Unlike wire it is much lighter and easily
handled. Due to its toughness we are comfortable assigning it a higher working load rating which is 25% of its breaking
strength. Unitrex XS Max Wear has high strength retention in service which is supported by field studies and our long
standing track record with Uniline polyester. Unitrex's tough rubber layer protects its high modulus Spectra core and the
outer jacket is saturated with Urethane making it the toughest UHMPE rope you can buy. All Yale's parallel core ropes are
torque free, with bonded cores preventing contamination of the internal strength member.
0.44 20,000 18,000 5,000 6.7
0.53 26,000 23,400 6,500 9.2
0.58 34,000 30,600 8,500 11.4
0.63 42,500 38,250 10,625 13.5
0.71 50,500 45,450 12,625 16.9
0.84 73,500 66,150 18,375 24.2
1 100,000 90,000 25,000 32.4
1.15 125,000 112,500 31,250 42.4
1.25 158,000 142,200 39,500 52.5
1.4 195,000 175,500 48,750 64.9
1.7 264,000 237,600 66,000 92.6
1.8 310,000 279,000 77,500 98.8
1.9 360,000 324,000 90,000 113.3
2.2 430,000 387,000 107,500 144.0

Amsteel® Rope
AMSTEEL®
• Highly abrasion resistant • Nonrotational • Samthane coated • Highly flex-fatigue resistant
• Made with Dyneema and lnnegra fiber • Lightweight • Wire rope replacement
SIZE DIAMETER WEIGHT PER SAMSON AVG. SAMSON MBS*
(IN) SIZE CIRC. (IN) 100 FT. (LBS) STRENGTH* (LBS) (LBS)
1/4 3/4 1.6 7,400 6,700
5/16 1 2.7 10,500 9,500
3/8 1-1/8 3.6 15,500 14,000
7/16 1-1/4 4.2 18,000 16,200
1/2 1-1/2 6.4 27,500 24,800
9/16 1-3/4 7.9 34,000 30,600
5/8 2 10.2 40,700 36,600
3/4 2-1/4 13.3 52,000 46,800
13/16 2-1/2 15.8 61,000 54,900
7/8 2-3/4 19.6 74,000 66,600
1 3 21.8 90,000 81,000
1-1/16 3-1/4 29.5 100,000 90,000
1-1/8 3-1/2 31.9 110,000 99,000
1-1/4 3-3/4 36.2 125,000 113,000
1-5/16 4 41.8 135,000 122,000
1-1/2 4-1/2 51.7 175,000 158,000
AMSTEEL® – BLUE
• Made with 100% Dyneema fiber • Samthane coated • Maximum strength-to weight ratio
• Highly flex-fatigue resistant • Highly abrasion resistant • Nonrotational
• 117th the weight of wire • Same elongation as wire • Wire rope replacement
SIZE DIAMETER WEIGHT PER SAMSON AVG. SAMSON MBS*
(IN) SIZE CIRC. (IN) 100 FT. (LBS) STRENGTH* (LBS) (LBS)
7/64 5/16 0.3 1,600 1,400
1/8 3/8 0.5 2,500 2,300
5/32 15/32 .75 4,000 3,600
1/4 3/4 1.6 8,600 7,700
5/16 1 2.7 13,700 12,300
3/8 1-1/8 3.6 19,600 17,600
7/16 1-1/4 4.2 23,900 21,500
1/2 1-1/2 6.4 34,000 30,600
9/16 1-3/4 7.9 40,500 36,500
5/8 2 10.2 52,800 47,500
3/4 2-1/4 13.3 64,400 58,000
7/8 2-3/4 19.6 90,800 81,700
1 3 21.8 109,000 98,100
1-1/16 3-1/4 27.5 131,000 118,000
1-1/8 3-1/2 31.9 148,000 133,000
1-1/4 3-3/4 36.2 165,000 149,000
1-5/16 4 41.8 184,000 166,000
1-3/8 4-1/8 45.0 205,000 185,000
1-1/2 4-1/2 51.7 228,000 205,000
Samson Rope
TENEX (826) ROPE

Tenex is a 12-strand single braid that offers high strength with low stretch and outstanding abrasion re-
sistance. It is Samthane coated to provide abrasion resistance, enhance wear life, snag resistance, and
increase ease of splicing. It is a viable alternative to using double braids when easy field splicing and
economy are major considerations.
APPLICATIONS FEATURES AND BENEFITS

• Lifting Sling / Utility • Available in long lengths • Excellent snag resistance
• Other Fishing Line • Easy to inspect • Firm construction
• Prusiks and Tails • Easy to splice • High strength per diameter
• Pulling / Stringing Line • Economical • High strength-to-weight ratio
• Purse Seine Line • Excellent abrasion resistance • Samthane coated
AVERAGE STRENGTH MINIMUM

DIAMETER (IN) CIRCUMFERENCE (IN) WEIGHT (LBS/100FT) (LBS) STRENGTH (LBS)
3/16 9/16 1.3 1,800 1,600
1/4 3/4 2.1 3,200 2,900
5/16 1 3.2 4,700 4,200
3/8 1-1/8 3.9 5,800 5,200
7/16 1-1/4 6.3 9,000 8,100
1/2 1-1/2 8 11,800 10,600
9/16 1-3/4 10 15,000 13,500
5/8 2 12 17,100 15,400
3/4 2-1/4 17.2 22,400 20,200
7/8 2-3/4 25.8 32,600 29,300
1 3 34.5 42,700 38,400
1-1/8 3-1/2 43 50,000 45,000
1-1/4 3-3/4 52.2 57,200 51,500
1-5/16 4 59.7 69,500 62,600
1-1/2 4-1/2 71.5 81,700 73,500
1-5/8 5 90.3 94,000 84,600
1-3/4 5-1/12 105 109,000 98,100
2-1/2 7-1/2 209 226,000 204,000
Specifications are for spliced strengths.

Rope Selection
HAND LINE
Utility structures, linemen, and Samson ropes are a natural fit. Our strong, durable hand lines stand up to rigorous
bending through blocks, yet are still easy on the hands. Excellent grip helps prevent slips, and allows for quick and
efficient lifts. Available in an economical 3-strand or non-rotational 12-strand constructions, these ropes bring the
quality and dependability Samson is known for to the worksite.
HAND LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER)
DURA-PLEX - Coated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend
DURA-PLEX - Uncoated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend
PRO-MASTER (WHITE) 3-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin-Polyester Blend
PRO-SET-3 3-Strand Nylon
QUIK-SPLICE 12-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin
SSR-100-3 3-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin-Polyester Blend
SSR-1200-3 3-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin-Polyester Blend
STABLE BRAID - Coated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester
STABLE BRAID - Uncoated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester
STABLE BRAID BLACK Double Braid Polyester / Polyester
ULTRA BLUE-3 3-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin
PULLING & STRINGING LINE

The athletes of the utility industry - strong enough to tackle the heaviest loads, yet light enough to be dependably
handled by man or machine. Long and strong, they also withstand miles of use and abuse and keep on working to
get the job done. The right rope makes quick work of handling conductors, whether they're aerial or underground.
Whether it's the economy of traditional fibers like polyester or the high performance of Dyneema®, Samson sets the
standard in pulling and stringing lines for the utility industry.
PULLING/ STRINGING LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER)
AMSTEEL® 12-Strand Dyneema®

Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II - Coated Dyneema® - MFP Blend / Polyester
Double Braid
Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Coated Dyneema® / Polyester
Double Braid
Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Uncoated Dyneema® / Polyester
Double Braid
AMSTEEL® -BLUE 12-Strand Dyneema®
DURA-PLEX - Coated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend
DURA-PLEX - Uncoated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend
ML-12 12-Strand Dyneema®
QUIK-SPLICE 12-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin
TENEX 12-Strand Polyester
Rope Selection
WINCH LINE
Lifting or shifting dead weight loads calls for lines that have the strength to perform, and the resistance to bend
fatigue needed to get the work to be done. Firm constructions that work well on winch drums, enhance lifting capacity,
and have the durability for long-lasting performance all typify Samson’s range of winch lines. Available in single
braid or double-braid constructions, and in several different fibers that allow you to regulate the length, diameter and
strength of the winch line to suit your application.
PULLING/ STRINGING LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER)
AMSTEEL® 12-Strand Dyneema®

Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II - Coated Dyneema® - MFP Blend / Polyester
Double Braid
Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II - Uncoated Dyneema® - MFP Blend / Polyester
Double Braid
Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Coated Dyneema® / Polyester
Double Braid
Core Dependent
AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Uncoated Dyneema® / Polyester
Double Braid
AMSTEEL® -BLUE 12-Strand Dyneema®
ML-12 12-Strand Dyneema®
NYSTRON - Coated Double Braid Nylon / Polyester
NYSTRON - Uncoated Double Braid Nylon / Polyester
QUANTUM-12 12-Strand Dyneema® -Polyester Blend

Core Dependent
TURBO-RC Dyneema® / Dyneema®
Double Braid
Core Dependent
VALIDATOR II Vectran® / Polyester
Double Braid
ROPE SELECTION
SELECT THE RIGHT ROPE FOR THE JOB be retired sooner. Braided ropes are stronger than twisted ropes of the
Selecting a rope involves evaluating a combination of factors. Some of same size and fiber type.
these factors are straight forward like comparing rope specifications. Note carefully the quoted breaking strengths of the various Samson
Others are not easily quantified, like color preference or how a rope products. These are average breaking strengths. Published breaking
feels in your hand. Cutting corners, reducing sizes, or strengths on an strengths are determined by standard cordage testing and do not cover
initial purchase creates unnecessary replacements, potentially danger- conditions such as sustained loads or shock loading. These strengths
ous conditions, and increases long-term costs. Fiber and construction are attained under laboratory conditions. Remember also, that this is a
being equal, a larger rope outlasts a smaller rope because of the great- breaking strength-not a recommended working load.
er surface wear distribution. Similarly, a stronger rope outlasts a weaker
one because it will be used at a lower percentage of its break strength ELONGATION
with less chance of being overstressed. The following areas should be It is well accepted that ropes with lower elongation under load will give
considered in your rope selection. you better load control-a big help at complicated job sites. However,
ropes with lower elongation that are shock loaded, like a lowering line,
STRENGTH can fail without warning even though it appears to be in good shape.
When given a choice between ropes, select the strongest of any given Low elongating ropes should be selected with the highest possible
size. A load of 200 pounds represents 2% of the strength of a rope with strength. Both twisted ropes and braided ropes are suitable for rigging.
a breaking strength of 10,000 pounds. The same load represents 4% Twisted rope has lower strength and more stretch. Braided rope has
of the strength of a rope that has a breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. higher strength and lower stretch.
The weaker rope is having to work harder and as a result will have to

Rope Selection
SHOCK LOADING Assume that you have seven identical ropes, each with a 30,000-lb
Working loads as described herein are not applicable when rope breaking strength and you work these ropes daily with each rope lifting
has been subjected to shock loading. Whenever a load is picked up, a different load, as shown in Table 5.
stopped, moved, or swung there is an increased force caused by the
dynamic nature of the movement. The force increases as these actions Table 5 shows that the higher the working load factor, the greater the
occur more rapidly or suddenly, which is known as “shock loading.” service life and the lower the replacement factor. Therefore, the work-
Examples of applications where shock loading occurs include ropes ing load factor directly reflects the economy of the purchase.
used as a tow line, picking up a load on a slack line, or using rope to
stop a falling object. In extreme cases, the force put on the rope may TABLE 5. Working loads for seven ropes with breaking strengths
be two, three, or more times the normal load involved. Shock-loading of 30,000 lb.
effects are greater on a low elongation rope such as polyester than
on a high-elongation rope such as nylon, and greater on a short rope WORKING
than on a long one. BREAKING WORKING LOAD NUMBER OF
For example, the shock load on a winch line that occurs when STRENGTH LOAD* FACTOR LIFTS
a 5,000-lb object is lifted vertically with a sudden jerk may “weigh” 1 30,000 LB 5,000 LB 6:1 1,000
30,000 lb under the dynamic force. If the winch line is rated in the 2 30,000 LB 6,000 LB 5:1 750
30,000-lb break-strength range, it is very likely to break.
3 30,000 LB 7,500 LB 4:1 500
Where shock loads, sustained loads, or where life, limb, or valuable
property is involved, it is recommended that an increased working load 4 30,000 LB 10,000 LB 3:1 300
factor be used. 5 30,000 LB 15,500 LB 2:1 100
It is recommended that a lower working load factor be selected with 6 30,000 LB 20,000 LB 1.5:1 25
only expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risk;
7 30,000 LB 28,000 LB 1.1:1 5
if the rope has been inspected and found to be in good condition; and if
the rope has not been subject to shock loads, excessive use, elevated *Relative values only. The higher the working load factor the greater the service life,
temperatures, or extended periods under load. and, of course, the lower the replacement factor. Thus, a working load factor also
For dynamic loading applications that involve severe exposure con- directly reflects an economy factor; if you always lifting the same weight, then the
ditions, or for recommendations on special applications, consult the stronger the rope, the higher the working load factor, and the longer the rope will last.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is important to note that many industries are subject to state
manufacturer. and federal regulation on workload limits that supersede the manufacturer's recom-
mendation. It is the responsibility of the rope user to be aware of and adhere to those
FIRMNESS laws and regulations.
Select ropes that are firm and round and hold their shape during use.
Soft or mushy ropes will snag easily and abrade quickly causing accel- ROPE HANDLING AND USAGE
erated strength loss. Because the fibers are in a straighter line, which
improves strength but compromises durability, loose or mushy rope will DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES
almost always have higher break strengths than a similar rope that is Based on rope industry practices, dielectric property testing is conduct-
firm and holds its shape. ed on clean, new rope samples and holds true only under such ideal
conditions. Dirt, grease, other foreign matter, and moisture (including
CONSTRUCTION AND ABRASION humidity) will alter the nonconductivity/ conductivity of any synthetic
It is important to choose the right rope construction for your applica- rope or material. No rope manufacturer can attest to a rope's dielectric
tion, because it affects resistance to normal wear and abrasion. Braid- properties under actual operating conditions.
ed ropes have a round, smooth construction that tends to flatten out
somewhat on a bearing surface. This distributes the wear over a much REMOVING ROPE FROM A REEL OR COIL
greater area, as opposed to the crowns of a 3-strand or, to a lesser Synthetic-fiber ropes are normally shipped on reels for maximum
degree, on an 8-strand rope. protection while in transit. The rope should be removed from the
reel by pulling it off the top while the reel is free to rotate. This can
ASSIGNED WORKING LOAD FACTORS be accomplished by passing a pipe through
Assigned working load factors vary in accordance with the different the center of the reel and jacking it up until the
safety practices and policies of utilities and industrial users. However, reel is free from the deck. Rope should never
our recommendation, and one that is fairly well accepted in the indus- be taken from a reel lying on its side. If the rope
try, is a minimum 5:1 working load factor. Thus, your maximum work- is supplied on a coil, it should always be un-
load should be approximately 1/5th, or 20%, of the quoted breaking coiled from the inside so that the first turn comes
strength. This factor provides greater safety and extends the service off the bottom in a counterclockwise direction.
life of the winch line.
Winch Lines and Operations
ROPE STORAGE: COILING, FLAKING, AND BAGGING ends of the winch line so that it can be reversed in the event of damage
Great care must be taken in the stowage and proper coiling of 3-strand to one end; however, this is not always possible, depending upon the
ropes to prevent the natural built-in twist of the line from developing method of attachment to the winch drum and whether or not a closed
kinks and heckles. Braided ropes on the other hand have no built-in thimble is spliced into the eye. If an eye is not used at the drum end,
twist and are far more resistant to kinking. Even if kinks do develop, then this end should be tightly whipped with a strong twine.
they cannot develop further into heckles.
Hockled Rope
Three-strand and braided

ropes should be coiled in a
clockwise direction (or in the
direction of the lay of the rope)
and uncoiled in a counter
clockwise direction to avoid
kinks. An alternate and perhaps
better method is to flake out the TABLE 6. EFFECT OF ROPE DIAMETER ON DRUM CAPACITY.
line in a figure eight. This avoids
ROPE DIAMETER FEET ON DRUM
putting twist in the line in either
direction and lessens the risk 1/2" 510'
of kinking. 5/8" 325'
3/4" 225'
Figure 8 Coiling - Twisting Rope
7/8" 165'
WINCH LINES AND WINCHING 1" 125'

1-1/8" 100'
OPERATIONS (values based on a 2' drum)
SHARP CUTTING EDGES
Samson winch lines should not be exposed to sharp edges and surfac- ROPE CAPACITY OF A WINCH DRUM
es such as metal burrs on winch drums, sheaves, shackles, thimbles, The formula for rope capacity on a winch drum is:
wire slings, etc. Our winch lines are made from synthetic fibers and, as Length to be A(B 2 – C2)
such, can be cut or damaged by sharp edges. When installing winch
stored (feet) = 15.3 (rope dia.) 2
lines on old truck units, great care must be exercised to assure that the
rope is not coming in contact with hardware that has been scored and (Where A, B, C, and rope
chewed by previously used wire lines. Sheaves, shackles, thimbles, diameter are expressed
in inches and length [L ]
etc., should be replaced in most cases. Other metal surfaces should be is expressed in feet.)
carefully examined and dressed if necessary.
ATTACHING LINE TO A WINCH DRUM

There are various methods of attaching a winch line to a winch drum:
using a wedge or plug and set-screw in the main body of the drum, or
using a “U” bolt through the side of the flange. Another method involves
welding a round plug to the winch drum. The soft eye at the end of the
winch line is placed over the plug and held in place with a flat keeper.
The attachment method should not have a sharp edge that will cut the
line under load. If possible, it is advisable to have an eye splice in both

WINDING ROPE ON THE WINCH DRUM DANGER TO PERSONNEL
The first layer (wrap) around the winch drum should be put on closely Persons should be warned against the serious danger of standing in
and tightly. The initial winding tension (load) should be approximate- line with a rope under tension. Should the rope separate, it may recoil
ly 50 pounds. This will prevent subsequent with considerable force. In all cases where any such risks are present,
wraps from slipping down between turns when or where there is any question about the load involved or the condition
tension is applied. Samson winch lines tend to of use, the working load should be substantially reduced and the rope
self-level. Important: Samson recommends at properly inspected before every use.
least four wraps* always be left on winch drum.
*IMPORTANT NOTE: Due to their low coeffi- AVOID KINKING AND HOCKLING
cient of friction AmSteel® and AmSteel®-Blue *4 wraps on a drum The continuous use of 3-strand and 4-strand lines on one side
lines must be worked with at least eight of a winch or windlass is a common abuse that can render a line
wraps on the drum at all times. useless in a short time. Repeated hauling of a line over a winch in a
counterclockwise direction will extend the lay of the rope and simul-
taneously shorten the twist of each strand. As this action continues,
kinks (or heckles) will develop. Once heckles appear, they cannot be
removed and the rope is permanently damaged.
If, on the other hand, the line is continuously hauled over a winch in a
clockwise direction, the rope lay is shortened and the rope becomes
stiff and readily kinks.
To avoid detrimental conditions, the direction of turns over the winch
LEVEL WINDING should be alternated regularly. Clockwise turns are recommended for
Using the appropriate amount of tension, wind the rope evenly, without the initial use of a new line. If this practice is observed, the original
spaces across the drum of the winch. The next level should wind over rope balance will be maintained and the lines will have a much longer
the previous layer of rope and follow the valley between turns on the useful life.
previous level. This pattern is followed for all layers of rope, with each Excessive turns can cause kinking in any rope but heckles can occur
layer of turns slightly offset from the layer below. only in the basic “twisted” ropes (3-strand, 4-strand, and wire rope).
Braided and plaited ropes cannot be heckled; their inter-locking strand
CROSS WINDING construction prevents the unlaying. Strands run in both directions
When the rope is placed under creating a torque-free balance thus eliminating any inherent tendency
load it can dive, or push into, the toward twist or rotation. Swivels can be used safely but are seldom
previously wrapped level below it. necessary. One word of caution here: when marrying a braided line to
To avoid diving, cross winding is a twisted line (and also to wire rope) the twisted line can impart its twist
recommended. to the braided line if the ropes are married without a swivel in between.
When cross winding, start with two
layers of level wound rope using A braided or plaited rope, being torque-free, can have twist induced
the appropriate back tension. At First Cross by constant working on winches. If a twist develops, it can easily be
the end of the second layer, pull the removed by “counter-rotating” when the rope is relaxed.
rope quickly across the drum, allow
it to wind one full turn at the side of EYE SPLICING
the drum, then quickly pull it back to The standard eye splice cannot be pulled out under tension; however, it
the opposite side of the drum. This can be pulled out by hand when the winch line is in a relaxed state. To
will force the rope to cross in the prevent such tampering, it is recommended that lock stitching or tight
middle and form a barrier that will Second Cross seizing be applied to the base or throat of the splice.
prevent the rope from diving into Lock stitching may also prove advantageous on some splices to pre-
the lower layers of the drum when vent no-load opening due to mishandling. The material required is one
placed under load. Follow the fid length of nylon whipping twine approximately the same size diam-
cross-wound layer with two layers eter as the strands in the rope you are lock stitching. The strands cut
of level wound turns, then form an- from the rope you are lock stitching may also be used, but whipping
other cross. Repeat this pattern un- twine is preferable. You may download lock-stitch instructions from our
til the length of rope is fully spooled website SamsonRope.com or call customer service to receive them
onto the winch. Level Layer
by mail.
Eye splices at the end of winch lines (if not put in at the factory) should On a cleat when the rope does not bend radially around, the barrel of
be done in strict accordance with the steps and procedures outlined the cleat can be one half the rope circumference (minimum).
in Samson splicing instructions. These splicing methods can be easily The ratio of the length of an eye splice to the diameter of the object
learned and executed by line crews and shop personnel. Assistance in over which the eye is to be placed (for example, bollard, bill, cleat,
splicing instruction is available through the Samson Technical Repre- etc.) should be a minimum 3-to-1 relationship and preferably 5-to-1.
sentative in your area. Splicing Training Kits, manuals, and tools can In other words, if you have a bollard 2 feet in diameter the eye splice
be ordered through your local Samson Distributor or direct from the should be 6 or 10 feet in length. By using this ratio the angle of the 2
factory. Instructions are also available on-line at SamsonRope.com. legs of the eye splice at its throat will not be so severe as to cause a
parting or tearing action at this point (thimbles are normally designed
KNOTS AND WINCH LINES with a 3-to-1 ratio).
Splicing is, by far, the strongest and most efficient means of attach-
ment. Knots should never be tied in a winch line if it can be in any way This angle
avoided because knots can reduce the strength of any rope (or wire) is more
than 10°
by as much as 50%. Also, avoid sharp bends in the line where possible
because this will also greatly reduce strength.
Surface diameter should
BOOM-SHEAVE RECOMMENDATIONS be at least three times the
To assure maximum efficiency and safety, the boom-sheave diameter rope diameter.
should be no less than eight times the rope's diameter. The sheave's
groove diameter should be no less than 10% greater than the rope
diameter, and the groove should be round in shape, not “V” shaped.
Groove
Diameter Bollards with
undersized horns minimum 6 ft
8-inch
Diameter
Rope
Sheave Diameter
ABRASION PROTECTION OF LINE
With their outer jacket of polyester, Stable Braid, AmSteel® II, Valida-
tor SKB, and Progen II have a relatively high degree of resistance to
1-inch abrasion and melting. However, all synthetics are subject to melting
Diameter if subjected to enough friction and heat; therefore, such practices as
Rope 10% greater surging on a gypsy-head winch, hard rendering around poles, or over
cross-arms, etc., should be avoided whenever possible.
than rope
8:1 diameter
USE OF SLINGS WITH WINCH LINES
Ratio The winch line itself should not be used as a choker to pick up a pole
or other objects. The hook attached on the end of the winch line can
TWISTED / PLAITED cut deeply into the rope itself. We recommend a separate line, sling or
10 times rope diameter strap be used as the choker and not the winch line itself.
BRAIDED TEMPERATURE
8 times rope diameter Friction can be your best friend or worst enemy if it is not managed
properly. Friction takes place anytime two surfaces come in contact.
BENDING RADIUS Mild friction, sometimes referred to as grip is a good characteristic,
Any sharp bend in a rope under load decreases its strength substantial- especially in winching applications. However, by definition, friction cre-
ly and may cause premature damage or failure. In sizing the radius of ates heat, the greater the friction, the greater the heat buildup. Heat is
bills, fairleads and chocks for best performance the following guidelines an enemy to synthetic fiber and elevated temperatures can drastically
are offered: reduce the strength and/or cause rope melt-through.
Where a rope bends more than 10 degrees around bills or chocks or, High temperatures can be achieved when checking ropes on a cable
for that matter, is bending across any surface, the diameter of that sur- or running over stuck or non-rolling sheaves or rollers. Each rope's
face should not be less than 3 times the diameter of the rope. Stated construction and fiber type will yield a different coefficient of friction
another way, the diameter of the surface should be at least three times (resistance to slipping) in a new and used state. It is important to un-
the rope diameter. A 4-to-1 ratio (or larger) would be better yet because derstand the operational demands, and take into account the size, rope
the durability of the rope increases substantially as the diameter of the construction, and fiber type to minimize heat buildup.
surface over which it is worked increases.

Never let ropes under tension rub together or move relative to one an-
other. Enough heat to melt the fibers can buildup and cause the rope to FATIGUE
fail quickly: as if it had been cut with a knife. Synthetic fibers have memory: they remember and retain the effects
Always be aware of areas of heat buildup and take steps to minimize it; of being overloaded and shock loaded. This why winch line proce-
under no circumstances let any rope come in contact with an exhaust dures are so important to reducing the danger of shock loading, which
muffler or any other hot object. The strength of a used rope can be prolongs the life of the rope and reduces premature down grading. If
determined by testing, but the rope is destroyed in the process so the there is reason to believe that a line has been shock loaded above its
ability to determine the retirement point before it fails in service is es- recommended working load, it should be logged. If a number of these
sential. That ability is based on a combination of education in rope use instances occur, the line should be inspected and rotated.
and construction along with good judgment and experience. Remem-
ber, you almost always get what you pay for in the form of performance END-FOR-ENDING
and reliability. It is recommended that every winch line be rotated end-for-end on a
periodic basis. This will vary high stress and wear points and extend
TABLE 7. The critical and melting temperatures for useful life. The recommended end-for-ending period is six months, at
synthetic fibers. which time visual inspection and washing can also be done.
FIBER TYPE CRITICAL TEMP. MELTING TEMP.
DYNEEMA® 150°F 300°F ROPE INSPECTION AND RETIREMENT
One of the most frequently asked questions is: “When should I retire my
POLYPROPYLENE 250°F 330°F
rope?” The most obvious answer is before it breaks. But, without a thor-
NYLON 325°F 425-490°F ough understanding of how to inspect it and without knowing the load
POLYESTER 350°F 480°F history, you are left making an educated guess. Unfortunately, there are
TECHNORA® 450°F 900°F* no definitive rules nor are there industry guidelines to establish when
a rope should be retired because there are so many variables that af-
*while the term “melting” does not apply to this fiber, it does undergo extreme degra- fect rope strength. Factors like load history, bending radius, abrasion,
dation in these temperatures, and they char. chemical exposure or some combination of those factors, make retire-
ment decisions difficult. Inspecting your rope should be a continuous
STRENGTH DEGRADATION FROM ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT process of observation before, during, and after each use. In synthetic
Prolonged exposure of synthetic ropes to ultraviolet (UV) radiation of fiber ropes, the amount of strength loss due to abrasion and/or flexing
sunlight causes varying degrees of strength degradation. is directly related to the amount of broken fiber in the rope's cross sec-
Polyester fibers are the least affected by UV exposure, and the result- tion. After each use, look and feel along every inch of the rope length
ing strength degradation of exposed fibers is negligible. Nylon is more inspecting for damage as listed below.
susceptible to strength loss due to ultraviolet rays, but with both polyes-
ter and nylon, the degree of susceptibility to UV damage is dependent VISUAL INSPECTION
on the type of fiber and the various UV inhibitors with which the fiber The load-bearing capacity of double braid ropes such as Stable Braid is
manufacturer treats them (i.e., Samthane coaling). divided equally between the inner core and the outer cover. If upon in-
Polyolefin and PBO fibers are severely affected by ultraviolet exposure, spection, there are cut strands or significant abrasion damage the rope
especially in their natural, undyed, and/or uncovered states. must be retired because the strength of the entire rope is decreased.
Core-dependent double braids such as AmSteel® II have 100% of their
HARMFUL CHEMICALS load-bearing capacity handled by the core alone. For these ropes, the
Certain chemicals break down synthetic fibers. Sulfuric acids, alkalis, jacket can sustain damage without compromising the strength of the
and chlorinate hydrocarbons over 160° F are to be avoided, while load-bearing member. Inspection of core-dependent double braids can
strong cleaning agents or bleaches may be harmful. If you are unsure be misleading because it is difficult to see the core.
about the effect of a specific chemical, contact our customer service In the case of 12-strand single braids such as AmSteel® and Am-
department for more information. Steel®-Blue, each of the 12-strands carries approximately 8.33%, or
1/12th, of the load. If upon inspection, there are cut strands or signifi-
AVOID SHOCK LOADING cant abrasion damage to the rope, the rope must be retired or the areas
Shock loading of any line, synthetic, manila, or wire, produces of damage removed and the rope repaired with the appropriate splice.
a drastically different set of physical properties and results as com-
pared with normal loading. Shock loading is a jerking or snatching of a
line, or a very sudden change in tension such as from a relaxed state
or low load to one of high load. A sudden drop off a platform as short a
distance as four inches actually doubles the rope's load. Similarly, an
over wrap “falling off” the winch drum can result in a 50% shock load.
This results in accelerated wear of the rope.
Davit Cranes and Winches
When it comes to equipment for heavy-duty lifting and positioning, Thern

has the experience you are looking for. Large or small, heavy or light,
Thern has designed and manufactured standard and custom cranes
and winches for countless customer applications around the world.
DAVIT CRANES
MAX CAPACITY 2000 LBS
MAX LIFT UP TO 240 FT
MODELS 5PT10-M1
HANES NO. WIN40515
PORTABLE POWER WINCHES

MAX CAPACITY 2000 LBS 2000 LBS 2000 LBS
LINE SPEED 8 - 19 fpm 8 - 19 fpm 13 - 22 fpm
TRAVEL DISTANCE 190 - 280 ft 190 - 280 ft 90 ft
HP 1.3 1.3 1.2
MODELS 4WP2T8 4WP2T8-2000-8 4771
HANES NO. WIN40506 WIN40505 WIN20300
WORM GEAR HAND WINCHES

MAX CAPACITY 750 LBS 1000 LBS 2000 LBS
GEAR RATIO 20:1 15:1 24:1
APROX. WEIGHT 12 LBS 15 LBS 32 LBS
MODELS 465 462 472
HANES NO. WIN20200 WIN20000 WIN20100
SPUR GEAR HAND WINCHES

MAX CAPACITY 500 LBS 1000 LBS 2000 LBS 2000 LBS 4000 LBS
GEAR RATIO – 3:1 15:1 4:1 25:1
APROX. WEIGHT 8 LBS 17 LBS 28 LBS 23 LBS 83 LBS
MODELS M401 M4022PB M4312PB M4312 M452
HANES NO. WIN20001 WIN40041 WIN20650 WIN20600 WIN20385

Hydraulics
Enerpac Hydraulic Cylinders are available in

hundreds of different configurations. Whatever
the industrial application… lifting, pushing, pulling,
bending, holding… whatever the force capacity,
stroke length, or size restrictions… single- or dou-
ble-acting, solid or hollow plunger, you can be sure
that Enerpac has the cylinder to suit your high force
application. Enerpac jacking cylinders fully comply
to ASME B30.1 (except RD-Series).
Enerpac Hydraulic Pumps are available in over

1,000 different configurations. Whatever your
high pressure pump needs are… speed, control,
intermittent or heavy-duty performance… you can
be sure that Enerpac has the pump to suit the ap-
plication. Featuring Hand, Battery, Electric, Air and
Gasoline powered models, with multiple reservoir
and valve configurations, Enerpac offers the most
comprehensive high pressure pump line available.
Enerpac's Bolting Solutions cater to the

complete bolting work-flow, ensuring joint
integrity in a variety of applications throughout
industry: Joint Assembly, Controlled Tightening
and Joint Separation.
Hydraulics
From inflatable jacks, torque wrenches, hydraulic pumps, cylinders and valves to clamping
components and hydraulic accessories, Power Team brand high-force tools and equipment are
used wherever strong, concentrated force is required ― on construction sites, in power plants,
on rail lines, in shipyards, in mining operations and more.
Powerteam Cylinders are used for mechanical

load holding over an extended period of time.
Available in low-profile, lightweight or tonnage
models see charts on pages 89-90 to help you
select a cylinder for your application.
Need a pump for your application? Use the chart

on page 88 to help you select the right Powerteam
Pump for your specific needs.
• Start-Up Kits cover a range of lifting, shifting,

and positioning needs.
• 10 Ton kit ranges from 1-3/4" to 9-3/4", and the
25 ton kit ranges from 2-5/16" to 10-3/4". Both
include strokes ranging from approximately
1/2" to 6" respectively. All of these cylinders are
single-acting spring return.
HYDRAULIC TOOLS
TORQUE WRENCH LOW CLEARANCE HYDRAULIC FLANGE HYDRAULIC PRY BAR

TORQUE WRENCH

SPX Pump Selection
Generally Marginal Check Not recommended
Recommended Requirements for most applications
10,000 PSI MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE

PRESSURE CYLINDER CAPACITY (TONS)
STAGE 5 10 15 20 25 30 55 75 100 150 200 300 400 500
P12‡ Single 14 32 44 65 72 93
P55‡ Single 6 14 19 28 31 40 71
P19/ Low 4 8 10 15 17 21
P19L High 13 30 42 59 68 86
Hand Pumps*
P59F Low 1.8 4.1 5.7 8 9 12 20 29

High 8 17 24 34 48 50 85 122
P59(L)‡ Low 1.5 3.2 4.7 7 7.7 9.7 16.7 23.9
P157‡ High 6 14 19 28 31 40 71 101
P159‡ Low 0.5 1 1.3 1.9 2.2 2.8 5 7 9 13 18
P300‡ High 7 15 21 30 34 43 77 110 143 200 250
P460‡ Low 0.1 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.5 2.2 2.8 4.2 5.6 8.4 11.2
High 3.3 7.7 9 14 17.5 22 37 55 71 105 143 213 284
PE10 Low 0.5 1.2 1.6 2.2 2.6 3.2 5.5
High 6 13.4 18.9 27 31 39 66.2
PE17‡ Low 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 2.3 3.3 4.3 6.5 8.7
High 3.5 7.9 10.9 16 18 23 39 56.3 73 109 146
PE18 Low 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 1.8 2.3 3.9 5.7 7.3 10.8 14.6 21.9 29.2
High 3.3 7.5 10.3 15 17 21 37 53 69 102 136 207 276
PE21‡ Low 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.1 1.4 2.5 3.6 4.6 6.8 9.2 13.8 18.4
High 2.8 6.4 9 13 15 19 32 45.5 59 88 118 177 236
Electric/ Hydraulic Pumps†
PED25 Low 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.0 1.3 2.2 3.2 4.1 6.1 8.3 12.0 15.7 19.9
High 2.4 5.4 7.5 10.6 12.4 15.6 26.5 38.2 49.5 73.6 99.1 144.3 188.5 238.6
PE30‡ Low 0.2 0.45 0.6 0.9 1 1.3 2.2 3.2 4.1 6
High 2 4.5 6 9 10 13 22 32 41 60
PE46‡ Low 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.5 4.7 7.2 9.6
High 1.3 2.9 4.1 5.9 6.8 8.6 14 22 28 42 56 84 112
PE55‡ Low 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4 1.8 2.6 3.5 5.4 7.2
PE60‡ High 1.1 2.4 3.4 4.8 5.6 7.1 12 17.8 23 34 45 69 92
PQ60 Low 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.4 5.1 6.8 8.5
High 1 2.2 3.3 4.4 5.2 6.5 11 16.2 21 31 41 63 84 105
PQ120 Low 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.4 5.1 6.8 8.5
High 0.5 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.6 3.2 5.5 7.7 10 15 21 30 40 50
PE400 Low 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.6 8 1 1.5 2.1 3 4 5
High 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.6 2.2 2.9 4.4 5.9 8.7 11.6 14.5
PA6‡ Single 10 22.4 31 44.4 51.3 65.2
PA9‡ Single 10 22.4 31 44.4 51.3 65.2
Air/ Hydrolic Pumps†
PA17‡ Low 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 2.3 3.3 4.3 6.5 8.7
High 3.5 7.9 10.9 16 18 23 39 56 73 109 146
PA46‡ Low 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.3 2 2.4 3.5 4.7 7.2 9.6
High 1.3 2.9 4.1 5.9 6.8 8.6 14 22 28 56 42 84 112
PA55‡ Low 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.5 2.2 2.8 4.1 5.5 8.4 11.2
High 1.1 2.4 3.4 4.8 5.6 7.1 12 18 23 34 45 69 92
PG30 Low 0.3 0.7 1 1.3 1.6 2 3.3 4.8 6.2 9.3 12.4 18.1
Gas/ Hydrolic Pumps†
High 2 4.5 6.3 8.9 10.3 13 22 31.8 41.3 61.4 83 121

PG55‡ Low 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.4 2 2.6 3.9 5.2 7.6 9.9 12.5
High 1.1 2.5 3.5 4.9 5.6 7.1 12.1 17.3 22.5 33.5 45 66 86 109
PG120‡ Low 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.4 2 2.6 3.9 5.2 7.6 9.9 12.5
High 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 5.1 7.3 9.5 14.2 19.1 27.8 36.3 46.0
PG400 Low 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 3.8 4.9
High 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.7 2.4 3.1 4.6 6.2 9.0 11.8 15.0
‡ Some Power Team pumps are available in special configurations not listed in this catalog. Power Team can "Assemble to order" pumps with special seals, voltages, valves, relief
valve settings, etc. For your special requirements please consult your local distributor or the Power Team factory. *Hand Pumps= Number of strokes required to move piston 1".
† Air, Electric and Gasoline Engine/Hydraulic pumps= Number of seconds required to move piston 1"
SPX Cylinder Selection
Hydraulic Circuit Example
Stroke Height Stroke Height Stroke Height

TONS (IN) (IN) Order No. TONS (IN) (IN) Order No. TONS (IN) (IN) Order No.
9/16 1-5/8 RLS50 12-1/8 16-11/16 C1512C 6 11-1/16 RH306D
1 4-3/8 C51C 15 14-1/8 18-11/16 C1514C 30 6-1/8 11-3/8 RA306
3-1/4 6-1/2 C53C 16 20-9/16 C1516C 10-1/8 17-1/4 RH3010
5 5-1/4 8-1/2 C55C 17.5 2 6-7/8 RT172
5/8 2-5/8 RLS500S
5-1/4 10-1/2 C55CBT 7/16 2 RLS200
2-3/8 5 RSS502
7-1/4 10-3/4 C57C 1-3/4 3-3/4 RSS202 50
3 7-1/8 RH503
9-1/4 12-3/4 C59C 2 6-1/8 RH202
2-1/8 6-3/8 RA202 3 10-9/16 RT503
7/16 1-3/4 RLS100
20
1 3-5/8 C101C 3 6-1/16 RH203 2 4-15/16 R552C
1-1/2 3-1/2 RSS101 4-1/8 8-3/8 RA204 2 6-3/8 R552L
2-1/8 4-3/4 C102C 6 12-1/8 RH206 2 6-7/8 C552C
2-1/2 5-1/4 RH102 6-1/8 10-3/8 RA206 2-1/8 6-3/4 RA552
4-1/8 6-3/4 C104C 1 5-1/2 C251C 4-1/8 8-3/4 RA554
6-1/8 9-3/4 C106C 2 6-1/2 C252C 4-1/4 9-1/8 C554C
6-1/8 11-1/2 C106CBT 4 8-1/2 C254C 6 8-15/16 R556C
10
6-1/4 11-11/16 RD106 6-1/4 10-3/4 C256C 6 10-3/8 R556L
8 11-5/16 RH108 6-1/4 13-3/8 C256CBT 6-1/8 10-3/4 RA556
8-1/8 11-3/4 C108C 6-1/4 12-3/8 RD256 55 6-1/8 12-1/2 RA556L
25
10 15-11/16 RD1010 8-1/4 12-3/4 C258C 6-1/4 11-1/8 C556C
10-1/8 13-3/4 C1010C 10-1/4 14-3/4 C2510C 6-1/4 12-31/32 RD556
10-1/8 15-1/2 C1010CBT 12-1/4 16-3/4 C2512C 10 12-15/16 R5510C
12-1/8 15-3/4 C1012C 14-1/8 18-3/4 C2514C 10 14-3/8 R5510L
14-1/8 17-3/4 C1014C 14-1/8 21-3/8 C2514CBT 10 15-1/8 RA5510
5/16 2-3/16 RH120 14-1/8 20-3/8 RD2514 10-1/4 15-1/8 C5510C
1-5/8 4-13/16 RH121 1/2 2-5/16 RLS300 13-1/8 19-27/32 RD5513
12
1-5/8 4-13/16 RH121T 2-1/8 7-3/8 RA302 13-1/4 18-1/8 C5513C
3 7-1/4 RH123 2-7/16 4-5/8 RSS302 18-1/8 25-7/8 RD5518
1 4-7/8 C151C 2-1/2 6-1/4 RH302 3 9-1/4 RH603
2-1/8 5-7/8 C152C 30 2-1/2 8-7/16 RT302 4 9-1/2 RHA604D
4-1/8 7-7/8 C154C 3 7-1/16 RH303 60 5 9-1/2 RH605
15
6-1/8 10-11/16 C156C 4-1/8 9-3/8 RA304 6 12-1/2 RH606
8-1/8 12-11/16 C158C 5-7/8 11-1/8 RHA306 10-1/8 18-1/16 RH610
10-1/8 14-11/16 C1510C 6 9-3/4 RH306 75 5/8 3-1/8 RLS750S

SPX Cylinder Selection
Hydraulic Circuit Example
1 Cylinder 4 Guage 8 Quick Coupling 11 T-Gauge Adapter

2 Pump 5 Hose 10 Load-Lowering Valve
Stroke Height Stroke Height Stroke Height

TONS (IN) (IN) Order No. TONS (IN) (IN) Order No. TONS (IN) (IN) Order No.
6-1/8 12-3/8 C756C 2 8-1/8 R1502L 10 15-1/2 R28010C
75 280
13-1/8 19-3/8 C7513C 5 12-1/8 RH1505 10 17-13/64 R28010D
80 13-1/8 20-3/8 RD8013 6 10-3/8 R1506C 10 17-3/4 R28010L
5/8 3-3/8 RLS1000S 6 11-7/16 R1506D 6 17-9/32 RD3006
300
1-1/2 5-11/16 RSS1002D 6 12-1/8 R1506L 13 24-9/32 RD30013
1-1/2 6-1/2 RH1001 6-5/8 14-7/8 RD1506 2 9-1/8 R3552C
150
2 5-1/2 R1002C 8 13-3/4 RH1508 2 11-1/2 R3552L
2 6-41/64 R1002D 10 14-3/8 R15010C 2 15-3/8 R3552D
2 7-1/4 R1002L 10 15-7/16 R15010D 6 12-5/8 R3556C
2 8-5/8 C1002C 10 16-1/8 R15010L 355 6 15-1/2 R3556L
2-1/8 7-3/4 RA1002 13-1/8 21-3/8 RD15013 6 17-21/32 R3556D
2-1/4 5-1/2 RSS1002 18-1/8 26-17/32 RD15018 10 17-1/8 R35510C
3 10 RH1003 2 7-1/2 R2002C 10 19-1/2 R35510L
4-7/8 15-1/8 RT1004 2 8-9/64 R2002D 10 21-21/32 R35510D
6 9-1/2 R1006C 2 9-1/2 R2002L 6 18-5/8 RD4006
400
6 10-41/64 R1006D 6 11-1/2 R2006C 13 25-5/8 RD40013
100
6 11-1/4 R1006L 6 12-9/64 R2006D 2 10-3/8 R4302C
6 12-3/8 RH1006 6 13-1/2 R2006L 2 12-5/16 R4302D
6-1/4 11-3/4 RA1006 200 6-5/8 16 RD2006 6 14-3/8 R4306C
430
6-1/4 13-3/8 RA1006L 8 16-1/16 RH2008 6 16-5/16 R4306D
6-5/8 13-1/4 C1006C 10 15-1/2 R20010C 10 20-5/16 R43010C
6-5/8 13-25/32 RD1006 10 16-9/64 R20010D 10 20-53/64 R43010D
10 13-1/2 R10010C 10 17-1/2 R20010L 6 19-21/32 RD5006
500
10 14-41/64 R10010D 13-1/8 22-1/2 RD20013 13 26-21/32 RD50013
10 15-1/4 R10010L 18-1/8 28-1/2 RD20018 2 11-1/2 R5652C
10-1/8 19-13/16 RH10010 250 3 11-7/16 RSS2503 2 14-5/8 R5652L
10-1/4 16-7/8 C10010C 2 7-1/2 R2802C 2 16-19/32 R5652D
13-1/8 20-9/32 RD10013 2 9-13/64 R2802D 6 15-1/2 R5656C
20-1/8 28-9/32 RD10020 2 9-3/4 R2802L 565 6 18-5/8 R5656L
280
9/16 4 RLS1500S 6 11-1/2 R2806C 6 20-19/32 R5656D
150 2 6-3/8 R1502C 6 13-13/64 R2806D 10 19-1/2 R56510C
2 7-7/16 R1502D 6 13-3/4 R2806L 10 22-5/8 R56510L
10 24-19/32 R56510D
Dynamometers
The MSI-7200 Dyna-Link is a versatile digital The MSI-3360 Challenger II Digital Crane
force measurement and load-indicating Scale is an instrument for light-duty overhead
instrument for inside and outside use. Ask industrial weighing.
about remote display options.
MSI-7200 MSI-3360
DYNA-LINK CHALLENGER
DYNA-LINK CHALLENGER
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
500 LB. 250 LB.

TO 250 TON TO 15,000 LB.
RANGE RANGE
“PORTA-WEIGH TRANS-WEIGH
PLUS” SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
500 LB.
500 LB. TO 250 TON
TO 250 TON RANGE
RANGE
MSI-4300 MSI-6260
“PORTA-WEIGH PLUS” TRANS-WEIGH
The MSI-4300 “Porta-Weigh Plus” Overhead The MSI-6260 Trans-Weigh Radio Telemetry
Crane Scale has served duty in aerospace, Crane Scale provides trouble-free data trans-
chemical, marine, mining, petroleum, and steel mission from crane hook to digital indicator.
industry applications for heavy-duty use. Ask
about the MSI-4260 “Porta-Weigh” for
Intrinsically Safe and High Heat applications.
! WARNING Do not use this product unless properly trained.

Inspect and use according to OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturers Instructions.

Dynamometers
The DYNAFOR™ LLX1 devices are electronic load indicators to

measure tensile forces (N) and determine hanging loads (Lbs).
Precision: +/- 0.2 %

Available models from 1000 lbs to 40000 lbs.
Option: mobile display using the Zigbee technology (2.4 GHz)
Model LLX1
PRECISION AFFICHAGE INCRÉMENT
CMU (T) +/- (KG) MINIMUM (KG) (KG) POIDS (KG)
.5 1 .5 .2 1.1
1 2 1 .5 1.1
2 4 2 1 1.3
3.2 6 2 1 1.5
5 10 5 2 2.3
6.3 13 5 2 2.3
12.5 25 10 5 4.3
20 40 20 10 7
DYNAFOR™ LLXh devices are load indicators to measure tensile

forces (N) and determine hanging loads (Lbs).
One Dynafor LLXh unit consists of a sensor and a remotely
installed display (2.4 GHz connection).
Optional PC connection via USB interface.

Precision: 0.2 %
Available models from 30,000 lbs to 500,000 lbs.
Hilman Rollers
GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING THE PROPER MODEL
1. How much does the load weigh?
2. How many contact points does the load have? The Hilman rollers are rated in metric tons. Divide the number of contact
points into the total load to determine the capacity of individual rollers. Determine if the load is equally distributed or
unbalanced. If unbalanced, some rollers may carry more load and some less.
3. What is the rolling surface and its condition? The rolling surface should be hard and level, and free of debris. Where the
surface is not hard such as asphalt or dirt, a track or steel plate can be used as the rolling surface. If the surface is not
level, there must be a hold-back system on the load to brake and control it. If the floor is composed of a delicate surface,
then specify Nyton rollers which are coated to soften the roller contact.
4. Are there turns involved or is it a straight line move? If there are turns, rollers with swivels or swivels with a locking top are
suggested. If no turns, then a rigid style top is fine.
Rollers are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 to 3,000 tons. Riggers kits which consist of four rollers, steering handles and
various tops are available if moving loads with rollers is a common task. The kit comes complete with a locking steel box. A
riggers set is the same as a kit without the steel box.
Move and position all types of heavy equipment
HILMAN DELUXE KITS
• Steel or Nyton Chain
14 gauge steel
carrying case
Raised base
prevents corrosion
and provides
forklift loading
Two full-length steering

handles knock-down
for storage
Hilman Rollers
provide maximum
turning options

Windmill Lifting Brackets
Engineered Lifting Technologies, Inc., a subsidiary of the Hanes Supply Group, has received patent protection of its propri-
etary tower erection system. The system consists of all the necessary brackets, rigging & hardware required for the installation
of towers. The patent is all-inclusive, consisting of lightweight tower lifting brackets, tipping brackets, rigging and hardware.
Exclusive Two-Point Two-Point Top Pick

Top Bracket Pick • Eliminates the dangers inherent
“The Safest and Fastest Solution” with using wire rope blocks to balance a
four-point pick.
Each Bracket Weighs Only 92 lbs.
• Reduced number of brackets – Only four
• Alternatives are often over 300 lbs. needed for entire lift.
• Small size and weight offers
superior ergonomics. Exceeds ANSI/ASME Requirements
• Reduces required manpower • Zinc Dichromate plated body for outstanding
to install and reduces crane time – corrosion protection.
Can be installed by one worker. • Nickel plated inserts.
• No load bearing welds.
Adjustable Eccentric Inserts
• Tighter bolt clearance holes.
• Replaceable inserts easily
and quickly adjust to variances Designed to be Used with Slingmax®
in hole tolerances “on-the-fly.”
• Twin-Path® slings offer the patented
Check-Fast® system for inspection.
• Two individual paths offer superior
safety in the event of a rip or tear.
Other Windmill Industry

Equipment Available...
HUB BRACKET NACELLE BEAM ADJUSTABLE STAGING HOOK

Lifting Beams
LIFTING BEAMS
The Difference – Lifter vs Spreader
Lifting beams are used when available headroom is not sufficient for top rigging. Lifting
beams must be designed structurally larger than spreader beams to adequately handle load
stress. Spreader beams with top rigging are smaller because most load stress is absorbed
by the rigging. This differentiation is critical in order to properly specify the equipment
required. Make sure you know the difference.
Practical Tips for Using Overhead Lifting Attachments
INSPECTION 5. The operator should observe the lifter before

using. A defect observed shall be examined by
The lifter should be visually inspected by or under
a qualified person to determine if it is a hazard.
the direction of an appointed person on a daily or
weekly schedule depending on the nature of the
lifter and the severity of the service. Defects to HANDLING THE LOAD
look for include but are not limited to:
1. The lifter should not be loaded in excess of
1. Structural deformation. its rated load.
2. Cracks in the structural frame, welds, hoist 2. The combined weight of the lifter and load
hook attachment points, mechanically should not exceed the rated load of the crane
operating lifter. or hoist.
3. Malfunctions during operation of 3. The lifter should be applied to the load
mechanically operating lifter. in accordance with the manufacturer's
4. Loose covers, fasteners and stops. recommended operating procedures.
5. Faulty operation of automatic hold and 4. Lifter ropes and chains should not be kinked,
release mechanisms. and multiple part lines shall not be twisted
about each other.
6. Wear of hoist hooking points, load
supporting clevises, pins, slings, linkages 5. The lifter should not touch obstructions during
and mechanical parts. load movement.
7. Missing nameplates and markings. 6. The operator or other personnel should not
ride suspended loads or enter restricted
OPERATING PRACTICES spaces adjacent to them.
1. The operator should watch carefully that the 7. The load or lifter should not be slid on the floor
lifter is performing properly during the lifting or other surface.
procedure.
8. The lifter should not be used for loads for
2. The operator should be familiar with the which it is not designed.
standard crane directing hand signals.
9. If suspended loads are moved manually, they
3. The operator should respond to signals from should be pushed, not pulled.
an appointed person only. However, stop
signals from anyone shall be obeyed. 10. A preliminary lift of a few inches should be
made to establish that the load is stable.
4. The operator should notify a designated
person when he considers a load to be unsafe. 11. All loads should be accelerated and
decelerated smoothly.
LIFTING ATTACHMENTS COMPLY TO ASME STANDARDS

Lifting Attachments
Hanes Supply, Inc., is an industry leader in the
development and manufacturing of below-the-
hook lifting devices for cranes and hoists. We
have a product line to provide the customer
with an ergonomic and economical solution to
various application needs. We custom manu-
facture products to suit almost any application
requirement where there is not a standard
solution available. It is the diversity along with
our commitment to quality that is responsible
for our worldwide reputation for best possible
service, competitive product and customer
satisfaction.
All of our products meet OSHA & ASME stan-
dards. Some of the products currently offered
are Pallet Lifters, C-hooks, Narrow Aisle Coil
Lifters, Telescoping Lifters, Lifting Beams, Lift-
ing Tongs and accessories.
The most versatile spreader beam system on the market!

ASB
Adjustable
Spreader BEAM
Easier cutting! Easier drilling! Better design! Easier to transport!

• Tube Steel ends do not need to • Does not lose capacity • Brackets are stamped with size
be cut square for proper operation. at maximum spreader length. and grade of tube steel needed
• Square profile makes cutting and • Capacities up to 100 Ton & 40 foot. for the system.
drilling faster and easier. • Brackets always fit and align due • No need to ship long beams –
• Tube steel can be drilled in multiple to more consistent nature of tube just buy new steel locally at
locations for quick transitions from steel over pipe. the next jobsite.
one length to another with a single
system. The bracket itself serves
as the drilling template.
Man Baskets/ Personnel Crane Baskets
Personnel Crane or Man Baskets are used to suspend workers from either a crane or forklift. They
are designed to ASME BTH-1, and are OSHA compliant. Manufactured and tested in accordance with
code of Federal Regulations 1926.550 and ASME B30.23. Crane Baskets are designed, fabricated,
tested and certified to exceed the above standards in order to meet the demands for a long life of
rugged job site use. High Profile and Low profile options are available.
In addition to offering a wide variety of standard models, custom models can be fabricated to best
suit your needs.
All Baskets are proof tested to 125% of their WLL and can have your company’s name included on
it at no extra charge.
Standard Equipment Optional Equipment

• Four Leg Bridle w/master link & four bolt type shackles • Solid Bail, optional for restricted headroom
• Anchors for safety lanyard and / or tagline • Emergency Ramp
• Quick attach/detach test weight assembly • Rubber Bumper around bottom and top perimeter
• In-Swing, self-closing, self-latching door • Casters System allow rolling fully loaded
• Grab Rail around full interior perimeter • Expanded Metal removable or fixed overhead protection
• Full 4″ kick plate • Test Weight is available as steel concrete form for you to
• Full 42″ height expanded metal to reduce wind affect fill with concrete on the jobsite in order to provide a more
economical solution
• Slip resistant checkered plate floor
• Fork Lift Tubes for easy movement at the job site
• Painted safety yellow

Wire Rope Clips
CROSBY CLIP WARNINGS &
D
NOTE:
D= TREAD DIAMETER
APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS D 60°
1 CLIP 1 CLIP
BASE BASE
G-450 WIDTH WIDTH
(Red-U-Bolt)
4. FIGURE 4
If a pulley (sheave) is used in place of a thimble, add one additional Fist Grip.
Fist Grip spacing should be as shown. (See Figure 4)
! WARNING 5. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES:

The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use inter-locking
turnback eyes with thimbles, TURNBACK
using the recommended number
• Failure to read, understand, and follow these instructions may of clips on each eye. An alternate FIGURE 5
cause death or serious injury. method is to use twice the
• Read and understand these instructions before using clips. number of clips as used
LIVE END DEAD END
• Match the same size clip to the same size wire rope. for a turnback termination.
LOAD
• Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. The rope ends are placed
• Do not use with plastic coated wire rope. parallel to each other, LOAD
• Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of overlapping by twice the DEAD END LIVE END
equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check turnback amount shown FIGURE 6
and retighten nuts to recommended torque (See Table 1 ). in the application instruc-
tions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See
Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the mini- Figure 6). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply.
mum breaking force of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared
6. IMPORTANT
loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8" through 7/8" is 80%, and for
Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater
sizes 1" through 3-1/2" is 90%.
weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and use torque wrench to
The number of clips shown (see Table 1) is based upon using RRL or ALL retighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and
wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP, XXIP. If Seale maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected
construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy.
is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley
(sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. TABLE I
CLIP SIZE MINIMUM NO. AMOUNT OF ROPE TO *TORQUE IN FT.
The number of clips shown also applies to rotation-resistant RRL wire (IN) OF CLIPS TURN BACK IN INCHES (LBS)
rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to 1/8 2 3-1/4 4.5
rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 3/16 2 3-3/4 7.5
inch and smaller. 1/4 2 4-3/4 15
For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contact- 5/16 2 5-1/4 30
ing Crosby Engineering to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of 3/8 2 6-1/2 45
wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. 7/16 2 7 65
1/2 3 11-1/2 65
For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA 1926.251. 9/16 3 12 95
5/8 3 12 95
3/4 4 18 130
1.
7/8 4 19 225
Refer to Table I following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of
1 5 26 225
rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one base width from dead end of
1-1/8 6 34 225
rope. Apply U-Bolt over dead end of wire rope – live end rests in saddle.
1-1/4 7 44 360
Tighten nuts evenly, alternate from one nut to the other until reaching the
1-3/8 7 44 360
recommended torque.
1-1/2 8 54 360
2. 1-5/8 8 58 430
When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or 1-3/4 8 61 590
thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating until reaching the 2 8 71 750
recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the 2-1/4 8 73 750
second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip 2-1/2 9 84 750
firmly, but do not tighten. 2-3/4 10 100 750
3 10 106 1200
3. 3-1/2 12 149 1200
When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip.
between first two – take up rope slack – tighten nuts on each U-Bolt evenly, If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback
alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque. should be increased proportionately.*The tightening torque values shown are based
upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.
Wire Rope Clips
CROSBY® CLIPS
Look for the Red-U-Bolt®,
your assurance of
E
• Sizes 1/8" through 3" have forged bases Crosby Clips.
• Entire clip – hot dip galvanized to resist

corrosive and rusting action.
A
F • Only genuine Crosby clips have a red

G
U-BOLT for instant recognition.
• All clips are individually bagged or tagged

with proper application instructions and
B
warning information.
C
• Clip sizes up through 1-1/2" have
D rolled threads. G-450
SEE APPLICATION AND

Crosby clips all sizes 1/4" and larger meet
Federal Specification FF-C-450 TYPE 1 CLASS 1.
! WARNING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS (IN)
ROPE SIZE G-450 STOCK STD. PKG. WT PER
(IN) NO. GALV. QTY. 100 (LBS) A B C D E F G H
1/8 1010015 100 6 .22 .72 .44 .47 .37 .38 .81 .99
*3/16 1010033 100 10 .25 .97 .56 .59 .50 .44 .94 1.18
1/4 1010051 100 19 .31 1.03 .50 .75 .66 .56 1.19 1.43
5/16 1010079 100 28 .38 1.38 .75 .88 .73 .69 1.31 1.66
3/8 1010097 100 48 .44 1.50 .75 1.00 .91 .75 1.63 1.94
7/16 1010113 50 78 .50 1.88 1.00 1.19 1.13 .88 1.91 2.28
1/2 1010131 50 80 .50 1.88 1.00 1.19 1.13 .88 1.91 2.28
9/16 1010159 50 109 .56 2.25 1.25 1.31 1.34 .94 2.06 2.50
5/8 1010177 50 110 .56 2.25 1.25 1.31 1.34 .94 2.06 2.50
3/4 1010195 25 142 .62 2.75 1.44 1.50 1.39 1.06 2.25 2.84
7/8 1010211 25 212 .75 3.12 1.62 1.75 1.58 1.25 2.44 3.16
1 1010239 10 252 .75 3.50 1.81 1.88 1.77 1.25 2.63 3.47
1-1/8 1010257 10 283 .75 3.88 2.00 2.00 1.91 1.25 2.81 3.59
1-1/4 1010275 10 438 .88 4.44 2.22 2.34 2.17 1.44 3.13 4.13
1-3/8 1010293 10 442 .88 4.44 2.22 2.34 2.31 1.44 3.13 4.19
1-1/2 1010319 10 544 .88 4.94 2.38 2.59 2.44 1.44 3.41 4.44
1-5/8 1010337 Bulk 704 1.00 5.31 2.62 2.75 2.66 1.63 3.63 4.75
1-3/4 1010355 Bulk 934 1.13 5.75 2.75 3.06 2.92 1.81 3.81 5.24
2 1010373 Bulk 1300 1.25 6.44 3.00 3.38 3.03 2.00 4.44 5.88
2-1/4 1010391 Bulk 1600 1.25 7.13 3.19 3.88 3.19 2.00 4.56 6.38
2-1/2 1010417 Bulk 1900 1.25 7.69 3.44 4.13 3.69 2.00 4.69 6.63
†2-3/4 1010435 Bulk 2300 1.25 8.31 3.56 4.38 4.88 2.00 5.00 6.88
3 1010453 Bulk 3100 1.50 9.19 3.88 4.75 4.44 2.38 5.31 7.61
†3-1/2 1010426 Bulk 4000 1.50 10.75 4.50 5.50 6.00 2.38 6.19 8.38
*Electro-plated U-Bolt and Nuts
†2-3/4" and 3-1/2" are made of cast steel.

Master Link
MASTER LINK
• Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered.
• Individually proof tested at 2 times Working
Load Limit with certification.
• Proof test certification shipped with each link.
• Sizes from 1/2" to 2" are drop forged.
DIMENSIONS (IN)
A-342 STOCK WEIGHT EACH PROOF LOAD DEFORMATION
SIZE (IN) NO. (LBS) WLL (LBS)* (LBS)** A B C INDICATOR
1/2W 1014266 1.3 7400 17200 .62 2.80 5.00 3.50
5/8 1014280 1.5 9000 18000 .62 3.00 6.00 3.50
3/4W 1014285 2.0 12300 28400 .73 3.20 6.00 4.00
7/8W 1014319 3.3 15200 35200 .88 3.75 6.38 4.50
1W 1014331 6.1 26000 60000 1.10 4.30 7.50 5.50
A-342
1-1/4W 1014348 12.0 39100 90400 1.33 5.50 9.50 7.00
1-1/2W 1014365 18.6 61100 141200 1.61 5.90 10.50 7.50
1-3/4 1014388 25.2 84900 212250 1.75 6.00 12.00 7.50
2 1014404 37.0 102600 256500 2.00 7.00 14.00 9.00
2-1/4 1014422 54.1 143100 289200 2.25 8.00 16.00 10.00 C
2-1/2 1014468 68.5 160000 320000 2.50 8.38 16.00 11.00
2-3/4 1014440 94.0 216900 433800 2.75 9.88 18.00 12.50
3 1014486 115 228000 456000 3.00 9.88 18.00 13.00
3-1/4 1014501 145 262200 524400 3.25 10.00 20.00 13.50
3-1/2 1014529 200 279000 558000 3.50 12.00 24.00 15.50 B A
3-3/4 1015051 198 336000 672000 3.75 10.00 20.00 13.50
4 1015060 264 373000 746000 4.00 12.00 24.00 16.00
†† 4-1/4 1015067 302 354000 708000 4.25 12.00 24.00 –
†† 4-1/2 1015079 345 360000 720000 4.50 14.00 28.00 –
†† 4-3/4 1015088 436 389000 778000 4.75 14.00 28.00 –
†† 5 1015094 516 395000 790000 5.00 15.00 30.00 –
*Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. **Proof
Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. ††Welded Master Link.
MASTER LINK ASSEMBLY

• Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered.
• Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification.
• Proof test certification shipped with each link.
WLL
BASED
ON 5:1 A-345
A-342 WEIGHT DESIGN PROOF DIMENSIONS (IN) DEFORMA- B
SIZE STOCK EACH FACTOR LOAD TION
(IN) NO. (LBS) (LBS) (LBS)** A B C D E F G INDICATOR
3/4W 1014739 3.5 12300 28400 .73 3.20 6.00 .56 3.35 1.77 .30 4.00
7/8W 1014742 4.8 15200 35200 .88 3.75 6.38 .56 3.35 1.77 .30 4.50 A
1W 1014766 9.3 26000 60000 1.10 4.30 7.50 .75 3.94 2.36 .33 5.50 C
1-1/4W 1014779 15.8 39100 90400 1.33 5.50 9.50 1.00 6.30 3.54 .51 7.00
1-1/2W 1014807 34.1 61100 141200 1.61 5.90 10.50 1.25 7.09 3.94 .65 7.50 G
1-3/4 1014814 46.7 84900 212250 1.75 6.00 12.00 1.38 8.00 5.00 .73 7.50
2 1014832 67.2 102600 256500 2.00 7.00 14.00 1.50 9.00 5.75 – 9.00
2-1/2 1014855 206 160000 320000 2.50 8.38 16.00 2.50 16.00 8.38 – 11.00 D
2-3/4 1014864 282 216900 433800 2.75 9.88 18.00 2.75 18.00 9.88 – 12.50
E
4 1014999 667 373000 746000 4.00 12.00 24.00 3.50 24.00 12.00 – 15.50***
*Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. The maximum individual sublink working load limit is 75% of the assembly working load limit except
for 2-1/2" and 2-3/4", which are 100% of assembly working load limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design
factor of 5. **Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. ***Sublink only.
F
Shackle Application Instructions
Round Pin Shackles can be used in tie down towing, suspension

or lifting applications where the load is strictly applied in-line. Round
pin shackles should never be used in rigging applications to gather,
multiple sling legs, or where side loading conditions may occur.
Screw Pin Shackles are used in Pick and Place* applications. For
permanent or long-term installations, Crosby recommends the use of
bolt type shackles.
If you choose to disregard Crosby's recommendation, the screw pin
shall be secured from rotation or loosening (next page).
Screw pin shackles can be used for applications involving side-loading
circumstances. Reduced working load limits are required for side-load-
ing applications. While in service, do not allow the screw pin to be
rotated by a live line, such as a chocker application.
*Pick and Place application: Pick (move) a load and place as required.
Tighten screw pin before each pick.
Bolt-Type Shackles can be used in any application where round pin

or screw pin shackles are used. In addition, they are recommended
for permanent or long term installations and where the load may slide
on the shackle pin causing the pin to rotate. The bolt-type shackle's
secondary securement system, utilizing a nut and cotter, eliminates the
requirement to tighten pin before each lift or movement of load.

RIGGING PRACTICE SHACKLES
Screw pin shall be fully engaged. If designed for a cotter pin, it shall be used WIRE ROPE SLINGS AND
CONNECTIONS TO FITTINGS
and maintained. Applied load should be centered in the bow to prevent side USE A THIMBLE TO
loading. Multiple sling legs should not be applied to the pin. If side loaded, the PROTECT SLING AND
TO INCREASE D/d
rated load shall be reduced according to Table 1 on the next page.
NEVER PLACE EYE
OVER FITTING SMALLER
SCREW PIN SHACKLES PIN SECURITY DIAMETER OR WIDTH
THAN THE ROPE'S
DIAMETER
MOUSE SCREW PIN WHEN USED IN LONG-TERM
OR HIGH-VIBRATION APPLICATIONS.
Mouse or Mousing (screw pin shackle) is a secondary securement WIRE ROPE SLINGS AND
method used to secure screw pin from rotation or loosening. Annealed CONNECTIONS TO FITTINGS
iron wire is looped through hole in collar of pin and around adjacent NEVER PLACE A SLING
EYE OVER A FITTING WITH
leg of shackle body with wire ends securely twisted together. A DIAMETER OR WIDTH
GREATER THAN ONE HALF
SHACKLES
THE NATURAL LENGTH OF
THE EYE
SYNTHETIC SLINGS RATED LOAD

FOLDING, BUNCHING OR PINCHING OF SYN-
THETIC SLINGS, WHICH OCCURS WHEN USED
WITH SHACKLES, HOOK OR OTHER APPLICA-
ROUND PIN SCREW PIN BOLT TYPE TIONS. WILL REDUCE THE RATED LOAD.
Do not side load, do not Use when picking and Use in permanent or long-
use as a collector ring, placing a load, tighten pin term installations, always
always use cotter pin. prior to each lift. use nut and cotter. BUNCHING PINCHING
ASME B30.9
CONNECTION OF SLINGS TO SHACKLES
CHOKER HITCH FORMED
WITH SHACKLES WITH CHOKER
HOOK
PLACE PIN IN
Diameter of shackle must be Shackle must be large EYE OF SLING
CORRECT!
greater than wire rope diame- enough to avoid pinching of
ter if no thimble in eye. synthetic slings.
BOLT TYPE SHACKLES

CROSBY SHACKLES
POINT LOADING
POINT LOADING OF CROSBY
SHACKLE BOWS IS ACCEPT-
Use Bolt-Type Shackle when ABLE
POINT LOADING OF CROSBY
a permanent or long-term SHACKLE PINS IS ACCEPT-
connection ABLE AS LOAD IS REASON-
ABLY CENTERED ON THE PIN
Although point loading is acceptable, a pad eye width
Use a screw pin shackle of 80% or more of shackle spread is best practice.
when it will be a temporary
connection.
SIDE LOADED RATING REDUCTION TABLE 3/16" - 3" (120 METRIC TONS)
Angle loads must be

applied in the plane
of the bow.
TABLE I
SIDE LOADING REDUCTION CHART FOR
SCREW PIN & BOLT TYPE SHACKLES ONLY+
ANGLE OF SIDE LOAD FROM
VERTICAL IN-LINE SHACKLE ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD LIMIT
0°-5° In-Line* 100% of rated working load limit
45° from In-Line* 70% of rated working load limit
90° from In-Line* 50% of rated working load limit
+ In-Line load is applied perpendicular to pin.
* DO NOT SIDE LOAD ROUND PIN SHACKLE
For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, where the angle of the side load is greater than 5 degrees, contact Crosby Engineering.
INCLUDED ANGLE - SHACKLES
Never exceed 120° included Shackles symmetrically loaded with

angle. Use Bolt Type and two leg slings having a maximum
Screw Pin Shackles ONLY. included angle of 120° can be utilized
to full Working Load Limit.
For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, the maximum included angle is 90 degrees for full working load limit. Contact Crosby
Engineering if included angle is greater than 90 degrees.

Forged Shackles
SCREW PIN • Working load limit permanently shown on every shackle. ROUND PIN
• Forged – Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins.
• Capacities 1/3 through 55 tons.
• Look for the red pin...the mark of genuine Crosby quality.
• Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to
designated standards such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other
G-209 S-209 certification available when requested at the time of order.
• Hot dip galvanized or self-colored. G-213 S-213
Screw pin anchor shackles meet the
Round pin anchor shackles meet the
requirements of Federal Specification • Fatigue rated. requirements of Federal Specification
RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 2.
RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 1.
NOM. WORKING STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

SIZE LOAD LIMIT* G-209 G-213 G-209 G-213
(IN) (TONS) GALV. S-209 S.C. GALV. S-213 S.C. S-209 S-213
3/16 †1/3 1018357 – – – .06 –
1/4 1/2 1018375 1018384 1018017 1018026 .10 .13
5/16 3/4 1018393 1018400 1018035 1018044 .18 .18
3/8 1 1018419 1018428 1018053 1018062 .31 .29
7/16 1-1/2 1018437 1018446 1018071 1018080 .38 .38
1/2 2 1018455 1018464 1018099 1018106 .72 .71
5/8 3-1/4 1018473 1018482 1018115 1018124 1.37 1.50
3/4 4-3/4 1018491 1018507 1018133 1018142 2.35 2.32
7/8 6-1/2 1018516 1018525 1018151 1018160 3.62 3.49
1 8-1/2 1018534 1018543 1018179 1018188 5.03 5.00
1-1/8 9-1/2 1018552 1018561 1018197 1018204 7.41 6.97
1-1/4 12 1018570 1018589 1018213 1018222 9.50 9.75
1-3/8 13-1/2 1018598 1018605 1018231 1018240 13.53 13.25
1-1/2 17 1018614 1018623 1018259 1018268 17.20 17.25
1-3/4 25 1018632 1018641 1018277 1018286 27.78 29.46
2 35 1018650 1018669 1018295 1018302 45.00 45.75
2-1/2 †55 1018678 1018687 – – 85.75 –
WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN) TOLERANCE +/-

NOM. LOAD
SIZE LIMIT* A B C D E F G H L M N P C A
3/16 †1/3 .38 .25 .88 .19 .60 .56 .98 1.47 .16 1.14 – .19 .06 .06
1/4 1/2 .47 .31 1.13 .25 .78 .61 1.28 1.84 .19 1.43 1.34 .25 .06 .06
5/16 3/4 .53 .38 1.22 .31 .84 .75 1.47 2.09 .22 1.71 1.59 .31 .06 .06
3/8 1 .66 .44 1.44 .38 1.03 .91 1.78 2.49 .25 2.02 1.86 .38 .13 .06
7/16 1-1/2 .75 .50 1.69 .44 1.16 1.06 2.03 2.91 .31 2.37 2.13 .44 .13 .06
1/2 2 .81 .63 1.88 .50 1.31 1.19 2.31 3.28 .38 2.69 2.38 .50 .13 .06
5/8 3-1/4 1.06 .75 2.38 .63 1.69 1.50 2.94 4.19 .44 3.34 2.91 .69 .13 .06
3/4 4-3/4 1.25 .88 2.81 .75 2.00 1.81 3.50 4.97 .50 3.97 3.44 .81 .25 .06
7/8 6-1/2 1.44 1.00 3.31 .88 2.28 2.09 4.03 5.83 .50 4.50 3.81 .97 .25 .06
1 8-1/2 1.69 1.13 3.75 1.00 2.69 2.38 4.69 6.56 .56 5.13 4.53 1.06 .25 .06
1-1/8 9-1/2 1.81 1.25 4.25 1.16 2.91 2.69 5.16 7.47 .63 5.71 5.13 1.25 .25 .06
1-1/4 12 2.03 1.38 4.69 1.29 3.25 3.00 5.75 8.25 .69 6.25 5.50 1.38 .25 .06
1-3/8 13-1/2 2.25 1.50 5.25 1.42 3.63 3.31 6.38 9.16 .75 6.83 6.13 1.50 .25 .13
1-1/2 17 2.38 1.63 5.75 1.54 3.88 3.63 6.88 10.00 .81 7.33 6.50 1.62 .25 .13
1-3/4 25 2.88 2.00 7.00 1.84 5.00 4.19 8.86 12.34 1.00 9.06 7.75 2.25 .25 .13
2 35 3.25 2.25 7.75 2.08 5.75 4.81 9.97 13.68 1.22 10.35 8.75 2.40 .25 .13
2-1/2 †55 4.13 2.75 10.50 2.71 7.25 5.69 12.87 17.84 1.38 13.00 – 3.13 .25 .25
*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. †Furnished in screw pin only.
Bolt-Type Shackles
BOLT-TYPE ANCHOR SHACKLE
• Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle.
• Forged – quenched and tempered, with alloy pins.
• Capacities 1/3 through 150 metric tons.
• Look for the red pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality.
• Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated
standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for
proof testing and certification available when requested at time of order.
• Hot dip galvanized or self colored.
• Fatigue rated.
• Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.
• Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME
B30.26.
G-2130 S-2130 • Approved for use at -40° F to 400° F.
Bolt Type Anchor shackles with

thin head bolt–nut with cotter pin,
meets the requirements of Federal ®
Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA,

Grade A, Class 3.
WORKING 2130 TOLERANCE

NOM. LOAD STOCK NO. WEIGHT DIMENSIONS(IN) +/-
SIZE LIMIT* G-2130 EACH
(IN) (TONS) GALV. S-2130 (LBS) A B C D E F H L M N C A
3/16 1/3 ŧ 1019464 – .06 .38 .25 .88 .19 .60 .56 1.47 .98 1.29 .19 .06 .06
1/4 1/2 1019466 – .11 .47 .31 1.13 .25 .78 .61 1.84 1.28 1.56 .25 .06 .06
5/16 3/4 1019468 – .22 .53 .38 1.22 .31 .84 .75 2.09 1.47 1.82 .31 .06 .06
3/8 1 1019470 – .33 .66 .44 1.44 .38 1.03 .91 2.49 1.78 2.17 .38 .13 .06
7/16 1-1/2 1019471 – .49 .75 .50 1.69 .44 1.16 1.06 2.91 2.03 2.51 .44 .13 .06
1/2 2 1019472 1019481 .79 .81 .64 1.88 .50 1.31 1.19 3.28 2.31 2.80 .50 .13 .06
5/8 3-1/4 1019490 1019506 1.68 1.06 .77 2.38 .63 1.69 1.50 4.19 2.94 3.56 .69 .13 .06
3/4 4-3/4 1019515 1019524 2.72 1.25 .89 2.81 .75 2.00 1.81 4.97 3.50 4.15 .81 .25 .06
7/8 6-1/2 1019533 1019542 3.95 1.44 1.02 3.31 .88 2.28 2.09 5.83 4.03 4.82 .97 .25 .06
1 8-1/2 1019551 1019560 5.66 1.69 1.15 3.75 1.00 2.69 2.38 6.56 4.69 5.39 1.06 .25 .06
1-1/8 9-1/2 1019579 1019588 8.27 1.81 1.25 4.25 1.13 2.91 2.69 7.47 5.16 5.90 1.25 .25 .06
1-1/4 12 1019597 1019604 11.71 2.03 1.40 4.69 1.29 3.25 3.00 8.25 5.75 6.69 1.38 .25 .06
1-3/8 13-1/2 1019613 1019622 15.83 2.25 1.53 5.25 1.42 3.63 3.31 9.16 6.38 7.21 1.50 .25 .13
1-1/2 17 1019631 1019640 19.00 2.38 1.66 5.75 1.53 3.88 3.63 10.00 6.88 7.73 1.62 .25 .13
1-3/4 25 1019659 1019668 33.91 2.88 2.04 7.00 1.84 5.00 4.19 12.34 8.80 9.68 2.25 .25 .13
2 35 1019677 1019686 52.25 3.25 2.30 7.75 2.08 5.75 4.81 13.68 10.15 10.81 2.40 .25 .13
2-1/2 55 1019695 1019702 98.25 4.13 2.80 10.50 2.71 7.25 5.69 17.90 12.75 13.58 3.13 .25 .25
3 †85 1019711 – 154.00 5.00 3.30 13.00 3.12 7.88 6.50 21.50 14.62 15.13 3.62 .25 .25
3-1/2 †120ŧ 1019739 – 265.00 5.25 3.76 14.63 3.62 9.00 8.00 24.88 17.02 17.00 4.38 .25 .25
4 †150ŧ 1019757 – 383.00 5.50 4.26 14.50 4.00 10.00 9.00 25.68 18.00 17.75 4.56 .25 .25
*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. † Individually Proof Tested with certification
ŧ Furnished in Anchor style only and furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handles

Bolt-Type Shackles
BOLT-TYPE CHAIN SHACKLE
• Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle.

• Forged – quenched and tempered, with alloy pins.
• Capacities 1/2 through 85 metric tons.
• Look for the red pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality.
• Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to
designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other
certification. Charges for proof testing and certification avail-
able when requested at time of order.
• Hot dip galvanized or self colored.
• Fatigue rated.
• Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.
• Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26.
G-2150 S-2150 • Approved for use at -40° F to 400° F.
Bolt Type Chain shackles with thin

hex head bolt–nut with cotter pin,
meets the requirements of Federal ®
Specification RR-C-271D Type IVB,

Grade A, Class 3.
2150 TOLERANCE
NOM. WORKING STOCK NO. WEIGHT DIMENSIONS(IN) +/-
SIZE LOAD LIMIT* EACH
(IN) (TONS) G-2150 GALV. A-2150 S.C. (LBS) A B D F G K M P R G A
1/4 1/2 1019768 – .13 .47 .31 .25 .62 .91 1.59 .97 1.56 .25 .06 .06
5/16 3/4 1019770 – .23 .53 .38 .31 .75 1.07 1.91 1.15 1.82 .31 .06 .06
3/8 1 1019772 – .33 .66 .44 .38 .92 1.28 2.31 1.42 2.17 .38 .13 .06
7/16 1-1/2 1019774 – .49 .75 .50 .44 1.06 1.48 2.67 1.63 2.51 .44 .13 .06
1/2 2 1019775 1019784 .75 .81 .64 .50 1.18 1.66 3.03 1.81 2.80 .50 .13 .06
5/8 3-1/4 1019793 1019800 1.47 1.06 .77 .63 1.50 2.04 3.76 2.32 3.56 .63 .13 .06
3/4 4-3/4 1019819 1019828 2.52 1.25 .89 .75 1.81 2.40 4.53 2.75 4.15 .81 .25 .06
7/8 6-1/2 1019837 1019846 3.85 1.44 1.02 .88 2.10 2.86 5.33 3.20 4.82 .97 .25 .06
1 8-1/2 1019855 1019864 5.55 1.69 1.15 1.00 2.38 3.24 5.94 3.69 5.39 1.00 .25 .06
1-1/8 9-1/2 1019873 1019882 7.60 1.81 1.25 1.13 2.68 3.61 6.78 4.07 5.90 1.25 .25 .06
1-1/4 12 1019891 1019908 10.81 2.03 1.40 1.25 3.00 3.97 7.50 4.53 6.69 1.38 .25 .06
1-3/8 13-1/2 1019917 1019926 13.75 2.25 1.53 1.38 3.31 4.43 8.28 5.01 7.21 1.50 .25 .13
1-1/2 17 1019935 1019944 18.50 2.38 1.66 1.50 3.62 4.87 9.05 5.38 7.73 1.62 .25 .13
1-3/4 25 1019953 1019962 31.40 2.88 2.04 1.75 4.19 5.82 10.97 6.38 9.33 2.12 .25 .13
2 35 1019971 1019980 46.75 3.25 2.30 2.10 5.00 6.82 12.74 7.25 10.41 2.36 .25 .13
2-1/2 55 1019999 1020004 85.00 4.13 2.80 2.63 5.68 8.07 14.85 9.38 13.58 2.63 .25 .25
3 †85 1020013 – 124.25 5.00 3.25 3.00 6.50 8.56 16.87 11.00 15.13 3.50 .25 .25
*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit.
† Individually Proof Tested with certification
Alloy Bolt-Type Shackles
BOLT-TYPE ANCHOR SHACKLE
WORKING STOCK NO. WEIGHT

NOM. SIZE LOAD LIMIT* G-2140 S-2140 EACH G-2140 S-2140
(IN) (TONS) GALV. S.C. (LBS)
1-1/2 30 1021110 1021129 18.8
1-3/4 40 1021138 1021147 33.8 • Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle.
2 55 1021156 1021165 49.9 • Alloy bows, alloy bolts.
2-1/2 85 1021174 1021183 103 • Quenched and tempered.
3 120 1021192 – 162 • Sizes 200 tons and larger are individually proof tested.
3-1/2 †150 1021218 – 327 • Forged Alloy Steel 30 through 175 metric tons. Cast Alloy
4 †175 1021236 – 318 Steel 200 through 400 metric tons.
4-3/4 †200 1021234 – 461 • Pins are galvanized and painted red.
5 †250 1021443 – 608 • Sizes 1-1/2 and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.
6 †300 1021252 – 797
• Approved use at -40°F to 400°F.
7** †400 1021478 – 1289
NOM. WORKING
SIZE LOAD LIM- DIMENSIONS(IN) TOLERANCE +/-
(IN) IT* (TONS) A B C D +/- .02 E F G H J K L M N A E
1-1/2 30 2.38 3.62 1.62 1.63 5.75 1.39 6.88 7.73 10.00 3.88 1.53 – – .13 .25
1-3/4 40 2.88 4.19 2.25 2.00 7.00 1.75 8.81 9.33 12.34 5.00 1.84 – – .13 .25
2 55 3.25 4.81 2.40 2.25 7.75 2.00 10.16 10.41 13.68 5.75 2.08 – – .13 .25
2-1/2 85 4.12 5.81 3.12 2.75 10.50 2.62 12.75 13.58 17.90 7.25 2.71 – – .25 .25
3 †120 5.00 6.50 3.63 3.25 13.00 3.00 14.62 15.13 21.50 7.88 3.12 – – .25 .25
3-1/2 †150 5.25 8.00 4.38 3.75 14.63 3.75 17.02 20.33 24.88 9.00 3.62 4.00 1.80 .25 .25
4 †175 5.50 9.00 4.56 4.25 14.50 4.00 18.00 21.20 25.68 10.00 4.00 4.00 1.80 .25 .25
4-3/4 †200 7.25 10.50 5.00 4.75 15.19 4.58 20.84 24.04 27.81 11.00 4.75 4.00 1.80 .25 .25
5 †250 8.50 12.00 5.62 5.00 18.50 4.85 23.62 24.87 32.61 13.00 5.00 4.00 1.80 .25 .25
6 †300 8.38 13.00 6.06 6.00 18.72 4.89 24.76 26.22 34.28 13.00 5.88 4.00 1.80 .25 .25
7** †400 8.25 14.00 7.25 7.00 22.50 6.50 26.00 29.66 40.25 13.00 6.00 4.00 1.80 .25 .25
*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit on 200 through 400 metric tons. For sizes 30 thru
175 metric tons, Minimum Ultimate Load is 5.4 times the Working Load Limit.
**Cast Alloy Steel.
†Furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handle.

Wide Body Shackles
“WIDE BODY” SLING SAVER SHACKLES INCREASE SLING LIFE

• Greatly improves wearability of wire rope slings.
• Increase in shackle bow radius provides minimum 58% gain
in sling bearing surface & eliminates need for a thimble.
• Increases usable sling strength minimum of 15%.
• Pin is non-rotating, with weld on handles for easier use.
• All ratings are in metric tons, embossed on side of bow.
• Sizes 400 tons and larger are tested to 1.33 times WLL.
• Standard 2160 shackles 400 tons and larger are individually
proof tested with Crosby certification. Shackles requiring ABS,
DNV, Lloyds and other certifications are available upon spe-
cial request and must be specified at time of order.
• Weighs no more than conventionally designed shackles.
• All sizes quenched and tempered for maximum strength.
G-2160 • Forged alloy steel from 7 tons through 1,550 metric tons. Conventional
Shackle
Patented • Cast alloy steel from 400 tons through 1,550 metric tons.
• All bows are furnished Dimetcoted. All pins are Dimetcoted
then painted red.
"Wide body"
Shackle
G-2160 S-2160 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS(IN)

WLL STOCK STOCK EACH B D
(T)* NO. NO. (LBS) A +/- .25 C +/- .02 E G H J K M N P R
7 1021256 1021548 4.0 4.14 1.25 0.69 0.88 1.82 1.25 3.56 1.60 1.25 – – 4.10 5.87
12.5 1021265 1021557 8.80 5.38 1.69 0.92 1.13 2.38 1.37 4.63 2.13 1.63 – – 5.51 7.63
18 1021274 1021566 14.90 6.69 2.03 1.16 1.38 2.69 1.50 5.81 2.50 2.00 – – 6.76 9.38
30 1021283 1021575 26.50 7.69 2.37 1.38 1.63 3.50 2.50 6.94 3.13 2.50 – – 8.50 11.38
40 1021285 1021584 46.00 9.28 2.88 1.69 2.00 4.00 1.75 8.06 3.75 3.00 – – 10.62 13.62
55 1021287 1021593 68.00 10.36 3.25 2.00 2.25 4.63 2.63 9.36 4.50 3.50 – – 12.26 15.63
75 1022101 – 112 14.37 4.13 2.12 2.75 5.34 3.50 15.91 4.75 3.64 4.00 1.80 12.28 18.41
125 1022110 – 193 18.32 5.12 2.66 3.15 6.50 3.75 18.32 5.91 4.33 4.00 1.80 15.46 22.98
200 1022118 – 420 21.20 5.91 2.94 4.12 8.41 5.25 21.20 8.63 5.42 4.00 1.80 20.26 30.43
300 1022127 – 805 24.20 7.38 3.84 5.25 10.50 6.13 24.20 10.38 6.31 4.00 1.80 23.93 37.66
400 1021334 – 1143 30.27 8.66 5.16 6.30 12.56 7.99 28.72 12.60 7.28 4.00 1.80 27.17 38.78
500 1021343 – 1439 33.35 9.84 5.73 7.09 13.39 8.09 31.21 13.39 8.86 4.00 1.80 31.10 42.72
600 1021352 – 2132 36.02 10.83 6.23 7.87 15.50 13.00 35.36 14.57 9.74 5.75 2.25 34.05 47.24
700 1021361 – 2579 38.91 11.81 6.59 8.46 17.03 8.87 37.52 15.75 10.63 5.75 2.25 37.01 50.18
800 1021254 – 3025 41.66 12.80 7.30 9.06 17.69 9.76 39.90 16.54 10.92 5.75 2.25 38.39 52.09
900 1021389 – 3775 43.73 13.78 7.78 9.84 18.81 13.00 42.20 18.81 11.52 5.75 2.25 40.35 54.59
1000 1021370 – 4079 45.98 14.96 8.33 10.63 20.00 10.26 44.30 18.11 12.11 5.75 2.25 42.32 55.31
1250 1021272 – 5320 49.86 16.99 9.16 11.81 22.56 13.92 39.62 20.87 12.70 – – 46.26 65.35
1550 1021281 – 8302 54.89 18.31 11.10 12.60 24.25 12.52 42.32 22.82 13.29 – – 51.81 74.63
*7t-300t Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
400t-1550t Prof Load is 1.33 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.
Easy-Loc®
CROSBY ALLOY EASY-LOC SHACKLES
• Quenched and tempered.
• RFID EQUIPPED
• Approved for use at -40°F to 400°F
• All sizes are individually proof tested to
2.0 times the Working Load Limit
• Furnished with Round Head bolts with
an eyebolt for handling
G-2140E
TOLERANCE
NOMINAL WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN) +/-
SHACKLE WLL STOCK EACH D +/-
SIZE (IN) (TONS)* NO. (LBS) A B C .02 E F G H J K L M N A E
4-3/4 200 1021475 458 7.25 10.50 5.00 4.75 15.19 4.58 20.84 23.01 27.81 11.00 4.75 4.00 1.80 0.25 0.25
5 250 1021484 597 8.50 12.00 5.63 5.00 18.50 4.48 23.63 23.84 32.63 13.00 5.00 4.00 1.80 0.25 0.25
6 300 1021493 791 8.38 13.00 6.06 6.00 18.72 4.89 24.76 25.01 34.28 13.00 5.88 4.00 1.80 0.25 0.25
*Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit.
CROSBY WIDE BODY EASY-LOC SHACKLES
• Quenched and tempered.

• RFID EQUIPPED
• Approved for use at -40°F to 400°F
• All sizes are individually proof tested to
2.0 times the Working Load Limit
G-2160E
Patented
WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

WLL STOCK EACH B +/- D +/-
(TONS)* NO. (LBS) A .25 C .02 E G H J K M N P R
75 1021500 110 15.04 4.13 2.39 2.75 5.34 3.75 11.54 5.00 3.64 4.00 1.80 12.64 18.66
125 1021509 190 17.70 5.12 3.10 3.15 6.50 3.75 14.37 5.91 4.33 4.00 1.80 15.47 23.00
200 1021518 408 19.35 5.91 3.39 4.12 8.41 5.25 18.91 8.63 5.42 4.00 1.80 20.47 30.44
300 1021527 787 22.61 7.38 4.30 5.25 10.50 6.13 23.63 10.38 6.31 4.00 1.80 23.93 37.51
*Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit.

Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles
SLING SAVER S-281

• All Alloy Construction.
• Design Factor of 5 to 1.
• Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material trace-
ability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it.
• Incorporates same ear spread and pin dimensions as conventional Crosby
Shackles. Allows easy connection to pad eyes, eye bolts, and lifting lugs.
Web Sling Shackle is • Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting
designed to connect
Synthetic Web Slings in an increased area for load distribution, thus:
and Synthetic Round
Slings to eyebolts, pad • Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard
eyes, and lifting logs.
anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This
allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.
• Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers.
• Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26
including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements.
Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including
fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B30.26.
• Look for the Red Pin... The mark of genuine Crosby Quality.
S-281 WEB SLING SHACKLE

ROUND WEB SLINGS* WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN)
SLING WEBBING EYE LOAD WEIGHT
SIZE WIDTH WIDTH LIMIT S-281 EACH
(NO) (IN) (IN) PLY (TONS) STOCK NO (LBS) A C D E K M N
1&2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021048 1.2 1.06 2.50 0.75 1.62 1.22 3.84 3.34
3 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021057 1.5 1.25 2.00 0.88 1.50 1.41 3.38 3.97
4 4 2 2 6-1/4 1021066 2.5 1.44 2.50 1.00 2.00 1.62 4.22 4.50
5&6 6 3 2 8-1/2 1021075 4.3 1.69 3.62 1.13 2.75 1.84 5.64 5.13
*NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. For 3" and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required.
† NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown
in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001).
Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles
S-252 BOLT TYPE • All Alloy Construction. S-253 SCREW PIN
SLING SHACKLE • Design Factor of 5 to 1. SLING SHACKLE
• Shackles available in size 3-1/4 to 50 tons.
• Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability
along with a WLL and the name Crosby forged into it.
• Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an
increased area for load distribution, thus:
• Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard
anchor & chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This
allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.
• Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers.
including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load & temperature
requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance
requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability,
not addressed by ASME B30.26.
• Shackles available in both a Screw Pin & Bolt, Nut & cotter pin configuration.
• Bolt (Pin) has a larger diameter that provides better load distribution.
• Look for the Red Pin... The mark of Genuine Crosby Quality.
S-252 BOLT TYPE SLING SHACKLE

SLING ROUND DIMENSIONS (IN)
EYE SLING WEIGHT
WIDTH SIZE WLL S-252 EACH
(IN) (NO) (TONS)* STOCK NO (LBS) A B C D E F G H J K L M
1 1&2 3-1/4 1020485 1.4 1.06 0.58 1.38 0.75 1.50 0.44 3.38 3.68 1.12 1.50 0.75 2.69
1.5 3&4 6-1/2 1020496 2.4 1.25 0.75 1.75 0.88 1.88 0.50 4.15 4.25 1.31 1.81 1.00 3.38
2 5&6 8-3/4 1020507 4.1 1.38 0.88 2.25 1.00 2.81 0.56 5.50 4.72 1.50 2.09 1.12 4.19
3 7&8 12-1/2 1020518 8.0 1.62 1.12 3.25 1.25 3.06 0.75 6.34 5.88 1.88 2.62 1.38 5.62
4 9 & 10 20-1/2 1020529 16.9 2.12 1.38 4.50 1.50 5.25 0.88 9.45 7.19 2.25 3.12 1.75 7.50
5 11 & 12 35 1020540 35.0 2.50 1.75 5.50 2.00 6.34 1.12 11.50 9.31 3.00 4.19 2.25 9.19
6 13 50 1020551 57.5 3.00 2.12 6.50 2.25 7.70 1.25 13.75 10.38 3.38 4.75 2.75 11.00
*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
S-253 SCREW PIN SLING SHACKLE

SLING ROUND DIMENSIONS (IN)
EYE SLING WEIGHT
WIDTH SIZE WLL S-252 EACH
(IN) (NO) (TONS)* STOCK NO (LBS) A B C D E G K L M N P R
1 1&2 3-1/4 1020575 1.4 0.88 0.62 1.38 0.75 1.50 3.38 1.50 0.75 2.69 3.22 0.44 1.00
1.5 3&4 6-1/2 1020584 2.2 1.25 0.75 1.75 0.88 1.88 4.15 1.81 1.00 3.38 4.03 0.50 1.19
2 5&6 8-3/4 1020593 3.8 1.38 0.88 2.25 1.00 2.81 5.50 2.09 1.12 4.19 4.50 0.50 1.44
3 7&8 12-1/2 1020602 7.3 1.62 1.12 3.25 1.25 3.06 6.34 2.62 1.38 5.62 5.59 0.62 1.81
4 9 & 10 20-1/2 1020611 15.2 2.12 1.38 4.50 1.50 5.25 9.45 3.12 1.75 7.50 6.88 0.75 2.13
5 11 & 12 35 1020620 30.8 2.50 1.75 5.50 2.00 6.34 11.50 4.19 2.25 9.19 8.66 1.00 2.88
6 13 50 1020629 52.0 3.00 2.12 6.50 2.25 7.70 13.75 4.75 2.75 11.00 10.22 1.22 3.19

Van Beest Green Pin® Standard Shackles
BOW SHACKLES WITH SCREW COLLAR PIN
• Material: bow and pin high tensile steel, Grade 6, quenched

and tempered
• Safety Factor: MBL equals 6 x WLL
• Standard: EN 13889 and meets performance requirements

of US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 Type IVA Class 2, Grade A from
2T and upward these shackles comply with ASME B30.26
G-4161 • Finish: Hot dipped galvanized
• Temperature range: -40ºC up to + 200º C
• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCa,* DNV 2.7-1b,* DNV 2.22, CE

* For shackles ≥ WLL 2 T
G-4161 BOW SHACKLE WITH SCREW PIN

DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH LENGTH WEIGHT
WLL BOW PIN EYE EYE INSIDE INSIDE WIDTH BOW LENGTH BOLT WIDTH EACH
TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) LBS
0.33 3/16 1/4 1/2 3/16 3/8 7/8 5/8 1-13/32 1-5/32 1-1/32 0.05
0.5 1/4 5/16 21/32 9/32 15/32 1-5/32 25/32 1-29/32 1-1/2 1-11/32 0.11
0.75 5/16 3/8 25/32 11/32 17/32 1-1/4 7/8 2-7/32 1-27/32 1-9/16 0.22
1 3/8 7/16 7/8 13/32 21/32 1-7/16 1-1/32 2-1/2 2-1/8 1-13/16 0.3
1.5 7/16 1/2 1-1/32 7/16 3/4 1-11/16 1-5/32 2-29/32 2-11/32 2 0.42
2 1/2 5/8 1-11/32 1/2 7/8 2 1-1/4 3-1/2 2-7/8 2-9/32 0.79
3.25 5/8 3/4 1-9/16 5/8 1-1/16 2-17/32 1-11/16 4-11/32 3-1/2 2-15/16 1.38
4.75 3/4 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-7/32 3 2 5-3/32 4-1/16 3-1/2 2.22
6.5 7/8 1 2-1/16 7/8 1-13/32 3-9/32 2-9/32 5-21/32 4-11/16 4-1/32 3.31
8.5 1 1-1/8 2-5/16 31/32 1-11/16 3-3/4 2-11/16 6-15/32 5-13/32 4-21/32 4.86
9.5 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 1-27/32 4-1/4 2-15/16 7-9/32 6-1/32 5-5/32 6.97
12 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 2 4-17/32 3-9/32 7-29/32 6-11/16 5-25/32 9.49
13.5 1-3/8 1-1/2 3-5/32 1-3/8 2-1/4 5-1/4 3-5/8 8-15/16 7-5/16 6-3/8 12.24
17 1-1/2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 2-3/8 5-3/4 3-29/32 9-13/16 8 6-7/8 16.37
25 1-3/4 2 4-1/16 1-25/32 2-29/32 7 4-31/32 11-13/16 9-9/16 8-1/2 28.31
35 2 2-1/4 4-3/8 1-31/32 3-9/32 7-3/4 5-7/16 13-1/32 10-23/32 9-3/8 40.01
42.5 2-1/4 2-9/16 5-1/8 2-1/4 3-3/4 8-3/4 6-5/16 14-27/32 12-7/32 10-25/32 57.96
55 2-1/2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 4-1/8 10-1/4 7-3/32 17-1/16 13-17/32 12-7/32 82.89
Van Beest Green Pin® Standard Shackles
BOW SHACKLES WITH SAFETY BOLT
• Material: bow and pin high tensile steel, Grade 6,

quenched and tempered
• Standard: EN 13889 and meets performance requirements of US Fed.

Spec. RR-C-271 Type IVA Class 3, Grade A from 2 T and upward these
shackles comply with ASME B30.26
G-4163 • Finish: Hot dipped galvanized
• Temperature range: -40ºC up to +200º C
• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCa,* DNV 2.7-1b,* DNV 2.22, CE

G-4163 BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT

DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH WIDTH LENGTH THICKNESS WEIGHT
WLL BOW PIN EYE EYE INSIDE INSIDE BOW LENGTH BOLT WIDTH NUT EACH
TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) K (IN) LBS
0.5 1/4 5/16 21/32 9/32 15/32 1-5/32 25/32 1-29/32 1-21/32 1-11/32 5/32 0.13
0.75 5/16 3/8 25/32 11/32 17/32 1-1/4 7/8 2-7/32 1-31/32 1-9/16 3/16 0.25
1 3/8 7/16 7/8 13/32 21/32 1-7/16 1-1/32 2-1/2 2-3/8 1-13/16 5/16 0.34
1.5 7/16 1/2 1-1/32 7/16 3/4 1-11/16 1-5/32 2-29/32 2-5/8 2 7/16 0.48
2 1/2 5/8 1-11/32 1/2 7/8 2 1-1/4 3-1/2 3-7/32 2-9/32 1/2 0.92
3.25 5/8 3/4 1-9/16 5/8 1-1/16 2-17/32 1-11/16 4-11/32 3-27/32 2-15/16 21/32 1.62
4.75 3/4 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-7/32 3 2 5-3/32 4-1/2 3-1/2 3/4 2.59
6.5 7/8 1 2-1/16 7/8 1-13/32 3-9/32 2-9/32 5-21/32 5-1/8 4-1/32 7/8 3.9
8.5 1 1-1/8 2-5/16 31/32 1-11/16 3-3/4 2-11/16 6-15/32 5-29/32 4-21/32 31/32 5.69
9.5 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 1-27/32 4-1/4 2-15/16 7-9/32 6-17/32 5-5/32 1-1/16 8.06
12 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 2 4-17/32 3-9/32 7-29/32 7 5-25/32 1-3/16 10.81
13.5 1-3/8 1-1/2 3-5/32 1-3/8 2-1/4 5-1/4 3-5/8 8-15/16 7-3/4 6-3/8 1-5/16 14.42
17 1-1/2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 2-3/8 5-3/4 3-29/32 9-13/16 7-15/16 6-7/8 3/4 18.06
25 1-3/4 2 4-1/16 1-25/32 2-29/32 7 4-31/32 11-13/16 9-13/16 8-1/2 29/32 31.34
35 2 2-1/4 4-3/8 1-31/32 3-9/32 7-3/4 5-7/16 13-1/32 10-19/32 9-3/8 1-1/32 43.77
42.5 2-1/4 2-9/16 5-1/8 2-1/4 3-3/4 8-3/4 6-5/16 14-27/32 11-27/32 10-23/32 1-5/32 62.46
55 2-1/2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 4-1/8 10-1/4 7-3/32 17-1/16 13 12-7/32 1-1/4 87.27
85 3 3-1/4 6-3/8 2-7/8 5 12-15/16 7-15/32 20-3/4 14-31/32 13-3/8 1-17/32 136.69

Van Beest Green Pin® Wide Mouth Shackle
• Material: bow and pin alloy steel, Grade 8,

quenched and tempered
• Finish: Hot dipped galvanized
• Temperature Range: -20°C up to 200°C
G-4263 • Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCa, CE
G-4263 WIDE MOUTH BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT

DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH WIDTH LENGTH THICKNESS WEIGHT
WLL BOW PIN EYE EYE INSIDE INSIDE BOW LENGTH BOLT WIDTH NUT EACH
TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) K (IN) LBS
4.75 7/8 1 2-1/16 7/8 2-15/32 4-13/32 3-15/32 6-13/16 6-3/16 5-3/16 7/8 4.59
6.5 1 1-1/8 2-5/16 31/32 2-15/16 5-5/16 4-1/8 8-1/32 7-7/32 6-3/32 31/32 6.92
8.5 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 3-7/32 5-13/16 4-17/32 8-27/32 8-1/16 6-23/32 1-1/16 9.61
9.5 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 3-17/32 6-3/8 4-31/32 9-3/4 8-13/16 7-15/32 1-3/16 13.12
12 1-3/8 1-1/2 3-1/8 1-3/8 3-15/16 7-3/32 5-1/2 10-25/32 9-21/32 8-9/32 1-5/16 17.35
16 1-1/2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 4-3/16 8-1/2 6-1/4 12-9/16 9-3/4 9-1/4 3/4 27.56
25 1-3/4 2 4-1/16 1-25/32 5 9-3/4 6-7/8 14-9/16 11-21/32 10-7/16 29/32 36.82
30 2 2-1/4 4-21/32 1-31/32 5-3/4 10-3/4 8-5/32 16-3/16 13-1/16 12-3/32 1-1/32 55.12
55 2-1/2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 6-1/2 12-3/8 8-3/8 19-3/16 15-13/32 13-1/2 1-1/4 105.82
75 3-1/4 3-1/4 6-15/32 3-9/32 7-1/4 13 10 21-5/32 18-1/8 16-17/32 1-17/32 154.32
Van Beest Green Pin® Sling Shackles
• Material: bow and pin alloy steel, Grade 8, quenched

and tempered
• Finish: shackle bow painted silver, pin painted green
• Temperature range: -20ºC up to +200º C
• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCb,*LROS,* MPIb,* USb, CE

P-6033
P-6033 SLING BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT

DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH WIDTH LENGTH THICKNESS BEARING WEIGHT
WLL BODY PIN EYE EYE INSIDE INSIDE BOW LENGTH BOLT WIDTH NUT SURFACE EACH
TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) K (IN) L (IN) LBS
7 7/8 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-9/32 3-25/32 2-17/32 6 4-17/32 4-5/16 3/4 1-5/18 4.41
12.5 1-1/8 1-1/8 2-3/8 1 1-3/4 4-3/4 3-1/4 7-3/4 5-15/16 5-3/4 15/16 2-1/8 8.82
18 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-23/32 1-3/16 2-1/8 5-13/16 4-1/32 9-13/32 6-7/8 7-3/32 1-5/32 2-17/32 18
30 1-9/16 1-21/32 3-17/32 1-3/8 2-23/32 6-1/2 4-31/32 10-31/32 8-5/16 7-7/8 1-11/32 3-1/8 29
40 2-5/32 2 4-9/32 1-25/32 3-5/16 7-27/32 5-1/2 13-1/32 9-29/32 9-1/4 1-1/2 3-13/16 46
55 2-3/8 2-1/4 4-17/32 2-5/32 3-17/32 9-7/16 6-5/16 15-5/16 11-25/32 10-5/8 1-25/32 3-15/16 66
75 2-11/16 2-3/4 4-29/32 2-1/8 4-11/32 11-13/32 7-9/32 18-5/8 12-7/8 12-15/32 2-1/8 4-23/32 106
125 3-11/32 3-5/32 6-1/16 3-11/32 5-13/32 14-13/32 8-21/32 22-15/16 16-25/32 15-11/32 2-17/32 5-29/32 203
150 3-11/16 3-3/4 7-1/16 3-1/2 5-25/32 15-13/32 9-31/32 25-13/32 17-1/8 17-3/32 1-31/32 6-11/16 309
200 4-11/32 4-1/8 7-27/32 3-15/16 6-7/32 18-15/16 11-1/32 29-7/8 18-1/2 18-31/32 1-31/32 8-1/16 452
250 4-31/32 4-23/32 8-15/16 4-11/32 7-1/16 21-11/32 11-13/16 33-13/16 20-7/16 20-7/8 2-3/8 9-7/16 582
300 5-5/16 5-9/32 9-21/32 4-13/16 7-11/16 23-21/32 13-25/32 37-9/32 22-5/8 24-13/32 2-3/4 10-7/16 794
400 6-5/16 6-5/16 11-17/32 5-23/32 9-3/32 22-11/16 14-9/16 38-25/32 26-9/16 27-5/32 3-5/32 12-19/32 1279
500 6-11/16 7-3/32 12-29/32 6-5/16 10-11/32 26-13/16 17-23/32 44-17/32 29-7/16 31-3/32 3-17/32 13-11/32 1720
600 7-15/32 7-7/8 13-11/16 6-11/16 11-3/8 29-3/16 19-9/32 48-19/32 31-27/32 34-1/16 3-15/16 14-9/16 2161
700 7-7/8 8-15/32 15-7/16 7-15/32 12-13/32 29-9/16 21-1/4 50-9/16 34-19/32 35-15/32 3-15/16 15-3/4 2998
800 8-19/32 9-1/16 16-17/32 7-7/8 13-15/32 33-1/2 21-13/16 56-5/32 37-3/32 37-9/32 4-11/32 16-17/32 3153
900 9-17/32 10-1/32 18-11/32 8-21/32 14-1/2 33-1/2 22-27/32 58-19/32 40-9/32 40-9/32 4-23/32 17-5/16 3638
1000 10-1/4 10-5/8 19-9/32 9-7/16 15-23/32 33-1/2 24-3/16 60-5/16 43-7/16 43-19/32 4-23/32 18-1/8 6548
1250 11-7/32 11-13/16 20-3/32 10-1/4 17-25/32 36-21/32 25-19/32 65-19/32 48-5/16 46-17/32 5-29/32 20-7/8 8157
1550 11-7/32 12-19/32 21-21/32 11-1/32 19-1/32 37-13/32 26-25/32 67-5/16 51-3/16 49-11/32 5-29/32 22-1/16 8818

CM Long Reach Shackle
LONG REACH SHACKLES
As one of the only manufacturers of long-reach shackles, we designed
these shackles for use in construction applications where a longer reach
is needed to attach to pick points.
• Design factor of 5:1

• Meets the requirements of ASME B30.26
• Alloy Steel
• WLL forged on body
• Do not point load. The load should be evenly distributed over
• The entire pin to achieve full working load limit.
Screw Pin
Bolt, Nut & Cotter
SCREW PIN BOLT, NUT & COTTER

PRODUCT CODE PRODUCT CODE DIMENSIONS (IN)
SELF WEIGHT SELF WEIGHT
SIZE (IN) WLL COLORED PAINTED (LBS) COLORED PAINTED (LBS) P D L W G
5/8 7,000 M7151 M7151P 1.80 M9151 M9151P 1.95 0.75 0.63 4.00 2.25 1.57
3/4 10,000 M7152 M7152P 2.72 M9152 M9152P 3.21 0.88 0.75 5.00 2.75 1.81
1 19,000 M7154 M7154P 5.86 M9154 M9154P 6.31 1.00 1.00 5.50 3.25 2.38
1-1/4 28,000 M7156 M7156P 11.90 M9156 M9156P 12.90 1.38 1.25 6.19 3.88 3.06
1-1/2 34,000 M7157 M7157P 19.60 M9157 M9157P 20.70 1.50 1.50 7.00 4.50 3.50
1-3/4 50,000 M7177 M7177P 30.70 M9177 M9177P 33.30 2.00 1.75 8.00 5.25 4.00
Skookum® Shackles
ALLOY ANCHOR SHACKLES
NO. 263 NO. 264 NO. 320 NO. 330

Screw Pin Shackle Eyed Pin Screw Pin Shackle Hex Head Pin Screw Pin Shackle Towing Shackle Double Nut with
or Marine Hex Head Locking Bolts
D
• Skookum Gold Standard Forgings
• All sizes are forged, quenched and tempered.
• Enamel, zinc plate or galvanized finish.
B
L • Custom sizes & materials (stainless steel, etc.) are available
upon request.
P
• Superior strength, hardness & uniformity.
• Size & working load permanently imprinted.
W R
• Material heat codes imprinted on bale and pin.
SPECIFICATIONS
STOCK NO. DIMENSIONS (IN)
SIZE WLL1 WEIGHT2
(IN) (TONS) (LBS) 263 264 320 330 D W L B R P
1/2 5.00 1.00 626304 626404 632004 633004 0.63 0.81 ± .125 1.88 ± .125 1.28 1.44 0.63
5/8 7.00 2.00 626305 626405 632005 633005 0.75 1.06 ± .0625 2.50 ± .125 1.75 1.63 0.75
3/4 9.00 3.00 626306 626406 632006 633006 0.88 1.25 ± .0625 2.88 ± .25 2.00 1.84 0.88
7/8 12.00 4.00 626307 626407 632007 633007 1.00 1.44 ± .0625 3.31 ± .25 2.28 2.13 1.00
1 16.00 5.50 626308 626408 632008 633008 1.13 1.69 ± .0625 3.75 ± .25 2.69 2.25 1.13
1-1/8 18.00 8.00 626309 626409 632009 633009 1.13 1.81 ± .0625 4.25 ± .25 2.94 2.63 1.25
1-1/4 21.00 11.00 626310 626410 632010 633010 1.25 2.03 ± .0625 4.63 ± .25 3.25 3.00 1.38
1-3/8 26.00 14.00 626311 626411 632011 633011 1.38 2.25 ± .125 5.25 ± .25 3.63 3.25 1.50
1-1/2 31.00 18.00 626312 626412 632012 633012 1.50 2.38 ± .125 5.75 ± .25 3.88 3.44 1.63
1-5/8 35.00 23.00 626313 626413 632013 633013 1.63 2.63 ± .125 6.25 ± .25 4.63 4.00 1.75
1-3/4 41.00 30.00 626314 626414 632014 633014 1.75 2.88 ± .125 7.00 ± .25 5.00 4.25 2.00
2 52.00 42.00 626316 626416 632016 633016 2.00 3.25 ± .125 7.75 ± .50 5.75 5.00 2.25
2-1/4 67.00 57.00 626318 626418 632018 633018 2.25 3.88 ± .125 9.25 ± .50 6.50 5.50 2.50
2-1/2 82.00 85.00 626320 626420 632020 633020 2.50 4.13 ± .125 10.50 ± .50 7.25 5.88 2.75
2-3/4 104.00 100.00 626322 626422 632022 633022 2.75 4.50 ± .125 11.50 ± .75 7.50 6.25 3.00
3 117.00 136.00 626324 626424 632024 633024 3.00 5.00 ± .125 13.00 ± .75 7.88 6.50 3.25
3-1/2 150.00 256.00 – – 632028 633028 3.50 5.75 ± .25 15.00 ± .75 9.50 8.00 3.75
4 175.00 310.00 – – 632032 633032 4.00 6.55 ± .25 17.00 ± .75 11.00 9.25 4.25
1
Ton=2,000lbs - Design factor is 5 to 1.
2
Weights vary slightly with style of shackle pin used. Specifications subject to change without notice.

Skookum® Shackles
ALLOY CHAIN SHACKLES
NO. 270 NO. 271 NO. 321 NO. 325

Screw Pin Shackle Eyed Pin Screw Pin Shackle Hex Head Pin Screw Pin Shackle Towing Shackle Double Nut with
or Marine Hex Head Locking Bolts
• Skookum Gold Standard Forgings

D
• All sizes are forged, quenched and tempered.
• Enamel, zinc plate or galvanized finish.
L
• Custom sizes & materials (stainless steel, etc..)
are available upon request.
P • Superior strength, hardness & uniformity.
• Size & working load permanently imprinted.
W R
• Material heat codes imprinted on bale and pin.
SPECIFICATIONS
STOCK NO. DIMENSIONS (IN)
SIZE WLL1 WEIGHT2
(IN) (TONS) (LBS) 270 271 321 325 D W L R P
1 16.00 5.50 627008 627108 632108 – 1.00 1.69 =/- 0.6 3.25 ± .25 2.25 1.13
1-1/8 18.00 6.60 627009 627109 632109 – 1.13 1.81 ± 0.13 3.56 ± .25 2.63 1.25
1-1/4 21.00 8.90 627010 627110 632110 – 1.25 2.03 ± .0625 3.94 ± .25 2.88 1.38
1-3/8 26.00 12.00 627011 627111 632111 – 1.38 2.25 ± .125 4.44 ± .25 3.25 1.50
1-1/2 31.00 16.20 627012 627112 632112 – 1.50 2.38 ± .125 4.88 ± .25 3.44 1.63
1-5/8 35.00 21.00 627013 627113 632113 – 1.63 2.63 ± .125 5.25 ± .25 4.00 1.75
1-3/4 41.00 25.00 627014 627114 632114 632514 1.75 2.88 ± .125 5.75 ± .25 4.50 2.00
2 52.00 36.00 627016 627116 632116 632516 2.00 3.25 ± .125 6.75 ± .50 5.13 2.25
2-1/4 67.00 60.00 – – 632118 632518 2.25 3.88 ± .125 7.13 ± .50 5.25 2.50
2-1/2 82.00 74.00 – – 632120 632520 2.50 4.13 ± .125 8.00 ± .50 6.25 2.75
2-3/4 104.00 90.00 – – 632122 632522 2.75 4.50 ± .125 8.25 ± .75 6.25 3.00
3 117.00 110.00 – – 632124 632524 3.00 5.13 ± .125 9.00 ± .75 6.50 3.25
3-1/2 150.00 200.00 – – 632128 632528 3.50 5.75 ± .25 10.50 ± .75 8.00 3.75
4 175.00 310.00 – – 632132 632532 4.00 6.50 ± .25 12.00 ± .75 9.00 4.25
1 Ton=2,00lbs - Design factor is 5 to 1.

2 Weights vary slightly with style of shackle pin used. Specifications subject to change without notice.
Skookum® Shackles
SHEET PILE SHACKLE
• The No. 59A shackles were specifically designed for pulling sheet piling. They are equipped with
an easy opening pin which will not detach and become lost. No tools are required.
• Replacement pins must replaced or repaired by Skookum in Hubbard, OR.
• Max opening with pin in open (unlocked) position.
• Design factor is 5 to1.
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS (IN)
WLL1 WEIGHT
SIZE PART NO. (TONS) (LBS) OPENING2 J A B C D E F G H
1 605908 8.00 10.00 1-3/4 4.25 2.25 1.00 1.13 7.00 ± .25 0.63 2.38 5.00
1-1/8 605909 10.00 13.50 1-7/8 4.50 2.50 1.00 1.25 8.00 ± .50 0.75 3.00 5.00
1-1/4 605910 12.00 18.00 2.00 5.25 2.75 1.25 1.38 9.00 ± .50 0.88 3.00 5.00
1-1/2 605912 17.00 29.00 2-1/8 6.25 3.00 1.50 1.63 10.00 ± .50 1.13 3.50 6.00
1-3/4 605914 24.00 45.00 2-1/2 7.00 3.50 1.75 2.00 11.00 ± .50 1.25 4.00 7.00
2 605916 30.00 63.00 3.00 8.00 4.00 2.00 2.25 12.00 ± .75 1.38 4.50 8.00
12-TON GROUND RELEASE SHEET PILE SHACKLE
159A GROUND RELEASE SHEET PILE SHACKLE

COMES WITH 1” #320 SHACKLE NOT SHOWN IN PICTURE
DESC PART NO. • 12 ton WLL @ 4:1 design factor.

GROUND RELEASE 615912
• Equipped with Skookum 1" #320 bolt type anchor shackle
REPAIR KIT 615912K
• Built with high strength steel.
• 12" lg. stainless steel release cable with thimble.
• Repair Kit Available

Sling Saver Fittings / Accessories
HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR IS DESIGNED TO CONNECT
HIGH PERFORMANCE SYNTHETIC SLINGS OF ALL MATERIALS.
• Capacities available:
• Working Load Limit (5 to 1): 10,000 through 60,000 lbs.
• Sling body Widths: 3" through 6"
• Allows easy connection to master links or eye hooks, and is ideal for bridles
• Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an
increased area for load distribution, thus:
S-237 • Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to master links, S-238
shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of
the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.
• All alloy construction.
• Design factor of 5 to 1.
• Individually Proof Tested at 2.5 times Working Load Limit.
• Each connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material
traceability, along with a frame size, and the name Crosby and USA
in raised letters.
S-237 HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR

WLL S-237 WEB TO NOMINAL DIMENSIONS (IN)
LOK-A-LOY SLING WEIGHT
4:1 5:1 ASSY. STOCK FRAME BODY LOK-A-LOY EACH
(LBS)* (LBS) NO. NO. WIDTH (IN) SIZE (IN) (LBS) A B C E G H L N R S W
12500 10000 1020704 10 3 5/8 2.96 1.42 1.52 2.75 4.13 1.25 .98 5.68 1.71 3.94 .75 1.75
18750 15000 1020713 15 3 3/4 4.75 1.63 1.58 2.75 4.37 1.38 1.10 6.49 2.04 4.46 .93 1.88
31250 25000 1020722 25 4 7/8 8.59 2.00 2.33 3.75 6.00 1.75 1.41 7.97 2.27 5.51 1.06 2.25
37500 30000 1020731 30 4 7/8 9.24 2.00 2.20 3.75 6.19 1.75 1.41 7.84 2.27 5.38 1.06 2.38
50000 40000 1020740 40 5 1 15.7 2.25 2.91 4.75 7.25 2.25 1.78 9.45 2.44 6.45 1.22 3.09
75000 60000 1020759 60 6 1-1/4 26.0 2.56 3.36 5.75 9.13 2.31 1.86 11.08 3.07 7.72 1.50 3.16
*Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times Working Load Limit.
Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements of the minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards
Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the web sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2010)
S-238 HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR

S-238 WEB TO NOMINAL WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)
WLL WEB ASSEMBLY FRAME SLING BODY LOK-A-LOY EACH
(LBS) STOCK NO. NO. WIDTH (IN) SIZE (IN) (LBS) A B C E G H K M W
5000 1020415 5 2 3/8 1.6 .88 1.42 2.00 3.18 1.00 .80 4.90 3.30 1.38
10000 1020423 10 3 5/8 3.3 1.42 1.52 2.75 4.13 1.25 .98 5.72 3.76 1.75
15000 1020432 15 3 3/4 4.9 1.63 1.58 2.75 4.37 1.38 1.10 6.16 3.96 1.88
25000 1020441 25 4 7/8 10.1 2.00 2.33 3.75 6.00 1.75 1.41 8.40 5.58 2.25
30000 1020450 30 4 7/8 11.4 2.00 2.20 3.75 6.19 1.75 1.41 8.14 5.32 2.38
40000 1020469 40 5 1 20.7 2.25 2.91 4.75 7.25 2.25 1.78 10.48 6.92 3.09
60000 1020478 60 6 1-1/4 32.0 2.56 3.36 5.75 9.13 2.31 1.86 11.72 8.00 3.16
*Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times Working Load Limit.
Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements of the minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards
Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the web sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2010)
Sling Saver Fittings/Accessories
S-282 WEB/CHAIN CONNECTOR
• Available in three sizes:
• 3-1/4 ton Working Load Limit - 2" Webbing to 3/8" (10mm) chain.
• 4-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 1-1/2" (3" Tapered Webbing) to 1/2" (13mm) chain.
• 6-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 2" (4" Tapered Webbing) to 5/8" (16mm) chain.
• Alloy Steel (Quenched and Tempered)
• Each Connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability
Designed around the same along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it.
concept as our S-280 Web
Connector, the S-282 Chain • Uses same spool & cover as S-280 Web Connector.
Connector makes the
connection from your web • Replacement Kit for Spool & Web Cover available.
sling to existing chain quick
& easy.
ROUND WEB SLINGS* S-282 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

SLING WEBBING EYE CHAIN WLL STOCK EACH
SIZE (NO) WIDTH (IN) WIDTH (IN) PLY SIZE (TONS)** NO (LBS) B C E F
1&2 2 2 2 3/8 3-1/4 1021084 1.9 4.33 2.13 2.11 4.77
3 3 1.5 2 1/2 4-1/2 1021093 2.8 5.04 1.63 2.44 4.54
4 4 2 2 5/8 6-1/4 1021100 4.3 5.69 2.13 2.54 5.31
NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7,2 Ply web slings.
**NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
S-287 CHOKER HOOK

• Available in 2 sizes: 3-1/4 tons (2" webbing) and 4-1/2 tons (3" webbing).
• Each Connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for materials traceability
along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it.
• Special design of hook protects the synthetic sling when dropped
or dragged.
• Forged Alloy steel - Quenched & Tempered.
• Designed to reduce friction, abrasion, & fraying in choker area.
• Use same spool and cover as S-280 Web Connector.
• Replacement Kit for Spool and Web Cover available.
ROUND WEB SLINGS* S-287 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

SLING WEBBING EYE WLL STOCK EACH
SIZE (NO) WIDTH (IN) WIDTH (IN) PLY (TONS)** NO (LBS) A B C D E F G H J AA
1&2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021909 3.7 2.13 2.50 3.32 0.38 6.03 4.77 4.88 0.34 1.50 1.50
3 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021918 6.1 1.63 3.50 3.67 0.38 7.06 4.53 6.51 1.36 1.88 -

Sling Saver Synthetic Sling Hooks
WS-320A SYNTHETIC SLING HOOK
• Hook capacity available: 1-1/2, 3, and 5 tons.

• All Alloy construction.
• Each hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability
along with a working load limit and the name Crosby forged into it.
• Originally designed for 2-Ply Web slings, the Crosby Web Sling hook can also
be used with Round Slings as long as the Working Load Limit ratings are
compatible. The new hook incorporates the following features.:
• Eye is designed with a wide beam surface which: Eliminates
bunching effects.
• Reduces sling tendency to slide.
• Allows a better load distribution on internal fibers.
• All hooks feature Crosby's patented QUIC-CHECK indicators.
• Hook Web Sling Eye width available: 1", 2", and 3".
• Fatigue rated to 20,000 cycles at 1-1/2 times the WLL.
WEB ROUND
SLING SLING WEIGHT HOOK
EYE WIDTH SIZE WLL WS-320A WSL-320A EACH ID S-4320
(IN) (NO) (TONS) STOCK NO WITH LATCH (LBS) CODE REP LATCH
1 1 1-1/2 1022701 1022706 1.10 FA 1096374
2 2 3 1022712 1022717 2.86 HA 1096468
3 3 5 1022723 1022728 6.60 IA 1096515
HOOK DIMENSIONS (IN)

ID WLL
CODE (TONS)* A B C D F G H J K L M N O P Q T AA
FA 1-1/2 5.25 2.26 3.98 3.11 1.38 0.84 0.94 0.93 0.71 1.50 0.63 0.75 0.91 2.24 1.01 0.98 2.00
HA 3 7.11 3.66 5.31 3.97 1.63 1.13 1.32 1.13 0.94 2.50 0.85 1.13 1.09 2.82 1.69 1.16 2.00
IA 5 9.33 5.13 7.06 4.81 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.47 1.31 3.75 1.13 1.63 1.36 3.51 2.59 1.53 2.50
Sling and Hoist Hooks
SLING & HOIST HOOKS
WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS
S-319 S-320 S-320N S-322
! WARNING 2/3 2/3
ZONE B
ZONE B
45O 45O 45O 45O
ZONE C ZONE C
60
O
60 O
ZONE D
• Loads may disengage from hook if proper procedures are ZONE A ZONE A
not followed.
• A falling load may cause serious injury or death.
ZONE A: REPAIR NOT REQUIRED
• See OSHA Rule 1926.1431(g)(1)(i)(A) and 1926.1501(g)(4) ZONE B: 10% OF ORIGINAL DIMENSION
(iv)(B) for personnel hoisting by cranes and derricks, and ZONE C: 5% OF ORIGINAL DIMENSION
OSHA Directive CPL 2-1.36 -Interim Inspection Procedures ZONE D: SEE MINIMUM THREAD SIZE
During Communication Tower Construction Activities.
A Crosby 319, 320 or 322 hook with a PL latch attached Figure 1
and secured with a bolt, nut and cotter pin (or toggle pin)
may be used for lifting personnel. A Crosby 319N, 320N or
322N hook with an S-4320 latch attached and secured with
cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin; or a PL-N latch attached and i.e.,
secured with toggle pin may be used for lifting personnel. Backhoe
Bucket
A hook with a Crosby SS-4055 latch attached shall NOT be
used for personnel lifting.
Tip Load
• See OSHA Directive CPL 2-1.36 - Crosby does not recom- Side Load Side Load Back Load
WRONG
WRONG WRONG WRONG
mend the placement of lanyards directly into the positive
locking Crosby hook when hoisting personnel. Crosby
Figure 2
requires that all suspension systems (vertical lifelines/
lanyard) shall be gathered at the positive locked load hook
by use of a master link, or a bolt-type shackle secured with
cotter pin.
• Threads or Split-Nut may corrode and/or strip and drop
the load.
• Remove securement nut to inspect or to replace S-322 and
S-3319 bearing washers (2).
• Hook must always support the load. The load must never
be supported by the latch. RIGHT WRONG
• Never apply more force than the hook's assigned Working Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5
Load Limit (WLL) rating.
• Read and understand these instructions before using hook
*For two legged slings with angles greater than 90°, use an inter-
mediate link such as a master link or bolt type shackle to collect
the legs of the slings. The intermediate link can then be placed
over the hook to provide an in-line load on the hook. This approach
must also be used when using slings with three or more legs.

SLING & HOIST HOOKS
WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS
QUIC-CHECK® Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into provided that the reduced dimension is within the limits
the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features: shown in Figure 1. Contact Crosby Engineering to
Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed evaluate any crack.
marks, one just below the shank or eye • Remove from service any hook which has threads
and the other on the hook tip, which allows corroded more than 20% of the nut engagement length.
for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to • Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by
determine if the throat opening has changed, welding, heating, burning, or bending.
thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring • Never side load, back load, or tip load a hook.(Side
device (i.e., tape measure) to measure the distance between loading, back loading and tip loading are conditions that
the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half- damage and reduce the capacity of the hook).
inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement (See Figure 2.)
does not meet criteria, the hook should be inspected further • Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are designed
for possible damage. to be used with wire rope or chain. Efficiency of assem-
bly may be reduced when used with synthetic material.
Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle • Do not swivel the S-322 or S-3319 swivel hooks while
which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. supporting a load. These hooks are distinguishable by
These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate hex nuts and flat washers.
other included angles between two sling legs. • The S-3322 swivel hook is designed to rotate under
load. The S-3322 is distinguishable from the S-322 by
Important Safety Information – Read & Follow use of a round nut designed to shield bearing.
• The frequency of bearing lubrication on the S-3322
• A visual periodic inspection for cracks, nicks, wear, depends upon frequency and period of product use as
gouges and deformation as part of a comprehensive well as environmental conditions, which are contingent
documented inspection program, should be conducted upon the user's good judgment.
by trained personnel in compliance with the schedule in • The use of a latch may be mandatory by regulations or
ANSI 830.10. safety code e.g., OSHA, MSHA, ASME 830, Insurance,
• For hooks used in frequent load cycles or pulsating etc .. (Note: When using latches, see instructions in
loads, the hook and threads should be periodically “Understanding: The Crosby Group Warnings” for
inspected by Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant. (Note: further information.)
Some disassembly may be required.) • Always make sure the hook supports the load. (See
• Never use a hook whose throat opening has been Figure 3). The latch must never support the load (See
increased, or whose tip has been bent more than 10 Figure 4).
degrees out of plane from the hook body, or is in any • When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the
other way distorted or bent. Note: A latch will not work angle from the vertical to the outermost leg is not great-
properly on a hook with a bent or worn tip. er than 45 degrees, and the included angle between the
• Never use a hook that is worn beyond the limits shown legs does not exceed 90 degrees* (See Figure 5).
in Figure 1. • Reference Crosby's Hoist Hook Warning and Appli-
• Remove from service any hook with a crack, nick, or cation information for basic machining and minimum
gouge. Hooks with a nick or gouge shall be repaired by thread size.
grinding lengthwise, following the contour of the hook, • See ASME 830.10 “Hooks” for additional information.
Hoist Hooks
SHANK HOOKS
SEE APPLICATION AND

• The most complete line of shank hoist hooks.

Available 3/4 to 300 tons.
• Available in carbon steel, alloy steel, and bronze.
• Quenched and Tempered.
• Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quench
and tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight
and bulk.
S-319 • Every Crosby Shank Hook has a pre-drilled cam which can be S-319N
equipped with a latch. Even years after purchase of the original
hook, latch assemblies can be added.
• Load Rating code stamped on each hook
(Refer to Hook Identification Code columns below).
WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

(TONS) SHANK HOOK STOCK NO. REP. LATCH KITS STOCK NO.
CARBON ALLOY SHANK‡ WEIGHT
HOOK ID S-319C S-319A BRONZE LENGTH EACH
CARBON ALLOY BRONZE CODE S-319CN S-319AN S-319BN TYPE (LBS) S-4320 PL SS-4055
3/4 1 .5 †D 1028505 1028701 1028900 Std. .50 1096325 – –
1 1-1/2 .6 †F 1028514 1028710 1028909 Std. .75 1096374 – –
1-1/2 2 1.0 †G 1028523 1028723 1028918 Std. 1.00 1096421 – –
2 3 1.4 †H 1028532 1028732 1028927 Std. 1.82 1096468 – –
3 5 2.0 †I 1028541 1028741 1028936 Std. 3.69 1096515 1092000 –
5 7 3.5 †J 1028550 1028750 1028945 Std. 7.25 1096562 1092001 –
7-1/2 11 5.0 †K 1028563 1028765 1028954 Std. 13.49 1096609 1092002 –
10 15 6.5 †L 1028590 1028792 1028981 Std. 21.90 1096657 1092003 –
15 22 10.0 †N 1028599 1028801 1028990 Std. 38.40 1096704 1092004 –
20 30 – O 1024386 1024803 – Std. 72.00 – 1093716 1090161
20 30 – O 1024402 1024821 – Long 85.50 – 1093716 1090161
25 37 – P 1024420 1024849 – Std. 134.00 – 1093717 1090189
25 37 – P 1024448 1024867 – Long 172.00 – 1093717 1090189
30 45 – S 1024466 1024885 – Std. 182.00 – 1093718 1090189
30 45 – S 1024484 1024901 – Long 214.00 – 1093718 1090189
40 60 – T 1024509 1024929 – Std. 268.00 – 1093719 1090205
40 60 – T 1024545 1024965 – Long 312.00 – 1093719 1090205
50 75 – U 1024563 1024983 – Std. 390.00 – 1093720 –
50 75 – U 1024581 1025009 – Long 426.00 – 1093720 –
– 100 – W – 1025027 – Std. 610.00 – 1093721 –
– 100 – W – 1025045 – Long 675.00 – 1093721 –
– 150 – X – 1025063 – Std. 735.00 – 1093721 –
– 200 – Y – 1025081 – Std. 1020.00 – 1093723 –
– 300 – Z – 1025090 – Std. 1390.00 – 1093724 –
Proof Load is 2 Times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks designed with 5/1 design factor. All alloy hooks 1-22t designed with a 4.5/1 design
factor. All alloy hooks 30t and larger designed with a 4/1 design factor. All bronze hooks designed with a 4/1 design factor. † New 319 style
hook. ‡See column “Y” for actual shank length on next page

Hoist Hooks
Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features.
• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and
the other on the hook up, which allow for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to determine if the
throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload.
• To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the
marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring
device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further
for possible damage.
• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2)
sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other
included angles between two sling legs.
S-319 Continued
DIMENSIONS (IN)
HOOK
ID
CODE D F G H J K L M O P R T X Y Z AA**
D 2.88 1.25 .73 .81 .93 .63 5.14 .63 .93† 1.96 2.35 .97 .59 2.06 .69 1.50
F 3.16 1.38 .84 .94 .97 .71 5.68 .71 .97† 2.22 2.59 .97 .66 2.25 .78 2.00
G 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 .88 6.35 .88 1.06† 2.44 2.76 1.03 .72 2.59 .88 2.00
H 4.00 1.62 1.14 1.31 1.19 .94 7.14 .94 1.16† 2.78 3.16 1.16 .88 2.84 1.00 2.00
I 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 8.63 1.13 1.36† 3.47 3.85 1.53 1.16 3.44 1.25 2.50
J 6.28 2.50 1.82 2.06 1.78 1.66 10.43 1.44 1.61† 4.59 4.77 1.96 1.41 3.84 1.56 3.00
K 7.54 3.00 2.26 2.63 2.41 1.88 12.52 1.63 2.08† 5.25 5.88 2.47 1.81 4.38 1.94 4.00
L 8.34 3.25 2.60 2.94 2.62 2.19 16.10 1.94 2.27† 5.96 6.37 2.62 2.00 7.00 2.19 4.00
N 10.34 4.25 3.01 3.50 3.41 2.69 18.15 2.38 3.02† 6.88 8.14 2.83 2.56 7.00 2.63 5.00
O 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.62 4.00 3.00 23.09 3.00 3.25 8.78 9.44 3.44 3.12 10.00 3.12 6.50
O 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.62 4.00 3.00 31.09 3.00 3.25 8.78 9.44 3.44 3.12 18.00 3.12 6.50
P 14.06 5.38 4.56 5.00 4.25 3.62 32.12 3.00 3.00 11.31 12.50 3.88 4.00 15.00 4.00 7.00
P 14.06 5.38 4.56 5.00 4.25 3.62 41.12 3.00 3.00 11.31 12.50 3.88 4.00 24.00 4.00 7.00
S 15.44 6.00 5.06 5.50 4.75 3.72 34.12 3.25 3.38 12.56 14.00 4.75 4.19 15.00 4.19 8.00
S 15.44 6.00 5.06 5.50 4.75 3.72 43.12 3.25 3.38 12.56 14.00 4.75 4.19 24.00 4.19 8.00
T 18.50 7.00 6.00 6.50 5.75 4.44 36.06 3.91 4.12 14.75 15.56 5.69 4.50 14.50 4.50 10.00
T 18.50 7.00 6.00 6.50 5.75 4.44 47.56 3.91 4.12 14.75 15.56 5.69 4.50 26.00 4.50 10.00
U 20.62 7.75 6.69 7.25 6.50 5.25 41.16 4.25 4.88 16.53 19.38 6.00 5.00 15.00 5.00 11.50
U 20.62 7.75 6.69 7.25 6.50 5.25 49.16 4.25 4.88 16.53 19.38 6.00 5.00 23.00 5.00 11.50
W 23.00 6.81 8.59 9.88 5.88 5.50 42.12 5.50 4.50 17.25 18.41 7.00 7.00 15.00 7.00 12.00
W 23.00 6.81 8.59 9.88 5.88 5.50 48.12 5.50 4.50 17.25 18.41 7.00 7.00 21.00 7.00 12.00
X 24.38 6.75 9.12 10.94 6.00 6.00 45.75 6.00 4.50 18.00 18.38 7.00 7.25 18.00 7.25 13.00
Y 26.69 7.50 9.75 11.81 6.60 7.00 50.50 7.00 5.00 19.75 20.50 8.00 8.00 20.00 8.00 13.00
Z 30.12 9.50 10.62 12.94 8.00 7.25 54.69 8.00 6.25 22.69 23.50 8.25 9.50 20.00 9.50 15.00
†3/4TC -22TA Dimensions shown are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits.
EYE HOOKS
SEE APPLICATION AND

All Crosby 320 Eye Hoist Hooks incorporate the following features:
• Designed with 5:1 Design Factor.
• Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quenched and
tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk.
• Pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch.
• Eye hooks are load rated.
• Available in carbon steel and alloy steel.
• Strategically placed markings forged into the product which address
two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features. (See following page)
• Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles.
S-320 • Low profile hook tip. L-320N
• Integrated latch (S-4320) meets the World class standard for lifting.
• Heavy duty stamped latch interlocks with the hook tip.
• High cycle, long life spring.
• When secured with proper cotter pin through the hole in the tip
of the hook, meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for
personnel hoisting.
WLL* (TONS) EYE HOOK STOCK NO. REPLACEMENT LATCH KITS

CARBON ALLOY
CARBON L-320C CARBON ALLOY L-320A WEIGHT S-4320
HOOK ID S-320C L-320CN G-320C S320A L-320AN EACH STOCK SS-4055
CARBON ALLOY CODE S.C. S.C. GALV. S.C. S.C. (LBS) N0. PL STOCK NO. STOCK NO.
3/4 1 †D 1022200 1022205 1022208 1022375 1022380 .61 1096325 – –
1 1-1/2 †F 1022211 1022216 1022219 1022386 1022391 .89 1096374 – –
1-1/2 2 †G 1022222 1022227 1022230 1022397 1022402 1.44 1096421 – –
2 3 †H 1022233 1022238 1022241 1022406 1022413 2.07 1096468 – –
3 5 †I 1022244 1022246 1022249 1022419 1022424 4.30 1096515 1092000 –
5 7 †J 1022255 1022260 1022262 1022430 1022435 8.30 1096562 1092001 –
7-1/2 11 †K 1022264 1022271 1022274 1022441 1022446 15.00 1096609 1092002 –
10 15 †L 1022277 1022282 1022285 1022452 1022457 20.77 1096657 1092003 –
15 22 †N 1022288 1022293 1022296 1022465 1022468 39.50 1096704 1092004 –
20 30 O 1022289 10222302 – 1023546 1022477 60.00 – 1093716 1090161
25 37 P 1023305 – – 1023564 – 105.00 – 1093717 1090189
30 45 S 1023323 – – 1023582 – 148.00 – 1093718 1090189
40 60 T 1023341 – – 1023608 – 228.00 – 1093719 1090205
*Eye Hooks (3/4TC - 22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times Working Load Limit.
All carbon hooks – average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1 ton through 22 ton – average
load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.
†New 320N style hook.

SEE APPLICATION AND

Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features.
• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye
and the other on the hook up, which allow for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to
determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload.
• To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between
the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the
measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be
inspected further for possible damage.
• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two
(2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate
other included angles between two sling legs.
S-320 Continued
DIMENSIONS (IN)
HOOK ID* C D F G J K M N O† O2†† Q T† T2†† AA
D 3.34 2.83 1.25 .73 .90 .63 .63 .36 .89 – .75 .87 – 1.50
F 3.81 3.11 1.38 .84 .93 .71 .71 .42 .91 – .91 .98 – 2.00
G 4.14 3.53 1.50 1.00 1.00 .88 .88 .55 1.00 – 1.13 1.03 – 2.00
H 4.69 3.97 1.63 1.13 1.13 .94 .94 .58 1.09 – 1.25 1.16 – 2.00
I 5.77 4.81 2.00 1.44 1.47 1.31 1.31 .72 1.36 1.00 1.56 1.53 1.50 2.50
J 7.37 6.27 2.50 1.81 1.75 1.66 1.66 .90 1.61 1.31 2.00 1.96 1.88 3.00
K 9.07 7.45 3.00 2.25 2.29 1.88 1.63 1.11 2.08 1.81 2.44 2.47 2.25 4.00
L 10.08 8.30 3.25 2.59 2.50 2.19 1.94 1.27 2.27 2.00 2.84 2.62 2.31 4.00
N 12.53 10.30 4.25 3.00 3.30 2.69 2.38 1.56 3.02 2.75 3.50 2.83 2.56 5.00
O 14.06 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.00 3.00 3.00 1.75 3.25 – 3.50 3.44 – 6.50
P 18.19 14.06 5.38 4.56 4.25 3.75 3.19 2.00 3.00 – 4.50 3.88 – 7.00
S 20.12 15.44 6.00 5.06 4.75 4.50 3.25 2.18 3.38 – 4.94 4.75 – 8.00
T 23.72 18.50 7.00 6.00 5.75 5.50 3.91 2.53 4.12 – 5.69 5.69 – 10.00
*Eye Hooks (3/4TC - 22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times Working Load Limit.
All carbon hooks – average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30 tons through 60 tons – aver-
age straightening load (ultimate load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.
† 3/4C-22TA dimensions shown are for S-4320 Latch Kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits.
†† Dimension are for PL-N Latch Kits.
Swivel Hooks
S-322 CN/S-322 AN
• Forged - Quenched and Tempered.
• Load rating codes stamped on each hook. 322 Swivel Hooks use the same load rating
code as 319 Shank Hooks, (review proper Hook Identification Codes).
• Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives
maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk.
• Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two
(2) QUIC-CHECK FEATURES:
• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank
or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement
to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload.
To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance
between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment
on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook
should be inspected further for possible damage.
• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two
(2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate
other included angles between two slings legs.
This hook is a positioning device and is not intended to rotate under load. Use in corrosive environment
requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with A.S.M.E. B30.10-1.2.1(b)(2)(c) 2000.
U.S. Patents 5,381,650 & 5,193,480 & 5,103,755 and foreign equivalents.
WLL (TONS)* DIMENSIONS (IN)
EACH (LBS)
REP LATCH
STOCK NO
STOCK NO
STOCK NO
S-322 CN
S322 AN
WEIGHT
CARBON
ALLOY
A B C D F G H J K L M O† R S AA
3/4 1 1048600 1048804 0.75 2.00 0.82 1.25 2.86 1.25 0.73 0.81 0.93 0.63 5.66 0.63 0.89 4.55 0.38 1.50 1096325
1 1-1/2 1048609 1048813 1.25 2.50 1.31 1.50 3.15 1.38 0.84 0.94 0.97 0.71 6.71 0.71 0.91 5.37 0.50 2.00 1096374
1-1/2 2 1048618 1048822 2.25 3.00 1.50 1.75 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 0.88 7.75 0.88 1.00 6.12 0.63 2.00 1096421
2 3 1048627 1048831 2.30 3.00 1.50 1.75 4.00 1.62 1.13 1.31 1.19 0.94 8.25 0.94 1.09 6.50 0.63 2.00 1096468
3 5 1048636 1048837 4.96 3.50 1.64 2.00 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 9.69 1.13 1.36 7.50 0.75 2.50 1096515
5 7 1048645 1048854 10.29 4.56 2.29 2.50 6.28 2.50 1.81 2.06 1.78 1.66 12.47 1.44 1.61 9.63 1.00 3.00 1096562
7-1/2 11 1048654 1048865 19.40 5.00 2.44 2.75 7.54 3.00 2.25 2.63 2.41 1.88 14.75 1.63 2.08 11.37 1.13 4.00 1096609
10 15 1048663 1048877 23.25 5.62 2.48 3.12 8.34 3.25 2.59 2.94 2.62 2.19 16.40 1.94 2.27 12.25 1.25 4.00 1096657
15 22 1048672 1048886 47.00 7.10 3.76 4.10 10.34 4.25 3.00 3.50 3.41 2.69 21.34 2.38 3.02 16.71 1.50 5.00 1096704
- 30 - 1025688 70.50 7.10 3.76 4.10 13.62 5.00 3.61 4.63 4.00 3.00 23.25 3.00 3.25 18.01 1.50 6.50 1093716
*NOTE: Carbon swivel hooks .75tC-15tC: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 5 to 1 design factor.
Alloy swivel hooks 1.5tA-22tA : proof load is 2.5 times the working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor.
Alloy swivel hooks 30tA: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor.
†Dimensions for hooks 3/4 ton carbon thru 22 ton alloy are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for hooks 30 ton alloy are for PL latch kit.
WARNING: SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION PRIOR TO USE!

Swivel Hooks
S-3322 SWIVEL HOOKS WITH BEARING
New anti-friction bearing design allows hook to rotate freely under load.
• Capacities ranging from 2 through 15 metric tons.
• Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered.
• Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives
maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk.
• Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N latch kit. Simply purchase
the latch assemblies. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies
can be added.
• S-3322 hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2)
QUIC-CHECK FEATURES:
• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank
or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement
to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload.
To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance
between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment
on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook
should be inspected further for possible damage.
• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed
between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity
to approximate other included angles between two slings legs.
For other swivel hooks designed to rotate under load, see page 95, 103, 106, 111-115. Use in corrosive environment
requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with A.S.M.E. B30.10-1.2.1(b)(2)(c) 2000.
U.S. Patents 5,381,650 & 5,193,480 & 5,103,755 and foreign equivalents.
DIMENSIONS (IN)
WLL (TONS)*
STOCK NO†
EACH (LBS)
REP LATCH
STOCK NO
STOCK NO
WEIGHT
S-3322
L-3322
A B C D F G H J K L M O R S AA
2 1028605 1028609 2.5 3.00 1.50 1.75 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 0.88 7.64 0.88 1.00 6.01 0.63 2.00 1096421
3 1028614 1028618 3.8 3.50 1.56 2.00 4.00 1.62 1.13 1.31 1.19 0.94 8.60 0.94 1.09 6.72 0.75 2.00 1096468
5 1028623 1028627 7.0 4.00 1.56 2.25 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 10.32 1.13 1.36 8.00 0.88 2.50 1096515
7 1028632 1028636 14.0 5.00 1.94 2.75 6.27 2.50 1.81 2.06 1.78 1.66 12.84 1.44 1.61 9.90 1.13 3.00 1096562
11 1028641 1028645 22.3 5.62 2.05 3.12 7.54 3.00 2.25 2.63 2.41 1.88 15.24 1.63 2.08 11.74 1.25 4.00 1096609
15 1028650 1028654 36.0 7.12 3.62 4.10 8.33 3.25 2.59 2.94 2.62 2.19 18.64 1.94 2.27 14.41 1.50 4.00 1096657
* NOTE: Proof load is 2.5 times the working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor.
† Supplied with latch attached.
WARNING: SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION PRIOR TO USE!
Grab Hooks
H-330 CLEVIS GRAB HOOK
• Forged Steel - Quenched and Tempered.

• Design factor is 4:1.
• Features quick and easy assembly.
• H-330 designed for Crosby Spectrum 4® chain
• A-330 designed for Crosby Spectrum 7® chain
CHAIN STOCK NO. WLL (LBS) WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

SIZE H-330 A-330 H-330 A-330 EACH
(IN) CARBON ALLOY* CARBON ALLOY (LBS) A B C D E G H K L N P R
1/4 1027105 1027249* 2600 3500 .36 1.00 .32 .31 1.81 .34 .88 .72 .47 3.05 1.75 .31 1.64
5/16 1027123 1027267* 3900 4700 .62 1.22 .43 .36 2.12 .44 .97 .91 .59 3.66 2.06 .38 2.02
3/8 1027141 1027285* 5400 7100 1.00 1.42 .48 .49 2.53 .50 1.17 1.00 .72 4.42 2.34 .44 2.41
7/16 1027169 1027301 7200 8750 1.31 1.66 .66 .62 3.09 .56 1.31 1.13 .69 4.94 2.66 .56 2.75
1/2 1027187 1027329* 9200 12000 2.22 1.88 .57 .51 3.56 .66 1.53 1.25 .78 5.72 2.97 .63 3.19
5/8 1027203 1027347 13000 18100 4.41 2.31 .71 .67 4.39 .78 1.78 1.56 1.09 6.83 4.31 .75 4.09
3/4 1027221 1027365 20200 24700 6.50 2.62 .94 .94 5.22 .94 2.13 1.88 1.31 8.13 5.09 .88 4.63
H-323 EYE GRAB HOOK
• Forged Steel - Quenched and Tempered.

• Design factor is 4:1.
• Features quick and easy assembly.
• H-323 designed for Crosby Spectrum 4® chain
• A-323 designed for Crosby Spectrum 7® chain
CHAIN STOCK NO. WLL (LBS) WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

SIZE H-323 A-323 H-323 A-323 EACH
(IN) CARBON ALLOY* CARBON ALLOY (LBS) A B C D E G K L N R
1/4 1026204 1026384* 2600 3500 .28 1.09 .53 .31 1.81 .34 .88 .47 3.05 1.75 1.88
5/16 1026222 1026400* 3900 4700 .45 1.31 .62 .38 2.12 .44 .97 .59 3.59 2.06 2.28
3/8 1026240 1026428* 5400 7100 .79 1.56 .75 .44 2.53 .50 1.17 .72 4.28 2.34 2.69
1/2 1026286 1026464* 9200 12000 1.75 1.94 .88 .53 3.56 .66 1.53 .78 5.44 2.97 3.38
5/8 1026302 1026482* 13000 18100 3.25 2.48 1.16 .66 4.41 .79 1.89 1.16 6.82 4.25 4.25
3/4 1026320 1026507 20200 24700 5.94 2.88 1.38 .75 5.22 .94 2.13 1.31 8.06 5.09 5.16
* These A-330 hooks are forged with an “8” designating Grade 80, and are suitable for use with Grade 8 chain in overhead lifting applications
as long as hook is proof-tested as part of the chain sling assembly or as an individual component per ASME B30.9. We recommend the use of
the A-338 which is proof tested and supplied with proof test certificate.

Crosby Shur-Loc Hooks
S-1326 • Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. S-13326
• Individually Proof Tested at 2-1/2 times the 4:1 Working Load Limit
with certification.
• Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the
trigger from potential damage.
• Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access.
• Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded.
• Rated for both Wire Rope and use with Grade 80/100 Chain.
• G-414 Heavy Thimble should be used with wire rope slings.
• Trigger Repair Kit available (S-4316). Consists of spring, roll pin
and trigger.
• S-13326 Swivel Hook utilizes anti-friction bearing design which
allows hook to rotate freely under load.
• Fatigue rated
• The SHUR-LOC® hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used
for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule
1926. 1431(g)(1)(i)(A) and 1926.1501 (g)(4)(iv)(B).
S-1326 Swivel Hooks Suitable for infrequent, non-continuous rotation under load.
CHAIN SIZE GRADE WIRE ROPE DIMENSIONS (IN)
100 ALLOY XXIP IWRC S-1326 WEIGHT
CHAIN WLL MECHANICAL SPLICE STOCK EACH
IN MM (LBS) 4:1* WLL (LBS) 5:1* NO. (LBS) A B C D E F H J L AA**
– 6 3200 2560 1004304 1.26 1.50 1.32 6.13 .79 2.60 .67 .50 .63 1.13 1.50
1/4 - 5/16 7-8 5700 4560 1004313 2.62 1.75 1.59 7.60 1.10 3.50 .87 .63 .81 1.38 2.00
3/8 10 8800 7040 1004322 4.70 2.00 1.73 8.83 1.17 4.39 1.10 .75 .94 1.75 2.50
1/2 13 15000 12000 1004331 8.64 2.50 2.38 11.20 1.67 5.45 1.26 1.00 1.16 2.11 3.00
5/8 16 22600 18000 1004340 17.00 2.75 2.70 12.90 2.05 6.56 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.49 3.50
3/4 18 - 20 35300 28240 1004349 24.00 2.83 2.52 14.10 2.22 7.76 2.01 1.10 2.03 3.52 5.00
7/8 22 42700 34160 1004358 29.00 3.44 3.19 16.40 2.45 8.75 2.26 1.30 2.20 3.83 6.00
* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. ** Deformation indicators.
S-13326 Swivel Hooks Suitable for frequent rotation under load.

CHAIN SIZE GRADE WIRE ROPE DIMENSIONS (IN)
100 ALLOY XXIP IWRC S-13326 WEIGHT
CHAIN WLL MECHANICAL SPLICE STOCK EACH
IN MM (LBS) 4:1* WLL (LBS) 5:1* NO. (LBS) A B C D E F H J L AA**
– 6 3200 2560 1004404 1.50 1.50 1.14 6.17 .79 2.60 .67 .50 .63 1.13 1.50
1/4 - 5/16 7-8 5700 4560 1004413 3.10 1.75 1.52 7.54 1.10 3.50 .87 .63 .81 1.44 2.00
3/8 10 8800 7040 1004422 5.26 2.00 1.61 8.88 1.16 4.35 1.10 .75 .94 1.83 2.50
1/2 13 15000 12000 1004431 11.22 2.50 2.03 11.11 1.66 5.45 1.26 1.00 1.16 2.19 3.00
5/8 16 22600 18000 1004440 17.32 2.75 2.25 12.90 2.05 6.56 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.61 3.50
* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. ** Deformation indicators.
Crosby Shur-Loc Hooks
S-1316 All SHUR-LOC hooks have the following features: S-1317
• Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the trigger
from potential damage.
• Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access.
• Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered.
• Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded.
• The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel
lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550 (g) (4) (iv) (B).
Eye Style incorporates these added features:
• Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 times the WLL with certification.
• Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles.
• 25% stronger than Grade 80.
• Suitable for use with Grade 100 and Grade 80 chain.
• Designed with “Engineered Flat” to connect to S-1325 chain coupler.
S-1316 Eye Hook

CHAIN SIZE WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)
S-1316 EACH
(IN) (MM) WLL (LBS)* STOCK NO (LBS) A C D E F H J L AA
– 6 3200 1022896 0.85 0.78 3.95 0.79 2.60 .67 .31 0.63 1.14 1.50
1/4 - 5/16 7-8 5700 1022914 1.80 1.08 5.31 1.10 3.50 .87 .39 0.81 1.48 2.00
3/8 10 8800 1022923 3.40 1.30 6.57 1.17 4.39 1.10 .51 0.94 1.83 2.50
1/2 13 15000 1022932 6.00 1.65 8.23 1.67 5.45 1.26 .67 1.16 2.22 3.00
5/8 16 22600 1022941 15.1 2.20 10.06 2.04 6.56 1.50 .87 1.50 2.65 3.50
3/4 18 - 20 35300 1022942 19.0 2.60 10.77 2.22 7.76 2.01 .87 2.03 3.52 –
7/8 22 42700 1022943 28.0 2.87 12.49 2.45 8.75 2.27 .98 2.20 3.83 –
1 26 59700 1022944 49.5 3.15 14.60 3.21 9.87 2.46 1.26 2.68 4.09 –
* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit.
S-1317 Clevis Hooks

CHAIN SIZE S-1317 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)
WLL STOCK EACH
(IN) (MM) (LBS)* NO (LBS) C D E G J L AA
– 6 3200 1028991 .77 3.44 .79 2.60 4.75 .63 1.16 1.50
1/4 7 4300 1029000 1.80 4.48 1.10 3.51 6.25 .81 1.48 2.00
5/16 8 5700 1029009 1.80 4.47 1.10 3.51 6.25 .81 1.48 2.00
3/8 10 8800 1029018 3.66 5.53 1.17 4.39 7.54 .94 2.21 2.50
1/2 13 15000 1029027 6.80 6.81 1.67 5.49 9.52 1.16 2.22 3.00
5/8 16 22600 1029036 11.9 8.22 2.04 6.55 11.61 1.50 2.65 3.50
3/4 18-20 35300 1029071 15.0 9.42 2.22 7.76 13.21 2.03 3.52 –
7/8 22 42700 1029080 28.0 11.14 2.45 8.75 15.45 2.20 3.83 –
1 26 59700 1029089 49.5 12.56 3.21 9.87 18.44 2.68 4.09 –
* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit.

Hooks
HOOKS • SNAP • REPLACEMENT • SORTING • BARREL
SLIDING CHOKER HOOKS Quenched & Tempered

• FORGED ALLOY STEEL
through 3/4". SINGLE EIGHT SAFE DIMENSIONS (IN)
PART PART WORKING WEIGHT
• Wide throat to take heavy ROPE ROPE LOAD* EACH
thimbles SIZE SIZE (LBS) A C E L (LBS)
3/8 – 2,500 2-1/16 5/8 5/8 4-9/32 .77
* Ultimate Load is 5 times 1/2 1/8 3,300 2-1/4 3/4 25/32 4-31/32 1.19
Safe Working Load.
5/8† 3/16 5,000 3-1/16 3/4 OR 1 5/16 6-3/8 2.89
† When ordering, EYE 3/4† 1/4 8,000 3-3/8 1 OR 1-7/16 1-5/32 7-21/32 5.00
diameter (“C”) should
A-350 be specified.
SNAP HOOKS Forged Steel, Quenched & Tempered

• Pressed steel latches and stain SAFE INSIDE TROAT LENGTH WEIGHT
less steel springs, bolts and nuts. HOOK WORKING DIAM. OF OPENING OVERALL POUNDS
SIZE (IN) LOAD (LBS) EYE (IN) (IN) (IN) PER 100
• Safe Working Loads shown are 7/16 750 3/4 3/4 3-15/16 23.25
based on Ultimate Load that is
4 times the Safe Working Load. 9/16 1,000 1-1/8 13/16 4-3/4 48.25
G-3315
• Easily attached to any hoist with REPLACEMENT HOOKS Quenched & Tempered
welded link load chain and roller
chain or wire rope with suitable WIDTH THROAT
end fitting. SIZE HOIST BETWEEN DIAM. OVERALL OPENING WEIGHT
(TONS) JAWS (IN) BOLT (IN) LENGTH (IN) (IN) EACH (LBS)
• Spring latch, latch bolt with self 1/2 9/16 3/8 6-1/8 31/32 1.25
locking nut – stainless steel. Nuts
cadmium plated brass. 1 11/16 7/16 7-11/16 1-1/8 2.61
S-3316 • For chain and electric hoists

with swivel jaw-forged.
Forged Alloy Steel
SORTING HOOKS Quenched & Tempered
• Deep straight throat permits efficient handling of Safe Working Load at Tip 2 TON
flat plates or large cylindrical shapes.
Safe Working Load at Bottom of Hook 7-1/2 TON
• The long tapered point allow easy grab in rings, Overall Length 9-11/16"
pear links, eye bolts or lifting holes.
I.D. of Eye 1-3/8"
• Ultimate load is 5 times the Safe Working Load. Opening at Top of Hook 2-13/16"
A-378 Radius at Bottom of Hook 5/8"

Weight Each 6.42 LBS
Forged Carbon Steel

BARREL HOOKS Quenched & Tempered
I.D. of Eye 1-9/16"
• Meets the performance requirements of Federal O.D. of Eye 2-13/16"

Specification RR-C-271F, Type V, Class 6, except Over-all Length 5"
for those provisions required of the contractor.
Width of Lip 2-7/8"
Weight Per Pair 3.56 LBS
S-377
Golden Gate Hooks
GOLDEN GATE HOOKS
The 6 connector styles shown below make it possible for Crosby to furnish a Golden Gate Hook to fit almost
any make or model of hoisting equipment including American Engineering Lo-Hed, ARO, Coffing, Electro Lift,
Ingersoll-Rand, P & H, Robbins and Myers, Shepard Niles, CM, Shaw-Box, Wright, Yale & Towne.
CLOSED SWIVEL BAIL SHANK-TYPE HOOK SHANK-TYPE HOOK

For use where hoisting line or (Standard Length) (Long Length)
shackle can be inserted into For use on existing load For use on existing
the bail. Suitable blocks, with standard load blocks requiring
for infrequent, shank length. extra shank.
non continuous Hook sizes:
Hook sizes:
rotation under load.
2 through 14 4 through 17
Hook sizes:
1 through 14
Style C - with self-closing gate. Style D - with self-closing gate. Style K - with self-closing gate.
Style A - with manual-closing gate. Style B - with manual-closing gate. Style I - with manual-closing gate.
UNIVERSAL TYPE LINK CHAIN NEST ROLLER CHAIN NEST

Open swivel bail for With ball-bearing Attachment with
attachment to swivel; attaches ball-bearing swivel
link chain. to chain by an and full-floating
Suitable for alloy pin. Suitable connector.
infrequent, for frequent Suitable for
non continuous rotation under load. frequent rotation
rotation under under load.
Hook sizes:
load.
4, 5 & 6 Hook sizes:
Hook sizes: 4, 5 & 6
3, 4 & 5
Style E - with self-closing gate. Style O - with self-closing gate. Style S - with self-closing gate.
Style G - with manual-closing gate. Style P - with manual-closing gate. Style R - with manual-closing gate.
Letter designations shown beneath each illustration above indicate BOTH connector style and gate type. Each connector
is available with either a self-closing or manual-closing gate. (e.g.: A size 4 hook with a closed swivel bail connector and
self-closing gate is 4-C; with manual-closing gate, it is 4-A.)

Clevises
U W P D
T
N A
TABLE I
STANDARD CLEVIS DIMENSIONS – Inches
Material: C-1035 and SA-182-F-11 in stock MAX
WORKING WGT.
Threads: U.N.C. Class 2B, Right or Left Hand CLEVIS U LOAD EACH
Finish: Self-Colored, Galvanized, Plated NO. D N MAX. W TOLERANCE A P MAX. KIPS LBS.
Options: Stainless Steel; Other Alloys; 2 1-7/16 5/8 5/8 1-1/16 5/16 + 1/32 - 0 3-9/16 3/4 3-1/2 1
Special Threading 2-1/2 2-1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/4 5/16 + 1/32 - 0 4 1-1/2 7-1/2 2-1/2
Maximum working loads have been established 3 3 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1/2 + 1/32 - 1/32 5-1/16 1-3/4 15 4
with a safety factor of 5:1 using the maximum pin 3-1/2 3-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1/2 + 1/16 - 1/16 6 2 18 6
diameter, the resulting net area of the eye at the 4 4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 1/2 + 1/16 - 1/16 5-15/16 2-1/4 21 8
pin hole, and the expected ultimate tensile strength 5 5 2-1/4 2-1/8 2-1/2 5/8 + 3/32 - 0 7 2-1/2 37-1/2 16
of C-1035 steel. 6 6 2-3/4 2-1/2 3 3/4 + 3/32 - 0 8 3 54 26
The maximum tap size (U dimension) shown in 7 7 3 3 3-1/2 7/8 + 1/8 - 1/16 9 3-3/4 68-1/2 36
Table I is for reference purposes only. It should be 8 8 4 4 4 1-1/2 + 1/8 -1/16 10-1/8 4-1/4 135 90
used only to determine the largest tap diameter
the clevis can accommodate without considering TABLE II
the pin diameter. Use Table II to select the proper DIAMETER OF PIN – Inches
combination of tap size and pin diameter for any 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1¼ 1½ 1¾ 2 2¼ 2½ 2¾ 3 3¼ 3½ 3¾ 4 4¼
given size of clevis. 3/8 2 2 2
Clevis sizes in Table II for any given tap size and pin 1/2 2 2 2
diameter combination are based upon the net area 5/8 2 2 2 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½
of the eye at the pin hole being equal to or greater 3/4 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½
than 125% of the net area at the minor diameter of 7/8 2½ 2½ 2½ 3½
a round rod without upset ends, threaded Unified 1 3 3 3 3
National Coarse Series. 1-1/8 3 3 3 3 3½
For any combination of tap size and pin diameter 1-1/4 3 3 3 3 3½
shown, the pin in double shear will develop the 1-3/8 3 3 3½ 3½ 4
strength of the rod if both the rod and pin are made 1-1/2 3½ 3½ 4 4 5
from steel having the same physical properties. The
DIAMETER OF TAP – Inches
1-5/8 4 4 4 5 5 5
pin must be investigated for bending, however; and 1-3/4 4 5 5 5 5
if inadequate, a larger diameter pin selected. Pins 1-7/8 5 5 5 5 5
supplied with clevises by Cleveland City Forge are 2 5 5 5 5 5 6 6
made from steel having a minimum ultimate tensile 2-1/8 5 5 6 6 6 6
strength of 58,000 pounds per square inch, unless
2-1/4 6 6 6 6 6 7 7
otherwise specified.
2-3/8 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7
If the pin is made from steel with physical properties
2-1/2 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7
lower in value than the steel used for the rod, the
2-5/8 7 7 7 7 7 8
pin may not develop the strength of the rod in either
2-3/4 7 7 7 7 8 8
shear or bending; requiring a larger diameter pin.
2-7/8 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Some combinations of tap size and pin diameter
3 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
shown will not develop the maximum working load
3-1/8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
of the clevis shown in Table I.
3-1/4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Selection of the rod and pin, the material from which
3-3/8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
both are made, as well as the clevis size adequate
3-1/2 8 8 8 8 8 8
to meet the required design load is the responsi-
3-5/8 8 8 8 8 8
bility of the purchaser or user. Load imposed upon
3-3/4 8 8 8 8 8
the clevis should not exceed the maximum working
3-7/8 8 8 8
load values shown in Table I.
4 8 8
Wedge Sockets
WEDGE SOCKET
WARNINGS AND APPLICATION
INSTRUCTIONS ! WARNING
• Use only if trained.
Extended Wedge Socket Assembly
• Loads may slip and fall if the Wedge Socket
U.S. Patent No. 5,553,360
is not properly installed.
• A failing load can seriously injure or kill.
• Read and understand these instructions
before installing the Wedge Socket.
• Do not side load the Wedge Socket.
S-421T • Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire
Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal
“THE TERMINATOR™” or greater weight than loads expected in use.
NOTE: Existing Crosby S-421 Wedge Sockets can be
FIGURE 1
retrofitted with the New Terminator Wedge.
*TAIL
LENGTH
New QUIC-CHECK™ “Go” and “No-Go” features cast into wedge. The
proper size wire rope is determined when the following criteria are met:
1. The wire rope shall pass thru the “Go” hole in the wedge.
"No-Go"
2. The wire rope shall NOT pass thru the “No-Go” hole in the wedge.
"Go"
RIGHT
Important Safety Information –
*Tail Length
Read and Follow
Inspection / Maintenance Safety Standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope Rotation Resistant Wire Rope
A minimum of 6 rope diame- A minimum of 20 rope diame-
• Always inspect socket, wedge and pin before using. ters,but not less than 6". ters, but not less than 6".
• Do not use part showing cracks.
• Do not use modified or substitute parts. TABLE I
• Repair minor nicks or gouges to socket or pin by lightly grinding until sur-
faces are smooth. Do not reduce original dimension more than 10%. Do Rope Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4
not repair by welding. Clip Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4
• Inspect permanent assemblies annually, or more often in severe operating
*Torque Ft./Lbs. 45 65 65 95 95 130 225 225 225 360
conditions.
Assembly Safety *The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads
• Use only with standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope of designated size. being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.
For intermediate size rope, use next larger size socket. For example:
When using 9/16" diameter wire rope use a 5/8" size Wedge Socket
Assembly. Welding of the tail on the standard wire rope is not recom-
mended. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 6
rope diameters but not less than 6". (See Figure 1)
• To use with Rotation Resistant wire rope (special wire rope construc-
tions with 8 or more outer strands) ensure that the dead end is weld-
ed, brazed or seized before inserting the wire rope into the wedge
WRONG WRONG WRONG
socket to prevent core slippage or loss of rope lay. The tail length of Rope Wedge Tail Clipped
the dead end should be a minimum of 20 rope diameters but not less Backward Backward to live Line
than 6". (See Figure 1) FIGURE 2
Operating Safety
• Properly match socket, wedge and clip (See Table I) to wire rope size.
• Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket.
• Align live end of rope, with center line of pin. (See Figure 1) This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected
• Secure dead end section of rope. (See Figure 1) in use.
• Tighten nuts on clip to recommended torque. (Table I) • Efficiency rating of the Wedge socket termination is based upon the
catalog breaking strength of Wire Rope. The efficiency of a properly
• Do not attach dead end to live end or install wedge backwards.
(See Figure 2) assembled Wedge Socket is 80%.
• During use, do not strike the dead end section with any other elements
• Use a hammer to seat Wedge and Rope as deep into socket of the rigging (Called two-blocking).
as possible before applying first load.

Wedge Sockets
“THE TERMINATOR™”
SEE APPLICATION AND
S-421T
U.S. Patent No. 5,553,360 and foreign equivalents
• Basket is cast steel.

• Individually magnetic particle inspected.
• Pin diameter and jaw opening allows wedge and
socket to be used in conjunction with open swage
and spelter sockets.
• Secures the tail or “dead end” of the wire rope to
the wedge, thus eliminates loss or “Punch out”
of the wedge.
• The TERMINATOR™ wedge eliminates the potential
breaking off of the tail due to fatigue.
• The tail, which is secured by the base of the clip and
S-421T S-421TW the wedge, is left undeformed and available for reuse.
STOCK NO S-421T STOCK NO. WEDGE ONLY • Incorporates Crosby's patented QUIC-CHECK™ “Go”
WIRE ROPE COMPLETE WEIGHT WEDGE WEIGHT
SIZE (IN) ASSEMBLY* EACH (LBS) ONLY (LBS) and “No-Go” feature cast into the wedge. The proper size
3/8 1035000 3.18 1035555 .50 rope is determined when the following criteria are met:
1/2 1035009 6.15 1035564 1.05 1. The wire rope should pass thru
5/8 1035018 9.70 1035573 1.79 the “Go” hole in the wedge.
3/4 1035027 14.50 1035582 2.60 2. The wire rope should NOT pass thru
7/8 1035036 21.50 1035591 4.00 the “No-Go” hole in the wedge.
1 1035045 30.75 1035600 5.37 • Utilizes standard Crosby Red-U-Bolt wire rope clip.
1-1/8 1035054 45.30 1035609 730 • Generates a minimum efficiency of 80% based
1-1/4 1035063 64.90 1035618 10.60 on the catalog breaking strength of the wire rope.
*Terminator Assembly includes Socket, Wedge, Pin and Wire Rope Clip. • Standard S-421 wedge socket can be retrofitted with the
new style TERMINATOR™ wedge.
S-421T WEDGE SOCKETS • Available with Bolt, Nut and Cotter Pin.
WIRE
ROPE DIMENSIONS (IN)
DIA. ‡
(IN) A B C +/- .09 D G H J† K† L P R S T U V
3/8 5.69 2.72 .81 .81 1.38 3.06 7.80 1.88 .88 1.56 .44 2.13 .44 1.25 1.38
1/2 6.88 3.47 1.00 1.00 1.62 3.76 8.91 1.26 1.06 1.94 .50 2.56 .53 1.75 1.88
5/8 8.25 4.30 1.25 1.19 2.12 4.47 10.75 1.99 1.22 2.25 .56 3.25 .69 2.00 2.19
3/4 9.88 5.12 1.50 1.38 2.44 5.28 12.36 2.41 1.40 2.63 .66 3.63 .78 2.34 2.56
7/8 11.25 5.85 1.75 1.63 2.69 6.16 14.37 2.48 1.67 3.13 .75 4.31 .88 2.69 2.94
1 12.81 6.32 2.00 2.00 2.94 6.96 16.29 3.04 2.00 3.75 .88 4.70 1.03 2.88 3.28
1-1/8 14.38 6.92 2.25 2.25 3.31 7.62 18.34 2.56 2.25 4.25 1.00 5.44 1.10 3.25 3.56
1-1/4 16.34 8.73 2.62 2.50 3.56 9.39 20.48 2.94 2.34 4.50 1.06 6.13 1.19 4.62 4.94
†Nominal ‡For intermediate wire rope sizes use next larger size socket.
Hook & Eye Turnbuckles
• Hot Dip galvanized steel.

• End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing.
• Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment
in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through
2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye.
• Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in
a stronger hook with better fatigue properties.
• TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.
• Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties.
Body has UNC threads.
HG-225 • Lock Nuts available for all sizes.
HOOK & EYE • Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26.
J OPEN
K CLOSED
R
D A
S
F
BB
E CLOSED X CLOSED
M OPEN
N CLOSED
Meets the performance requirements

of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb.,
Type 1, Form 1 – CLASS 6, and ASTM ®
F-1145, except for those provisions

required of the contractor.
THREAD WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN)

DIAMETER LOAD WEIGHT
& TAKE UP STOCK LIMIT* EACH E J K M N X
(IN) NO. GALV. (LBS) (LBS) A D CLOSED F OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED R S CLOSED BB
†1/4 x 4 1030636 400 .31 .25 .44 1.67 1.27 11.66 7.66 12.29 8.29 .81 .34 1.76 4.07
†5/16 x 4-1/2 1030654 700 .50 .31 .50 2.00 1.50 13.50 9.00 14.28 9.78 .95 .44 2.20 4.58
†3/8 x 6 1030672 1000 .79 .38 .56 2.28 1.76 17.09 11.09 18.04 12.04 1.13 .53 2.48 6.10
1/2 x 6 1030690 1500 1.80 .50 .65 3.53 2.28 19.57 13.57 20.79 14.79 1.41 .71 3.56 6.03
1/2 x 12 1030734 1500 2.70 .50 .65 3.51 2.28 31.86 19.86 33.08 21.08 1.41 .71 3.54 12.36
5/8 x 6 1030752 2250 2.98 .63 .90 4.24 2.81 21.11 15.11 22.61 16.61 1.80 .88 4.35 6.03
5/8 x 12 1030798 2250 4.35 .63 .90 4.23 2.81 33.45 21.45 34.95 22.95 1.80 .88 4.34 12.39
3/4 x 6 1030814 3000 4.21 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 22.61 16.61 24.45 18.45 2.09 1.00 5.12 6.13
3/4 x 12 1030850 3000 6.52 .75 .98 5.04 3.33 35.01 23.01 36.85 24.85 2.09 1.00 5.09 12.59
3/4 x 18 1030878 3000 8.24 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 47.01 29.01 48.85 30.85 2.09 1.00 5.12 18.53
7/8 x 12 1030896 4000 9.34 .88 1.13 5.82 3.78 36.11 24.11 38.23 26.23 2.38 1.25 5.79 12.16
1 x 12 1030958 5000 13.9 1.00 1.25 6.56 4.25 37.65 25.65 40.06 28.06 3.00 1.43 6.50 12.18
*Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.
† Mechanical Galvanized

Hook & Hook Turnbuckles

• Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in a
stronger hook with better fatigue properties.
• Body has UNC threads.
• Lock Nuts available for all sizes.
• Fatigue Rated.
• Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26.
J OPEN
K CLOSED
HG-223
HOOK & HOOK D
A
BB
E CLOSED
M OPEN
N CLOSED

Type 1, Form 1 – CLASS 5, and ASTM ®

DIAMETER LOAD WEIGHT
& TAKE UP STOCK LIMIT* EACH E J K M N
(IN) NO. (LBS) (LBS) A D CLOSED F OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED BB
†1/4 x 4 1030011 400 .33 .25 .44 1.67 1.27 9.79 7.38 12.20 8.20 4.07
†5/16 x 4-1/2 1030039 700 .52 .31 .50 2.00 1.50 11.58 8.58 14.08 9.58 4.58
†3/8 x 6 1030057 1000 .83 .38 .56 2.28 1.77 15.23 10.62 17.84 11.84 6.10
1/2 x 6 1030075 1500 1.88 .50 .65 3.53 2.28 17.98 13.20 20.76 14.76 6.03
1/2 x 12 1030119 1500 2.77 .50 .65 3.51 2.28 30.27 19.49 33.05 21.05 12.36
5/8 x 6 1030137 2250 3.21 .63 .90 4.24 2.81 19.50 14.50 22.50 16.50 6.03
5/8 x 12 1030173 2250 4.58 .63 .90 4.23 2.81 31.84 20.84 34.84 22.84 12.39
3/4 x 6 1030191 3000 4.20 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 21.19 15.98 24.40 18.40 6.13
3/4 x 12 1030235 3000 6.92 .75 .98 5.04 3.33 33.59 22.38 36.80 24.80 12.59
3/4 x 18 1030253 3000 8.65 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 45.59 28.38 48.80 30.80 18.53
7/8 x 12 1030271 4000 9.85 .88 1.13 5.82 3.78 34.89 23.52 38.26 26.26 12.16
1 x 12 1030333 5000 14.8 1.00 1.25 6.56 4.25 36.59 25.06 40.12 28.12 12.18
Jaw & Eye Turnbuckles
J OPEN
G K CLOSED R
A
B S
BB
X CLOSED
E CLOSED
M OPEN
N CLOSED
• Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system
HG-227 and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one
JAW & EYE size smaller can be reeved through eye.
• Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4" through 5/8",
and pins and cotters on 3/4" through 2-3/4" sizes.
Meets the performance requirements • TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.
of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., • Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties.
Type 1, Form 1 – CLASS 8, and ASTM
Body has UNC threads. ®
required of the contractor. • Lock Nuts available for all sizes.

DIAMETER STOCK LOAD WEIGHT
& TAKE UP NO. LIMIT* EACH E J K M N X
(IN) GALV. (LBS) (LBS) A B CLOSED G OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED R S CLOSED BB
†1/4 x 4 1031877 500 .33 .25 .45 1.66 .64 11.57 7.57 12.28 8.28 .81 .34 1.76 4.07
†5/16 x 4-1/2 1031895 800 .52 .31 .50 2.02 .87 13.50 9.00 14.30 9.80 .95 .44 2.20 4.58
†3/8 x 6 1031911 1200 .80 .38 .53 2.11 .85 16.91 10.91 17.87 11.87 1.13 .53 2.48 6.10
1/2 x 6 1031939 2200 1.77 .50 .64 3.22 1.07 19.30 13.30 20.48 14.48 1.41 .71 3.56 6.03
1/2 x 9 1031957 2200 2.25 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 25.59 16.59 26.77 17.77 1.41 .71 3.54 9.36
1/2 x 12 1031975 2200 2.67 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 31.59 19.59 32.77 20.77 1.41 .71 3.54 12.36
5/8 x 6 1031993 3500 2.98 .63 .79 3.90 1.32 20.73 14.73 22.27 16.27 1.80 .88 4.35 6.03
5/8 x 9 1032019 3500 3.72 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 27.07 18.07 28.61 19.61 1.80 .88 4.34 9.39
5/8 x 12 1032037 3500 4.35 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 33.07 21.07 34.61 22.61 1.80 .88 4.34 12.39
3/4 x 6 1032055 5200 4.51 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 22.17 16.17 24.09 18.09 2.09 1.00 5.12 6.13
3/4 x 9 1032073 5200 5.56 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 28.57 19.57 30.49 21.49 2.09 1.00 5.09 9.59
3/4 x 12 1032091 5200 6.42 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 34.57 22.57 36.49 24.49 2.09 1.00 5.09 12.59
3/4 x 18 1032117 5200 8.14 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 46.57 28.57 48.49 30.49 2.09 1.00 5.12 18.53
7/8 x 12 1032135 7200 9.10 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 35.68 23.68 37.91 25.91 2.38 1.25 5.79 12.16
7/8 x 18 1032153 7200 11.6 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 48.15 30.15 50.38 32.38 2.38 1.25 5.79 18.63
1x6 1032171 10000 10.0 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 25.03 19.03 27.59 21.59 3.00 1.43 6.50 6.18
1 x 12 1032199 10000 13.4 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 37.03 25.03 39.59 27.59 3.00 1.43 6.50 12.18
1 x 18 1032215 10000 16.7 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 49.03 31.03 51.59 33.59 3.00 1.43 6.50 18.18
1 x 24 1032233 10000 20.6 1.00 1.34 6.06 2.05 61.63 37.63 64.19 40.19 3.00 1.43 6.47 24.84
1-1/4 x 12 1032251 15200 20.9 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 40.76 28.76 43.98 31.98 3.59 1.82 8.49 12.06
1-1/4 x 18 1032279 15200 24.8 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 52.76 34.76 55.98 37.98 3.59 1.82 8.49 18.06
1-1/4 x 24 1032297 15200 28.8 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 65.32 41.32 68.54 44.54 3.59 1.82 8.49 24.62
1-1/2 x 12 1032313 21400 30.6 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 42.50 30.50 46.21 34.21 4.09 2.12 9.46 12.32
1-1/2 x 18 1032331 21400 36.0 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 54.50 36.50 58.21 40.21 4.09 2.12 9.46 18.32
1-1/2 x 24 1032359 21400 41.5 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 67.12 43.12 70.83 46.83 4.09 2.12 9.46 24.94
1-3/4 x 18 1032395 28000 52.1 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 55.37 37.37 59.77 41.77 4.65 2.38 9.97 18.37
1-3/4 x 24 1032411 28000 59.7 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 67.37 43.37 71.77 47.77 4.65 2.38 9.97 24.37
2 x 24 1032439 37000 89.9 2.00 2.62 11.80 3.74 72.66 48.66 77.95 53.95 5.81 2.69 13.03 24.48
2-1/2 x 24 1032457 60000 158 2.50 3.06 13.26 4.44 76.08 52.08 82.68 58.68 6.49 3.12 13.76 24.60
2-3/4 x 24 1032475 75000 187 2.75 3.69 14.92 4.19 78.05 54.05 85.67 61.67 7.00 3.25 15.09 24.65
*Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. † Mechanical Galvanized

Eye & Eye Turnbuckles
J OPEN
K CLOSED
R
A
BB
X CLOSED
M OPEN
N CLOSED

HG-226
EYE & EYE • Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment
in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through
2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye.
• Body has UNC threads.
of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., • Lock Nuts available for all sizes.
Type 1, Form 1 – CLASS 4, and ASTM • Fatigue Rated. ®

THREAD DIMENSIONS (IN)
DIAMETER WORKING WEIGHT
& TAKE UP STOCK NO. LOAD LIMIT* EACH J K M N X
(IN) GALV. (LBS) (LBS) A OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED R S CLOSED BB
†1/4 x 4 1031252 500 .29 .25 11.94 7.94 12.38 8.38 .81 .34 1.76 4.07
†5/16 x 4-1/2 1031270 800 .48 .31 13.92 9.42 14.48 9.98 .95 .44 2.20 4.58
†3/8 x 6 1031298 1200 .75 .38 17.56 11.56 18.24 12.24 1.13 .53 2.48 6.10
1/2 x 6 1031314 2200 1.72 .50 19.94 13.94 20.82 14.82 1.41 .71 3.56 6.03
1/2 x 12 1031350 2200 2.63 .50 32.23 20.23 33.11 21.11 1.41 .71 3.54 12.36
5/8 x 6 1031378 3500 2.75 .63 21.72 15.72 22.72 16.72 1.80 .88 4.35 6.03
5/8 x 12 1031412 3500 4.12 .63 34.06 22.06 35.06 23.06 1.80 .88 4.34 12.39
3/4 x 6 1031430 5200 4.22 .75 23.24 17.24 24.50 18.50 2.09 1.00 5.12 6.13
3/4 x 12 1031476 5200 6.12 .75 35.64 23.64 36.90 24.90 2.09 1.00 5.09 12.59
3/4 x 18 1031494 5200 7.83 .75 47.64 29.64 48.90 30.90 2.09 1.00 5.12 18.53
7/8 x 12 1031519 7200 8.83 .88 36.70 24.70 38.20 26.20 2.38 1.25 5.79 12.16
7/8 x 18 1031537 7200 11.5 .88 49.17 31.17 50.67 32.67 2.38 1.25 5.79 18.63
1x6 1031555 10000 9.62 1.00 26.24 20.24 28.00 22.00 3.00 1.43 6.50 6.18
1 x 12 1031573 10000 13.0 1.00 38.24 26.24 40.00 28.00 3.00 1.43 6.50 12.18
1 x 18 1031591 10000 16.3 1.00 50.24 32.24 52.00 34.00 3.00 1.43 6.50 18.18
1 x 24 1031617 10000 20.2 1.00 62.84 38.84 64.60 40.60 3.00 1.43 6.47 24.84
1-1/4 x 12 1031635 15200 19.9 1.25 42.14 30.14 44.38 32.38 3.59 1.82 8.49 12.06
1-1/4 x 18 1031653 15200 23.8 1.25 54.14 36.14 56.38 38.38 3.59 1.82 8.49 18.06
1-1/4 x 24 1031671 15200 27.8 1.25 66.70 42.70 68.94 44.94 3.59 1.82 8.49 24.62
1-1/2 x 12 1031699 21400 28.7 1.50 44.24 32.24 46.74 34.74 4.09 2.12 9.46 12.32
1-1/2 x 18 1031715 21400 34.1 1.50 56.24 38.24 58.74 40.74 4.09 2.12 9.46 18.32
1-1/2 x 24 1031733 21400 39.6 1.50 68.86 44.86 71.36 47.36 4.09 2.12 9.46 24.94
1-3/4 x 18 1031779 28000 50.7 1.75 57.38 39.38 60.38 42.38 4.65 2.38 9.97 18.37
1-3/4 x 24 1031797 28000 58.2 1.75 69.38 45.38 72.38 48.38 4.65 2.38 9.97 24.37
2 x 24 1031813 37000 83.5 2.00 75.68 51.68 79.18 55.18 5.81 2.69 13.03 24.48
2-1/2 x 24 1031831 60000 149 2.50 79.18 55.18 83.18 59.18 6.49 3.12 13.76 24.60
2-3/4 x 24 1031859 75000 174 2.75 81.34 57.34 85.84 61.84 7.00 3.25 15.09 24.65
Jaw & Jaw Turnbuckles
J OPEN
K CLOSED
G
A
BB
E CLOSED
M OPEN
N CLOSED

HG-228 • TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.
JAW & JAW • Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4" through 5/8",
and pins and cotters on 3/4" through 2-3/4" sizes.
Body has UNC threads.
Type 1, Form 1 – CLASS 7, and ASTM • Lock Nuts available for all sizes. ®
F-1145, except for those provisions • Fatigue Rated.

THREAD DIMENSIONS (IN)
DIAMETER WORKING WEIGHT
& TAKE UP STOCK NO. LOAD LIMIT* EACH E J K M N
(IN) GALV. (LBS) (LBS) A B CLOSED G OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED BB
†1/4 x 4 1032493 500 .37 .25 .45 1.66 .64 11.19 7.19 12.18 8.18 4.07
†5/16 x 4-1/2 1032518 800 .56 .31 .50 2.02 .87 13.07 8.57 14.12 9.62 4.58
†3/8 x 6 1032536 1200 .85 .38 .53 2.11 .85 16.25 10.25 17.50 11.50 6.10
1/2 x 6 1032554 2200 1.82 .50 .64 3.22 1.07 18.65 12.65 20.14 14.14 6.03
1/2 x 9 1032572 2200 2.29 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 24.94 15.94 26.43 17.43 9.36
1/2 x 12 1032590 2200 2.71 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 30.94 18.94 32.43 20.43 12.36
5/8 x 6 1032616 3500 3.21 .63 .79 3.90 1.32 19.74 13.74 21.82 15.82 6.03
5/8 x 9 1032634 3500 3.95 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 26.08 17.08 28.16 19.16 9.39
5/8 x 12 1032652 3500 4.58 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 32.08 20.08 34.16 22.16 12.39
3/4 x 6 1032670 5200 4.80 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 21.09 15.09 23.68 17.68 6.13
3/4 x 9 1032698 5200 5.85 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 27.49 18.49 30.08 21.08 9.59
3/4 x 12 1032714 5200 6.72 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 33.49 21.49 36.08 24.08 12.59
3/4 x 18 1032732 5200 8.45 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 45.49 27.49 48.08 30.08 18.53
7/8 x 12 1032750 7200 9.37 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 34.65 22.65 37.62 25.62 12.16
7/8 x 18 1032778 7200 11.8 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 47.12 29.12 50.09 32.09 18.63
1x6 1032796 10000 10.4 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 23.82 17.82 27.18 21.18 6.18
1 x 12 1032812 10000 13.8 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 35.82 23.82 39.18 27.18 12.18
1 x 18 1032830 10000 17.1 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 47.82 29.82 51.18 33.18 18.18
1 x 24 1032858 10000 21.0 1.00 1.34 6.06 2.05 60.42 36.42 63.78 39.78 24.84
1-1/4 x 12 1032876 15200 21.9 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 39.37 27.37 43.58 31.58 12.06
1-1/4 x 18 1032894 15200 25.9 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 51.37 33.37 55.58 37.58 18.06
1-1/4 x 24 1032910 15200 29.8 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 63.93 39.93 68.14 44.14 24.62
1-1/2 x 12 1032938 21400 32.6 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 40.76 28.76 45.68 33.68 12.32
1-1/2 x 18 1032956 21400 38.0 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 52.76 34.76 57.68 39.68 18.32
1-1/2 x 24 1032974 21400 43.5 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 65.38 41.38 70.30 46.30 24.94
1-3/4 x 18 1033018 28000 53.5 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 53.35 35.35 59.16 41.16 18.37
1-3/4 x 24 1033036 28000 61.1 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 65.35 41.35 71.16 47.16 24.37
2 x 24 1033054 37000 96.3 2.00 2.62 11.80 3.74 69.64 45.64 76.72 52.72 24.48
2-1/2 x 24 1033072 60000 167 2.50 3.06 13.26 4.44 72.97 48.97 82.18 58.18 24.60
2-3/4 x 24 1033090 75000 199 2.75 3.69 14.92 4.19 74.75 50.75 85.50 61.50 24.65
*Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. † Mechanical Galvanized

Wire Rope Thimbles
STANDARD WIRE ROPE THIMBLES GALVANIZED STEEL
DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT
INSIDE POUNDS
ROPE OVERALL OVERALL LENGTH WIDTH WIDTH OF PER 100 G-411
DIAMETER (IN) LENGTH WIDTH INSIDE INSIDE SCORE (LBS) STANDARD
1/8 1.94 1.06 1.31 .69 .16 3.50
3/16 1.94 1.06 1.31 .69 .22 3.50
1/4 1.94 1.06 1.31 .69 .28 3.50
5/16 2.13 1.25 1.50 .81 .34 4.00
3/8 2.38 1.47 1.63 .94 .41 6.70
1/2 2.75 1.75 1.88 1.13 .53 12.50
5/8 3.50 2.38 2.25 1.38 .66 34.50
3/4 3.75 2.69 2.50 1.63 .78 47.10
Recommended for light duty service.
7/8 5.00 3.19 3.50 1.88 .94 84.60
G-411 meets Federal Specification
1 5.69 3.75 4.25 2.50 1.06 97.50 FF-T-276b Type II.
1-1/8 - 1-1/4 6.25 4.31 4.50 2.75 1.31 175.00
GALVANIZED AND
EXTRA HEAVY WIRE ROPE THIMBLES STAINLESS STEEL
DIMENSIONS (IN)
OVERALL WEIGHT
ROPE OVERALL OVERALL LENGTH WIDTH THICK- POUNDS
DIAMETER (IN) LENGTH WIDTH INSIDE INSIDE NESS PER 100 G-414 and SS-414
*1/4 2.19 1.50 1.62 .88 .41 7 STAINLESS STEEL
*5/16 2.50 1.81 1.88 1.06 .50 14
*3/8 2.88 2.12 2.12 1.12 .63 23
7/16 3.25 2.38 2.38 1.25 .72 37
*1/2 - 9/16 3.62 2.75 2.75 1.50 .89 50
*5/8 4.25 3.12 3.25 1.75 1.00 82
*3/4 5.00 3.81 3.75 2.00 1.22 157
7/8 5.50 4.25 4.25 2.25 1.38 190
1 6.12 4.75 4.50 2.50 1.56 280 EXTRA HEAVY
1-1/8 - 1-1/4 7.00 5.88 5.12 2.88 1.88 — Rugged rope thimbles recommended
for heavy duty service. Thimbles
1-1/4 -1-3/8 9.08 6.81 6.50 3.50 2.25 830
G-414 meet Federal Specification
1-3/8 - 1-1/2 9.00 7.12 6.25 3.50 2.62 1250 FF-T-276b Type III.
1-5/8 11.25 8.12 8.00 4.00 3.00 —
1-3/4 12.19 8.50 9.00 4.50 3.06 1860
1-7/8 - 2 15.12 10.38 12.00 6.00 3.38 2760
2-1/4 17.50 11.88 14.00 7.00 3.88 —
*Sizes available in Stainless (304) Steel.
SOLID WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

DIMENSIONS (IN) S-412
ROPE OVERALL OVERALL WEIGHT PER
DIAMETER (IN) LENGTH WIDTH THICKNESS 100 (LBS)
1/2 2.81 2.13 .88 .61
5/8 4.69 3.38 1.13 2.21
3/4 4.69 3.38 1.38 2.32
7/8 6.06 4.50 1.63 5.45
1 6.06 4.50 1.81 5.25
SOLID
1-1/8 7.25 5.38 2.06 9.29
Fits open wire rope socket, boom
1-1/4 - 1-3/8 7.25 5.38 2.31 9.81 pendant clevis, as well as wedge socket.
Thimbles
C A
SLIP-THRU THIMBLE
NEWCO SLIP-THRU THIMBLES are designed to allow
passage of an identical thimble through its eye. This is a
necessity when a regular sling is used as a choker sling. G
SLIP-THRU THIMBLES also prevent the eye of the sling B
from mashing together and the top of the eye wearing

excessively. The generous inside dimensions allow the
thimbles to fit large crane hooks. D F
DIMENSIONS AND DATA

SLING SIZE DIMENSION (IN)
THIMBLE WT.
CODE SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. 4 PTS. A B C D ER F G (LBS)
*W-2 5/16 - 3/8 3/32 - 1/8 3/32 - 1/8 1/8 -3/16 2-1/8 4-1/8 7/16 13/16 9/16 3-1/4 5-1/4 1.3
W-3 1/2 - 9/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 2-3/8 4-3/8 5/8 1 5/8 4 6 1.15
W-4 5/8 - 3/4 1/4 1/4 - 5/16 5/16 - 1/8 3-3/8 6-5/8 13/16 1-5/16 5/8 5-3/8 8-1/2 3.11
W-5 7/8 - 1 5/16 3/8 7/16 - 1/2 3-3/4 7-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 7/8 6-1/4 9-3/8 5.6
W-6 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 3/8 7/16 9/16 - 5/8 4-3/8 8-3/8 1-3/8 1-7/8 1 7-1/8 11 8.6
W-7 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 7/16 - 1/2 1/2 3/4 5 9-1/2 1-5/8 2-1/8 1-1/4 8-1/8 12-1/2 11.1
W-8 1-5/8 - 1-3/4 9/16 5/8 7/8 6-3/4 11-3/4 1-13/16 2-9/16 1-7/16 9-3/8 14-3/4 17.6
W-9 1-7/8 - 2 5/8 3/4 1 8 14-1/2 2-1/8 3-1/4 1-7/8 13 19-1/4 53
W-10 2-1/8 - 2-1/4 1/4 7/8 - 1 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 8 15-1/2 2-1/2 3-3/4 2 13 20-1/8 66
W-11 2-1/2 - 3 7/8 - 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 - 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 9 18-1/2 3-3/16 4-11/16 2-1/2 15-3/4 24-3/4 126
*Made from High Tensile Malleable. C
G D
CRESCENT THIMBLE N
Designed to protect the bearing surface of a F E
loop where a large dimension loop is necessary.
B
The ears are tapered so that they can be bent
over. Standard-Laid Rope Size 3/8" to 3".
A
DIMENSIONS AND DATA

ROPE SIZE DIMENSION (IN)
THIMBLE WT.
CODE SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. 4 PTS. A B C D E F G H (LBS)
6C 3/8 - 7/16 3-3/2 - 1/8 1/8 1/8 - 3/16 2 1 27/32 15/32 2-1/16 3/8 1/2 3/8 .75
8C 1/2 - 9/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 2-1/4 1-1/8 1 5/8 2-1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1.0
9C 5/8 – 1/4 5/16 2-3/4 1-3/8 1-5/32 23/32 3 19/32 9/16 19/32 1.2
10C 3/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3-1/4 1-5/8 1-5/16 13/16 3-1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 2.0
14C 7/8 – – 7/16 4-1/2 2-1/4 1-7/16 15/16 4-5/16 3/4 11/16 3/4 3.3
16C 1 5/16 3/8 1/2 4-1/2 2-1/4 1-9/16 1-1/16 4-19/32 13/16 3/4 7/8 3.8
18C 1-1/8 3/8 7/16 9/16 4-7/8 2-7/16 1-13/16 1-1/4 5-1/32 7/8 7/8 1 5.0
20C 1-1/4 7/16 1/2 5/8 5-1/2 2-3/4 2-1/16 1-7/16 5-3/4 15/16 15/16 1-1/8 6.8
22C 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 1/2 9/16 3/4 6 3 2-1/4 1-5/8 6-1/4 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-3/16 9.0
24C 1-5/8 9/16 5/8 – 6-1/2 3-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/4 6-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/4 12.0
28C 1-3/4 - 1-7/8 – – 7/8 7 3-1/2 2-15/16 1-15/16 7-3/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 16.6
32C 2 5/8 3/4 1 7 3-1/2 3-3/16 2-3/16 7-13/16 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-5/8 21.8
40C 2-1/4 - 2-1/2 3/4 - 7/8 1 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 8-1/2 4-1/4 4-1/8 2-7/8 9-5/8 1-5/8 1-7/8 2 39.0
48C 2-3/4 - 3 1 1-1/8 – 10 5 4-7/8 3-3/8 11-1/4 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 67.0
*Made from High Tensile Malleable.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND ARE APPROXIMATE.

Open Spelter Sockets
GROOVED OPEN SPELTER SOCKETS

NOTICE: All cast steel sockets 1-5/8" and
larger are magnetic particle inspected and
ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available
on special order.
G-416/S-416
• Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2", cast alloy steel 1-5/8" thru 4".
• Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%,

based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on
recommended use with 6 x 7, 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), Note: Above drawing illustrates one groove
used on sockets 1/4" thru 3/4". Sizes 7/8"
RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. thru 1-1/2" use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8" and
larger use 3 grooves.
ROPE STRUCTURAL STOCK NO. WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

DIAMETER STRAND DIAM. G-416 S-416 EACH
(IN) (IN) GALV. S.C. (LBS) A C D F G H J L M N
1/4 – 1039619 1039628 1.10 4.56 .75 .69 .38 .69 1.56 2.25 1.56 1.31 .36
5/16 - 3/8 – 1039637 1039646 1.30 4.84 .81 .81 .50 .81 1.69 2.25 1.75 1.50 .44
7/16 - 1/2 – 1039655 1039664 2.25 5.56 1.00 1.00 .56 .94 1.88 2.50 2.00 1.88 .50
9/16 - 5/8 1/2 1039673 1039682 3.60 6.75 1.25 1.19 .69 1.13 2.25 3.00 2.50 2.25 .56
3/4 9/16 - 5/8 1039691 1039708 5.83 7.94 1.50 1.38 .81 1.25 2.62 3.50 3.00 2.62 .62
7/8 11/16 - 3/4 1039717 1039726 9.65 9.25 1.75 1.63 .94 1.50 3.25 4.00 3.50 3.13 .80
1 13/16 - 7/8 1039735 1039744 15.50 10.56 2.00 2.00 1.13 1.75 3.75 4.50 4.00 3.75 .88
1-1/8 15/16 - 1 1039753 1039762 21.50 11.81 2.25 2.25 1.25 2.00 4.12 5.00 4.62 4.12 1.00
1-1/4 - 1-3/8 1-1/16 - 1-1/8 1039771 1039780 31.00 13.19 2.50 2.50 1.50 2.25 4.75 5.50 5.00 4.75 1.13
1-1/2 1-3/16 - 1-1/4 1039799 1039806 47.25 15.12 3.00 2.75 1.63 2.75 5.25 6.00 6.00 5.38 1.19
*1-5/8 1-5/16 - 1-3/8 1039815 1039824 55.00 16.25 3.00 3.00 1.75 3.00 5.50 6.50 6.50 5.75 1.31
*1-3/4 - 1-7/8 1-7/16 - 1-5/8 1039833 1039842 82.00 18.25 3.50 3.50 2.00 3.13 6.38 7.50 7.00 6.50 1.56
*2 - 2-1/8 1-11/16 - 1-3/4 1039851 1039860 129.00 21.50 4.00 3.75 2.25 3.75 7.38 8.50 9.00 7.00 1.81
*2-1/4 - 2-3/8 1-13/16 - 1-7/8 1039879 1039888 167.00 23.50 4.50 4.25 2.50 4.00 8.25 9.00 10.00 7.75 2.13
*2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1-15/16 - 2-1/8 1041633 1041642 252.00 25.50 5.00 4.75 2.88 4.50 9.25 9.75 10.75 8.50 2.38
*2-3/4 - 2-7/8 2-3/16 - 2-7/16 1041651 1041660 315.00 27.25 5.25 5.00 3.12 4.88 10.50 11.00 11.00 9.00 2.88
*3 - 3-1/8 2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1041679 1041688 380.00 29.00 5.75 5.25 3.38 5.25 11.12 12.00 11.25 9.50 3.00
*3-1/4 - 3-3/8 2-3/4 - 2-7/8 1041697 1041704 434.00 30.88 6.25 5.50 3.62 5.75 11.88 13.00 11.75 10.00 3.12
*3-1/2 - 3-5/8 3 - 3-1/8 1041713 1041722 563.00 33.25 6.75 6.00 3.88 6.50 12.38 14.00 12.50 10.75 3.25
*3-3/4 - 4 – 1041731 1041740 783.00 36.25 7.50 7.00 4.25 7.25 13.62 15.00 13.50 12.50 3.50
*Cast alloy steel
Closed Spelter Sockets
GROOVED CLOSED SPELTER SOCKETS

NOTICE: All cast steel sockets 1-5/8" and
larger are magnetic particle inspected and
ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available
on special order.
G-417
• Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2", cast alloy steel 1-5/8" thru 4".
• Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%,

based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based
on recommended use with 6 x 7, 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP Note: Above drawing illustrates one groove
(EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. used on sockets 1/4" thru 3/4". Sizes 7/8"
thru 1-1/2" use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8" and
larger use 3 grooves.
Closed Grooved Sockets meet the requirements of Federal Specifications RR-S-550D, Type B.
ROPE STRUCTURAL STOCK NO. WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

DIAMETER STRAND DIAM. G-417 S-417 EACH
(IN) (IN) GALV. S.C. (LBS) A B C D F G H J K L
1/4 – 1039897 1039904 .50 4.50 .50 1.50 .88 .38 .69 1.56 2.25 .50 1.75
5/16 - 3/8 – 1039913 1039922 .75 4.94 .62 1.69 .97 .50 .81 1.69 2.25 .69 2.06
7/16 - 1/2 – 1039931 1039940 1.50 5.50 .69 2.00 1.16 .56 .94 2.00 2.50 .88 2.31
9/16 - 5/8 1/2 1039959 1039968 2.50 6.31 .81 2.63 1.41 .69 1.12 2.38 3.00 1.00 2.50
3/4 9/16 - 5/8 1039977 1039986 4.25 7.62 1.06 3.00 1.66 .88 1.25 2.75 3.50 1.25 3.06
7/8 11/16 - 3/4 1039995 1040000 7.25 8.75 1.25 3.63 1.94 1.00 1.50 3.25 4.00 1.50 3.50
1 13/16 - 7/8 1040019 1040028 10.50 9.91 1.41 4.13 2.30 1.13 1.75 3.75 4.50 1.75 4.00
1-1/8 15/16 - 1 1040037 1040046 14.25 11.00 1.50 4.50 2.56 1.25 2.00 4.13 5.00 2.00 4.50
1-1/4 - 1-3/8 1-1/16 - 1-1/8 1040055 1040064 19.75 12.12 1.63 5.00 2.81 1.50 2.25 4.75 5.50 2.25 5.00
1-1/2 1-3/16 - 1-1/4 1040073 1040082 29.20 13.94 1.94 5.38 3.19 1.63 2.75 5.25 6.00 2.50 6.00
1-5/8 1-5/16 - 1-3/8 1040091 1040108 36.00 15.13 2.13 5.75 3.25 1.75 3.00 5.50 6.50 2.75 6.50
1-3/4 - 1-7/8 1-7/16 - 1-5/8 1040117 1040126 57.25 17.25 2.19 6.75 3.75 2.00 3.13 6.38 7.50 3.00 7.56
2 - 2-1/8 1-11/16 - 1-3/4 1040135 1040144 79.00 19.87 2.44 7.63 4.38 2.25 3.75 7.38 8.50 3.25 8.81
2-1/4 - 2-3/8 1-13/16 - 1-7/8 1040153 1040162 105.00 21.50 2.75 8.50 5.00 2.63 4.13 8.25 9.00 3.63 9.75
2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1-15/16 - 2-1/8 1041759 1041768 140.00 23.50 3.12 9.50 5.50 2.88 4.50 9.25 9.75 4.00 10.62
2-3/4 - 2-7/8 2-3/16 - 2-7/16 1041777 1041786 220.00 25.38 3.12 10.75 6.25 3.12 4.88 10.19 11.00 4.88 11.25
3 - 3-1/8 2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1041795 1041802 276.00 27.12 3.37 11.50 6.75 3.38 5.25 11.50 12.00 5.25 11.75
3-1/4 - 3-3/8 2-3/4 - 2-7/8 1041811 1041820 313.00 29.25 4.00 12.25 7.25 3.62 5.75 12.25 13.00 5.75 12.25
3-1/2 - 3-5/8 3 - 3-1/8 1041839 1041848 400.00 31.00 4.00 13.00 7.75 3.88 6.31 13.00 14.00 6.25 13.00
3-3/4 - 4 – 1041857 1041866 542.00 33.25 4.25 14.25 8.50 4.25 7.25 14.25 15.00 7.00 14.00

Swage Buttons/Socket Compound
WIRELOCK® - RESIN FOR SPELTER SOCKETS
AMOUNT OF WIRELOCK® REQUIRED
WIRE ROPE WIRELOCK® WIRE ROPE WIRELOCK®
SIZE (IN) REQUIRED (CC) SIZE (IN) REQUIRED (CC)
• Ideal for on-site applications 1/4 9 1-3/4 700
• Improved fatigue life 5/16 17 1-7/8 700
• For use on 416 & 417 Spelter 3/8 17 2 1265
Sockets only 7/16 35 2-1/8 1265
• 100% termination efficiency 1/2 35 2-1/4 1410
• Temperature operating range 9/16 52 2-3/8 1410
from -65°F to 240°F 5/8 52 2-1/2 1830
• One Booster pack needed if pouring 3/4 86 2-5/8 1830
W416-7 temperature is 35°F to 48°F 7/8 125 2-3/4 2250

• Two Booster packs needed if 1 160 3 3160
pouring temperature is 27°F to 35°F 1-1/8 210 3-1/4 3795

1-1/4 350 3-1/2 4920
APPROXIMATE U.S. MEASUREMENTS 1-3/8 350 3-3/4 5980
250cc Kit 1 Cup
1-1/2 420 4 7730
500cc Kit 1 Pint
1-5/8 495 — —
1,000cc Kit 1 Quart
NATO NUMBERS
W416-7 KITS BOOSTER
100cc 8030-21-902-1823 PACK
250cc 8030-21-902-1824 KIT SIZE KIT PER CASE STOCK NO. WT. EACH (LBS) STOCK NO.
500cc 8030-21-902-1825 100 CC 20 1039602 .62 1039603
1,000cc 8030-21-902-1826
250 CC 12 1039604 1.25 1039605
Witnessed and tested by American
Bureau of Shipping (ABS) 500 CC 12 1039606 2.54 1039607
1000 CC 12 1039608 4.59 1039609
2000 CC 12 1039610 9.00 1039611
S-409 SWAGE BUTTONS

• Low carbon steel
• Spherodize annealed
• Quality controlled DIMENSIONS (IN)
ROPE
• Economical to use ITEM DIAMETER A B C D E
1 SB 1/8 .42 .50 .14 .40 .61
A multi-purpose fitting for many swaging 3 SB 3/16 .56 .70 .20 .52 .84
applications. Manufactured from a special 5 SB 1/4 .68 1.06 .31 .58 1.41
analysis high quality, low carbon steel, and 7 SB 5/16 .88 1.13 .36 .77 1.33
later heat treated. They are precision made 8 SB 3/8 .88 1.48 .42 .77 1.69
with constant quality control checks through- 9 SB 7/16 1.13 1.63 .48 1.03 1.94
out all stages of manufacturing to assure 10 SB 1/2 1.31 1.89 .55 1.16 2.17
the best in quality and performance. 11 SB 9/16 1.44 2.02 .61 1.29 2.41
12 SB 5/8 1.56 2.42 .67 1.42 2.89
B
13 SB 3/4 1.68 2.74 .80 1.55 3.25
BEFORE SWAGE
14 SB 7/8 2.00 3.27 .94 1.80 3.86
A C
15 SB 1 2.25 3.67 1.06 2.05 4.36
16 SB 1-1/8 2.56 4.05 1.19 2.30 4.81
E 17 SB 1-1/4 2.81 4.57 1.33 2.56 5.42
AFTER SWAGE
NOTE: Length is measured from outside end of terminal.
D
Open Swage Socket
OPEN SWAGE SOCKET
B C
L
A
F N
S-501
• Forged from special bar quality carbon steel,
D suitable for cold forming.
E H
M • Hardness controlled by spheriodize annealing.
• Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating

of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope.
NOTE: S-501 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with

6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope.
S-501 OPEN SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS SWAGER / DIE DATA

BEFORE SWAGE DIMENSIONS MAX STOCK NO. SIDE LOAD
AFTER 500 TON
ROPE WEIGHT SWAGE DIE 1000 TON 1500 TON 1500 3000
STOCK SIZE EACH DIM. DESCRIP. 1500 TON 3000 TON TONS TONS
NO. (IN) (LBS) A B C D E F H L M N (IN) (SOCKET) 5X7 6 X 12 6 X 12 6 X 12
1039021 1/4 .52 4.78 .50 1.38 .69 .27 2.19 .69 4.00 .38 1.47 .46 1/4 1192845 – – –
1039049 5/16 1.12 6.30 .78 1.62 .81 .34 3.25 .80 5.34 .48 1.67 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –
1039067 3/8 1.30 6.30 .78 1.62 .81 .41 3.25 .80 5.34 .48 1.67 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –
1039085 7/16 2.08 7.82 1.01 2.00 1.00 .49 4.31 1.00 6.69 .56 1.96 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –
1039101 1/2 2.08 7.82 1.01 2.00 1.00 .55 4.31 1.00 6.69 .56 1.96 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –
1039129 9/16 4.67 9.54 1.27 2.38 1.19 .61 5.38 1.25 8.13 .68 2.21 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –
1039147 5/8 4.51 9.54 1.27 2.38 1.19 .68 5.38 1.25 8.13 .68 2.21 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –
1039165 3/4 7.97 11.61 1.56 2.75 1.38 .80 6.44 1.50 10.00 .80 2.69 1.42 3/4 1192925 – – –
1039183 7/8 11.52 13.37 1.72 3.13 1.63 .94 7.50 1.75 11.63 .94 3.20 1.55 7/8 1192943 – – –
1039209 1 17.80 15.47 2.00 3.69 2.00 1.07 8.63 2.00 13.38 1.07 3.68 1.80 1 1192961 – – –
1039227 1-1/8 25.25 17.35 2.25 4.12 2.25 1.19 9.63 2.25 15.00 1.19 4.18 2.05 1-1/8 1192989 – – –
1039245 1-1/4 35.56 19.20 2.53 4.59 2.50 1.34 10.69 2.50 16.50 1.27 4.68 2.30 1-1/4 1193005 – – –
1039263 1-3/8 43.75 21.10 2.81 5.25 2.50 1.46 11.88 2.41 18.13 1.46 5.25 2.56 1-3/8 1193023 – – –
1039281 1-1/2 58.50 23.17 3.08 5.50 2.75 1.59 12.81 3.00 19.75 1.70 5.70 2.81 1-1/2 1193041 1191267 1195355 1195192
1039307 1-3/4 88.75 26.70 3.40 6.25 3.50 1.87 15.06 3.50 23.00 2.11 6.67 3.06 1-3/4 1193069 1191276 1195367 1195209
1042767 2 146.25 31.15 3.94 7.80 3.75 2.12 17.06 4.00 26.75 1.81 8.19 3.56 2 1193087 1191294 1195379 1195218

Closed Swage Sockets
CLOSED SWAGE SOCKET
S-502
B
• Forged from special bar quality carbon steel,
D C
suitable for cold forming.
L
• Hardness controlled by spheriodize annealing.
A
F
• Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%
E H
based on the catalog strength of wire rope.
NOTE: S-502 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with

6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope.
S-502 CLOSED SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS SWAGER / DIE DATA

BEFORE SWAGE DIMENSIONS MAX STOCK NO. SIDE LOAD
AFTER 500 TON
ROPE WEIGHT SWAGE DIE 1000 TON 1500 TON 1500 3000
STOCK SIZE EACH DIM. DESCRIP. 1500 TON 3000 TON TONS TONS
NO. (IN) (LBS) A B C D E F H L (IN) (SOCKET) 5X7 6 X 12 6 X 12 6 X 12
1039325 1/4 .33 4.28 .50 1.38 .76 .27 2.19 .50 3.50 .46 1/4 1192845 – – –
1039343 5/16 .75 5.42 .77 1.62 .88 .34 3.25 .68 4.50 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –
1039361 3/8 .72 5.42 .78 1.62 .88 .41 3.25 .68 4.50 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –
1039389 7/16 1.42 6.88 1.01 2.00 1.07 .49 4.31 .87 5.75 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –
1039405 1/2 1.42 6.88 1.01 2.00 1.07 .55 4.31 .87 5.75 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –
1039423 9/16 2.92 8.59 1.27 2.38 1.28 .61 5.38 1.14 7.25 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –
1039441 5/8 2.85 8.59 1.27 2.38 1.28 .68 5.38 1.14 7.25 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –
1039469 3/4 5.00 10.25 1.56 2.88 1.49 .80 6.44 1.33 8.63 1.42 3/4 1192925 – – –
1039487 7/8 6.80 11.87 1.72 3.12 1.73 .94 7.50 1.53 10.09 1.55 7/8 1192943 – – –
1039502 1 10.40 13.56 2.00 3.62 2.11 1.07 8.63 1.78 11.50 1.80 1 1192961 – – –
1096520 1-1/8 14.82 15.03 2.25 4.00 2.37 1.19 9.75 2.03 12.75 2.05 1-1/8 1192989 – – –
1039548 1-1/4 21.57 16.94 2.53 4.50 2.62 1.34 10.81 2.25 14.38 2.30 1-1/4 1193005 – – –
1039566 1-3/8 28.54 18.59 2.81 5.00 2.62 1.46 11.88 2.29 15.75 2.56 1-3/8 1193023 – – –
1039584 1-1/2 38.06 20.13 3.08 5.38 2.87 1.59 12.81 2.56 17.00 2.81 1-1/2 1193041 1191267 1193355 1195192
1039600 1-3/4 51.00 23.56 3.40 6.25 3.63 1.87 15.06 3.08 20.00 3.06 1-3/4 1193069 1191276 1195367 1195209
1042589 2 89.25 27.13 3.94 7.25 3.88 2.12 17.06 3.31 23.00 3.56 2 1193087 1191294 1195379 1195218
Swaged Sockets
SWAGED SOCKETS ASSEMBLIES

Pins
Parallel
OS-OS 500-P
Pins at
Right Angles
500-R
In mechanically swaged fittings, high pressure presses and Pins

Parallel
precision dies cause metal of the socket to flow around wires CS-CS 502-P
Pins at
and strands to offer the ultimate in compactness and strength Right Angles
with minimum weight. Material is weldless, drop-forged steel. 502-R
Pins
Parallel
Normally, only regular lay rope is used. Swaged assemblies OS-CS 503-P
Pins at
are interchangeable with *poured sockets up through 2" rope Right Angles
503-R
diameters. Assembly length is measured from centerline of
pins for both open and closed sockets.
When purchasing, indicate choice of end fittings by the suf-
fixes “OS” or “CS” after the stock number, for open or closed
type fittings. Pins and cotters are supplied as standard on
open fittings, but assemblies may be specified without pins.
Fittings are assembled in the same plane unless specified
otherwise when ordered.
* These sockets are not interchangeable with zinc poured sockets.
CAPACITY (TONS*)
OPEN SOCKET DIAMETER (IN) CLOSED SOCKET DIAMETER (IN) 6X19 & 6X37
ROPE Ls (AP- Ls (AP- ROPE IWRC
DIA. C D E F PIN As PROX.) C D E As PROX.) DIA. LPS XIP
1/4 11/16 5/16 1-1/2 1-3/8 .688 .438 4-7/16 1-7/16 .750 1/2 .438 3-15/16 1/4 .588 .69
5/16 13/16 13/32 1-3/4 1-5/8 .812 .688 5-15/16 1-11/16 .875 11/16 .688 5-1/8 5/16 .916 1.05
3/8 13/16 13/32 1-3/4 1-5/8 .812 .688 5-15/16 1-11/16 .875 11/16 .688 5-1/8 3/8 1.3 1.5
7/16 1 1/2 2 2 1.00 .875 7-5/8 2 1.063 7/8 .875 6-5/8 7/16 1.778 2.04
1/2 1 1/2 2 2 1.00 .875 7-5/8 2 1.063 7/8 .875 6-5/8 1/2 2.3 2.66
9/16 1-1/4 5/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 1.19 1.125 9-3/16 2-1/2 1.250 1-1/8 1.125 8-5/16 9/16 2.9 3.36
5/8 1-1/4 5/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 1.19 1.125 9-3/16 2-1/2 1.250 1-1/8 1.125 8-5/16 5/8 3.58 4.12
3/4 1-1/2 3/4 2-3/4 3 1.38 1.375 11-1/4 3 1.438 1-5/16 1.375 9-15/16 3/4 5.12 5.88
7/8 1-3/4 15/16 3-1/4 3-3/8 1.63 1.50 13-1/8 3-1/2 1.688 1-1/2 1.50 11-5/8 7/8 6.92 7.96
1 2 1-1/32 3-3/4 4 2.00 1.75 15-1/16 4 2.063 1-3/4 1.75 13-3/16 1 8.98 10.34
1-1/8 2-1/4 1-3/16 4-1/4 4-1/2 2.25 2.00 16-15/16 4-1/2 2.313 2 2.00 14-11/16 1-1/8 11.3 13
1-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/16 4-3/4 5 2.50 2.25 18-5/8 5 2.563 2-1/4 2.25 16-1/2 1-1/4 13.88 15.98
1-3/8 2-1/2 1-5/16 5-1/4 5-1/4 2.50 2.50 20-1/2 5-1/4 2.563 2-1/4 2.50 18-1/8 1-3/8 16.7 19.2
1-1/2 3 1-7/16 5-3/4 5-3/4 2.75 2.75 22-5/16 5-1/2 2.813 2-1/2 2.75 19-9/16 1-1/2 19.78 22.8
1-3/4 3-1/2 1-11/16 6-3/4 7 3.50 3.00 26 6-3/4 3.563 3 3.00 23 1-3/4 26.6 30.6
2 4 1-13/16 8 8 3.75 3.50 30-1/8 7-3/4 3.813 3-1/4 3.50 26-7/16 2 34.4 39.6
2-1/4* 4-1/4 2-1/8 6-3/4 8-3/4 4.25 4.00 31-1/4 8-3/4 4.312 4 4.00 28-1/2 2-1/4 43 49.4
2-1/2* 4-1/4 2-1/8 6-3/4 8-3/4 4.25 4.40 33-3/8 8-3/4 4.312 4 4.40 30-1/4 2-1/2 52.4 60.4

Wire & Synthetic Rope Fittings and Swivels
Electroline manufactures non-swage end fittings and swivels for wire and synthetic rope, cable and line. End fittings
include clevis, eyes, studs, hooks and turnbuckles.
An Electroline wire rope fitting is installed much like a compression fitting in a plumbing application. The wire rope
passes through a sleeve. The strands are fanned-out and a plug is inserted. As the plug is driven into the fanned
end of the rope, the diameter of the end increases so that the rope can't dislodge itself. The last thing you do is
to put a socket over the sleeve and thread it on tight. It's a procedure essentially entailing three steps.
Electroline fitting assemblies are testable as well via a seconds-long onsite inspection process. Each fitting is
equipped with an inspection hole through which the rope strands are visible, and proper assembly confirmed.
An Electroline fitting is also esthetically pleasing, and therefore appropriate for many applications. More importantly,
however, its highly polished, well-finished appearance conveys an impression of strength and security. The fittings
are machined to incredible tolerances. They look and perform like the precision instruments they actually are.
Electroline fittings are used in a wide variety of applications. Because they are made of high-quality materials such as
stainless steel they are a niche product for outdoor use where rust can be a problem. They can be found in zoos,
outdoor parking lots, public ballparks, and in just about any other outdoor venue where wire or synthetic rope is employed.
BOOM PENDANT ASSEMBLIES

IMPROVED PLOW, IWRC EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW IWRC SWAGED SOCKET TYPE
BREAKING RECOMMENDED BREAKING RECOMMENDED
ROPE DIA. STRENGTH CAPACITY TONS STRENGTH CAPACITY TONS
(IN) (TONS) (AT 5:1 SF) (TONS) (AT 5:1 SF)
1/2 11.2 2.3 13 2.7 TYPE A
9/16 14.1 2.9 16.4 3.4

5/8 17.4 3.6 20.1 4.1 TYPE B
3/4 25 5.1 28.7 5.9

7/8 33.7 6.9 38.8 8 TYPE C
1 43.8 9 50.4 10
1-1/8 55.1 11 63.4 13
1-1/4 67.7 14 77.9 16
1-3/8 81.4 17 93.6 19
Note: 6 x 25 W Regular Lay construction is recommended for all sizes shown.
Eye Bolts
FORGED EYE BOLT ! WARNING

WARNINGS AND APPLICATION
INSTRUCTIONS • Use only if trained.
• Loads may slip or fall if proper eye bolt
assembly & lifting procedures are not used.
• A falling load can seriously injure or kill.
• Read, understand & follow all eye bolt safety in-
formation & diagrams presented here.
TABLE I (IN-LINE LOAD)

SIZE (IN) WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)
1/4 650
Regular Nut Shoulder Nut Machinery 5/16 1200
Eye Bolt Eye Bolt Eye Bolt
G-291 G-277 S-279/M-279 3/8 1550
1/2 2600
Important Safety Information – 5/8 5200
Read and Follow 3/4 7200
Inspection / Maintenance Safety
7/8 10600
• Always inspect eye bolt before use. 1 13300
1-1/4 21000
• Never use eye bolt that shows signs of wear or damage.
1-1/2 24000
• Never use eye bolt if eye or shank is bent or elongated.
1-3/4 34000
• Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean. 2 42000
2-1/2 65000
• Never machine, grind, or cut eye bolt.
Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt –

Assembly Safety Installation for Angular Loading
• Never exceed load limits specified in Table I. IN-LINE • The threaded shank must
protrude through the load
• Never use regular nut eye bolts for angular lifts. sufficiently to allow full
engagement of the nut.
• Always use shoulder nut eye bolts (or machinery eye bolts) for
angular lifts. • If the eye bolt protrudes
so far through the load
• For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows: that the nut cannot be
tightened securely against
DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD the load, use properly
sized washers to take
45 degrees 30% of rated working load
up the excess space
90 degrees 25% of rated working load BETWEEN THE NUT
AND THE LOAD.
• Never undercut eye bolt to seat shoulder against the load.
• Always countersink receiving hole or use washers to seat shoulder. • Place washers or spacers
between nut and load so that
• Always screw eye bolt down completely for proper seating. • Thickness of spacers
when the nut is tightened
must exceed this distance
securely, the shoulder is
• Always tighten nuts securely against the load. between the bottom of the
secured flush against the
load and the last thread of
load surface.
the eye bolt.

Eye Bolts
IMPORTANT – READ & UNDERSTAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE USING EYE BOLTS.
Regular Nut & Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt – Installation for In-Line Loading
RIGHT More than one RIGHT One eye bolt RIGHT Tighten Hex WRONG
eye bolt dia. dia. of threads Nut Securely
of threads, or less, use Against Load.
only (1) nut two (2) nuts.
required.
Tap Depth: 2x Dia.

2.5 x Dia. (Min.)
Tighten hex nut securely Tighten hex nut securely

against load against load One eye bolt dia. or less
Operating Safety
• Always inspect eye bolt before use. • Never exceed the capacity of the eyebolt – See Table I.
• Always stand clear of load. • When using lifting slings of two or more legs, make sure the loads in the
• Always lift load with a steady, even pull – do not jerk. legs are calculated using the angle from the vertical to the leg and prop-
• Always apply load to eye bolt in the plane of the eye, not at an angle. erly size the shoulder nut or machinery eye bolt for the angular load.
Do not reeve slings from WRONG After slings have been prop- Buckling may
one eye bolt to another. erly attached to the eye bolts, occur if the load is
This will alter the load & apply force slowly. Watch the not stiff enough to
angle of loading on the load carefully & be prepared resist the compres-
eye bolt. Resultant Load to stop applying force if the sive forces which
load starts buckling. result from the
angular loading.
Machinery Eye Bolt – Installation for In-Line & Angular Loading

These eye bolts are primarily intended to be installed into tapped holes. TABLE II
SHIM THICKNESS REQUIRED EYE BOLT
1. After the loads on the eye bolts have been calculated, select the proper
EYE BOLT SIZE (IN) SIZE TO CHANGE ROTATION 90° (IN)
size eye bolt for the job.
For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows: 1/4 .0125
5/16 .0139
DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD
3/8 .0156
1/2 .0192
5/8 .0227
2. Drill and tap the load to the correct sizes to a minimum depth of one-half 3/4 .0250
the eye bolt size beyond the shank length of the machinery eye bolt. 7/8 .0278
3. Thread the eye bolt into the load until the shoulder is flush and securely 1 .0312
tightened against the load. 1-1/4 .0357
4. If the plane of the machinery eye bolt is not aligned with the sling line,
1-1/2 .0417
estimate the amount of unthreading rotation necessary to align the plane
of the eye properly. Shim added to change eye alignment 90°
5. Remove the machinery eye bolt from the load and add shims (washers)
of proper thickness to adjust the angle of the plane of the eye to match Min. tap depth is basic
the sling line. Use Table II to estimate the required shim thickness for the shank length plus one-
amount of unthreading rotation required. half the nominal eye bolt
diameter.
Eye Bolts
REGULAR NUT EYE BOLTS
A D
G
G-291
F
• Recommended for straight line pull.
H
E • All Bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading.

B C
• Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized hex nuts.
• Forged Steel – Quenched and Tempered.
including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature
SEE APPLICATION AND requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical perfor-
! WARNING INFORMATION mance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material
traceability, not addressed by ASME B30.26.
WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN)

SHANK G-219 LOAD WEIGHT
DIAMETER & STOCK LIMIT PER 100
LENGTH (IN) NO. GALV. (LBS) (LBS) A B C D E F G H
1/4 x 2 1043230 650 8.20 .25 .50 1.00 .25 1.50 2.00 3.06 .56
1/4 x 4 1043258 650 11.70 .25 .50 1.00 .25 2.50 4.00 5.06 .56
5/16 x 2-1/4 1043276 1200 13.30 .31 .62 1.25 .31 1.50 2.25 3.56 .69
5/16 x 4-1/4 1043294 1200 25.00 .31 .62 1.25 .31 2.50 4.25 5.56 .69
3/8 x 2-1/2 1043310 1550 23.30 .38 .75 1.50 .38 1.50 2.50 4.12 .88
3/8 x 4-1/2 1043338 1550 29.50 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 4.50 6.12 .88
3/8 x 6 1043356 1550 35.20 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 6.00 7.62 .88
1/2 x 3-1/4 1043374 2600 50.30 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 1.50 3.25 5.38 1.12
1/2 x 6 1043392 2600 66.10 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 6.00 8.12 1.12
1/2 x 8 1043418 2600 82.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 8.00 10.12 1.12
1/2 x 10 1043436 2600 88.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 10.00 12.12 1.12
1/2 x 12 1043454 2600 114.20 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 12.00 14.12 1.12
5/8 x 4 1043472 5200 103.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 2.00 4.00 6.69 1.44
5/8 x 6 1043490 5200 118.20 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 6.00 8.69 1.44
5/8 x 8 1043515 5200 135.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 8.00 10.69 1.44
5/8 x 10 1043533 5200 153.60 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 10.00 12.69 1.44
5/8 x 12 1043551 5200 167.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 4.00 12.00 14.69 1.44
3/4 x 4-1/2 1043579 7200 168.60 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 2.00 4.50 7.69 1.69
3/4 x 6 1043597 7200 184.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 6.00 9.19 1.69
3/4 x 8 1043613 7200 207.90 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 8.00 11.19 1.69
3/4 x 10 1043631 7200 235.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 10.00 13.19 1.69
3/4 x 12 1043659 7200 257.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 4.00 12.00 15.19 1.69
3/4 x 15 1043677 7200 298.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 5.00 15.00 18.19 1.69
7/8 x 5 1043695 10600 270.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 2.50 5.00 8.75 2.00
7/8 x 8 1043711 10600 308.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 8.00 11.75 2.00
7/8 x 12 1043739 10600 400.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 12.00 15.75 2.00
1x6 1043757 13300 421.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 3.00 6.00 10.31 2.31
1x9 1043775 13300 468.50 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 9.00 13.31 2.31
1 x 12 1043793 13300 540.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 12.00 16.31 2.31
1 x 18 1043819 13300 650.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 7.00 18.00 22.31 2.31
1-1/4 x 8 1043837 21000 750.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 8.00 13.38 2.88
1-1/4 x 12 1043855 21000 900.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 12.00 17.38 2.88
1-1/4 x 20 1043873 21000 1210.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 6.00 20.00 25.38 2.88
*Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.

Eye Bolts
SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLTS
J ®
G
A D
F H
E
B C
G-277
• Forged Steel
SEE APPLICATION AND • Hot Dip galvanized
! WARNING INFORMATION • Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized, heavy hex nuts
DIAMETER & STOCK NO. LIMIT* PER 100
LENGTH (IN) GALV. (LBS) (LBS) A B C D E F G H J
1/4 x 2 1045014 650 6.60 .25 .50 .88 .19 1.50 2.00 2.94 .50 .47
1/4 x 4 1045032 650 9.10 .25 .50 .88 .19 2.50 4.00 4.94 .50 .47
5/16 x 2-1/4 1045050 1200 12.50 .31 .62 1.12 .25 1.50 2.25 3.50 .69 .56
5/16 x 4-1/4 1045078 1200 18.80 .31 .62 1.12 .25 2.50 4.25 5.50 .69 .56
3/8 x 2-1/2 1045096 1550 21.40 .38 .75 1.38 .31 1.50 2.50 3.97 .78 .66
3/8 x 4-1/2 1045112 1550 25.30 .38 .75 1.38 .31 2.50 4.50 5.97 .78 .66
1/2 x 3-1/4 1045130 2600 42.60 .50 1.00 1.75 .38 1.50 3.25 5.12 1.00 .91
1/2 x 6 1045158 2600 56.60 .50 1.00 1.75 .38 3.00 6.00 7.88 1.00 .91
5/8 x 4 1045176 5200 68.60 .62 1.25 2.25 .50 2.00 4.00 6.44 1.31 1.12
5/8 x 6 1045194 5200 102.40 .62 1.25 2.25 .50 3.00 6.00 8.44 1.31 1.12
3/4 x 4-1/2 1045210 7200 144.50 .75 1.50 2.75 .62 2.00 4.50 7.44 1.56 1.38
3/4 x 6 1045238 7200 167.50 .75 1.50 2.75 .62 3.00 6.00 8.94 1.56 1.38
7/8 x 5 1045256 10600 225.00 .88 1.75 3.25 .75 2.50 5.00 8.46 1.84 1.56
1x6 1045292 13300 366.30 1.00 2.00 3.75 .88 3.00 6.00 9.97 2.09 1.81
1x9 1045318 13300 422.50 1.00 2.00 3.75 .88 4.00 9.00 12.97 2.09 1.81
1-1/4 x 8 1045336 21000 650.00 1.25 2.50 4.50 1.00 4.00 8.00 12.72 2.47 2.28
1-1/4 x 12 1045354 21000 795.00 1.25 2.50 4.50 1.00 4.00 12.00 16.72 2.47 2.28
1-1/4 x 15 1045372 24000 1425.00 1.50 3.00 5.50 1.25 6.00 15.00 20.75 3.00 2.75
*Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.
H J
E
D
G-275 C
SCREW EYE BOLTS B
• Forged Steel – Quenched and Tempered A G
• Hot Dip galvanized

DIAMETER & STOCK NO. LIMIT* PER 100
LENGTH (IN) GALV. (LBS) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H J
1/4 x 2 1046111 500 4.30 .25 1.50 2.00 2.50 2.94 .50 .88 .19 .47
5/16 x 2-1/4 1046139 800 9.90 .31 1.69 2.25 2.94 3.50 .63 1.13 .25 .56
3/8 x 2-1/2 1046157 1200 18.88 .38 1.88 2.50 3.28 3.97 .75 1.38 .31 .66
1/2 x 3-1/4 1046175 2200 37.50 .50 2.44 3.25 4.25 5.12 1.00 1.75 .38 .91
5/8 x 4 1046193 3500 85.50 .63 3.00 4.00 5.31 6.44 1.25 2.25 .50 1.12
Eye Bolts
SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS
• Forged Steel – Quenched and Tempered.

• Recommended for straight line pull
• Working Load Limits shown are for In-line pull.
• Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load
Limit at 20,000 cycles.
• Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME
B30.26.
S-279
SEE APPLICATION AND

!
®
WARNING INFORMATION
WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN)

STOCK WLL PER 100 A**
SIZE NO. (LBS)* (LBS) THREAD B C D E F G H
1/4 x 1 9900182 650 5.00 1/4 - 20 1.02 1.13 .75 2.29 .19 .53 .77
5/16 x 1-1/8 9900191 1200 9.00 5/16 - 18 1.15 1.38 .88 2.74 .25 .59 .95
3/8 x 1-1/4 9900208 1550 15.00 3/8 - 16 1.27 1.62 1.00 3.07 .31 .69 1.05
1/2 x 1-1/2 9900217 2600 28.00 1/2 - 13 1.53 1.95 1.19 3.70 .38 .91 1.27
5/8 x 1-3/4 9900226 5200 55.00 5/8 - 11 1.79 2.38 1.38 4.45 .50 1.13 1.53
3/4 x 2 9900235 7200 96.00 3/4 - 10 2.05 2.76 1.50 5.07 .63 1.38 1.71
7/8 x 2-1/4 9900244 10600 154.00 7/8 - 9 2.31 3.25 1.75 5.87 .75 1.56 2.00
1 x 2-1/2 9900253 13300 238.00 1-8 2.57 3.76 2.00 6.66 .88 1.81 2.30
1-1/8 x 2-3/4 9900257 15000 320.00 1-1/8 - 7 2.75 4.19 2.25 7.20 .97 2.06 2.35
1-1/4 x 3 9900262 21000 399.00 1-1/4 - 7 3.09 4.50 2.50 7.95 1.00 2.28 2.73
1-1/2 x 3-1/2 9900271 24000 720.00 1-1/2 - 6 3.60 5.50 3.00 9.49 1.25 2.75 3.28
1-3/4 x 3-3/4 9900280 34000 1040.00 1-3/4 - 5 3.75 6.26 3.50 10.48 1.38 3.00 3.60
2x4 9900289 42000 1880.00 2 - 4-1/2 4.00 7.26 4.00 12.31 1.81 3.38 4.50
2-1/2 x 5 9900298 65000 3250.00 2-1/2 - 4 5.00 8.76 4.50 14.88 2.12 4.25 5.50
*Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit.
** All bolts threaded UNC

Eye Bolts
SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS
• Drop Forged Carbon Steel, Self-Colored

• ASTM A489
• Fully threaded: UNC-2A
UNC-2A METRIC
UNC-2A SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS
SHANK DIA. & THREAD
HANES
UNC-2A SHANK LENGTH EYE I.D. EYE O.D.
PRODUCT RATED CAPACITY
NO. STOCK NO. (LBS) A B C D WEIGHT
FIT50011 K2021 500 1/4 - 20 1 3/4 1-3/16 0.06
FIT50031 K2022 900 5/16 - 18 1-1/8 7/8 1-7/16 0.11
FIT50051 K2023 1300 3/8 - 16 1-1/4 1 1-21/32 0.18
FIT50071 K2024 1800 7/16 - 14 1-3/8 1-3/32 1-27/32 0.23
FIT50091 K2025 2400 1/2 - 13 1-1/2 1-3/16 2-1/16 0.35
FIT50111 K2026 3000 9/16 - 12 1-5/8 1-9/32 2-9/32 0.47
FIT50131 K2027 4000 5/8 - 11 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-1/2 0.70
FIT50151 K2028 5000 3/4 - 10 2 1-1/2 2-13/16 1.10
FIT50171 K2029 7000 7/8 - 9 2-1/4 1-11/16 3-1/4 1.70
FIT50191 K2030 9000 1-8 2-1/2 1-13/16 3-9/16 2.36
FIT50211 K2031 12000 1-1/8 - 7 2-3/4 2 4 3.41
FIT50231 K2032 15000 1-1/4 - 7 3 2-3/16 4-7/16 4.68
FIT50251 K2034 21000 1-1/2 - 6 3-1/2 2-1/2 5-3/16 7.77
FIT50270 K2035 28000 1-3/4 - 5 3-3/4 2-7/8 6-1/16 11.35
FIT50291 K2036 38000 2 - 4-1/2 4 3-1/4 6-7/8 16.70
FIT50293 K2037** 56000 2-1/2 - 4 5 4 8-9/16 29.80
METRIC SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS

APPROX. THREAD SIZE SHANK LENGTH I.D. EYE O.D. EYE OVERALL LENGTH APPROX. RATED RATED
EQUIV. IN WEIGHT PER CAPACITY CAPACITY
METRIC SIZE INCHES A B C D E EACH IN KGS. IN LBS
M6 1/4 M6 x 1.0 25.4 19 30.0 60.3 .06 210 462
M7 5/16 M7 x 1.0 28.5 22 36.5 71.4 .10 370 814
M8 3/8 M8 x 1.25 31.7 25 43.0 82.5 .17 500 1,110
M10 7/16 M10 x 1.5 35.0 27 46.0 90.5 .24 740 1,628
M12 1/2 M12 x 1.75 38.0 30 54.0 100.8 .36 1,030 2,266
M14 9/16 M14 x 2.0 44.5 35 65.0 120.7 .48 1,600 3,520
M16 5/8 M16 x 2.0 44.5 35 65.0 120.7 .69 1,600 3,520
M18 3/4 M18 x 2.5 51.0 38 71.5 133.3 1.10 2,140 4,708
M20 7/8 M20 x 2.5 57.0 41 81.0 152.4 1.51 2,860 6,292
M24 1 M24 x 3.0 63.5 44 90.4 168.3 2.36 3,850 8,470
M27 1-1/8 M27 x 3.0 70.0 51 103.0 191.3 3.41 5,200 11,440
M30 1-1/4 M30 x 3.5 76.0 55 112.7 208.8 4.68 6,400 14,080
M36 1-1/2 M36 x 4.0 89.0 63 131.8 240.5 7.77 8,970 19,734
M42 1-5/8 M42 x 4.5 95.0 73 152.4 274.7 11.10 11,960 26,312
M45 1-3/4 M45 x 4.5 95.0 73 152.4 274.7 11.35 12,720 27,984
M48 1-7/8 M48 x 5.0 101.6 82 174.6 301.6 15.90 16,400 36,080
M52 2 M52 x 5.0 101.6 82 174.6 301.6 16.70 17,300 38,060
Crosby's Slide-Loc™
CROSBY’S INNOVATIVE ALTERNATIVE TO

STANDARD EYE BOLTS
The new Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc™ provides features

not found on standard lifting eye bolts. At the center
of the new design is the patent pending locking mech-
anism that slides to lock the bolt for faster installation,
then slides back to make ready for lifting — without
the need for tools. Swivels
• When compared to respective size eye bolts, 360°
the Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc™:
- Has a larger eye opening for easy access.
- Utilizes a bail that swivels 360˚ to keep load
aligned with the sling leg, and maintains full
WLL at any angle.
• Fatigue Rated® to 20,000 cycles at 1.5 times
the WLL.
WORKING
• The patent pending locking mechanism provides LOAD LIMIT VENDOR HSI
(T) BOLT SIZE (IN) PART NO. PART NO.
quicker installation, without the need for tools.
0.5 3/8 - 16x1 1068407 FIT24600
• QUIC-CHECK® mark indicates if the 0.75 1/2 - 13x1 - 1/4 1068416 FIT24605
Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc™ is ready for the lift.
1.5 5/8 - 11x1 - 5/8 1068425 FIT24610
• Forged alloy steel and Quenched and Tempered
2.3 3/4 - 10x2 1068434 FIT24615
bail provides toughness in potentially abusive
field conditions. 2.3 7/8 - 9x2 - 1/1 1068443 FIT24620
3.2 1 - 8x3 1068452 FIT24625
• Meets the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
guidelines and is marked with CE accordingly.

Swivel Hoist Rings
ACTEK™ SWIVEL (SAFETY) HOIST RINGS
UNC THREADS
• Rated load from 400 lbs. to 125 tons. • Safety factor: 5:1
• Pivots 180°/ Swivels 360° • 100% magnetic particle inspected
• Material: AISI 4140 aircraft quality • Certified heat treatment
• Finish: Black oxide per mil spec cadmium plated
UNC THREADS
RATED STANDARD U-BAR LONG U-BAR
LOADS THREAD PART PART TORQUE WT.
(LBS) SIZE (IN) A C D E NO. B F NO. B F G H (FT/LB) (LBS)
600 1/4 - 20 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.54 46100 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 6 0.3
800 5/16 - 18 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.29 46102 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 7 0.3
800 5/16 - 18 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.54 46104 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 7 0.3
1,000 3/8 - 16 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.54 46106 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 12 0.3
2,000 7/16 - 14 0.70 0.93 1/2 1.07 46606 1.90 3.77 – – – 2.58 1.49 22 1.0
2,500 1/2 - 13 0.70 0.93 1/2 1.07 46602 1.84 3.77 – – – 2.58 1.49 28 1.0
2,000 7/16 - 14 0.88 1.22 3/4 0.78 46000 2.37 4.78 46638 4.34 6.72 3.52 1.99 22 2.6
2,500 1/2 - 13 0.88 1.22 3/4 0.78 46008 2.31 4.78 46644 4.25 6.72 3.52 1.99 28 2.6
2,500 1/2 - 13 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.03 46010 2.31 4.78 46646 4.25 6.72 3.52 1.99 28 2.6
2,500 1/2 - 13 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.28 46012 2.31 4.78 46648 4.25 6.72 3.52 1.99 28 2.6
4,000 5/8 - 11 0.88 1.22 3/4 0.78 46002 2.18 4.78 46641 4.12 6.72 3.52 1.99 60 2.6
4,000 5/8 - 11 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.03 46004 2.18 4.78 46640 4.12 6.72 3.52 1.99 60 2.6
4,000 5/8 - 11 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.28 46006 2.18 4.78 46642 4.12 6.72 3.52 1.99 60 2.6
5,000 3/4 - 10 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.03 46014 2.06 4.78 46650 4.00 6.72 3.52 1.99 100 3.0
5,000 3/4 - 10 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.53 46018 2.06 4.78 46654 4.00 6.72 3.52 1.99 100 3.0
7,000 3/4 - 10 1.40 1.71 1 1.04 46204 3.06 6.52 46658 4.65 8.11 5.14 3.00 100 7.0
7,000 3/4 - 10 1.40 1.71 1 1.54 46206 3.06 6.52 46660 4.65 8.11 5.14 3.00 100 7.0
8,000 7/8 - 9 1.40 1.71 1 1.04 46202 2.93 6.52 46656 4.52 8.11 5.14 3.00 160 7.0
8,000 7/8 - 9 1.40 1.71 1 1.29 46203 2.93 6.52 46657 4.52 8.11 5.14 3.00 160 7.0
10,000 1-8 1.40 1.71 1 1.29 46210 2.81 6.52 46662 4.40 8.11 5.14 3.00 230 7.5
10,000 1-8 1.40 1.71 1 1.54 46212 2.81 6.52 46664 4.40 8.11 5.14 3.00 230 7.5
10,000 1-8 1.40 1.71 1 2.29 46214 2.81 6.52 46666 4.40 8.11 5.14 3.00 230 7.5
15,000 1-1/4 - 7 1.75 2.11 1-1/4 1.89 46802 4.12 8.73 – – – 6.50 3.76 470 14.0
20,000 1-3/8 - 6 2.00 2.40 1-1/2 2.50 46702 5.50 10.20 – – – 7.46 4.31 540 23.0
24,000 1-1/2 - 6 2.25 2.81 1-3/4 2.70 46404 6.41 12.47 – – – 8.55 4.87 800 34.0
24,000 1-3/4 - 5 2.25 2.81 1-3/4 3.20 46408 6.16 12.47 – – – 8.55 4.87 800 34.0
30,000 2 - 4-1/2 2.25 2.81 1-3/4 3.20 46400 5.91 12.47 – – – 8.55 4.87 800 36.0
50,000 2-1/2 - 8 3.00 4.09 2-1/4 4.00 47002 8.03 16.87 – – – 11.67 6.52 2100 88.0
50,000 2-1/2 - 4 3.00 4.09 2-1/4 4.00 47006 8.03 16.87 – – – 11.67 6.52 2100 88.0
75,000 3-4 3.75 5.27 2-3/4 5.00 47200 8.48 19.50 – – – 14.15 8.10 4300 166.0
100,000 3-1/2 - 4 4.00 6.06 3-1/4 7.00 47402 9.28 22.09 – – – 15.90 8.60 5100 265.0
250,000 6-4 6.00 14.00 5 9.00 47602 14.00 33.00 – – – 25.00 13.00 9900 790.0
Swivel Hoist Rings
• Top washer has the following features:

• The Working Load Limit and Recommended Torque value
are permanently stamped into each washer.
• Washer is color coded for easy identification: Red - UNC thread.
• Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 time Working Load Limit.
• Bolt specification is an Alloy socket head cap screw to ASTM A 574.
• All threads listed are UNC.
• BOLD SIZE IDENTIFICATION: The size of the bolt will be stated as in
HR-125 the drawing above. Illustration shows meaning of each dimension given.
Swivel Hoist Ring • Frame 2 and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.
DIMENSIONS (IN)
EFFECTIVE
HR-125 TORQUE THREAD WEIGHT
FRAME STOCK WLL IN FT BOLT SIZE PROJECTION RADIUS DIAMETER EACH
SIZE NO. NO. (LBS)* LBS A‡ LENGTH B C D E F G H (LBS)
1† 1016887 800 7 5/16 - 18 x 1.50 .58 2.72 .97 .46 .34 1.87 1.12 .37
1† 1016898 1000 12 3/8 - 16 x 1.50 .58 2.72 .97 .46 .34 1.87 1.05 .39
2 1016909 2500 28 1/2 - 13 x 2.00 .70 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.29 2.33
2† 1016912 2500 28 1/2 - 13 x 2.50 1.20 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.29 2.36
2 1016920 4000 60 5/8 - 11 x 2.00 .70 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.16 2.41
2† 1016924 4000 60 5/8 - 11 x 2.75 1.45 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.16 2.47
2 1016931 5000 100 3/4 - 10 x 2.25 .95 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.04 2.52
2† 1016935 5000 100 3/4 - 10 x 2.75 1.45 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.04 2.59
3 1016942 7000** 100 3/4 - 10 x 2.75 .89 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.97 6.72
3† 1016946 7000** 100 3/4 - 10 x 3.50 1.64 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.97 6.81
3 1016953 8000 160 7/8 - 9 x 2.75 .89 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.84 6.84
3† 1016957 8000 160 7/8 - 9 x 3.50 1.64 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.84 6.96
3 1016964 10000 230 1 - 8 x 3.00 1.14 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.72 7.09
3† 1016969 10000 230 1 - 8 x 4.00 2.14 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.72 7.31
4 1016975 15000 470 1-1/4 - 7 x 4.50 2.21 8.72 3.71 1.75 1.19 6.18 3.93 14.51
5 1016986 24000 800 1-1/2 - 6 x 6.75 3.00 12.55 4.71 2.39 1.75 8.48 5.52 37.73
5 1016997 30000 1100 2 - 4-1/2 x 6.75 3.00 12.55 4.71 2.39 1.75 8.48 5.02 40.69
6 1017001 50000 2100 2-1/2 - 4 x 8.00 4.00 16.88 5.75 3.00 2.25 11.00 8.03 88.00
7 1017005 75000 4300 3 - 4 x 10.50 5.00 19.50 7.25 3.75 2.75 14.16 8.50 166.00
8 1017009 100000 5100 3-1/2 - 4 x 13.0 # 7.00 22.09 7.75 4.00 3.25 15.91 9.28 265.00
*Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. **Ultimate Load is 4.5 times the Working Load Limit for 7000# Hoist Ring when tested in 90
degree orientation. † Long Bolts are designed to be used with soft metal (i.e., aluminum) workpiece. While the long bolts may be used with
ferrous metal (i.e., steel & iron) workpiece, short bolts are designed for ferrous workpieces only. ‡ Bolt specification is an Alloy socket head
cap screw to ASTMA 574. # Hex head bolt used on Frame 8 (100,000lb.) Hoist Ring.

Lifting Clamps
“GXL” CLAMPS
• Available in a 1/2, 1 and 2 ton capacity.
• Exclusive feature is a patented wear indicator system. When any of cam’s straight line, convex
teeth are flattened between unique wear indicator grooves, it is time to change the cam.
• Drop forged and heat treated components, with gripping surfaces of case hardened alloy steel.
• Newly designed “Cam Engaging Lever” keeps the cam in contact with the plate. The tension
arm and spring mechanism facilitate attaching and removing the clamp. These
clamps will not lift plate when in the “lever open” position.
Warning: Never tamper with a UPC NO GRIP RANGE CLAMP WT WLL

clamp’s tension arm and spring CAT NO 020418 (IN) (LBS) (TONS)
mechanism during a lift. 6422012 187049 1/16 - 5/8 5.5 1/2
6422001 187687 1/16 - 3/4 8 1
6422002 187032 1/16 - 7/8 10.5 2
SAC (SCREW-ADJUSTED CAM) PLATE CLAMPS

• Recommended for turning plates from horizontal to vertical as well as through a 180° arc.
• The convex, serrated cam swivels on a ball joint so that the area of cam engagement
increases as load increases
• Drop forged body and shackle. Cam under load.
• 100% proof tested with certificate Cam position The heavier the
under no load. load, the greater
of test attached to each clamp. the bite.
Note: Screw
needs to be hand
tight only! Do not
over tighten. MERRILL UPC NO GRIP RANGE CLAMP WT WLL
MODEL NO CAT NO 020418 (IN) (LBS) (TONS)
SAC-1 6421000 096396 0-1 6-1/4 1
SAC- 3 6421001 096402 0-2 14-1/4 3
SAC- 6 6421002 096419 0-3 40 6
HORIZONTAL PLATE CLAMP

• Dual springs hold cam on the work while the second clamp is placed
• 100% proof tested with certificate of test attached to each clamp
• Sold in pairs
• One man can handle plates with this clamp
MERRILL GRIP CAM WT PER

MODEL UPC NO WLL RANGE WIDTH PAIR
NO CAT NO 020418 (TONS) (IN) WIDTH (IN) (IN) (LBS)
6H 6421701 096686 6 0-1-1/2 5 3/4 32
Lifting Clamps
IPU10 / UNIVERSAL VERTICAL LIFTING CLAMP

The IPU10 vertical lifting clamp WEIGHT
MODEL WLL (T)* STOCK NO. (LBS) JAW A
is used for lifting, turning, mov-
IPU10 .5 2701675 4.19 0 - .63
ing or vertical transfer of sheet,
IPU10 1 2701663 5.29 0 - .75
plates, or fabrications from hor-
IPU10 2 2701677 18.7 0 - 1.38
izontal to vertical and down to
horizontal (180°) as needed. The IPU10 3 2701665 32.6 0 - 1.56
hinged hoisting eye allows for the IPU10 4.5 2701667 35.3 0 - 1.56
clamp to place and lift the load IPU10 6 2701669 53.0 0 - 2.00
from any direction, or with a mul- IPU1J 6 2702469 67.3 2.00 - 4.00
tiple leg sling without side-loading IPU10 9 2701671 65.0 0 - 2.00
the clamp. IPU10J 9 2701673 67.2 2.00 - 4.00
IPU10S: For use with Stainless IPU10 12 2701679 126 0 - 2.13
Steel material. IPU10J 12 2701681 130 2.13 - 4.25
IPU10H: For use with materials IPU10 16 2701683 159 .25 - 2.50
with a surface hardness to 47Rc FOR STAINLESS STEEL - WITH UNIVERSAL HOISTING EYE
(450 HB)
IPU10S .5 2702275 4.19 0 - .63
IPU10S 1 2702263 4.63 0 - .75
IPU10S 2 2702277 16.8 0 - 1.38
IPU10S 3 2702265 32.7 0 - 1.56
FOR VERY HARD MATERIALS - WITH UNIVERSAL HOISTING EYE
IPU10H .5 2702175 4.16 0 - .63
IPU10H 1 2702177 16.8 0 - 1.38
IPU10H 2 2702165 32.7 0 - 1.56
IPU10H 3 2702167 35.3 0 - 1.56
*Design factor based on EN 13155 and ASME B30.20. Model IPU10R

(remote control opening and closing via a cable) on request.
IPHGZ / IPHGUZ HORIZONTAL LIFTING CLAMP
The IPHGZ, IPHGUZ horizontal lifting clamps

The IPBC horizontal lifting clamps have
have a pretension locking feature that allows
a pretension feature that allows the
the user to attach the clamps to the material
user to attach the clamps to the material for horizontal
for horizontal lifting and transfer of sagging
lifting and transfer of sagging and non-sagging material.
and non-sagging material. These clamps may also be used
These clamps may also be used to handle material that
to handle material that will be used in shears, bending and
will be used in shears, bending and rolling machines or
rolling machines or other fabrication equipment. May also
other fabrication equipment. May also be used for turning
be used to move and lift structural shapes such as I-Beams,
beams from the “H” into the “I” position.
H-Beams ect.
MODEL WLL (T)* IPBC STOCK NO. WEIGHT (LBS) MODEL WLL (T)* STOCK NO. WEIGHT (LBS)
IPBC 1 2700410 7.72 IPHGUZ 1.5 2705455 19.8
IPBC 2 2700411 14.3 IPHGZ .75 2705451 8.82
IPBC 3 2700412 18.8 IPHGZ 1.5 2705452 16.1
*Design factor based on EN 13155 and ASME B30.20. IPHGZ 3.0 2705453 27.1
IPHGZ 4.5 2705454 55.1

Lifting Clamps
FIXED JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS
These Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps are truly versatile in application
and may be used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point.
• Designed specifically to provide maximum JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT.

• Engineered for practical use where mobility is essential.
• Easily applied and do not require additional tools or width adjusting
components such as spacing washers.
JAW GRIP INSIDE SHACK-
WLL @ 0° ADJ. MIN- JAW APERTURE LE CROWN TO AVG. WT.
MODEL VERT. (LBS) MAX (IN) (IN) SPACER (IN) (LBS)
S1 4480 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 3-3/4 9
S2 6720 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 3-3/4 11
S2A 6720 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 3-3/4 18
S3 8960 6 - 10 7/8 3-7/8 24
S3X 11200 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 4-1/8 22
S3A 11200 6 - 12 1-5/8 4-1/8 33
S4S 13440 8 - 18 1-5/8 4-1/8 41
S4A 22400 8 - 18 1-5/8 4-1/2 62
S12 33600 8 - 18 2 5-7/8 109
S14 33600 16 - 24 2-1/2 5-7/8 129
SWIVEL JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps incorporate the additional benefit of
horizontal jaw adjustment. This enables the full length and maximum width of
the swivel jaw to anchor evenly on a considerable surface area of the beam
flange. Additional tools or width adjusting components are not required.
S5 6720 3-1/2 - 12 1 3-3/4 22
S5A 6720 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 31
S6 11200 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 31
S6A 11200 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 34
S11 22400 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 47
ADJUSTABLE RUNWAY BEAM TROLLEYS

“SUPERCLAMP” Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys are of acknowledged and
experienced design. The unique quality features of this new range of manual
traveling gear are the Wheel guarding Anti-drop Plates, which are incorporated
into the practical design of these transferable and mobile securing attachments.
To complement this range, reference is made to “SUPERCLAMP” Geared
Runway Beam Trolleys which allow additional ease of load conveyance.
B1 6720 3-8 1-1/8 4-3/4 52
B2 13440 4 - 12 1-1/4 3-7/8 110
B3 22400 4 - 12 1-1/2 5-1/8 164
Lifting Clamps
MODEL TLA & TL

The Model TLA is a vertical lifting clamp incorporating a “Lock Open” and a “Lock Closed” feature and an auxiliary lock. The clamp is
capable of turning a steel plate from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180 degree arc. The “Lock Open,” “Lock Closed” feature
facilitates attaching and removing the clamp from the plate. The Model TL is identical to the Model TLA except that it does not contain the
auxiliary lock. The Model TL is capable of turning a plate from horizontal to vertical and back through the same 90 degree arc.
RATED PLATE MAX.

CAPACITY THICKNESS B C MAX. D E F G H J WEIGHT
(TONS) A (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (LBS)
1/2 0 - 5/8 2-3/8 6-1/4 11-1/8 2-3/8 4-3/4 2-3/4 1-13/16 1/2 9
1/2 1/2 - 1 2-3/8 6-1/4 11-1/8 2-3/8 5-1/8 2-3/4 1-13/16 1/2 10
1/2 3/4 - 1-1/4 2-3/8 6-1/4 11-1/8 2-3/8 5-3/8 2-3/4 1-13/16 1/2 11
1/2 1-1/4 - 1-3/4 2-3/8 6-1/4 11-1/8 2-3/8 5-7/8 2-3/4 1-13/16 1/2 13
1 0 - 3/4 3 7-1/2 13-1/8 2-5/8 6 2-13/16 2 5/8 14
1 1/2 - 1 3 7-1/2 13-1/8 2-5/8 6-1/4 2-13/16 2 5/8 15
1 3/4 - 1-1/4 3 7-1/2 13-1/8 2-5/8 6-1/2 2-13/16 2 5/8 16
1 1 - 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 13-1/8 2-5/8 6-3/4 2-13/16 2 5/8 17
1 1-1/2 - 2 3 7-1/2 13-1/8 2-5/8 7-1/4 2-13/16 2 5/8 18
2 0-1 3-1/2 9-3/8 16-1/4 3-5/8 8-7/8 3-3/4 2-7/8 3/4 32
2 3/4 - 1-1/2 3-1/2 9-3/8 16-1/4 3-5/8 9-3/8 3-3/4 2-7/8 3/4 33
2 1-1/4 - 2 3-1/2 9-3/8 16-1/4 3-5/8 9-7/8 3-3/4 2-7/8 3/4 35
2 2 - 2-3/4 3-1/2 9-3/8 16-1/4 3-5/8 10-5/8 3-3/4 2-7/8 3/4 37
4 3/16 - 1-1/4 4 9-7/8 17-5/8 3-5/8 9 3-13/16 3 3/4 36
4 1-2 4 9-7/8 17-5/8 3-5/8 9-3/4 3-13/16 3 3/4 37
4 2-3 4 9-7/8 17-5/8 3-5/8 10-3/4 3-13/16 3 3/4 40
4 3-4 4 9-7/8 17-5/8 3-5/8 11-3/4 3-13/16 3 3/4 43
6 1/4 - 1-3/8 4-5/8 11-1/8 20-1/8 3-1/2 10-1/4 3-7/8 3-3/8 3/4 49
6 1 - 2-1/8 4-5/8 11-1/8 20-1/8 3-1/2 11 3-7/8 3-3/8 3/4 51
6 2 - 3-1/8 4-5/8 11-1/8 20-1/8 3-1/2 12 3-7/8 3-3/8 3/4 54
6 3 - 4-1/8 4-5/8 11-1/8 20-1/8 3-1/2 13 3-7/8 3-3/8 3/4 57
8 3/8 - 1-1/2 4-13/16 12-5/16 21-5/16 3-3/4 11-1/2 4-3/4 3-7/8 1 72
8 1 - 2-1/8 4-13/16 12-5/16 21-5/16 3-3/4 12-1/8 4-3/4 3-7/8 1 74
8 2 - 3-1/8 4-13/16 12-5/16 21-5/16 3-3/4 13-1/8 4-3/4 3-7/8 1 77
MODEL TL MODEL TLA
8 3 - 4-1/8 4-13/16 12-5/16 21-5/16 3-3/4 14-1/8 4-3/4 3-7/8 1 80
MODEL FR
The Model FR is a vertical lifting tool for relatively light work. It is small and easy to handle in capacities through three tons. It incorporates
a “Lock Closed” feature which facilitates attaching the clamp to the plate.
RATED PLATE
CAPACITY THICKNESS B C MAX. D E F G H J WEIGHT
(TONS) A (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (LBS)
1/2 0 - 3/4 2-13/16 7 11-1/4 2-3/8 4-5/8 2-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 8
1/2 1/2 - 1 2-13/16 7 11-1/4 2-3/8 4-7/8 2-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 8
1/2 3/4 - 1-1/4 2-13/16 7 11-1/4 2-3/8 5-1/8 2-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 9
1/2 1 - 1-1/2 2-13/16 7 11-1/4 2-3/8 5-3/8 2-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 10
1/2 1-1/4 - 1-3/4 3-13/16 7 11-1/4 2-3/8 5-3/8 2-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 11
1 0 - 3/4 3-3/16 9 13-3/4 2-5/8 5-7/8 3-3/16 1-5/8 5/8 14
1 1/2 - 1 3-3/16 9 13-3/4 2-5/8 6-1/8 3-3/16 1-5/8 5/8 15
1 3/4 - 1-1/4 3-3/16 9 13-3/4 2-5/8 6-3/8 3-3/16 1-5/8 5/8 15
1 1 - 1-1/2 3-3/16 9 13-3/4 2-5/8 6-5/8 3-3/16 1-5/8 5/8 16
1 1-1/4 - 1-3/4 3-3/16 9 13-3/4 2-5/8 6-7/8 3-3/16 1-5/8 5/8 17
1 1-1/2 - 2 3-3/16 9 13-3/4 2-5/8 7-1/8 3-3/16 1-5/8 5/8 18
2 0-1 3-1/2 9 16-3/8 3-5/8 6-3/4 3-3/8 2-1/8 3/4 23
2 3/4 - 1-1/2 3-1/2 9 16-3/8 3-5/8 7-1/4 3-3/8 2-1/8 3/4 23
2 1-1/4 - 2 3-1/2 9 16-3/8 3-5/8 7-3/4 3-3/8 2-1/8 3/4 23
2 1-3/4 - 2-1/2 3-1/2 9 16-3/8 3-5/8 8-1/4 3-3/8 2-1/8 3/4 24
3 0 - 1-1/4 4-3/16 10-3/4 18-3/8 3-5/8 7-5/8 3-9/16 2-7/16 3/4 30
3 3/4 - 1-1/2 4-3/16 10-3/4 18-3/8 3-5/8 7-7/8 3-9/16 2-7/16 3/4 31
3 1-1/4 - 2 4-3/16 10-3/4 18-3/8 3-5/8 8-3/8 3-9/16 2-7/16 3/4 32
3 1-3/4 - 2-1/2 4-3/16 10-3/4 18-3/8 3-5/8 8-7/8 3-9/16 2-7/16 3/4 33

Lifting Clamps
MODEL HR & HDR

The Model HR is a horizontal lifting clamp intended to be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting steel plates
horizontally. The Model HDR is similar to the Model HR except that it contains dual cam assemblies which provide two gripping surfaces.
Equipped with serrated gripping cams as standard equipment, both the HR and HDR models are available with smooth, bronze or stainless
steel gripping cams to prevent marring when handling polished metals such as stainless steel, copper, aluminum, etc.
MODEL HR
RATED JAW
CAPACITY OPENING B C D E F G H J K WEIGHT
(TONS) A (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (LBS)
1/4 0-1 2-3/4 1/2 + 1 3-9/16 4-1/16 3 3/8 1/2 3-1/2
1/2 0-2 4-1/4 1/2 + 1-3/8 5-5/8 6-1/8 7 3/4 1/2 14
3/4 0-2 4-3/8 5/8 + 1-3/8 5-5/8 6-1/4 7 3/4 3/4 19
1-1/2 0-2 4-3/8 3/4 + 1-3/8 5-5/8 6-3/8 7 3/4 3/4 23
3 0-2 4-5/8 5/8 1-5/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 7-1/4 7 3/4 3/4 24
4 0-3 5-5/8 3/4 2-1/8 1-3/8 7-1/2 9-5/8 7 1-1/8 1 44
MODEL HDR
RATED JAW
CAPACITY OPENING B C D E F G H J K L WEIGHT
(TONS) A (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (LBS)
1-1/2 0-2 4-3/8 5/8 + 3-1/4 5-5/8 6-1/4 12 15/16 3/4 5 44
3 0-2 4-3/8 3/4 + 3-1/4 5-5/8 6-3/8 12 15/16 3/4 5 48
6 0-2 4-5/8 5/8 1-5/8 3-1/4 5-5/8 7-1/4 12 15/16 1-5/8 5 53
8 0-3 5-5/8 3/4 2-1/8 3-1/4 7-1/2 9-5/8 12-1/4 15/16 1-5/8 5-1/4 84
MODEL M
The Model M is shown with the structural shape lifting clamps but can also be used for horizontal lifting of plates and structural beams.
The Model M incorporates a “Lock Closed” feature which facilities attaching the clamp to the member being lifted. These clamps must
be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting plate horizontally. Handle is available on 8 ton clamp only.
RATED JAW MAX.

CAPACITY OPENING B C Ch D E F G H J WEIGHT
(TONS) A (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (LBS)
1/2 0-1 2-5/16 7-1/16 – 4-11/16 2-1/4 8-7/8 2-5/8 – 1-7/16 7
1/2 3/4 - 1-1/2 2-5/16 7-1/16 – 5-3/16 2-1/4 9-3/8 2-5/8 – 1-7/16 8
1/2 1-1/4 - 2 2-5/16 7-1/16 – 5-11/16 2-1/4 9-7/8 2-5/8 – 1-7/16 9
1 0-1 2-1/2 8-1/8 – 5-1/2 2-1/4 9-1/2 2-3/4 – 1-7/8 11
1 3/4 - 1-1/2 2-1/2 8-1/8 – 6 2-1/4 10 2-3/4 – 1-7/8 12
1 1-1/4 - 2 2-1/2 8-1/8 – 6-1/2 2-1/4 10-1/2 2-3/4 – 1-7/8 13
2 0 - 1-1/4 3-3/16 10-3/4 – 6-9/16 3-1/16 12-1/8 3-7/8 – 2 23
2 1-2 3-3/16 10-3/4 – 7-3/16 3-1/16 12-7/8 3-7/8 – 2 24
2 1-3/4 - 2-3/4 3-3/16 10-3/4 – 7-15/16 3-1/16 13-5/8 3-7/8 – 2 27
4 0 - 1-1/2 3-13/16 12 – 7-3/4 3-5/8 14-1/2 4-3/8 – 2-3/4 36
4 1-1/4 - 2-1/2 3-13/16 12 – 8-3/4 3-5/8 16-1/2 4-3/8 – 2-3/4 38
4 2-1/4 - 3-1/2 3-13/16 12 – 9-3/4 3-5/8 14-1/2 4-3/8 – 2-3/4 41
8 0-2 4-15/16 – 19-1/4 11-7/16 4 19-1/2 5-1/2 8 4 107
8 1-3/4 - 3-1/2 4-15/16 – 19-1/4 12-15/16 4 21 5-1/2 8 4 110
8 3-1/4 - 5 4-15/16 – 19-1/4 14-7/16 4 22-1/2 5-1/2 8 4 125
Bearing Equipped Swivels
SWIVELS TIMKEN BEARING EQUIPPED – LOAD RATED
SAFE WORKING WIRE ROPE WEIGHT EACH
LOAD* TYPE SWIVEL NUMBER SIZE (LBS)
3 S-1 3-S-1 1/2 9.81
3 S-2 3-S-2 1/2 9.63
3 S-3 3-S-3 1/2 9.12
3 S-4 3-S-4 1/2 9.00
3 S-5 3-S-5 1/2 8.50
3 S-6 3-S-6 1/2 9.32
5 S-1 5-S-1 5/8 15.51
5 S-2 5-S-2 5/8 13.69
5 S-3 5-S-3 5/8 13.50
S-1 S-2
JAW & HOOK 5 S-4 5-S-4 5/8 12.33 JAW & JAW
5 S-5 5-S-5 5/8 11.30
5 S-6 5-S-6 5/8 14.24
8-1/2 S-1 8-1/2 - S - 1 3/4 29.42
8-1/2 S-2 8-1/2 - S - 2 3/4 26.16
8-1/2 S-3 8-1/2 - S - 3 3/4 24.90
8-1/2 S-4 8-1/2 - S - 4 3/4 29.00
8-1/2 S-5 8-1/2 - S - 5 3/4 29.25
8-1/2 S-6 8-1/2 - S - 6 3/4 32.00
10 S-1 10 - S - 1 7/8 46.75
10 S-2 10 - S - 2 7/8 45.75
10 S-3 10 - S - 3 7/8 43.50
10 S-4 10 - S - 4 7/8 44.00
10 S-5 10 - S - 5 7/8 42.00
10 S-6 10 - S - 6 7/8 45.50
15 S-1 15 - S - 1 1 73.75
15 S-2 15 - S - 2 1 62.75
15 S-3 15 - S - 3 1 61.00
S-3 15 S-4 15 - S - 4 1 61.00 S-4
JAW & EYE 15 S-5 15 - S - 5 1 49.00 EYE & JAW
15 S-6 15 - S - 6 1 63.00
25 S-1 25 - S - 1 – 140.00
25 S-2 25 - S - 2 – 140.00
25 S-3 25 - S - 3 – 135.00
25 S-4 25 - S - 4 – 135.00
25 S-5 25 - S - 5 – 130.00
25 S-6 25 - S - 6 – 135.00
35 S-1 35 - S - 1 – 220.00
35 S-2 35 - S - 2 – 155.00
35 S-3 35 - S - 3 – 150.00
35 S-4 35 - S - 4 – 150.00
35 S-5 35 - S - 5 – 145.00
35 S-6 35 - S - 6 – 215.00
45 S-1 45 - S - 1 – 251.00
45 S-2 45 - S - 2 – 235.00
S-5 45 S-3 45 - S - 3 – 225.00
S-5
EYE & EYE EYE & HOOK
45 S-4 45 - S - 4 – 225.00
45 S-5 45 - S - 5 – 215.00
45 S-6 45 - S - 6 – 270.00
*Safe working load in metric tons.

Swivels
REGULAR
A SAFE WORK- DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT
C SIZE ING LOAD EACH
(IN) (LBS)* A B C D R (LBS)
1/4 850 1-1/4 11/16 3/4 1-1/16 2-15/16 .21
B
SIZE 5/16 1250 1-5/8 13/16 1 1-1/4 3-9/16 .39
3/8 2250 2 15/16 1-1/4 1-1/2 4-5/16 .71
R 1/2 3600 2-1/2 1-5/16 1-1/2 2 5-7/16 1.32
5/8 5200 3 1-9/16 1-3/4 2-3/8 6-9/16 2.49
SIZE
D 3/4 7200 3-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-5/8 7-3/16 4.02
7/8 10000 4 2-1/16 2-1/4 3-1/16 8-3/8 6.25
C 1 12500 4-1/2 2-5/16 2-1/2 3-1/2 9-5/8 8.95
A 1-1/4 18000 5-5/8 2-11/16 3-1/8 2-11/16 11-1/8 16.37
G-402
REGULAR
1-1/2 45200 7 4-3/16 4 4-3/16 17-1/8 45.79
QUENCHED
*Ultimate Load is five times the Safe Working Load. & TEMPERED
JAW END
A
SAFE DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT
SIZE WORKING EACH C
(IN) LOAD (LBS)* A B C K N P R (LBS)
1/4 850 1-1/4 11/16 3/4 15/32 7/8 1/4 2-5/8 .21
B
5/16 1250 1-5/8 13/16 1 1/2 7/8 5/16 2-15/16 .34 SIZE
3/8 2250 2 15/16 1-1/4 5/8 1-1/16 3/8 3-5/8 .66 R

1/2 3600 2-1/2 1-5/16 1-1/2 3/4 1-5/16 1/2 4-1/2 1.34
5/8 5200 3 1-9/16 1-3/4 15/16 1-1/2 5/8 5-5/16 2.48 N
3/4 7200 3-1/2 1-3/4 2 1-1/8 1-3/4 3/4 6-1/16 3.88 P
7/8 10000 4 2-1/16 2-1/4 1-3/16 2-1/16 7/8 7 5.87 K

1 12500 4-1/2 2-5/16 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-13/16 1-1/8 8-9/16 9.84
1-1/4 18000 5-5/8 2-11/16 3-1/8 2-1/16 2-13/16 1-3/8 9-7/16 15.75
G-403 1-1/2 45200 7 4-3/16 4 2-7/8 4-7/16 2-1/4 14-3/4 54.75
JAW END
QUENCHED *Ultimate Load is five times the Safe Working Load.
& TEMPERED
CHAIN
A
C SAFE WORK- DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT
SIZE ING LOAD EACH
(IN) (LBS)* A B C D E R (LBS)
B
1/4 850 1-1/4 11/16 3/4 7/16 15/16 2-1/4 .13
SIZE
R 5/16 1250 1-5/8 13/16 1 1/2 1-1/8 2-23/32 .25
3/8 2250 2 15/16 1-1/4 3/4 1-1/2 3-7/16 .54
D 1/2 3600 2-1/2 1-5/16 1-1/2 7/8 1-7/8 4-1/4 1.12
E
5/8 5200 3 1-9/16 1-3/4 1-1/16 2-3/16 5-1/8 2.09
3/4 7200 3-1/2 1-3/4 2 1-1/4 2-5/8 5-25/32 3.09
*Ultimate Load is five times the Safe Working Load.
G-401
CHAIN
QUENCHED &
TEMPERED
Snatch Blocks
CROSBY LIGHT CHAMPION BY McKISSICK®
• Forged alloy heat treated hooks.
• Forged steel swivel tees, yokes and shackles.
• Hook and shackle assemblies on 4-1/2" through 14" sizes
can be interchanged.
• Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings.
• Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is sus-
pended from gin-pole.
• 3" thru 18" 418 and 419 blocks have exclusive bolt
retaining spring to assure no lost bolts.
• Can be furnished with SS-4055 hook latch.
• Pressure lube fittings.
• Fatigue rated.
418 419 404
W/ Hook W/ Shackle Tail Board • 3" - 10" feature dual rated wireline sheaves.
STOCK NO. WORKING WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

LOAD REPLACEMENT
SHEAVE BEARING 418 WITH 419 WITH 404 TAIL WIRE ROPE LIMIT* 418 WITH 419 WITH 404 TAIL SHEAVE STOCK
DIA. (IN) CODE HOOK SHACKLE BOARD SIZE (IN) ‡ (TONS) HOOK SHACKLE BOARD NO.
3** BB – 109091 – 5/16 - 3/8 2 – 4 – 460147
3** BB 108038 109037† 102016 5/16 - 3/8 2 5 4 3 460147
4-1/2** BB 108065 109064 102025 3/8 - 1/2 4 12 12 7 2000232
6 BB 108127 109126 102098 5/8 - 3/4 8 27 28 15 460815
6 RB 108154 109153 102114 5/8 - 3/4 8 27 28 15 472688
8 BB 108225 109224 102169 5/8 - 3/4 8 33 34 21 461164
8 RB 108252 109251 102187 5/8 - 3/4 8 33 34 21 473277
10 BB 108323 109322 102230 5/8 - 3/4 8 41 42 29 461805
10 RB 108350 109359 102258 5/8 - 3/4 8 41 42 29 473776
12 BB 169169 202961 178890 5/8 8 48 49 36 462270
12 RB 199911 169347 178934 5/8 8 48 49 36 474141
12 BB 108421 109420 102301 3/4 8 48 49 36 462289
12 RB 108458 109457 102329 3/4 8 48 49 36 474150
14 BB 194920 169356 – 5/8 8 55 56 – 463625
14 RB 199948 167857 – 5/8 8 55 56 – 474766
14 BB 108528 109527 – 3/4 8 55 56 – 463634
14 RB 108546 109545 – 3/4 8 55 56 – 474775
16 BB 199975 203041 – 3/4 15 130 135 – 4100056
16 RB 200008 203087 – 3/4 15 130 135 – 4200028
16 BB 108608 109607 – 7/8 15 130 135 – 4100065
16 RB 108626 109625 – 7/8 15 130 135 – 4200037
18 BB 200099 203130 – 7/8 15 150 155 – 464571
18 RB 200151 203176 – 7/8 15 150 155 – 475792
18 BB 108644 109643 – 1 15 150 155 – 4104640
18 RB 108662 109661 – 1 15 150 155 – 6000000
*Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

**Available in Bronze Bushed only. 3" and 4-1/2" have self-lubricating Bronze Bushing.
†Fitted with 1-1/4" ID Swivel Eye.
‡May be furnished in other rope sizes.

Snatch Blocks
CROSBY CHAMPION BY McKISSICK®
420 421 406

W/ Hook W/ Shackle Tail Board
• Hooks and side plates are forged alloy steel and heat treated.
• Shackles and yokes are forged and heat treated steel.
• All parts are forged.
• Side plates are designed to eliminate possibility of rope jamming.
• Can be furnished with bronze bushings or sealed roller bearings.
• Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is suspended from gin-pole.
• Can be furnished with S-4320 hook latch.
• Hook and shackle assemblies can be interchanged.
• Blocks furnished with dual rated Wireline sheaves.
• All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED.
SHEAVE STOCK NO. WORKING WEIGHT EACH (LBS) REP.

DIAMETER BEARING 420 WITH 421 WITH 406 TAIL WIRELINE LOAD 420 WITH 421 WITH 406 TAIL SHEAVE REP. LATCH
(IN) CODE HOOK SHACKLE BOARD SIZE (IN)† LIMIT (T)* HOOK SHACKLE BOARD STOCK NO. STOCK NO.
6 BB 169374 169481 167973 3/4 - 7/8 12 40 48 24 460940 1096609
6 RB 169392 204120 167982 3/4 - 7/8 12 40 48 24 473035 1096609
8 BB 169418 169515 167991 3/4 - 7/8 15 51 57 30 461360 1096609
8 RB 169445 204193 168008 3/4 - 7/8 15 51 57 30 473534 1096609
10 BB 110221 110720 103186 3/4 - 7/8 15 63 69 42 462001 1096609
10 RB 110258 110757 103202 3/4 - 7/8 15 63 69 42 474025 1096609
* Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

† May be furnished in other rope sizes.
Snatch Blocks
CROSBY SUPER CHAMPION BY McKISSICK®
• Drop forged, heat treated swivel hook or swivel shackle.

• Hook and shackle assemblies on 8" through 14" sizes can
be interchanged.
• Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings.
• 430 and 431 blocks have exclusive bolt-retaining spring to as-
sure no lost bolts.
• Can be furnished with hook latch.
• 8" and 10" models furnished with dual rated Wireline sheaves.
430 431 407 • Fatigue Rated.
W/ Hook W/ Shackle Tail Board • All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED.
SHEAVE STOCK NO. WORKING WEIGHT EACH (LBS) REP.

DIAMETER BEARING 430 WITH 431 WITH 407 TAIL WIRELINE LOAD 430 WITH 431 WITH 407 TAIL SHEAVE REP. LATCH
(IN) CODE HOOK SHACKLE BOARD SIZE (IN)† LIMIT (T)* HOOK SHACKLE BOARD STOCK NO. STOCK NO.
8 BB 120023 121022 103523 1 - 1-1/8 20 75 87 42 461440 1096657
8 RB 120041 121040 103541 1 - 1-1/8 20 75 87 42 473614 1096657
10 BB 120096 121095 103603 1 - 1-1/8 20 89 101 55 462083 1096657
10 RB 120112 121111 103621 1 - 1-1/8 20 89 101 55 474105 1096657
12 BB 208536 169917 184375 1 20 103 115 70 462680 1096657
12 RB 208554 209303 184393 1 20 103 115 70 474524 1096657
12 BB 120176 121175 103685 1-1/8 20 103 115 70 462699 1096657
12 RB 120194 121193 103701 1-1/8 20 103 115 70 474533 1096657
14 BB 208572 209321 184419 1 20 123 135 90 463457 1096657
14 RB 208590 170424 184437 1 20 123 135 90 475024 1096657
14 BB 120256 121255 103765 1-1/8 20 123 135 90 463466 1096657
14 RB 120274 121273 103783 1-1/8 20 123 135 90 475033 1096657
18 BB 208689 209410 184552 1 25 240 260 165 4100298 1090143
18 RB 208732 209465 184605 1 25 240 260 165 4200331 1090143
18 BB 119482 119561 119641 1-1/8 25 240 260 165 4103348 1090143
18 RB 119491 119570 119650 1-1/8 25 240 260 165 4200322 1090143
20 BB 208750 209483 184623 1-1/8 30 375 400 215 4103936 1090189
20 RB 208787 169864 184650 1-1/8 30 375 400 215 4200769 1090189
20 BB 119507 119589 119669 1-1/4 30 375 400 215 4103945 1090189
20 RB 119516 119598 119678 1-1/4 30 375 400 215 4200778 1090189
24 BB 208812 209526 184687 1-1/8 30 450 475 290 4104114 1090189
24 RB 208858 209553 184721 1-1/8 30 450 475 290 4200983 1090189
24 BB 119525 119605 119687 1-1/4 30 450 475 290 4104123 1090189
24 RB 119534 119614 119696 1-1/4 30 450 475 290 4200992 1090189
* Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.
† May be furnished in other rope sizes.

VB Model Snatch Blocks
• Manufactured from High Tensile Alloy Steel for light

weight / high capacity ratio
• Designed with 4:1 Safety Factor
• All Blocks are Individually Proof Tested
• Sheave runs on lubricated bronze bushing
• Open swivel with bronze thrust bearing
• Available with the following fittings:
• Machined Swivel Stud Eye with Shackle
• Standard machined oblong-swivel eye accepts
shackle pin (standard) or shackle ear (upset) for
direct connect to spreader bar or lifting fixture
• Swivel hook
• Standard capacities from 22-150 Ton WLL;
Available up to 350 Ton WLL
• Single or Double Sheave Models available
WIRE ØD DIMENSIONS (IN)

WLL US WEIGHT
* MODEL NO. TON IN MM ØD1 ØD2 B H T TA TB TL LBS
VB 240.28.1.20.S 22 1 - 1-1/8 28 11-13/16 9-1/2 10-1/16 1-7/16 2 12-1/4 3-5/16 28-1/2 120
VB 240.28.1.25.S 27.5 1 - 1-1/8 28 11-13/16 9-7/16 10-1/16 1-1/2 2-1/8 12-1/4 3-1/4 28-5/8 125
VB 300.28.1.20.S 22 1 - 1-1/8 28 14-3/8 11-13/16 11-5/16 1-7/16 2 14-3/4 3-1/4 31-1/4 130
VB 300.32.1.25.S 27.5 1 - 1-1/4 32 14-3/8 11-13/16 11-5/16 1-9/16 2-1/4 14-3/4 3-5/16 31-1/4 140
VB 345.32.1.32.S 35 1 - 1-1/4 32 15-3/4 13-9/16 12-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 16-1/8 4-7/16 37-5/16 265
VB 345.36.1.32.S 35 1-1/8 - 1-3/8 36 15-3/4 13-9/16 12-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 16-1/8 4-7/16 37-5/16 265
VB 390.32.1.32.S 35 1 - 1-1/4 32 17-11/16 15-1/4 13-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 18-1/2 4-7/16 39-1/2 310
VB 390.36.1.32.S 35.0 1-1/8 - 1-3/8 36 17-11/16 15-1/4 13-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 18-1/2 4-7/16 39-1/2 310
VB 430.32.1.32.2 35 1 - 1-1/4 32 19-1/2 17 14-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/4 20 4-7/16 41-1/4 330
VB 430.32.1.36,5.S 40 1 - 1-1/4 32 19-1/2 16-15/16 15-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 20 4-13/16 42-11/16 440
VB 430.38.1.32.S 35 1-1/8 - 1-1/2 38 19-1/2 16-15/16 14-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/4 20 4-7/16 41-1/4 330
VB 430.38.1.36,5.S 40 1-1/8 - 1-1/2 38 19-1/2 16-15/16 15-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/4 20 4-3/4 42-1/2 440
VB 520.38.1.55.S 60 1-1/8 - 1-1/2 38 23-7/16 20-1/2 18-1/8 2-15/16 3-1/8 24 5-9/16 50-3/8 680
VB 520.44.1.55.S 60 1-1/2 - 1-3/4 44 23-7/16 20-1/2 18-1/8 2-15/16 3-1/8 24 5-9/16 50-3/8 680
Minimum Ultimate Strength = 4 x WLL
*Represents Standard Models in Inventory. Available in Single or Double Sheave up to 350 Ton Capacity
All Models available with Roller Bearings and Hooks
All blocks Proof Tested and are supplied with Factory Certificates
Skookum® Sheave Blocks
SKOOKUM® R-SERIES UTILI-SHEAVE BLOCKS

• Multi-use wide throat and Utili-Sheave for passing a variety of line,
connecting links and terminations
• Work hardening manganese steel sheaves maximize wire rope and
sheave life
• R-6, R-8 & R-10 equipped with tapered roller bearings for long life in
higher line speed applications
• R-4 feature straight roller bearings to minimize size
• Recessed sheave prevents wire rope from binding between sheave
and block side
• Full sided block maximizes sheave protection and strength
• Versatile draw pin design allows for rapid reeving and ex-change of
attaching style
• Rugged cast alloy steel sides for demanding environments
• ASTM B30.26 Compliant
• Working loads from 5 tons to 9 tons.
J
G
E
A
D
B
C
SPECIFICATIONS
SHEAVE REGULAR WIRE WIRE REGULAR
BLOCK DIAMETER YOKE ROPE ROPE WLL YOKE SHEAVE
NO. (IN) BEARING PART NO. MIN. MAX (TONS) WEIGHT NO. DRAW PIN
R-4 4 RB 565303 3/8 3/8 5.00 11.45 571904 551401
R-6 6 TRB 551100 3/8 1/2 8.00 30 574803 551413
R-8 8 TRB 557700 1/2 5/8 8.00 43 799203 551420
R-10 10 TRB 557800 1/2 5/8 9.00 50 539703 551420
DIMENSIONS (IN)
BLOCK A B C D E G H J
R-4 10.00 1.75 4.75 1.00 2.50 5.25 1.00 1.00
R-6 14.50 8.00 6.75 2.50 4.50 6.50 1.25 1.25
R-8 17.00 8.50 8.75 2.50 4.75 7.25 1.38 1.38
R-10 19.50 8.00 10.50 3.50 4.75 7.25 1.38 1.38
Please specify Part Number, Sheave size, Working Load Limit (WLL), and Attaching Style when ordering.
Ultimate load for yoke attachments is five times WLL. Ton equals 2,000 lbs.

Wire Rope
COMMONLY USED WIRE ROPE CROSS SECTIONS
6 x 19 Classification
6 x 19 Seale 6 x 21 Filler Wire 6 x 25 Filler Wire 6 x 26 Warrington Seale

IWRC FC IWRC IWRC
6 x 36 Classification
6 x 31 Warrington Seale 6 x 36 Seale Filler Wire 6 x 36 Warrington Seale 6 x 31 Filler Wire Seale
IWRC IWRC FC IWRC
6 x 41 Warrington Seale 6 x 41 Seale Filler Wire 6 x 46 Seale Filler Wire 6 x 49 Filler Wire Seale
IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC
Cross sections of rotation resistant rope constructions.
3 x 19 Seale 8 x 19 Seale 8 x 25 Filler Wire 8 x 17

IWRC IWRC FC
19 x 7 19 x 19 Seale 35 x 7 35 x 19 Seale
General Purpose Wire Rope
6 x 7 Classification NOMINAL STRENGTH (TONS)* - BRIGHT OR DRAWN GALVANIZED† APPROX
6 x 7 Classification Wire Ropes give DIA EEIP EIP IPS WT/FT (LBS)
long service in operating conditions (IN) IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE
where ropes are dragged along the 1/4 3.59 3.17 3.27 2.90 2.84 2.64 0.10 0.094
ground or over rollers. Larger sheaves 5/16 5.58 4.92 5.07 4.51 4.41 4.10 0.16 0.15
and drums (than those used for more
3/8 7.97 7.03 7.25 6.45 6.30 5.86 0.23 0.21
flexible constructions) are required to
7/16 10.8 9.52 9.80 8.72 8.52 7.93 0.32 0.29
avoid breakage from fatigue. 6 x 7 Classification Ropes
contain 6 strands with 3 through 14 wires, no more than 1/2 14.0 12.4 12.8 11.3 11.1 10.3 0.42 0.38
9 of which are outside wires. 9/16 17.7 15.6 16.1 14.3 14.0 13.0 0.53 0.48
Characteristics: Excellent abrasion resistance; less bend- 5/8 21.6 19.1 19.7 17.5 17.1 15.9 0.65 0.59
ing fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Dragging and 3/4 30.9 27.2 28.1 25.0 24.4 22.7 0.92 0.84
haulage in mines, inclined planes and tramways, sand 7/8 41.7 36.8 38.0 33.8 33.0 30.7 1.27 1.15
lines. IWRC shown: fiber core available 1 54.0 47.6 49.1 43.7 42.7 39.7 1.65 1.50
Order Guide: 6 x 7 classification wire ropes may be 1-1/8 67.7 59.8 61.5 54.8 53.5 49.8 2.09 1.90
ordered in diameters from 1/4" to 1-1/2"... bright or
1-1/4 83.0 73.2 75.4 67.1 65.6 61.0 2.57 2.34
galvanized... EEIP, EIP and IPS grades... fiber core or
1-3/8 99.4 87.7 90.4 80.4 78.6 73.1 3.12 2.84
IWRC... right or left lay, regular or lang lay.
1-1/2 117.0 103.0 107.0 94.8 92.7 86.2 3.72 3.38

EEIP EIP IPS WT/FT (LBS)
6 x 19 Classification ropes provide an excellent balance DIA
between fatigue and wear resistance. They give excellent (IN) IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE
service with sheaves and drums of moderate size. 6 x 1/4 – – 3.40 3.02 2.94 2.74 0.116 0.105
19 Classification ropes contain 6 strands with 15 through 5/16 – – 5.27 4.69 4.58 4.26 0.18 0.164
26 wires per strand, no more than 12 of which are 3/8 – – 7.55 6.71 6.56 6.10 0.26 0.236
outside wires. 7/16 11.2 9.90 10.2 9.09 8.89 8.27 0.35 0.32
6 x 19 Seale Characteristics: 1/2 14.6 12.9 13.3 11.8 11.5 10.7 0.46 0.42
Resistant to abrasion and crushing; 9/16 18.5 16.2 16.8 14.9 14.5 13.5 0.59 0.53
medium fatigue resistance.
5/8 22.7 20.0 20.6 18.3 17.9 16.7 0.72 0.66
Typical Applications: Haulage rope,
3/4 32.4 28.6 29.4 26.2 25.6 23.8 1.04 0.95
choker rope, rotary drilling line. IWRC
7/8 43.8 38.6 39.8 35.4 34.6 32.2 1.42 1.29
shown: fiber core available
6 x 21 Filler Wire Characteristics: 1 57.5 50.0 51.7 46.0 44.9 41.8 1.85 1.68
Less abrasion resistance; more 1-1/8 71.5 63.0 65.0 57.9 56.5 52.6 2.34 2.13
bending fatigue resistance. Typical 1-1/4 87.9 77.5 79.9 71.0 69.4 64.6 2.89 2.63
Applications: Pull Ropes, load lines, 1-3/8 106.0 93.0 96.0 85.4 83.5 77.7 3.50 3.18
backhaul ropes, draglines. IWRC 1-1/2 125.0 111.0 114.0 101.0 98.9 92.0 4.16 3.78
shown; fiber core available
1-5/8 145.0 129.0 132.0 118.0 115.0 107.0 4.88 4.44
6 x 25 Filler Wire Characteristics:
Most flexible rope in classification; 1-3/4 168.0 149.0 153.0 136.0 133.0 124.0 5.67 5.15
best balance of abrasion and fatigue 1-7/8 191.0 169.0 174.0 155.0 152.0 141.0 6.50 5.91
resistance. Typical Applications: Most 2 218.0 192.0 198.0 176.0 172.0 160.0 7.39 6.72
widely used of all wire ropes - cranes
2-1/8 – – 221.0 197.0 192.0 179.0 8.35 7.59
hoists, skip hoists, haulage, mooring
lines, conveyors, etc., IWRC shown; 2-1/4 – – 247.0 220.0 215.0 200.0 9.36 8.51
fiber core available 2-3/8 – – 274.0 244.0 239.0 222.0 10.4 9.48
6 x 26 Warrington Seale Charac- 2-1/2 – – 302.0 269.0 262.0 244.0 11.6 10.5
teristics: Good balance of abrasion
2-5/8 – – 331.0 – 288.0 268.0 12.8 11.6
and fatigue resistance. Typical
Applications: Boom hoists, logging 2-3/8 – – 361.0 – 314.0 292.0 14.0 12.7
and tubing lines. IWRC shown, fiber *Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal strengths listed.
core available †Galvanizing: For class A galvanized wire rope (EIP and IPS grades only), deduct
10% from the nominal strength shown.

General Purpose Wire Rope
6 x 37 classification ropes contain 6 strands with 27 EEIP EIP IPS WT/FT (LBS)
DIA
through 49 wires, no more than 18 of which are outside (IN) IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE
wires. More flexible but less abrasion resistant than the 1/4 – – 3.40 3.02 2.94 2.74 0.116 0.105
6 X 19 classification. Each strand contains numerous
5/16 – – 5.27 4.69 4.58 4.26 0.18 0.164
small diameter wires. As the number of wires increases,
3/8 – – 7.55 6.71 6.56 6.10 0.26 0.236
flexibility increases.
Order Guide: 6 x 37 classification wire ropes may be or- 7/16 11.2 9.90 10.2 9.09 8.89 8.27 0.35 0.32
dered in diameters from 1/4" to 5"... bright or galvanized... 1/2 14.6 12.9 13.3 11.8 11.5 10.7 0.46 0.42
EEIP, EIP or IPS grades... IWRC or fiber core... right or left 9/16 18.5 16.2 16.8 14.9 14.5 13.5 0.59 0.53
lay, regular lang lay. 5/8 22.7 20.0 20.6 18.3 17.9 16.7 0.72 0.66
3/4 32.4 28.6 29.4 26.2 25.6 23.8 1.04 0.95
6 x 31 Warrington Seal Character- 7/8 43.8 38.6 39.8 35.4 34.6 32.2 1.42 1.29
istics: 12 outside wires. Slightly more 1 57.5 50.0 51.7 46.0 44.9 41.8 1.85 1.68
flexible than 6 x 25 rope with the same 1-1/8 71.5 63.0 65.0 57.9 56.5 52.6 2.34 2.13
abrasion resistance. Typical Applications:
1-1/4 87.9 77.5 79.9 71.0 69.4 64.6 2.89 2.63
Overhead crane and mobile crane hoist
1-3/8 106.0 93.0 96.0 85.4 83.5 77.7 3.50 3.18
ropes. IWRC shown; fiber core available
1-1/2 125.0 111.0 114.0 101.0 98.9 92.0 4.16 3.78
6 x 36 Warrington Seale 1-5/8 145.0 129.0 132.0 118.0 115.0 107.0 4.88 4.44
Characteristics: 14 outside wires. More 1-3/4 168.0 149.0 153.0 136.0 133.0 124.0 5.67 5.15
fatigue resistance; but less abrasion
1-7/8 191.0 169.0 174.0 155.0 152.0 141.0 6.50 5.91
resistance than 6 x 25 rope. Typical
Applications: Overhead crane and mobile 2 218.0 192.0 198.0 176.0 172.0 160.0 7.39 6.72
crane hoist ropes; winch lines; large diameter towing lines. 2-1/8 243.0 215.0 221.0 197.0 192.0 179.0 8.35 7.59
IWRC shown; fiber core available 2-1/4 272.0 240.0 247.0 220.0 215.0 200.0 9.36 8.51
2-3/8 301.0 266.0 274.0 244.0 239.0 222.0 10.4 9.48
6 x 41 Warrington Seale
Characteristics: 16 outside wires. Good 2-1/2 332.0 293.0 302.0 269.0 262.0 244.0 11.6 10.5
combination of fatigue and abrasion 2-5/8 – – 331.0 – 288.0 268.0 12.8 11.6
resistance for operating ropes Typical 2-3/4 – – 361.0 – 314.0 292.0 14.0 12.7
Applications: Overhead crane and mobile
2-7/8 – – 392.0 – 341.0 268.0 15.3 13.9
crane hoist ropes; shovel and dragline hoist ropes. IWRC
shown; fiber core available 3 – – 425.0 – 370.0 292.0 16.6 15.1
*Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal strengths listed.
6 x 41 Seale Filler Wire Characteristics: †Galvanizing: For class A galvanized wire rope (EIP and IPS grades only), deduct
Same characteristics and applications as 10% from the nominal strength shown.
6 x 41 Warrington Seale. IWRC shown;
fiber core available
6 x 49 Seale Warrington Seale Charac-

teristics: 16 outside wires. Best fatigue
resistance and abrasion resistance in 6
x 37 classification Typical Applications:
Mooring, towing and anchor lines. IWRC
shown; fiber core available
Wire Ropes
ROTATION RESISTANT DYFORM®-34LR & 35LS ROTATION RESISTANCE ROPE
Dyform® - 34LR MIN BREAKING FORCE** APPROX.
WIRE ROPES (TONS) WT/FT (LBS)
In certain instances the use of rotation resistant wire rope is DIAMETER 1960 2160
necessary to provide rotational stability to the lifted load. In (MM) (IN) 34LR 35LS 34LR 34LR 35LS
general, the use of these specialized wire ropes is limited to – 1/2 15.40 13.60 17.42 .54 .49
those situations where it is impractical to: 13 – 16.19 14.28 18.21 .57 .51
14 – 18.88 16.52 21.13 .65 .60
Strongest, most rotation – 9/16 19.67 17.31 22.03 .69 .62
1. Use a tag line. resistant. For the most 15 – 22.03 19.11 24.73 .77 .69
2. Relocate rope dead end. demanding hoisting 16 5/8 25.18 21.69 28.21 .87 .78
applications.
3. Increase sheave sizes. 17 – 27.20 24.28 30.46 .94 .87
18 – 30.80 27.09 34.62 1.07 .97
4. Eliminate “odd-part” reeving. 19 3/4 34.51 30.91 38.67 1.20 1.11
5. Significantly reduce rope loading and rope length. 35LS 20 – 38.33 33.61 42.94 1.32 1.21
21 – 43.28 37.43 48.45 1.49 1.34
Rotation resistant wire ropes have less of a tendency to 22 – 46.65 41.37 52.38 1.61 1.49
unlay when loaded than do conventional wire ropes. This – 7/8 47.21 41.59 53.06 1.65 1.51
23 – 50.69 44.74 56.88 1.75 1.61
results in improved rotational stability to the lifted load within 24 – 55.64 49.35 62.38 1.92 1.77
a safe working load range. Rotation resistant wire ropes are 25 – 60.59 52.94 67.89 2.10 1.91
designed in such a way that the rotational force of the outer For demanding – 1 62.38 54.40 70.03 2.16 1.97
rope is partially counteracted by the rotational force of the applications where 26 – 66.09 57.78 74.19 2.28 2.08
highest strength is
inner rope when the rope is subjected to a load. 28 – 75.99 66.99 85.20 2.63 2.41
not mandatory.
– 1-1/8 77.45 68.90 86.89 2.70 2.50
30 – 86.44 75.99 97.01 2.99 2.74
The rated strengths of rotation resistant ropes are less 32 1-1/4 98.13 85.99 110.16 3.39 3.10
than the conventional 6 x 19 and 6 x 36 Classification wire 35 1-3/8 116.90 105.89 123.65 4.05 3.82
38 1-1/2 138.26 120.27 147.25 4.87 4.35
ropes, and larger sheaves and drums are required in order
to achieve comparable fatigue life. Drum and sheave diam- 19 X 7 ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE
eters should be 34 to 36 times rope diameter for the 19 x 7 NOMINAL STRENGTH* APPROX.
and 35 x 7 rotation resistant ropes and 21 to 27 times rope DIA. (TONS) WT/FT
19 x 7
diameter for 8 x 19 rotation resistant ropes. (IN) EIP IPS (LBS)
Rotation Resistant 3/16 1.57 1.42 .064
1/4 2.77 2.51 .113
Rotation Resistant Ropes are available in a full range of 5/16 4.30 3.90 .177
sizes, grades and constructions: 3/8 6.15 5.59 .25
• Standard constructions for single-part and multi-part lifting. 7/16 8.33 7.58 .35
• Special wire rope constructions for increased service life in 1/2 10.8 9.85 .45
particularly demanding applications – Dyform®-18 HSLR, 9/16 13.6 12.4 .58

5/8 16.8 15.3 .71
Dyform® 34LR and 35LS. Not recommended for 3/4 24.0 21.8 1.02
Note: multiple part lifting.
7/8 32.5 29.5 1.39
1. Swivels are not recommended for use with rotation 1 42.2 38.3 1.82
1-1/8 53.1 48.2 2.30
resistant ropes.
1-1/4 65.1 59.2 2.80
2. Although B30 standards permit rotation resistant ropes 1-3/8 78.4 71.3 3.43
to be used under certain conditions at design factors 1-1/2 92.8 84.4 4.08
8 x 19
of 3.5:1, we recommend a minimum design factor of 5:1 1-5/8 108.0 98.4 4.80
Rotation Resistant
& a design factor of 7:1 for extended rope life. 8 X 19 ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE
7/16 8.97 7.80 .36
Dyform® - 18HSLR DYFORM®-18HSLR 1/2 11.7 10.2 .47
Rotation Resistant ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE 9/16 14.7 12.8 .60
NOMINAL 5/8 18.1 15.7 .73
STRENGTH* APPROX. 3/4 25.9 22.6 1.06
7/8 35.0 30.5 1.44
DIA. (IN)† (TONS) WT/FT (LBS)
Can be used for 1 45.5 39.6 1.88
3/8 8.3 .27 multiple part lifting. 1-1/8 57.3 49.8 2.39
7/16 11.2 .37 1-1/4 70.5 61.3 2.94
1/2 14.6 .51 1-3/8 84.9 73.8 3.56
For multi-part lifting. 9/16 18.5 .64 1-1/2 100.0 87.3 4.24
35% greater strength.. 5/8 22.7 .79
3/4 32.4 1.1 *Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal
breaking strengths listed. NOTE: These strengths apply only when
7/8 43.8 1.5 a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use, the strength
1 57.5 2.0 of these ropes may be reduced if one end is free to rotate. **Listed
1-1/8 71.5 2.5 minimum breaking force is for 1960 & 2160 grade bright (ungalvanized)
1-1/4 87.9 3.1 ropes. Inquire for a minimum breaking force of galvanized ropes.
†Other sizes available upon request.

Wire Ropes
HIGH PERFORMANCE WIRE ROPE

6-PAC is recommended for use where the rope is subject-
Constructex® is made of three different
ed to heavy use or where conditions are extremely abu-
strand constructions: 7-wire, 24-wire and
sive, such as offshore pedestal, crawler and lattice boom
40-wire strands. The nine strands are closed
equipped truck crane boom hoist applications. 6-PAC is
in operation and lightly swaged to postform
also recommended for winch lines, overhead cranes,
the rope and give the strands a triangular
multipart hoist lines where rotation-resistant ropes are not required,
shape. Compacting increases strength and resistance to
and other applica-
crushing. The smooth outside surface enhances abrasion ROPE DIA. STANDARD APPROX. NOMINAL
tions where flexibility, CONSTRUC- WEIGHT STRENGTH
and scrubbing resistance. Constructex® can provide 1-1/2 to
high strength and IN MM TIONS (LB/FT) (TONS)
2 times the service life of other wire ropes in severely abu- 3/8 9.5 6x19 Seale 0.285 8.3
resistance to crushing
sive applications. Typical Applications include: tubing lines,
are important, and a 7/16 11.0 6x19 Seale 0.388 11.2
logging lines, winch lines, boom hoists, scrap yard, mobile
cost-effective 6-strand 1/2 13.0 6x26 0.503 14.6
and overhead traveling cranes, hot bed conveyors, car haul-
rope is desired. 9/16 14.5 6x26 0.642 18.5
CONSTRUCTEX® ROPE age and marine
NOMINAL cargo falls. Strands: 6 5/8 16.0 6x26 0.795 22.7
Wires per strand: 19-36
STRENGTH* APPROX. 3/4 19.0 6x31 1.143 32.4
Core: IWRC
DIA. (IN)† (TONS) WT/FT (LBS)
Standard grade: Royal Purple 7/8 22.0 6x31 1.547 43.8
5/8 25.2 .86 Lay: Right Regular 1 26.0 6x31 2.075 56.9
3/4 36.5 1.1 Finish: Bright
7/8 48.5 1.5 1-1/8 29.0 6x31 2.575 71.5
1 62.5 2.0 1-1/4 32.0 6x31 3.169 87.9
1-1/8 79.5 2.6
*Acceptance strength is not 1-3/8 35.0 6x36 3.758 106.0
1-1/4 97.6 3.2
less than 2-1/2% below the
1-3/8 118.0 3.8 1-1/2 38.0 6x36 4.564 125.0
nominal breaking strengths
1-1/2 139.0 4.6 listed. †Other sizes avail 1-5/8 41.3 6x36 5.356 146.0
1-5/8 162.0 5.3 able upon request. 1-3/4 45.5 6x36 6.212 169.0
AIRCRAFT CABLE
Aircraft Cable is pre-formed and made
7 X 19 GALVANIZED STAINLESS STEEL
in accordance with commercial speci-
APPROX. WT MIN. BREAKING MIN. BREAKING
fications. GAC to military and federal DIA. (IN) 1000 FT/LBS. STRENGTH (LBS) STRENGTH (LBS.)
specifications is available.
3/32 17. 1,000 920
1/8 29. 2,000 1,760
CARBON STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE
5/32 45. 2,800 2,400
Galvanized cable has the highest 7 x 19 3/16 65. 4,200 3,700
strength and greatest fatigue life of the 7/32 86. 5,600 5,000
materials offered. It has good to fair 1/4 110. 7,000 6,400
corrosion resistance in rural to indus- 9/32 139. 8,000 7,800
trial atmosphere environments. This 5/16 173. 9,800 9,000
material is most widely used for small 3/8 243. 14,400 12,000
diameter cable. Tin over galvanized ca-
ble offers greater corrosion resistance VINYL COATED GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE
and reduced friction over pulleys.
COATED APPROX WT/FT MIN. BREAKING
DIA. (IN) TO (IN) CONSTRUCTION (LBS) STRENGTH (LBS)
3/32 3/16 7x7 28 920
1/8 3/16 7x7 39 1,700
1/8 3/16 7 x 19 39 2,000
7 x 19 3/16 1/4 7 x 19 78 4,200
1/4 5/16 7 x 19 125 7,000
3/8 7/16 7 x 19 272 14,400
Wire Ropes
ABRASION AND BENDING
THE “X CHART”: ABRASION RESISTANCE VS. BENDING-FATIGUE RESISTANCE
While there is a possibility, there is likelihood actual wear is slight. The smaller the diameter sheave, there is a loss of effective strength
that an application can be found for which of the sheave, the sooner these fatigue breaks due to the inability of the individual strands
there is a precisely suitable wire rope – one will occur and the shorter rope life becomes. and wire to adjust themselves entirely to
that can satisfy every indicated requirement. their changed position. Tests show that rope
Another undesirable effect of small sheaves strength efficiency decreases to a marked de-
As with all engineering design problems, fea- is accelerated wear of both rope and sheave gree as the sheave diameter is reduced with
sible solutions demand compromise to some groove. The pressure per unit area of rope on respect to the diameter of the rope.
degree. At times, it becomes necessary to set- sheave groove for a given load is inversely
tle for less than optimum resistance to abra- proportional to the size of the sheave. In other Therefore, it is evident that a definite relation-
sion in order to obtain maximum flexibility; the words, the smaller the sheave the greater the ship exists between rope service and sheave
latter being a more important requirement for rope pressure per unit area on the groove. size. As a guide to rope users, wire rope
the given job. A typical example of this kind of Both sheaves and rope life can obviously manufacturers have established standards
trade-off would be in selecting a highly flexible be prolonged by using the proper diameter for various rope constructions. To secure the
rope on an overhead crane. Conversely, in a sheave for the size and construction of rope. most economical service, it is important that
haulage installation, a rope with greater resis- the suggested size of sheaves given below
tance to abrasion would be chosen despite the Sheave diameter can also influence rope be used.
fact that such ropes are markedly less flexible. strength. When a wire rope is bent around a
The wire rope industry refers to this as the X-chart. It serves to illustrate the
Two compelling factors that govern most inverse relationship between abrasion resistance and resistance to bending
decisions as to the selection of a wire rope fatigue in a representative number of the most widely used wire ropes.
are: abrasion resistance, and resistance to 6 6x7
bending fatigue. Striking a proper balance with
LE
NUMBER OF OUTSIDE WIRES PER STRAND
respect to these two important characteristics 9 6 x 19 S

ST
AS
TE
demands judgment of a very high order. A

T×
EA
RE
graphic presentation of just such comparison 10 6 x 21 FW

GR
SI
Ø
ST
of qualities between the most widely used

ON
AN
rope constructions and others is given by 12 Flattened Strand

SI
CE
RA
TO
means of X-chart.
AB
12 6 x 25 FW
BE
ND
Referring to this chart when selecting a rope,

IN
TO
12 6 x 31 WS
G
the mid-point (at the X) comes closest to an

FA
EC
TI
AN
even balance between abrasion resistance

G
14 6 x 36 WS
UE
ST
and resistance to bending fatigue. Reading up

Ø
SI
GR
RE
or down along either leg of the X, the inverse

T×
EA
16 6 x 49 WS
TE
relationship becomes more apparent as one

AS
ST
LE
quality increases and the other decreases. 18 6 x 64 SFWS
PROPER SHEAVE AND DRUM SIZES

EFFECT OF SHEAVE SIZE
CONSTRUCTION SUGGESTED D/d* RATIO MINIMUM D/d* RATIO
Wire ropes are manufactured in a great variety 6x7 72 42
of constructions to meet the varying demands 19 x 7 or 18 x 7 Rotation Resistant 51 34
of wire rope usage. Where abrasion is an 6 x 19 Seale 51 34
important factor, the rope must be made of a 6 x 27 H Flattened strand 45 30
coarse construction containing relatively large 6 x 31 V Flattened strand 45 30
wires. In other cases, the great amount of 6 x 21 Filler wire 45 30
bending to which the rope is subjected is more 6 x 25 Filler wire 39 26
important. Here, a more flexible construction, 6 x 31 Warrington Seale 39 26
containing many relatively small wires, is 6 x 36 Warrington Seale 35 23
required. In either case, however, if the rope 8 x 19 Seale 41 27
operates over inadequate size sheaves, the
8 x 25 Filler wire 32 21
severe bending stresses imposed will cause
6 x 41 Warrington Seale 32 21
the wires to break from fatigue, even though
6 x 42 Filler 21 14

Wire Ropes
ABRASION RESISTANCE FATIGUE RESISTANCE

...DECREASES ...DECREASES
with Smaller Wires with Fewer Wires
...INCREASES ...INCREASES
with Larger Wires with More Wires
WIRE ROPE
NOMINAL STRENGTHS AND WEIGHTS – 6 X 19 CLASS – 6 X 36 CLASS
NOMINAL STRENGTH IN TONS OF 20000 POUNDS
EXTRA IMPROVED APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PER FOOT (LBS)
DIAMETER (IN) IMPROVED PLOW STEEL
PLOW STEEL
FIBER CORE IWRC IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC
3/16 1.55 1.67 – .059 .065
1/4 2.74 2.94 3.40 .105 .116
5/16 4.26 4.58 5.27 .164 .18
3/8 6.10 6.56 7.55 .236 .26
7/16 8.27 8.89 10.2 .32 .35
1/2 10.7 11.5 13.3 .42 .46
9/16 13.5 14.5 16.8 .53 .59
5/8 16.7 17.9 20.6 .66 .72
3/4 23.8 25.6 29.4 .95 1.04
7/8 32.2 34.6 39.8 1.29 1.42
1 41.8 44.9 51.7 1.68 1.85
1-1/8 52.6 56.5 65.0 2.13 2.34
1-1/4 64.6 69.4 79.9 2.63 2.89
1-3/8 77.7 83.5 96. 3.18 3.50
1-1/2 92.0 98.9 114. 3.78 4.16
1-5/8 107. 115. 132. 4.44 4.88
1-3/4 124. 133. 153. 5.15 5.67
1-7/8 141. 152. 174. 5.91 6.50
2 160. 172. 198. 6.72 7.39
2-1/8 179. 192. 221. 7.59 8.35
2-1/4 200. 215. 247. 8.51 9.36
2-3/8 222. 239. 274. 9.48 10.4
2-1/2 244. 262. 302. 10.5 11.6
2-5/8 268. 288. 331. 11.6 12.8
2-3/4 292. 314. 361. 12.7 14.0
2-7/8 317. 341. 393. 13.9 15.3
3 – 370. 425. – 16.6
3-1/8 – 399. 458. – 18.0
3-1/4 – 429. 492 – 19.5
3-3/8 – 459. 529. – 21.0
3-1/2 – 491. 564. – 22.6
Available galvanized at 10% lower strengths, or in equivalent strengths on special request.
Wire Ropes
INSPECTION – THE KEY TO LONGER, SAFER WIRE ROPE USE
Any wire rope in use should be inspected on a regular basis. JUST LOOKING AT THE ROPE IS NOT ENOUGH
You have too much at stake in lives and equipment to ignore
thorough examination of the rope at prescribed intervals. When an inspector takes a look at a rope, he may see sections show-
ing excessive wear. By flagging the rope, he can quickly determine
The purpose of inspection is to accurately estimate the ser- where the rope is rubbing or contacting parts of the equipment, and
vice life and strength remaining in a rope so that maximum then repair, replace or modify the condition causing wear.
service can be had within the limits of safety. Results of the
inspection should be recorded to provide a history of rope Inspections of sheaves is a relatively simple, yet very vital task. A
performance on a particular job. On most jobs, wire rope sheave groove gauge, usually obtainable from a wire rope manu-
must be replaced before there is a risk of failure. A rope facturer, is used to check the grooves in a sheave. Hold the gauge
broken in service can destroy machinery and curtail produc- perpendicular to the surface of the groove to observe properly the
tion. It can also kill. groove size and contour, as in this illustration.
Because of the great responsibility involved in ensuring safe

rigging on equipment, the man assigned to inspect should
know wire rope and its operation thoroughly. Inspections
should be made regularly and the results recorded.
When inspecting the rope, the condition of the drum,

sheaves, guards, cable clamps and other end fittings should
be noted. The condition of these parts affects rope wear;
any defects detected should be repaired.
To ensure rope soundness between inspections, all work-

ers should participate. The operation can be most helpful
by watching the ropes under his control. If any accident
involving the ropes occurs, the operator should immedi-
ately shut down his equipment and report the accident to
his supervisor. The equipment should be inspected before
resuming operation.
The Occupational Safety and Health Act has made periodic

inspection mandatory for most wire rope applications. Photo shows new gauge and worn sheave. This new gauge is designed
with one-half the allowable oversize (see table). Using the new gauge,
when you do not see light, the sheave is OK. When you do see light under
the new gauge, the sheave should be replaced.
NOMINAL ROPE ALLOWABLE ROPE ONE-HALF ALLOW-

DIAMETER OVERSIZE ABLE ROPE OVERSIZE
0" - 3/4" +1/32" +1/64"
13/16" - 1-1/8" +3/64" +3/128"
1-3/16" - 1-1/2" +1/16" +1/32"
1-9/16" - 2-1/4" +3/32" +3/64"
2-5/16" - & larger +1/8" +1/16"

Wire Ropes
SHEAVES SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR:
1. Correct groove diameter
2. Roundness or contour to give proper support to the rope
3. Small holes, cracks, uneven surfaces, or other defects that might
be detrimental to the rope
4. Extreme deep wear
A sheave should also be checked to make sure it turns freely, is prop-

erly aligned, has no broken or cracked flanges, and has bearings that
work properly.
Drums should also be inspected for signs of wear that could damage
rope. Plain-faced or smooth drums can develop grooves or impressions
that prevent rope from winding properly. Repair by resurfacing the face
or replacing the lagging.
Scrubbing will occur if the rope tends to close wind. If the tendency is
to open winding, the rope will encounter abnormal abuse as the second
RIGHT WAY layer forces itself down between the open wraps of the first layer on
Set the machinist's caliper
to read the widest diame-
the drum.
ter. Vernier scale reads to
1/128th of an inch. Operating with a smooth drum calls for special care. Be sure the rope is
always tightly wound and thread laid on the first layer. Any loosening of
the line is easily observed as the winding will be bad and the rope will
be coming off with a series of “bad spots.”
Grooved drums should be examined for tight or corrugated grooves

and for differences in depth or pitch that could damage the second
and subsequent layers. Worn grooves can develop extremely sharp
edges that shave away small particles of steel from the rope. Correct
this condition by grinding or filing a radius to replace the sharp edge.
Drum flanges, as well as the starter, filler and riser strips, should be
checked. Excessive wear here often causes unnecessary rope abuse
at the change of layers and cross-over points.
Other places of contact such as rollers, scrub boards, guides and

end-attachments should also be inspected.
MEASURE THE WIDEST DIAMETER

Ropes and sheave grooves must be precisely fitted to each other to
get the most service out of your wire rope dollar. Make measurement of
rope diameter a normal part of your inspection program.
There's only one right way to measure rope diameter: use machinist's
WRONG WAY calipers and be sure to measure the widest diameter. The drawings at
This is the wrong way to
measure wire rope diame- the left compare the right way with the wrong way.
ter. Widest diameter is not
being read. This method is not only useful for measuring the diameter of a new
rope, but also for determining the amount of wear and compression that
has occurred while the rope has been in use. Accurate recording of this
information is essential in helping to decide when to replace wire rope.
Wire Ropes
COMMON WIRE ROPE ABUSES
Neglect and abuse are the two chief enemies of wire rope
life. One costly form of neglect is lack of proper field lubrica-
tion. Abuse takes many forms: improper reeling or unreeling,
wrong size or worn sheaves, improper storage, and bad
splicing are a few.
CRUSHING. Because of loose winding on drum, rope was pulled in

CONDITION OF MACHINERY between underlying wraps and crushed out of shape.
Wire rope performance depends upon the condition of the

equipment on which it operates; poorly maintained equip-
ment will usually result in reduced rope life.
EFFECTS OF SHOCK-LOADING AND

VIBRATION
The destructive effects of jerking or shock-loading are visu-
ally noticeable. Vibration has somewhat the same effect, and
is equally destructive. An individual shock may be slight, but
many rapidly repeated slight shocks can have the effect of TOO SUDDEN LOAD RELEASE. The sudden release of a load caused
several large shocks. birdcaging. Here individual strands open away from each other, displacing
the core.
Vibration which occurs directly above a load is often unavoid-

able. “Whipping” of the section of rope immediately above
the load is also common. In these cases, rapid wire fatigue
is possible. For reasons of safety, this section should be ex-
amined regularly.
LACK OF LUBRICATION. Premature breakage of wires resulted from
Wire rope failure is usually cumulative. Each repeated over- “locking” of strands, which was caused by insufficient lubrication.
stress brings the rope nearer to failure. Thus, a wire rope
may become fatigued to a point close to failure under a heavy
load, and actually fail under a much lighter load.
OVERSTRESSING
In any hoisting operation, there should be no slack in the wire
rope when the load is applied. Otherwise, the resulting stress
will be excessive. INFREQUENT INSPECTION. Neglect of periodical inspection left this
rope in service too long, resulting in considerable abrasion.
Overstressing can also be the result of too-rapid acceleration
or deceleration. Wire rope will withstand considerable stress
if the load is applied slowly. As with ordinary twine, a quick
snap will cause overstressing and breakage. This applies
both when starting to lift a load, and when bringing it to a stop.
CORROSION
IMPROPER HANDLING. Kink or “dog leg” was caused by improper
Corrosion can seriously shorten wire rope life, both by metal handling and/or installation. A kink causes excessive localized or spot
loss & by formation of corrosion pits in the wires. These pits abrasion.
act as stress-concentration points in the wires in much the
same manner as do nicks.
continued...

Wire Ropes
WIRE ROPE ABUSE continued

Wire rope left on machines shut down for long periods of
time deteriorates rapidly. To preserve the rope for future sue,
it should be removed, cleaned and thoroughly lubricated.
CAUSES OF CORROSION DAMAGE

Pitting, erosion and surface effects of many different types REVERSE BENDING. Running this rope over one sheave and under
another caused fatigue breaks in wires.
can all result in corrosion damage. Because they tend to
increase corrosion, the following conditions should be con-
sidered and noted when applicable, during the ordering of
wire rope: acid and alkaline solutions, gases, fumes, brine
and salt air, sulphurous compounds, and high humidity and
temperature. Lubricants are readily available to reduce the
EXCESSIVE EXPOSURE TO ELEMENTS. Too much exposure
severity of attack of most of these conditions. combined with surface wear and loss of lubrication caused corrosion
and pitting.
EFFECTS OF SEVERE HEAT
Where wire rope is subjected to severe heat (e.g., foundry
cranes) it will not give the service expected because it will
deteriorate more quickly.
TOO LONG IN SERVICE. Repeated winding and overwinding of this rope
on a drum while it was under heavy stress caused the unusually severe
Wire ropes exposed to hot-metal handling or other extreme wear shown.
heat sometimes require independent wire rope cores.
SHIFTING ROPES FROM ONE JOB TO

ANOTHER
Sometimes an idle wire rope from one operation is installed
on another to keep the rope in continuous service. This ex-
tremely poor practice is an expensive “economy.”
UNDERSIZE SHEAVE GROOVES. Sheaves were too small, causing
strands to pinch. Wires then fail in the valley between the strands.
Because wire rope tends to “set” to the conditions of its
particular operating job, the differing bends, abrasions and
stresses of a new operation can produce premature failure.
Therefore, for a maximum life and efficiency, a rope should
be used only on the job for which it has been specified.
POOR WORK PROCEDURES. Damage to strands and wires resulted

MACHINERY OPERATION from electric arcing.
Some operators are harder on their machinery than others

and as a result they get shorter rope life. In certain instanc-
es, enough extra work is done to more than offset the addi-
tional wear-and-tear on equipment and wire rope. The oper-
ation may be more efficient from the production standpoint
as a result, but those in charge of rope purchases should
be made aware of the probable reduction in rope life and LACK OF KNOWLEDGE. Here's what occurs when a loop which has
been “pulled through” and tightened remains in service.
increased rope costs.
Wire Ropes
ROPE STRENGTH AND DESIGN FACTORS
The rope strength design factor is the ratio of the rated Wire rope is an expendable item – a replacement part of a
strength of the rope to its operating stress. If a particular machine or installation. For economic and other reasons,
rope has a rated strength of 100,000 lbs. and is working un- some installations require ropes to operate at high stresses
der an operating stress of 20,000 lbs., it has a rope strength (low rope strength design factors). On some installations
design factor of 5. It is operating at one-fifth or 20% of its where high risk is involved, high rope strength design fac-
rated strength. tors must be maintained. However, operating and safety
codes exist for most applications and these codes give
Many codes refer to this factor as the “Safety Factor” which specific factors for usage. When a machine is working and
is a misleading term, since this ratio obviously does not in- large dynamic loadings (shock loading) are imparted to the
clude the many facets of an operation which must be consid- rope, the rope strength design factor will be reduced which
ered in determining safety. could result in overstressing of the rope. Reduced rope
strength design factors frequently result in reduced service
life of wire rope.
DIAMETER LOSS
O.S.H.A. (A.N.S.I.) Removal Criteria 5. ORIGINAL
A.N.S.I. Safety Codes, Standards and Requirements – DIAMETER (IN) LOSS (IN)
rope must be removed from service 5/16 & smaller 1/64
when diameter loss or wire breakage 3/8 - 1/2 1/32
occurs as follows:
9/16 - 3/4 3/64
7/8 - 1-1/8 1/16
1-1/4 - 1-1/2 3/32
NUMBER OF WIRE BREAKS

NUMBER BROKEN WIRES IN NUMBER BROKEN WIRES IN
RUNNING ROPES STANDING ROPES
A.N.S.I. IN ONE ROPE IN ONE IN ONE ROPE IN ONE
NO. EQUIPMENT LAY STRAND LAY STRAND
B30.2 Overhead & Gantry Cranes 12 4 Not specified Not specified
B30.4 Portal, Tower & Pillar Cranes 6 3 3 2
B30.5 Crawler, Locomotive & Truck Cranes 6 3 3 2
B30.6 Derricks 6 3 3 2
B30.7 Base Mounted Drum Hoists 6 3 3 2
B30.8 Floating Cranes & Derricks 6 3 3 2
A10.4 Personnel Hoists 6* 3 2* 2
A10.5 Material Hoists 6* Not specified Not specified Not specified
*Also remove for 1 valley break. OSHA requires monthly record keeping of wire rope condition.
Note: Current industry recommendations and OSHA Standards are based upon the use of steel sheaves.
The manufacturer of plastic or synthetic sheaves or liners should be consulted for their recommendations on the safe
application of their product, and possible revision in rope inspection criteria when used with their product.

Wire Ropes
To the abuses of bending over small diameter sheaves, pinching in
undersize sheave grooves, crushing when winding on drums, and
failing due to excessive rotation. Left lay rope has greatest usage
in oil fields on rod and tubing lines, blast hole rigs, and spudders
where rotation of right lay rope would loosen couplings. The rotation
of a left lay rope tightens a standard coupling.
A wire rope is a piece of flexible, multi-wired, stranded machinery

made of many precision parts.
Usually a wire rope consists of a core member, around which a

number of multi-wired strands are “laid” or helically bent. There
are two general types of cores for wire rope – fiber cores and wire
cores. The fiber core may be made from natural or synthetic fibers.
The wire core can be an Independent Wire Core (IWRC), or Strand
Core (SC).
The purpose of the core is to provide support and maintain the po-
sition of the outer strands during operation.
Any number of multi-wired strands may be laid around the core. The
UNDERSTAND WHAT THE “LAYS” OF WIRE most popular arrangement is six strands around the core, as this
combination gives the best balance.
ROPE MEAN
The number of wires per strand may vary from 3 to 91, with the
“Lay” of a wire rope is simply a description of the way wires and
majority or wire ropes falling into the 7-wire, 19-wire, or 36 wire
strands are placed during construction. Right lay and left lay refer to
strand categories.
the direction of strands. Right lay means that the strands pass from
left to right across the rope. Left lay means just the opposite; strands
pass from right to left.
LENGTH OF SERVICE DEPENDS ON
HOW YOU TREAT YOUR WIRE ROPES.
Regular lay and lang lay describe the way wires are placed within
each strand. Regular lay means that wires in the strands are laid op-
posite in direction to the lay of the strands. Lang lay means that wires
are laid in the same direction as the lay of the strands.
Most of the wire rope used is right lay, regular lay. This specification
has the widest range of applications and meets the requirements of RIGHT LAY REGULAR LAY
most equipment. In fact, other lay specifications are considered ex-
ceptions and must be requested when ordering.
HERE ARE SOME EXCEPTIONS LEFT LAY REGULAR LAY
Lang lay is recommended for many excavating, construction, and

mining applications, including draglines, hoist lines, dredgelines and
other similar lines. Here's why. Lang lay ropes are more flexible than
regular lay ropes. They also have greater wearing surface per wire RIGHT LAY LANG LAY
than regular lay ropes.
Where properly recommended, installed and used, lang lay ropes can
be used to greater advantage than regular lay ropes. However, lang
lay ropes are more susceptible. LEFT LAY LANG LAY
D/d Ratio
HOW TO CALCULATE THE D/d RATIO
D/d Ratio Efficiencies D/d Ratio Efficiencies

25 100% 3.5 73%
20 92% 3.25 72%
1" 15 88% 3 71%
10 86% 2.75 70%
8 84% 2.5 68%
6 80% 2.25 67%
5 78% 2 65%
15" 4.75 77% 1.75 62%

Radius of Contact
4.5 76% 1.5 59%
4 75% 1.25 55%
3.75 74% 1 50%
D/d ratio = 15: 15" ÷ 1" = 15
15:1 ratio = Approx. 88% efficiency.
Wire Rope Slings

The diameter of curvature around which a wire rope sling is bent affects its capacity. This is known as the D/d ratio. The
capital D refers to the diameter of a sheave, hoist drum, or with rigging the diameter of the object to which the sling hitch
is applied. The lower case d represents the diameter of the wire rope.
To determine the D/d ratio, divide the diameter of the wire rope sling into the diameter of the load. A good rule to follow is
to try and keep at least a 6:1 ratio which results in an 80% efficiency of the sling. A 1:1 ratio results in only 50% efficiency
of the sling. Softeners, as seen above, are often used to help create a better D/d ratio. For example, when the diameter
of the load is 15 times the diameter of the wire rope sling the D/d ratio is 15:1.
Alloy Chain Sling

D/d Ratio Strength Efficiencies
6:1 or greater 100%
1"
5:1 90%
4:1 80%
3:1 70%
Softener protecting 2:1 60%
4" chain
less than 2:1 Not recommended
D/d ratio = 4:1 4" ÷ 1" = 4

4:1 ratio = Approx. 80% efficiency.
Chain Slings
As with wire rope slings, the diameter of curvature around which an alloy chain sling is bent affects its capacity. To
determine the D/d ratio, divide the diameter of the alloy chain sling into the diameter of the load. For example, when the
diameter of the load is 4 times the diameter of the alloy chain sling the D/d ratio is 4:1.

Wire Ropes
BLOCK TWISTING lightly loaded ropes. This condition would also PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
apply to the speed of loading or “shock” loading, ELASTIC PROPERTIES OF WIRE ROPE
Block twisting or “cabling” is one of the most fre- since this condition also causes higher wire rope The following discussion relates to conventional
quently encountered wire rope problems in the loading. 6- or 8-strand ropes that have either fiber or steel
construction field. When this problem occurs, the 3. Eliminate “odd-part” reeving, where the wire cores; it is not applicable to rotation-resistant
wire rope is most often blamed, and other equally rope “dead-end” is on the traveling block. Wire ropes since these constitute a separate case.
important factors in the operation are overlooked. rope torque, from the application of load, is Wire rope is an elastic member; it stretches or
greatest at the rope dead-end. elongates under load. This stretch
Personnel experienced with handling of wire 4. Relocate the rope dead-end at the boom, in derives from two sources:
rope know that conventional wire ropes will order to increase the separation between the 1. Constructional, and
twist or unlay slightly, when a load is applied. In dead-end and the other rope parts. This applies 2. Elastic.
a reeved hoisting system, subjected to loading a stabilizing load directly to the traveling block. In actuality, there may be a third source of
and unloading such as a load hoisting line, this The original equipment manufacturer should be stretch – a result of the rope rotating on its own
results in block twisting and possibly distortion of consulted before making this modification. axis. Such elongation, which may occur either
the wire rope. Cabling of the block most frequent- 5. Increase sheave size. This increases the as a result of using a swivel, or from the effect
ly occurs as the load in the wire rope is released, amount of separation between wire rope parts of a free-turning load, is brought about by the
and the “falls” are in a lowered position. Cabling and may improve the situation by applying sta- unlaying of the rope strands. Because the third
may be considered as the twisting of the block bilizing loads and reducing the amount of rope source is a subject that is beyond the scope of
beyond one-half of a revolution (180° twisting) of torque transmitted to the traveling block. this publication, discussion will be directed to
the traveling block. When this condition occurs, 6. Restrain the twisting block with a “tag” line. One constructional and elastic stretch.
the operator shows good judgment in not making or more of the foregoing suggestions may elim-
additional lifts, until the conditions causing the inate the problem without resorting to “special- CONSTRUCTIONAL STRETCH
problem are corrected. ized” wire rope which may not only be difficult to
locate but expensive as well. When a load is applied to wire rope, the helical-
The following machine and site conditions should ly-laid wires and strands act in a constricting
be investigated for possible improvement in block The use of special “rotation resistant” wire ropes manner thereby compressing the core and
twisting. will not likely be required unless the intended bringing all the rope elements into closer contact.
1. Reduced wire rope length. Longer rope lengths length of rope “falls” exceeds 100 feet, or the The result is a slight reduction in diameter and
cause more twisting than short rope lengths. length of the load hoisting line exceeds 600 feet. an accompanying lengthening of the rope. Con-
This applies particularly to the amount of wire In the event these latter conditions exist, the user structional stretch is influenced by the following
rope in the “falls.” should also anticipate using a combination of the factors:
2. Reduce the amount of load lifted. Heavily “rotation resistant” wire rope and the foregoing 1. Type of core (fiber or steel),
loaded ropes have more torque and twist than field suggestions for the more severe problems. 2. Rope construction (6 x 7, 6 x 25 FW,
6 x 41 WS, 8 x 19 S, etc.),
3. Length of lay
ELASTIC STRETCH
4. Material.
Elastic stretch results from recoverable deformation of the metal itself. Here, again, a quantity cannot Ropes with wire strand core (WSC) or indepen-
be precisely calculated. However, the following equation can provide a reasonable approximation for dent wire rope core (IWRC) have less construc-
a good many situations. tional stretch than those with fiber core (FC). The
reason for this is the fact that the steel cannot
Change in load (lb.) x Length (ft.) compress as much as the fiber core.
Changes in length (ft.) =
Area (in.2) x Modulus of Elasticity (psi) Usually, constructional stretch will cease at an
early stage in the rope's life. However, some fi-
The modulus of elasticity is given below. ber core ropes, if lightly loaded (as in the case
of elevator ropes), may display a degree of con-
structional stretch over a considerable portion of
APPROXIMATE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY their life.
(POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH)
A definite value for determining constructional
ROPE ZERO THROUGH 20% 21 TO 65% stretch cannot be assigned since it is influenced
CLASSIFICATION LOADING LOADING* by several factors. The following table gives
6 x 7 with fiber core 11,700,000 13,000,000 some idea of the approximate stretch as a per-
6 x 19 with fiber core 10,800,000 12,000,000 centage of rope under load.
6 x 36 with fiber core 9,900,000 11,000,000
8 x 19 with fiber core 8,100,000 9,000,000
ROPE CONSTRUCTION APPROX. STRETCH*
6 x 19 with IWRC 13,500,000 15,000,000
6 strand FC 1/2% - 3/4%
6 x 36 with IWRC 12,600,000 14,000,000
6 strand IWRC 1/4% - 1/2%
*Applicable to new rope, i.e., not previously loaded.
8 strand FC 3/4% - 1%
*Varies with the magnitude of the loading.
General Information
In reeving a pair of tackle blocks, one of which has more than two sheaves, the To reeve by this method, the two blocks should be
hoisting rope should lead from one of the center sheaves of the upper block. placed so that the sheaves in the upper block are
at right angles to those in the lower one, as shown
When so reeved, the hoisting strain comes on the center of the blocks and they are in the following illustrations. Start reeving with the
prevented from toppling, with consequent injury to the rope by cutting across the becket, or standing end, of the rope.
edges of the block shell.
It is good practice to use a shackle block as the
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4 upper one of a pair and a hook block as the lower
one. A shackle would prevent any accidental dis-
engagement of the block from its attaching point in
the event of an unusual movement of the attaching
point or block. The lower block having a hook is
more readily attached or detached from the load.
See Figures 1 through 5.
FIGURE 5
SHEAVE
DOUBLE AND TRIPLE AND TRIPLE AND QUADRUPLE NO. 5 SHEAVE
DOUBLE DOUBLE TRIPLE AND TRIPLE SHEAVE NO. 3
NO. 1
VARYING SHEAVE REVOLUTIONS IN A PAIR OF TACKLE BLOCKS

To raise a load one foot, the lower block must be raised one foot, and in accomplishing this, each working rope
must be shortened one foot.
In the example above, Ropes 1, 2, 3, etc., must be shortened one foot to raise the load one foot. Assuming that
the circumference of each sheave is one foot, Sheave No.1 must make one revolution to shorten Rope No.
1; Sheave No. 2 must make one revolution to take up the one foot slack form Rope No. 1 and one additional
revolution to shorten Rope No. 2; Sheave No. 3 must make two revolutions to take up the two feet of slack
from Ropes 1 and 2 and one additional revolution to shorten Rope No. 3, etc. for each succeeding sheave.
Viz: Rope No. 1 must travel one foot on Sheave No. 1.

Rope No. 2 must travel two feet on Sheave No. 2.
Rope No. 3 must travel three feet on Sheave No. 3.
SHEAVE
Rope No. 4 must travel four feet on Sheave No. 4.
NO. 2
Rope No. 5 must travel five feet on Sheave No. 5.
SHEAVE
Therefore, all the sheaves in a set of blocks revolve at different rates of speed. Sheave No. 2 rotates twice NO. 4
as fast as No. 1, Sheave No. 3 rotates three times as fast as No.1, Sheave No. 4 four times as fast as No. 1,
etc. Consequently the sheaves nearest the lead line, rotating at higher rates of speed, wear out more rapidly.
All sheaves should be kept well lubricated when in operation to reduce friction and wear.

General Information
HOW TO FIGURE LINE PARTS
RATIO FOR RATIO FOR

NUMBER OF BRONZE BUSHED ANTI-FRICTION To help figure the number of parts of line to be used for a given load or the
PARTS OF LINE SHEAVES BEARING SHEAVES line pull required for a given load, the following ratio table is provided with
1 .96 .98 examples of how to use it:
2 1.87 1.94
3 2.75 2.88
4 3.59 3.81
5 4.39 4.71
6 5.16 5.60
7 5.90 6.47
8 6.60 7.32
9 7.27 8.16
10 7.91 8.98
11 8.52 9.79
12 9.11 10.6
13 9.68 11.4
14 10.2 12.1
15 10.7 12.9
16 11.2 13.6
1 2 3 4 5
17 11.7 14.3 PART PART PART PART PART
18 12.2 15.0 OF LINE OF LINE OF LINE OF LINE OF LINE
19 12.6 15.7
20 13.0 16.4
21 13.4 17.0
22 13.8 17.7
23 14.2 18.3
24 14.5 18.9
USING THE RATIO TABLE RATIO FORMULA
TOTAL LOAD TO BE LIFTED

= RATIO
SINGLE LINE PULL IN POUNDS
Example: Example:
To find the number of parts of line needed when weight of To find single line pull needed when weight of load and
load and single line pull is established. number of parts of line are established.
Sample Problem: Sample Problem:

72,480 lbs. (load to be lifted) 68,000 lbs. (load to be lifted)
8,000 lbs. (single line pull) = 9.06 RATIO 6.60 (ratio of 8 part line)
= 10,300 lbs. (single line pull)
Refer to ratio 9.06 in table or number nearest to it, then
check column under heading “Number of Parts of Line”... 10,300 lbs. single line pull required to lift this load on
12 parts of line to be used for this load. 8 parts of line.
General Information
LOADS ON BLOCKS
The Rated Load Values for blocks shown in Crosby Group literature imposed on each block in the system in order to properly determine
are shown as “Working Loads,” “Safe Working Load” and “Resultant the rated capacity block to be used.
Safe Working Load”; and all these terms are defined as the maximum
amount of total load that should be exerted on the block and its fitting, A single sheave block that is used to change direction of a load line
the fitting being a hook, shackle, eye, loop, etc. can be subjected to total loads GREATLY DIFFERENT than the
weight being lifted or pulled. The amount of total load changes with
It must be recognized that this total load value MAY BE DIFFERENT the angle between the incoming and departing lines to the block.
than the weight being lifted or pulled by a hoisting or hauling sys-
tem and, therefore, it is necessary to determine the total load being The following chart indicates the factor that is multiplied by the line
pull to obtain the total load on the block:
ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR TOTAL LOAD

0° 2.00 60° 1.73 130° .84
10° 1.99 70° 1.64 135° .76
20° 1.97 80° 1.53 140° .68
30° 1.93 90° 1.41 150° .52
40° 1.87 100° 1.29 160° .35
45° 1.84 110° 1.15 170° .17
50° 1.81 120° 1.00 180° .00
ANGLE
LINE PULL LINE PULL
Example: A gin pole truck being used to lift a weight of 1,000 lbs.
A
There is no mechanical advantage to a single part load line
system, so, winch line pull is equal to 1,000 lbs. or the weight
50°
being lifted.
135°
WINCH Total load on snatch block shown as A equals 1,000 lbs. times
LINE
PULL
angle factor for 50°.
B
1000 LBS Total load on A = 1,000 x 1.81 = 1,1810 lbs.
Total load on toggle block shown as B equals 1,000 lbs. times
angle factor for 135°.
Total load on B = 1,000 x .76 = 760 lbs.
Example: Hoisting system using a traveling block to lift a weight of 1,000 lbs.
The mechanical advantage at the traveling block C is 2 because 2 parts of a

load line support the 1,000 lbs. weight; so, the line pull equals the 1,000 lbs.
divided by 2 or 500 lbs.
D
Total load on traveling block shown as C equals 500 lbs. times angle factor 130°
for 0°. 40°
Total Load on C = 500 x 2.00 = 1,000 lbs.

50° E
Total load on stationary block shown as D equals the dead end load of 500 lbs.
C
plus the line pull of 500 lbs. times the angle factor for 40°.
Total Load on E = 500 x .84 = 420 lbs.
1000 LBS
Total load on block shown as F equals 500 lbs. times the angle factor for 90°.
Total Load on F = 500 x 1.41 = 705 lbs.

Basic Lift Engineering
EFFECT OF ANGLES It is neither economical nor good practice to ex- work and handling feature – of the proper length and
ceed a 45-degree sling leg angle. rated capacity for the situation.
Various sling manufacturers refer in their speci- Angles less than 45 degrees not only build up 2.Start and stop slowly. Crane hooks should be raised
fication tables to leg angles of slings during lifts tension in the sling legs out of all proportion to the slowly until the sling becomes taut and the load is
– since these angles have a direct relationship to weight of the load, they also create a much great- suspended. Lifting or lowering speed should be in-
lifting capability of a sling. Regardless of how the er “in-pull” on the ends of the load. This produces creased or decreased gradually. Sudden starts or
sling angle may be stated, or the method used eccentrically loaded column effect, as an engineer stops place heavier loads on a sling – comparable
to compute stress in a sling leg, the sling is the would describe it – meaning simply that long, to jamming the brakes on a speeding automobile.
same. Capacity does not change – but stresses slender objects have a tendency to buckle. An- A rule of thumb: Shock loads can double the stress
on sling legs change with rigging angles. gles less than 45 degrees indicate some thought on a sling.
should be given to the use of a lifting beam or 3. If possible, set the load on blocks. Pulling a sling
Much misunderstanding results because the other device in connection with the lift. from under a load causes abrasion and “curling” –
carrying capacity of a sling leg is reduced by the making the sling harder to handle on the next lift,
rigging angle. What happens is that the operator Studying typical sling charts readily reveals that while reducing strength through loss of metal.
is lifting the load straight up (vertical) while the lifting capacities on slings are misleading unless 4. Sharp corners cut slings. Use protector arcs, Cor-
legs are pulling at an angle, thereby causing the sling angle is stated. The same sling that will nermax™ and Synthetic Armor Wear Pads between
a disadvantage. handle 10 tons at an 85-degree leg angle will sharp corners and the sling body.
only handle 5 tons if this angle is decreased to 5. Store in a dry room. Moisture is a natural enemy
For quick figuring in the shop, a 60-degree leg 30 degrees. of wire rope – as are acid fumes and other caustic
angle causes a loss in lifting capacity of 15%... gases.
a 45-degree angle reduces capacity by 30%... GOOD SLING PRACTICE 6. Avoid handling hot material or objects in direct con-
and a 30-degree angle, 50%. This rule of thumb tact with the sling. Strength goes down as tempera-
is not 100% accurate, but is easy to remember Regardless of what type of sling may be em- ture goes up!
and slightly on the safe side. ployed, there are accepted good working rules 7. Dropping casting, tools or heavy objects on slings, or
which will help increase useful sling life – as well running over them with trucks, can cause damage.
It is always good practice, within limits, to keep as improve safety. These include: Always hang slings when not in use.
the sling leg angle as large as possible. The 1.Use The proper sling for the lift. Whether Twin- 8. Use hooks properly. “Point loading” reduces hook
length and width of the load sling length, and Path, Web, Chain, or Wire Rope, the proper capacity. Pull should be straight in the line of lift.
available headroom are determining factors in sling is the one with the best combination of
this sling angle.
SELECTING A SLING by the length of the sling, or the specific type ANSI Standard B30.9 specifies that a wire rope sling
of hitch, will handle the load. should be removed form service any time any of the
The following is presented as a guide only to help Attaching the sling and completing the lift should following conditions are detected:
in selection of a sling for a lift. be an orderly procedure without “surprises” when 1. Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope
1.Determine the Load: The weight of the load these steps have been followed. Two further pre- lay, or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.
must be known. This is always the starting cautions should be noted, however. 2. Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage
point. resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure.
2. Decide the Hitch: Shape and bulk of the load First, plan to protect both load and sling from dam- 3. Evidence of heat damage.
must be accommodated as well as weight. De- age at sharp corners, etc. Cornermax™ and Syn- 4. End attachments that are cracked, deformed,
termine whether a straight attachment at some thetic Armor Wear Pads should be provided at the or worn.
point on the load, a choker around the load, or lift site. A protective pad should be used anytime a 5. Hooks that have been opened more than 15% of the
some form of basket hitch will best control the sling passes around a sharp corner. normal throat opening measured at the narrowest
load during the lift. point, or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane
3. Adequacy of Lifting Device: The lifting device Last – by no means unimportant by being last of the unbent hook.
must have adequate capacity for making the – every sling should be visually examined from 6. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments.
lift, and provide any maneuverability required end to end BEFORE EVERY LIFT. It must always
once the load is hoisted. be kept in mind that the manufacturer's Rated It is apparent from the foregoing that inspection of a
4. Room to Lift: Make certain the lifting device Capacity applies only to a new sling in “unused” wire rope sling to meet these removal criteria requires
has sufficient headroom to raise the load to the condition. A sling should be carefully examined to more than a casual understanding of wire rope design
height required. Headroom will affect the length determine that it is in as nearly new condition as and manufacture, and the responsibility for daily in-
of sling. practicable before each lift. spections must be in the hands of trained personnel.
5. Length of Sling: By applying your decision on
the type of hitch to knowledge of the headroom There are specific standards on the use and care Most of the foregoing applies equally to any type of
offered by the lifting device, the length of sling of slings in industries such as shipping and con- sling and careful inspection by a trained inspector is
can be calculated. struction, and these provide some guidance for necessary for safe sling use. If you require training for
6. Use Rated Capacity Chart: Always double- sling inspectors. Consensus standards published any type of sling inspection, contact Hanes Supply for
check that the sling type and capacity you as ANSI B30.9 are particularly helpful. more information.
choose, when rigged at the angle determined
Lift Engineering
With the Pythagorean Theorem knowing two sides of a right triangle makes
it possible to calculate the third side
C
A To find c (hypotenuse) To find a
Given: a2 + b2 = c2 Given: c2 -b2 = a2
Example: 42 + 32 = c2; 16 + 9 = c2; √ 25 = 5 Example: 52 - 32 = a2; 25 - 9 = c2; √ 16 = 4
B
LOAD ANGLE FACTORS

5,000 LBS 5,000 LBS L = LAF (Load Angle Factor)
— Example:15
— = 1.5 (LAF)
H 10
L
H L x L's share of the load
Tension in L = —
H

Tension in L = 15
10,000 LBS
— x 5,000; 1.5 x 5,000 Ten. = 7,500 lbs.
H=10' L=15' 10
TENSION IN OVERHEAD HOISTS
A B
6'
2'
6'
Ten. in A = 6 x 3,000
— Ten. in A = 9,000 lbs.
2
(As load moves, tension changes)
6,000 LBS
OFF-SET CENTER OF GRAVITY (SHARE OF THE LOAD)
A B Inverse Proportion To Distance
3' 7'
Lift Point A Lift Point B
7 3
7 + 3 = 10,— = .70 7 + 3 = 10,— = .30
10,000 LBS 10 10
70 x 10,000 = 7,000 lbs. .30 x 10,000 = 3,000 lbs.
OFF-LEVEL LIFT POINTS
W x D2 x L1 LEGEND
L1 H1 TL1 = W = Load Weight

(D2 x H1) + (D1 x H2) L1 = Length Leg 1
H2 L2 = Length Leg 2
W x D1 x L2 H1 = Vertical Height 1
L2 TL2 = H2 = Vertical Height 2
(D2 x H1) + (D1 x H2) D1 = Horizontal Distance 1
D2 = Horizontal Distance 2
D1 D2

EVERY LIFT USES 1 OF 3 BASIC HITCHES
STRAIGHT OR VERTICAL, attachment, The diameter of the bend where the sling
is simply using a sling to connect a lifting contacts the load should keep the point
hook to a load. Full rated lifting capacity of of choke against the sling BODY – never
the sling may be utilized, but must not be against a splice or the base of the eye. When
exceeded. Whenever a single sling is used a choke is used, the sling rated capacity
in this manner, a tagline should be used to must be adjusted downward to compensate
prevent load rotation which may cause dam- for loss of capability. STRAIGHT
age to the sling. A choker hitch should be pulled tight before a CHOKER
When two or more slings are attached to the lift is made – NOT PULLED DOWN DURING BASKET
same lifting hook in straight or vertical man- THE LIFT. It is also dangerous to use only
ner, the total hitch becomes, in effect, a lifting one choker hitch to lift a load which might
bridle, and the load is distributed among the shift or slide out of the choke.
LOAD
individual slings. BASKET hitches distribute a load between LOAD
CHOKER hitches reduce lifting capability of the two legs of a sling – within limitations de-
a sling, since this method of rigging affects scribed below. Capacity of a sling used in a
ability of the wire rope components to adjust basket is affected by the bend, or curvature, LOAD
during the lift. A choker is used when the load where the sling body comes in contact with
will not be seriously damaged by the sling the load – just as any sling is affected and
body – or the sling damaged by the load, limited by bending action, as over a sheave.
and when the lift requires the sling to snug
up against the load.
CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING
As the horizontal angle between the legs of a 1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be
sling decreases, the load on each leg increases. used. This provides the load per leg if the lift were being made LEG ANGLES LOAD
The effect is the same whether a single sling is with all legs lifting vertically. (DEGREES) FACTOR
used as a basket, or two slings are used with 2. Determine the angle. 90° 1.000
each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle. 3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above)
85° 1.003
by the Load Factor for the leg angle being used (from the table
Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg – or below) – to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each leg for this lift 80° 1.015
legs – of a sling, the load per leg can be deter- and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE 75° 1.035
mined by using the data in the table at right. RATED SLING CAPACITY. 70° 1.064
Proceed as follows to calculate this load – and Thus, in drawing three (sling angle at 60°): 65° 1.103
determine the rated capacity required of the 1000 ÷ 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if vertical lift)
60° 1.154
sling, or slings, needed for a lift. 500 x 1.154 = 577 lbs. = ACTUAL LOAD on
each leg at the 60° HORIZ. angle being used. 55° 1.220
1000 LBS
50° 1.305
500 LBS
500 LBS
In drawing four (sling angle of 45°): 45° 1.414

1000 ÷ 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 40° 1.555
500 x 1.414 = 707 lbs. = ACTUAL LOAD
35° 1.566
on each leg at the 45° HORIZ. angle being used.
30° 2.000
Rated Capacity Adjustment

1000 LBS
For Choker Hitches

PERCENT
1000 LBS
OF SLING
ANGLE OF RATED
518
LBS
CHOKE IN CAPACITY
DEGREES APPLICABLE
LBS
518
120-180 100%
57
90-119 87%
BS
7L
60-89 74%
S
70
7L
90° 75° 60°

BS
LB
45° 30-59 62%

57
LB
7
70
0-29 49%
When a choke is drawn down tight against a load, or a

1000 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS side pull is exerted resulting in an angle of less than 120°,
an adjustment must be made for further reduction of the
sling rated capacity.
Carrying Full Load

Balancing Load
The number of legs in a multi-leg sling will also have some bearing on the total
lifting capacity. Unless the load is flexible, it is wrong to assume that a 3 or 4 leg
hitch will safely lift a load equal to the safe load on one leg multiplied by the number
of legs, because there is no way of knowing that each leg is carrying its share of
the load. With slings having more than 2 legs lifting a rigid load, it is possible for
two of the legs to be carrying a majority of the load while the others only balance it.
Equal loading can be maintained on all legs using adjustable hitches, turnbuckles,
or chain lever hoists.
Bridle Sling Capacity Calculation

Rated Load = single leg sling rated capacity x number of legs x sine
of the horizontal angle.
Sines
• 60 deg. - 0.866
• 45 deg. - 0.707
• 30 deg. - 0.500
Ways to help equalize the loading on a 4-leg rigging system.

• Leg lengths equal
• Lever Hoists
• Turnbuckles
• Adjustable Hitches
• Two 2-leg bridles instead of one 4-leg
• Use sub-link assembles on 4-leg bridles

Sling Hitches
SLING HITCHES
There are three basic hitches; the vertical hitch, the choker hitch and the basket
hitch. All other hitches are a combination or variation of the these sling hitches.
Vertical Hitch - A hitch where the sling is used in an eye and eye or
straight-pull configuration. The vertical hitch capacity reflects a full 100%
of the slings Working Load Limit (WLL). The hitch's efficiency is reduced
when used at any angle less than 90° from the horizontal plane.
Vertical Hitch
Choker Hitch - A hitch formed when one end of the sling is passed
under or through the load and back up through the sling eye or hard-
ware then is attached to the lifting hook or other device. The choker
hitch WLL reflects 75% to 80% of the vertical hitch rating, when the
angle of choke is 120° or greater. When the angle of the choke is less
than 120°, the hitch efficiency is reduced accordingly.
Choker Hitch
Basket Hitch - A hitch formed when the sling is passed under or

through the load and back up with both ends placed in the hoisting
hook or other device. The basket hitch WLL is 200% of the vertical
hitch rating as long as both legs of the hitch are within 5° of vertical
and the correct D/d ratio for the sling type is achieved. When the legs
of the hitch are less than 90°, its efficiency is reduced accordingly.
Basket Hitch
Sling Hitches
Bridle Hitch - A hitch where multiple vertical hitches

(usually 2 to 4 slings) are attached to a single upper
2-leg Bridle Hitch
attachment point to facilitate making the lift.
Bridle Sling - A sling where multiple legs are gathered

on a master link during fabrication. Bridle sling capac-
ities are based on a specific angle with all legs lifting
an equal share of the load weight.
2-leg Sling Hitch
Rendered Choker Hitch - A hitch where the bite of

the choke is rendered, to some degree, off to the side
of the load. This helps to control a high center.
Bite of Hitch
135°
Rendered Choke Hitch

120°
90
° 0°
18
RENDERED CHOKER ADJUSTMENT 60°
ANGLE OF CHOKE EFFICIENCY
OVER 120° 100%
30°
90° - 120° 87%
0°
60° - 89° 74%
30° - 59° 62%
0° - 29° 49%
Rendered Hitch Capacity = Choker WLL X Angle of Choke Efficiency

Sling Hitches
Double Wrap Choker Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a
choker hitch that does not have an extra wrap. However, this hitch
provides more load control because the extra wrap, around the load,
provides 360° contact around the load. The double wrap is great for
bundled loads and controlling a high center of gravity.
Dbl. Wrap Choker Hitch
Double Wrap Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a
basket hitch. The extra wrap provides 360° contact around the load.
The double wrap is great for bundled loads and controlling a high
center of gravity.
Dbl. Wrap Basket Hitch
Double Choker Hitch - This hitch has double the choker hitch capac-
ity when the body of the sling passes through the eyes and back to the
hook. Thus allowing for full adjustment of the sling to equalize loading
on all parts of the sling.
Dbl. Choker Hitch
Inverted Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a standard
basket hitch: less the reduction of a small D/d ratio. It is used to in-
crease the D/d ratio from a vertical basket through a shackle. It also
provides continual adjustments when used in conjunction with snatch
blocks during tilt up operations. It is possible for the inverted basket to
run over the saddle of the hook unless restrained.
Inverted Basket Hitch
Sling Hitches
Double Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as two basket
hitches (with the same angle). This hitch should be used at angles no
less than 60° from the horizontal plane. A tighter angle may cause the
basket part of the hitch to run, making the load unstable. The hitch
achieves an equilateral triangle at 60°.
Double Basket Hitch
Adjustable Hitch - This hitch should be used with the choker hitch
rating. This hitch is used for loads which have an offset center of grav-
ity. For this hitch to work, the bends in the hitch must be tight. When
slack, the hitch should be adjusted to the desired length. Once under
load, friction will allow the hitch to stay in place. Rigging hardware
should be used in the bite of the hitch.
Adjustable Hitch
Endless Choker Hitch - A choker hitch formed with an endless style

sling provides a more stable hitch than if formed with an eye and eye
style sling. This is because it provides a large base of support under
the load.
Endless Choker Hitch
Endless Basket Hitch - A basket hitch formed with an endless style

sling provides a more stable hitch than a basket hitch formed with
an eye and eye style sling because it gives a large base of support
under the load.
Endless Basket Hitch

Sling Hitches
Double Wrap Basket Hitches

Double Wrap Choker Hitches
Rendered Choker Hitch
Endless Sling Vertical Hitches
Two Vertical Hitches
Adjustable Hitch
Measuring Bridle Sling Length
Not all bridle sling lengths are measured the same. See the following examples:
Wire rope, synthetic web and synthetic round-

slings are measured from the sling's bearing
Sling Length
point located on the lower part of the master link
to the bearing point of the sling or hardware at-
tached on its opposite end.
Wire Rope Sling Bridle
Alloy chain sling length is measured from bear-

ing point to bearing point, this measurement is
Sling Length known as the Reach. The Reach is measured
from the upper bearing point of master link to the
bearing point of the sling or hardware attached
on its opposite end.
Alloy Chain Sling Bridle

How to Read a Tag
3
1 2
Each synthetic web sling shall be marked to show:

1. Manufacturer's name or trademark
2. Manufacturer's code or stock number
3. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on
4. Type of synthetic web material
5. Number of legs if more than one
1
3
Each wire rope sling shall be marked to show:

1. Manufacturer name or trademark
3. Diameter or size
4. Number of legs if more than one
4
2
3
5
Each alloy chain sling shall be marked to show:

1. Manufacturer's name or trademark
2. Grade and unique identification (e.g., serial number)
3. Nominal chain size
5. Reach (length of sling measured from bearing to bearing point)
6. Number of legs (branches)
General Information
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
Abrasion: The mechanical wearing of surface resulting from frictional contact with materials or objects.
Breaking Strength: That total force (lbs. or kg.) at which the sling fails. The total weight strain which can be
applied before failure. Usually at five times the rated capacity.
Bunching: Squeezing of a synthetic sling in narrow hardware or in a narrow lifting point.
Competent Person: A person designated for inspection who is trained, qualified by knowledge and practical
experience and the necessary instructions to enable the required test or examination to be carried out.
Design Factor (DF): A multiple of working load limit which varies from country to country. In North America a
5:1 DF is the standard. In Europe and Australia, a 7:1 DF is the standard. In Japan 6:1.
Double Basket Hitch: This is a basket hitch with the middle pulled up over the lifting hook between each
eye (end) of the sling to form two basket hitches. It has the same rating as two basket hitches (with the same
angle). This hitch should not be used at angles less than 60° to the horizontal.
Double Choker Hitch: This hitch has double the single choker hitch capacity when the body of the sling
passes through the eyes and back to the hook.
Double Wrap Basket Hitch: A basket hitch with one additional wrap around the load, providing 360° contact
around the load in order to have more control of the load during a lift. This hitch is great for bundled loads
and high centers of gravity. The rating is the same as a single basket.
Double Wrap Choker Hitch: This hitch has the same rating as a single choker hitch except it has an extra
wrap around the load for greater stability, providing 360° contact around the load.
Elongation: The measurement of stretch, expressed as a percentage of the finished length.
External Warning Indicator (EWI): A type of visual overload indicator that can be installed
on Slingmax® roundslings.
Fitting: A load bearing metal component which is fitted to the sling. Can be of steel, aluminum or other
material that will sustain the rated capacity of the sling.
Hitch/Vertical: A method of attachment whereby the sling extends from the crane hook to the load
in a straight connection.
Hitch/Choker: The sling is passed around the load and back through itself and is connected to the
crane hook. The sling then tightens around the load when it is strained.
Hitch/Basket: The sling is passed from the crane hook around the load and attached
to the crane hook.

General Information
Length: The distance between bearing points of the sling.
Proof Load: The average load to which an item may be subjected before visual deformation occurs or a
load that is applied in the performance of a proof test.
Proof Load Test: A non-destructive load test usually to twice the rated capacity of the sling.
Qualified Person: A person who, by possession of a recognized degree or certificate of a professional
standing in an applicable field, or who, by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully
demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter and work.
Rated Load: The maximum recommended load that should be exerted on the item. The following terms are
also used for the term Rated Load: “Working Load,” “Working Load Limit,” and “Resultant Working Load.” All
rated load values, unless noted otherwise, are for in-line pull with respect to the centerline of the item.
Safe Working Load (SWL): See Working Load Limit (WLL).
Safety Factor: A measurement no longer used in the USA to describe the design factor of a sling.
Shock Load: A resulting load from the rapid change of movement, such as impacting or jerking, or a static
load. A Shock Load is generally significantly greater than the static load.
Side Loading: A load applied at an angle to the vertical plane of a crane boom or the lifting axis
of rigging hardware.
Sling Loading: The total tension load applied to a sling during a lifting application.
Synthetic Fiber: Man-made material used for the cover, the core and the thread of the Twin-Path®
sling products.
Tell-Tails: Which extend past the tag area of Twin-Path® slings. Extension of the load core yarns. When the
sling is stretched beyond its elastic limit, they shrink and eventually disappear under the tag. Take out of
service if less than 1/2" is exposed.
Thread: The synthetic yarn which is used to sew the sling covers and tag and to provide the stitch which
separates the individual load cores.
Twin-Path®: A patented and trademarked product which is composed of two separate load cores and two
contrasting color covers.
Twin-Path® Core: The load bearing multiple fibers of polyester, aramids, or K-Spec™ which, when wound
into the seamless tubes, become the load bearing yarns of the sling. If other materials are used, follow the
manufacturers recommendations.
General Information
Twin-Path® Cover: The seamless tubes, usually at least two separate and contrasting colors for easier
inspection that contain the cores. Covers may be of polyester, Covermax nylon, or aramids depending
on the desired finished characteristics of the product.
Ultimate Load: The average load at which the item is being tested fails or no longer supports the load.
Ultimate Strength: Same as break strength-that total force (lbs or kg) at which the sling fails. The total
weight strain that can be applied before failure.
Vertical Rated Capacity (VRC): The Vertical Rated Capacity is the maximum rated capacity for a sling
in a straight hitch or vertical configuration.
Working Load Limit (WLL): The maximum weight that a piece of rigging equipment should carry. Rated
capacity, load rating, Safe Working Load (SWL) and Working Load Limit are frequently used interchange-
ably. Break strength divided by design factor equals Working Load Limit.
CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS
All ratings shown in this literature are based upon the items being new or “in as new” condition. Catalog rat-
ings are considered to be the greatest load that should be applied to the item; therefore, any shock loading
must be considered when selecting the item for use in a system.
The products shown in this literature are subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation, inten-
tional alteration and other usage factors which may necessitate a reduction in the product's Rated Capacity
or a reduction in its Design Factor. Therefore, it is recommended that all products be regularly inspected
to determine their condition as a basis for deciding if the product may continue to be used at the catalog
assigned WL, a reduced WL, a reduced design factor, or removed from service.

Common Conversions
SUMMARY OF COMMON CONVERSIONS
FACTORS
IF YOU KNOW: MULTIPLY BY: TO FIND:
Inches 25.4 Millimeters (mm)
Inches 2.54 Centimeters (cm)
Feet 0.30 Meters (m)
Yard 0.3711 Meters (m)
Miles 1.61 Kilometers (km)
Millimeters .0394 Inches
Centimeters .39 Inches
Meters 3.28 Feet
Meters 1.09 Yard
Kilometers .62 Miles
Metric Tons 1.102 U.S. Tons
U.S. Tons .9072 Metric Tons
Kilograms 2.204 Pounds
Pounds .453 Kilograms
Metric tons 2204.62 Pounds
Metric tons 1000.0 Kilograms
Fahrenheit (temp.) 5/9 (after subtracting 32) Celsius (temp.)
Celsius (temp.) 9/5 (then add 32) Fahrenheit (temp.)
DECIMAL / METRIC EQUIVALENT TABLE

FRACTION (IN) DECIMAL (IN) METRIC (MM)
1/16 .0625 1.588
1/8 .1250 3.175
3/16 .1875 4.762
1/4 .2500 6.350
5/16 .3125 7.938
3/8 .3750 9.525
7/16 .4375 11.112
1/2 .5000 12.700
9/16 .5625 14.288
5/8 .6250 15.875
11/16 .6875 17.462
3/4 .7500 19.050
13/16 .8125 20.638
7/8 .8750 22.225
15/16 .9375 23.812
1 1.0000 25.400
Weights of Material
MATERIALS AND LIQUIDS - POUNDS/CU. FT.

Aluminum 165 Granite, Solid 168
Asbestos 153 Iron Casting 450
Asphalt 81 Lead 710
Brass 524 Limestone, Solid 163
Brick, Soft 100 Lumber - Fir 32
Brick, Medium 115 Lumber - Oak 62
Brick, Hard 130 Lumber - RR Ties 50
Bronze 534 Marble, Solid 160
Coal 56 Oil, Motor 60
Concrete, Reinforced 150 Paper 75
Copper 556 Portland Cement, Loose 94
Crushed Rock 95 Portland Cement, Set 183
Diesel 52 River Sand 120
Dry Earth, Loose 75 Rubber 94
Dry Earth, Packed 95 Steel 490
Gasoline 45 Water, Fresh 63
Glass 161 Zinc 437
MATERIAL - POUNDS/SQ. FT.
Steel Plate Aluminum Plate
1/8" 5 1/8" 1.75
1/4" 10 1/4" 3.50
1/2" 20 1/2" 7.00
3/4" 30 3/4" 10.50
1" 40 1" 14.00
FORMULAS AND INFORMATION
H = Height W = Width L = Length d = diameter r = radius (1/2 dia.) p = 3.14 (rounded 3.15)
[area of a square or rectangle = HW] [Vol of cube = HWL] [Circumference of circle = pd]
[area of a circle = pr2 or the approximate area of a circle = 80% of the dia2 (dia x dia x .80)]

USA Standard
Crane Hand Signals
Use Main Hoist. Use Whipline. Raise Boom. Lower Boom. Travel. Arm Swing. Arm
Tap fist on head; (Auxiliary Hoist). Arm extended, Arm extended, extended forward, extended, point
then use regular Tap elbow fingers closed, fingers closed, hand open and with finger in
signals. with one hand, thumb pointing thumb pointing slightly raised, make direction of swing
then use upward. downward. pushing motion of boom.
regular signals. indirection of travel.
Hoist. With forearm Lower. With arm Raise the Boom and Lower the Boom Travel. (One Track). Travel.(Both
vertical, forefinger extended down- Lower the Load. and Raise the Load. Lock the track on side Tracks). Use both
pointing up, move ward, forefinger With arm extended, With arm extended, indicated by raised fists in front of body,
hand in small pointing down, thumb pointing up, thumb pointing down, fist. Travel opposite making a circular
horizontal circle. move hand in small flex fingers in and flex fingers in and out track in direction motion about each
horizontal circles. out as long as load as load movement is indicated by circular other, indicating
movement is desired. desired. motion of other fist, direction of travel;
rotated vertically in forward or back-
front of body. (For ward. (For crawler
crawler cranes only). cranes only.)
Additional Signals for Bridge Cranes
Extend Boom. Retract Boom. Stop. Arm extended, Emergency Stop. Bridge Travel. Arm Trolley Travel. Palm
(Telescoping (Telescoping palm down, hold Arm extended, palm extended forward, up, fingers closed,
Booms). Both Booms). Both fists position rigidly. down, move hand hand open and thumb pointing in
fists in front of in front of body with rapidly right and left. slightly raised, make direction of motion,
body with thumbs thumbs pointing pushing motion in jerk hand horizontally.
pointing outward toward each other. direction of travel.
Extend Boom. Retract Boom. Move Slowly. Dog Everything. Multiple Trolleys. Magnet is Discon-
(Telescoping (Telescoping Boom). Use one hand to give Clasp hands in front Hold up one finger for nected. Crane
Boom). One Hand One Hand Signal. any motion signal and of body. block marked “1” and Operator spreads
Signal. One fist in One fist in front of place other hand two fingers for block both hands apart
front of chest with chest, thumb pointing motionless in front of marked “2”. Regular palms up.
thumb tapping outward and heel of hand giving the motion signals follow.
chest. fist tapping chest. signal. (Hoist slowly
shown as example.)
HSI Training
H
anes Supply seminars are hands-on demonstrations for a wide range of industrial and
contractor applications. Our rigging & safety specialists are available to conduct training
seminars at your facility, or you can take advantage of our fully equipped facilities.
RIGGING
REVIEW OF ASME B30: EQUIPMENT SELECTION:
• Overview of safety codes and standards • Hardware capabilities
covering cranes and rigging equipment. • Hitch selection
INSPECTION (B30.9/B30.26): SAFE APPLICATIONS:

• Rejection criteria • Share of load
• Identification/tags • Lifting at angles
• Slings and hardware
SAFETY
CONFINED SPACE: ABC’S OF FALL PROTECTION:
• An overview of entering a permit-required Anchor Points, Bodywear, Connectors -
confined space as it relates to Fall Arrest –
Rescue retrieval. • An overview of proper fall protection
configurations that are capable of with-
• Live davit arm demonstration and standing fall arrest forces when connected.
showing of the rescue retrieval and fall
arrest equipment required in confined • Discussion of fall protection harnesses:
space entry. An overview of the different types and
how to wear them correctly.
LANYARDS VS RETRACTABLES:
• Discussion of the advantages FITTING OF HARNESSES:
that retractables offer over traditional Discussion of proper fitting of
lanyards as connecting devices. Fall Protection harnesses.
• Discussion of minimum fall
clearance heights for each device.
100% TIE OFF APPLICATIONS:
Review 100% tie off connections
INSPECTION GUIDELINES: with personal retractables and lanyards.
Discussion of OSHA requirements
for inspection of fall protection
products/equipment. HORIZONTAL LIFELINE APPLICATIONS:
Review different types of horizontal lifelines
that are temporary or permanent.
WE CAN CUSTOMIZE TRAINING TO YOUR SPECIFIC NEEDS


Rental and Repair
RENTAL
When purchasing isn't an option... Rent the equipment you need!

We have a large selection of equipment where and when you need it.
Reliable, Dependable and Ready To Work!
Air Compressors Gas Cutting Equipment Pressure Washers
Air Tools Hoists/Lifting Equipment Pulling/Bending Equipment
Blocks Hydraulic Equipment Pumps
Compaction Equipment Lighting Equipment Safety Equipment
Concrete Core Drilling/Sawing Main Lifting Equipment Swaging Tools
Concrete Equipment Material Handling Ventilation Equipment
Electric Tools Paint Spray Equipment Welders/Generators
Fastening Pipe Equipment Winches
REPAIRS
We service what we sell

Arbortech Enerpac Husqvarna Construction Columbus Mckinnon
Dewalt Honda Ingersoll-Rand Miller Equipment
Makita Dynadrade Eibenstock Mi-T-M Corp
Honeywell Chicago Pneumatic Tools Southwire Harrington
Bw Technologies My-Te Crosby Weka
Stout Fein / Jancy Panasonic Sioux
Coffing Hoist Wacker
Under Warranty
Ridgid Propress Greenlee Metabo Diamond Products
Ridgid Seesnake Hougen Bosch Powerteam
Ridgid Commercial Milwaukee Stihl Sumner
Yamaha Power
Not limited to the list. Just give us a call and we will let know if we can service it 1-888-426-3755
This Rigger’s Handbook is dedicated to Theodore C. Hanes, the founder of Hanes Supply. Ted
left us on August 11, 1997. We know it is appropriate that the history of Hanes Supply should
be told by Ted. His hard work, common sense and dedication enabled Hanes Supply to move
forward into the next millennium.
“It all started when Tex McLaughlin taught me how to splice cable in order to obtain my Feder-
al A and E Aircraft Mechanics License #8867 on May 1, 1930. After leaving American Airways
August 20, 1936 to become a Professional Firefighter, I soon learned that splicing cable for
local contractor friends like Herb Darling and Howard Stimm put extra bread on the table.
Soon we had to take operations into larger quarters at 23 Poplar Avenue. In 1962 we moved to
the warehouse at 1294 Seneca Street, giving us the space for a larger Sling Shop and also the
ability to be an Allied Products Supply House with more products and quicker, better service.
Our new 55,000 square feet warehouse at 55 James E. Casey Drive enables us to stock even
more products to better service our customers. The increasing number of Hanes Supply custom-
ers in Central New York State convinced us to open our new Rochester Warehouse. Hanes Sup-
ply is committed to making the moves to give the best possible service to all of our customers.
On October 1, 1975 I retired as a Battalion Chief from the Buffalo Fire Department enabling
me to devote more time to the company until my son Bill could take the wheel. Bill graduated
in June 1980 as a Civil Engineer from the State University at Buffalo and is now President of
Hanes Supply, Inc. Having been around watching Dad since he was 9 years old, he thoroughly
knows the wire rope business. In association with his friends Dennis St. Germain and Jim Boyco,
Bill and the Hanes Supply Crew have learned many modern improvements in sling productions.
Many thanks to our hard working staff led by our Operations Manager and son-in-law Dave
Learn, Retired Office Manager Hermine Bruno, my other son Ted Hanes, II and my late wife
Nellie C. Hanes who have all been very valuable assets to our business.”
Ted Hanes, 1996
Ted had many other accomplishments including being a Buffalo Firefighter for 39 years, retiring
as Battalion Chief in 1975. During WWII, Ted served in the Coast Guard Reserve. Ted was Com-
modore of the Buffalo Yacht Club in 1957 and Master of his Masonic Lodge in 1950.
Ted and Nellie had five children in the 1950’s. When most couples would be thinking of retire-
ment, they were busy providing the best home and education for their children.
Work was never a four letter word to Ted. Long days and nights of working at Hanes Marine and
Cable and the Buffalo Fire Department were common. He spent countless hours making slings
by walking around the rigger’s vise. His strength and determination built Hanes Supply into what
it is today. He also had the strength to pass the company to the next generation.
Your memory and leadership will never
leave us. Special thanks to a great man
who we are proud to have had as our
father. God bless you.
WE PROUDLY FLY
Thank you,
OUR FLAGS!
Bill Hanes/ Dave Learn/ Ted Hanes II
BUFFALO, NY ROCHESTER, NY ALBANY, NY SYRACUSE, NY
WATERTOWN, NY BRANFORD, CT NORTH & SOUTH CAROLINA
One of the foremost leaders in the industry Specializing in Lifting Solutions
Manufacturer of Slingmax, Wire Rope, Chain & Nylon Slings
Complete Contractor & Industrial Supplier
55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206 • U.S.A.

ISO 9001:2015 PHONE 888-426-3755 $12.95 US Dollars
REGISTERED WWW.HANESSUPPLY.COM Printed in Canada

Riggers Handbook 2017-Web

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Riggers Handbook 2017-Web

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VOL 17

Work with HSI Slings TM

ADDITIONAL SERVICES WE PROVIDE

FIRE EXTINGUISHER SERVICES: BELOW-THE-HOOK

1 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

TWIN-PATH PG. 6 SPARKEATER PG. 15 SINGLE PATH PG. 15 ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE

500 Hrs EXPOSURE

CHECK-FAST PG. 7 UV PG. 9 ABRASION PG. 8

3 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

Experts agree that over 80%

CORNER-MAX PAD PG. 11 CORNER-MAX SLEEVE PG. 10

SYN-GLIDE PG. 12 SYNTHETIC ARMOR PG. 11 SHACKLE PIN-PAD PG. 12

SYNTHETIC SLING ACCESSORIES

EQUALIZER BLOCK PG. 16 TWIN-PATH TAPER PG. 16

WIRE ROPE SLINGS

GATOR-LAID PG. 27 GATOR-FLEX GROMMETS PG. 26 TRI-FLEX PG. 25

88 ton Refinery Compressor with CornerMax™ Pads

500 ton Steam Generator Replacement Mark V Navy Assault Boat

5 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

UNITED STATES CANADIAN

VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE NOMINAL

DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY

CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION SYSTEM

Patent US Patent #7,661,737 CA #2,547,632 EP #1,899,255

External Warning Indicator (E.W.I.)

Sacrificial strand recoils

External Warning Indicator pulls

7 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

COVERMAX® RIFLED COVER TECHNOLOGY

Twin-Path® high-performance roundslings with patented Rifled Cover®

COVERMAX® COVER - ABRASION

Roundsling Cover Abrasion Test Results

NO EXPOSURE 500 Hrs EXPOSURE

10,000 WLL (12,800 LBS)

9 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

CRNMXS03 5 UP TO TPXC 3,000

CORNERMAX™ PAD CUT PROTECTION

SYNARM–SL “Sliding” SYNARM–RM “Removable”

SYNARM–EE “Eye and Eye”

CORNERMAX™ PAD CUT PROTECTION

11 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS

ADJUSTABLE RING DIMENSIONS SHACKLE DIMENSIONS SLING WEIGHT (LBS.)

13 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS) 5:1 DF

SINGLE-PATH® VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES NOMINAL

DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS) 5:1 DF

15 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

MAXIMUM SLING SUGGESTED SLING FOR 90° BLOCK WEIGHT

TWIN-PATH® FIELD TAPER

Do not fold one path over Squeeze both paths

17 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

40 ton Electric Transformer 90 ton Oil Rig Thruster

220 ton Cement Kiln Removing Nuclear Reactor Lid Sections

19 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

Inspections of Twin-Path® Products

21 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

QUICK REFERENCE CHART OF THE MOST POPULAR SLINGMAX®

PARTS OF WIRE TERMINATION OF

Gator-Laid® 6' for 3/4" 80% efficiency;

Gator-Flex® 5' for 1/4"